Shree Sayan Vibhag Sahakari Khand Udhyog Mandli LTD Srt65 Eia1

S H R E E S AYA N V I B H A G S A H A K A R I K H A N D U D Y O G
DRAFT ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT

s
ASSESSMENT AND EMP REPORT
FOR
Modernization of Sugar Unit (7,000 TCD)
AT
At & Post Sayan, Taluka Olpad, District Surat, Gujarat-394 130.

MANDLI LIMITED
PROJECT CATEGORY: B,
5(j), Sugar Industry
STUDY PERIOD:
March 2019 to May 2019
PROJECT PROPONENT:
M/s. Shree Sayan Vibhag Sahakari Khand Udyog Mandli
For
Limited
PREPARED BY:
ENVISION ENVIRO TECHNOLOGIES PVT. LTD.

3rd Floor, Shree Ram Complex, Above Bank of India,
Near Kargil Chowk, Surat-Dumas Road,
Piplod, Surat-395007
Gujarat.
Phone No.: (0261) 2223003, 2224004

Email Add.: info@en-vision.in
Website: www.en-vision.in
Accreditation by
QCI / NABET Certificate No. NABET/EIA/1821/RA 0102
November, 2019
191125_RP44_1
Declaration by the Project Proponent
en-vιsι n
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1 CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................. 1-1

1.1 Purpose of EIA....................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Identification of Project and Project Proponent ..................................................................... 1-1
1.2.1 Promoters and their Background........................................................................................ 1-1
1.3 Brief Description of Nature, Size, Location of the Project .................................................... 1-3
1.4 Scope of Study ....................................................................................................................... 1-4
1.5 Regulatory Frame Work ........................................................................................................ 1-6
1.5.1 Legal Compliances of Existing Unit .................................................................................. 1-7
1.5.1.1 Current CCA & It’s Compliance ................................................................................. 1-7
1.5.1.2 Show Cause Notice; Direction; Closure Notice Issued ............................................... 1-7
CHAPTER 2 PROJECT DESCIRPTION ........................................................................................................ 2-1
2.1 Type of Project....................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Information about Violation .................................................................................................. 2-1
2.3 Need for the Project and its Importance to the Country and/or Region ................................. 2-1
2.4 Location ................................................................................................................................. 2-3
2.4.1 Justification of Site Selection and Key Infrastructure Features and Settlements ............... 2-5
2.4.2 Project Land and Plant Layout ......................................................................................... 2-10
2.5 Magnitude of Operation & Project Cost .............................................................................. 2-14
2.5.1 List of Products and Production Capacity........................................................................ 2-14
2.5.2 Project Cost ...................................................................................................................... 2-16
2.6 Project Implementation Schedule ........................................................................................ 2-16
2.6.1 Construction Activities .................................................................................................... 2-16
2.7 Process Description.............................................................................................................. 2-17
2.7.1 Manufacturing process of Sugar ...................................................................................... 2-17
2.7.2 Process description of distillery unit ................................................................................ 2-19
2.8 Raw Material Requirement .................................................................................................. 2-20
2.8.1 Mode of Transportation for Raw Materials ..................................................................... 2-20
2.9 Requirement of Resources ................................................................................................... 2-20
2.9.1 Electricity / Power............................................................................................................ 2-21
2.9.2 Manpower ........................................................................................................................ 2-21
2.9.3 Water ................................................................................................................................ 2-22
2.9.4 Utilities and Fuel Requirement ........................................................................................ 2-22
2.10 Pollution Potential and Mitigation Measures ....................................................................... 2-25
2.10.1 Water Environment .......................................................................................................... 2-25
2.10.1.1 Wastewater Treatment & Disposal ............................................................................ 2-29
M/S. SHREE SAYAN VIBHAG SAHAKARI KHAND UDHYOG MANDLI LTD., SAYAN, SURAT GUJARAT I-1
en-vιsι n
2.10.1.2 Addition of Proposed Tertiary Treatment Plant (TTP) ............................................. 2-33
2.10.1.3 Economical & Technical Viability of the Effluent Treatment System (ETP) ........... 2-33
2.10.1.4 ETP Sludge Generation ............................................................................................. 2-34
2.10.2 Air Environment .............................................................................................................. 2-35
2.10.2.1 Flue Gas Emission ..................................................................................................... 2-35
2.10.2.2 Process Gas Emission ................................................................................................ 2-36
2.10.2.3 Fugitive Emission ...................................................................................................... 2-36
2.10.2.4 Odor Control Action Plan.......................................................................................... 2-37
2.10.3 Noise Environment .......................................................................................................... 2-37
2.10.4 Solid/ Hazardous Waste Management ............................................................................. 2-37
2.10.5 Hydro-Geological Environment ....................................................................................... 2-38
2.10.5.1 Rain Water Harvesting .............................................................................................. 2-38
2.10.6 Socio-Economic Environment ......................................................................................... 2-39
2.10.7 Ecology and Biodiversity ................................................................................................. 2-40
2.10.7.1 Greenbelt Development ............................................................................................. 2-40
2.10.7.2 Details of Existing Greenbelt .................................................................................... 2-40
2.10.7.3 Guidelines for plantation ........................................................................................... 2-44
2.11 Reuse/recycle and Cleaner Production Technologies .......................................................... 2-44
2.11.1 Cleaner Production Technologies .................................................................................... 2-44
2.11.2 Waste Minimization Methods .......................................................................................... 2-45
CHAPTER 3 DESCRITPION OF ENVIRONTMENT ...................................................................................... 3-1
3.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................ 3-1
3.1.1 Objectives of Baseline Monitoring .................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.2 Methodology for Data Collection ...................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.3 Study Area ......................................................................................................................... 3-2
3.2 Meteorological Environment ................................................................................................. 3-3
3.2.1 Climate of Study Area ....................................................................................................... 3-3
3.2.1.1 Predominant Wind Direction ....................................................................................... 3-4
3.2.1.2 Site Specific Micro-Meteorology Data ....................................................................... 3-5
3.3 Air Environment .................................................................................................................... 3-9
3.3.1 Sampling Methodology and Analysis ................................................................................ 3-9
3.3.2 Selection of Monitoring Locations .................................................................................... 3-9
3.3.3 Results and Discussion .................................................................................................... 3-12
3.4 Water Environment .............................................................................................................. 3-15
3.4.1 Sampling Methodology and Analysis .............................................................................. 3-15
3.4.2 Selection of Monitoring Location .................................................................................... 3-16
3.4.3 Results-Ground Water and Surface Water ....................................................................... 3-19
3.4.4 Discussions ...................................................................................................................... 3-27
en-vιsι n
3.4.4.1 Ground Water ............................................................................................................ 3-27
3.4.4.2 Surface Water ............................................................................................................ 3-27
3.5 Noise Environment .............................................................................................................. 3-28
3.5.1 Selection of Monitoring Locations and Results ............................................................... 3-29
3.5.2 Discussion of Noise Levels .............................................................................................. 3-32
3.5.3 Traffic Study .................................................................................................................... 3-32
3.5.3.1 Selection of Study Location ...................................................................................... 3-32
3.5.3.2 Methodology ............................................................................................................. 3-33
3.5.3.3 Results ....................................................................................................................... 3-33
3.5.3.4 Discussion ................................................................................................................. 3-34
3.6 Soil Environment ................................................................................................................. 3-34
3.6.1 Sampling Methodology and Analysis .............................................................................. 3-35
3.6.2 Sampling Locations and Results ...................................................................................... 3-36
3.6.3 Discussion-Soil Environment .......................................................................................... 3-40
3.7 Land Environment ............................................................................................................... 3-40
3.7.1 Methodology of Study ..................................................................................................... 3-41
3.7.1.1 Pre-Field Interpretation ............................................................................................. 3-41
3.7.1.2 Site / Ground Truthing .............................................................................................. 3-41
3.7.1.3 Post Field Work ......................................................................................................... 3-41
3.7.2 Land Use / Land Cover Map ............................................................................................ 3-41
3.7.3 Drainage Pattern of the surrounding Region.................................................................... 3-42
3.8 Hydrology and Groundwater ............................................................................................... 3-45
3.8.1 Geomorphology ............................................................................................................... 3-45
3.8.2 Topography ...................................................................................................................... 3-45
3.8.3 Drainage ........................................................................................................................... 3-45
3.8.4 Geology & Structure ........................................................................................................ 3-46
3.8.5 Seismic Zone.................................................................................................................... 3-47
3.8.6 Soil ................................................................................................................................... 3-47
3.8.6.1 Climate & Meteorology............................................................................................. 3-50
3.8.6.2 Hydrology .................................................................................................................. 3-50
3.8.6.3 Discussions on Ground Water Quality ...................................................................... 3-51
3.9 Ecology and Bio-diversity ................................................................................................... 3-57
3.9.1 Biodiversity of Terrestrial Environment .......................................................................... 3-57
3.9.2 Biological Diversity ......................................................................................................... 3-57
3.9.3 Ecological Impact Assessment......................................................................................... 3-58
3.9.4 Period of The Study and Study Area ............................................................................... 3-58
3.9.4.1 Methodology ............................................................................................................. 3-58
3.9.4.2 Presence –Absence .................................................................................................... 3-59
en-vιsι n
3.9.4.3 DAFOR Scale ............................................................................................................ 3-59
3.9.5 Biodiversity of Terrestrial Environment .......................................................................... 3-60
3.9.5.1 Habitats Description of the Project Site and its Immediate Surroundings ................ 3-60
3.9.5.2 Floral Diversity of the Study Area ............................................................................ 3-61
3.9.5.3 Trees .......................................................................................................................... 3-62
3.9.5.4 Shrubs ........................................................................................................................ 3-64
3.9.5.5 Herbs ......................................................................................................................... 3-64
3.9.5.6 Climbers and Twiners ............................................................................................... 3-65
3.9.5.7 Cultivated Plants in the Study Area........................................................................... 3-66
3.9.5.8 Rare and Endangered Flora in the Study Area .......................................................... 3-66
3.9.5.9 Endemic Plants of the Study Area ............................................................................. 3-66
3.9.5.10 Status of Forest and their category in the study area ................................................. 3-66
3.9.6 Faunal Diversity of Study Area ....................................................................................... 3-66
3.9.6.1 Birds of the Study Area ............................................................................................. 3-66
3.9.6.2 Butterflies from the study area .................................................................................. 3-69
3.9.6.3 Herpetofauna ............................................................................................................. 3-69
3.9.6.4 Mammals ................................................................................................................... 3-70
3.9.7 Rare and Endangered Fauna of the Study Area ............................................................... 3-70
3.9.7.1 As per Indian Wild Life (Protection) Act, 1972 ........................................................ 3-70
3.10 Socio-economic Environment .............................................................................................. 3-71
3.10.1 Major Objectives of the Study ......................................................................................... 3-71
3.10.2 Identification of Stakeholders .......................................................................................... 3-71
3.10.3 Methodology .................................................................................................................... 3-71
3.10.3.1 Primary Data Collection: Tools and Techniques....................................................... 3-72
3.10.3.2 Secondary Data Collection ........................................................................................ 3-73
3.10.3.3 Data analysis and Interpretation ................................................................................ 3-73
3.10.4 Limitations ....................................................................................................................... 3-73
3.10.5 The Project Influence Area .............................................................................................. 3-73
3.10.1 Overview of Study Area .................................................................................................. 3-77
3.11 Findings of Community Consultations ................................................................................ 3-77
3.11.1 Population ........................................................................................................................ 3-77
3.11.2 Population Density ........................................................................................................... 3-77
3.11.3 Sex Ratio .......................................................................................................................... 3-78
3.11.4 Literacy Rate .................................................................................................................... 3-78
3.11.5 Economic Profile ............................................................................................................. 3-78
3.11.6 Infrastructure Facilities .................................................................................................... 3-78
3.11.7 Educational Facility ......................................................................................................... 3-78
3.11.8 Sanitation ......................................................................................................................... 3-79
en-vιsι n
3.11.9 Water Supply ................................................................................................................... 3-79
3.11.10 Health Care facility .......................................................................................................... 3-79
3.11.11 Culture ............................................................................................................................. 3-79
3.11.12 Quality of life ................................................................................................................... 3-79
3.12 People’s Perception.............................................................................................................. 3-80
3.12.1 Conclusions Socio-Economic Survey .............................................................................. 3-82
CHAPTER 4 ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS AND MITIGATION MEASURES ....................... 4-1
4.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................ 4-1
4.1.1 Objective ............................................................................................................................ 4-1
4.1.2 Environmental Aspects ...................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.3 Environmental Impacts ...................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.4 Environmental Indices ....................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.5 Environmental Impact Assessment Study.......................................................................... 4-2
4.1.5.1 Identification of Impacts.............................................................................................. 4-2
4.1.5.2 Ecological Impact Assessment Considered the Following Stages .............................. 4-2
4.1.5.3 Component Wise Environment Risk Assessment and Mitigation ............................... 4-2
4.2 Impact Identification and Assessment ................................................................................... 4-2
4.2.1 Identification Matrix .......................................................................................................... 4-2
4.2.2 Impact Assessment and Quantification .............................................................................. 4-3
4.2.2.1 Scoring the Overall Impact Severity/Consequence ..................................................... 4-4
4.2.2.2 Quantifying the Probability of Occurrence of the Impact ........................................... 4-5
4.2.2.3 Quantifying Environmental Impact Risk..................................................................... 4-6
4.2.2.4 Identifying Activities Causing Unacceptable Levels of Environmental Risk ............. 4-6
4.3 Significance of Impacts & Proposed Mitigation Measures ................................................... 4-6
4.3.1 Land Environment ............................................................................................................. 4-8
4.3.2 Soil Environment ............................................................................................................. 4-10
4.3.4 Noise Environment .......................................................................................................... 4-12
4.3.4.1 Projection of Proposed Traffic .................................................................................. 4-14
4.3.5 Ecological Environment................................................................................................... 4-15
4.3.6 Socio Economic Environment ......................................................................................... 4-17
4.3.7 Risk & Hazard and Occupational Health & Safety.......................................................... 4-19
4.3.8 Air Environment .............................................................................................................. 4-22
4.3.9 Air Quality Modeling....................................................................................................... 4-24
4.3.9.1 AERMOD.................................................................................................................. 4-24
4.3.9.2 Methodology ............................................................................................................. 4-25
4.3.9.3 Mixing Height ........................................................................................................... 4-25
4.3.9.4 Maximum Ground Level Concentration ................................................................... 4-25
en-vιsι n
CHAPTER 5 ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES (TECHNOLOGY AND SITE) ................................................. 5-1
5.1 Project Alternative ................................................................................................................. 5-1
5.2 Site Alternative ...................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.3 Fuel Alternative ..................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.4 Water Supply alternative........................................................................................................ 5-1
5.5 Best Available Technology .................................................................................................... 5-1
5.6 Wastewater Treatment and Use Alternative .......................................................................... 5-1
CHAPTER 6 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAM ....................................................................... 6-1
6.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................ 6-1
6.2 Monitoring and Reporting Procedure .................................................................................... 6-1
6.3 Laboratory Facility ................................................................................................................ 6-4
6.4 Continuous Emission Monitoring System (Cems) ................................................................ 6-4
6.5 Work Zone Monitoring for Hazardous Chemicals ................................................................ 6-4
CHAPTER 7 ADDITIONAL STUDIES .......................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1 Public Consultation ................................................................................................................ 7-1
7.2 Social Impact Assessment and R & R Action Plan ............................................................... 7-1
7.3 Risk Assessment .................................................................................................................... 7-1
7.3.1 Objective of Risk Assessment Study ................................................................................. 7-1
7.3.2 Methodology ...................................................................................................................... 7-2
7.4 Risk And hazard study ........................................................................................................... 7-2
7.4.1 Storage of Chemicals ......................................................................................................... 7-2
7.4.2 Regulatory Permission Required For Storage of Chemicals.............................................. 7-5
7.4.2.1 PESO Permission ........................................................................................................ 7-5
7.4.2.2 Applicability of MSIHC Rules .................................................................................... 7-5
7.5 Qualitative Risk Assessment.................................................................................................. 7-5
7.5.1 Hazard Identification and Risk Assessment (HIRA) ......................................................... 7-7
7.6 Quantitative Risk Assessment.............................................................................................. 7-13
7.6.1 Consequence analysis ...................................................................................................... 7-13
7.6.2 Damage Criteria ............................................................................................................... 7-13
7.6.3 Scenarios (Vulnerability Area Identification) .................................................................. 7-15
7.6.4 Software Used for Calculations ....................................................................................... 7-16
7.6.5 Scenario of Consequence Analysis .................................................................................. 7-17
7.6.6 Summary .......................................................................................................................... 7-20
7.6.7 Recommendation against Risk ......................................................................................... 7-20
7.6.8 Fire Fighting System ........................................................................................................ 7-20
7.6.9 Do’s and Don’ts ............................................................................................................... 7-21
7.6.10 Safety Training................................................................................................................. 7-23
7.6.11 Safety Audits and Inspections .......................................................................................... 7-24
en-vιsι n
7.6.12 Standard Operating Procedures........................................................................................ 7-24
7.6.13 Minimization of the Manual Handling of Hazardous Substance ..................................... 7-25
7.6.14 Personal Protective Equipment ........................................................................................ 7-25
7.6.15 Medical Facilities ............................................................................................................. 7-26
7.6.16 Hazard Identification Studies ........................................................................................... 7-26
7.7 Occupational Health Surveillance Program ......................................................................... 7-26
7.7.1 Health Management within Unit ...................................................................................... 7-26
7.7.2 Occupational Health Monitoring ..................................................................................... 7-27
7.8 Disaster Management Plan .................................................................................................. 7-27
7.8.1 Statutory Provisions ......................................................................................................... 7-27
7.8.2 Onsite Emergency Plan .................................................................................................... 7-28
7.8.2.1 Communication Facilities.......................................................................................... 7-32
7.8.2.2 Sequence of Action in Emergency ............................................................................ 7-33
7.8.3 Rehearsal and Up-dation of Plan ..................................................................................... 7-41
7.8.4 Offsite Emergency Preparedness Plan ............................................................................. 7-41
7.9 Leak Detection and Repair (LDAR) program...................................................................... 7-46
7.10 Specific Safety Measures to be Taken for General Public Living in The Vicinity .............. 7-50
CHAPTER 8 ENVIRONMENTAL DAMAGE ASSESSMENT, REMEDIATION PLAN AND
NATURAL & COMMUNITY RESOURCE AUGMENTATION PLAN ................................................. 8-1
8.1 Justification For Violation ..................................................................................................... 8-1
8.2 Environmental Damage Assessment And Remediation Plan ................................................ 8-2
8.2.1 Salient Features Of The Project ......................................................................................... 8-2
8.2.2 Identification Of Damage .................................................................................................. 8-3
8.2.3 Environment Benefits Earned And Cost Of Remediation Plan And Natural & Community
Resource Augmentation Plan .................................................................................................................... 8-8
8.3 Remediation Plan ................................................................................................................... 8-9
CHAPTER 9 PROJECT BENEFITS .............................................................................................................. 9-1
9.1 Physical Infrastructure ........................................................................................................... 9-1
9.2 Social Infrastructure ............................................................................................................... 9-1
9.2.1 Corporate Environment Responsibility.............................................................................. 9-1
9.3 Employment Potential............................................................................................................ 9-3
9.4 Benefits of Industry ............................................................................................................... 9-3
9.5 Other Tangible Benefits ......................................................................................................... 9-3
CHAPTER 10 ENVITONMENTAL COST BENEFIT ANALYSIS .................................................................... 10-1
CHAPTER 11 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN (EMP)............................................................... 11-1
11.1 Introduction.......................................................................................................................... 11-1
11.1.1 Objectives of EMP ........................................................................................................... 11-1
11.1.2 Components of EMP ........................................................................................................ 11-1
en-vιsι n
11.2 Environment Management Plan........................................................................................... 11-2
11.2.1 Land Environment ........................................................................................................... 11-2
11.2.2 Soil Environment ............................................................................................................. 11-4
11.2.4 Noise Level Monitoring & Traffic Management ............................................................. 11-6
11.2.5 Ecological Environment................................................................................................... 11-8
11.2.6 Socio Economic Environment ....................................................................................... 11-10
11.2.7 Risk & Hazard and Occupational Health & Safety........................................................ 11-12
11.2.8 Air Environment ............................................................................................................ 11-14
11.3 Environmental Management Cell (EMC) .......................................................................... 11-16
11.3.1 Environment Policy and its Standard Operating Procedure ........................................... 11-17
11.3.2 Reporting System to the Directors ................................................................................. 11-17
11.4 Record Keeping and Reporting .......................................................................................... 11-17
11.5 Budget for Environment Protection ................................................................................... 11-18
CHAPTER 12 SUMMARY & CONCLUSION ................................................................................................ 12-1
12.1 Justification for Implementation of the Project.................................................................... 12-1
12.2 Conclusions.......................................................................................................................... 12-3
CHAPTER 13 DISCLOSURE OF CONSULTANTS ENGAGED ....................................................................... 13-1
13.1 Details of Consultant ........................................................................................................... 13-1
13.2 Functional Area Experts Involved in The EIA .................................................................... 13-3
13.3 Laboratory Involved For Baseline Monitoring & Other Analysis ....................................... 13-3
en-vιsι n
LIST OF ANNEXURES
Annexure I Terms of Reference ....................................................................................................... A-5

Annexure II Water Supply Permission .............................................................................................A-18
Annexure III Climatological Normals 1981-2010 for Surat Station..................................................A-24
Annexure IV Analsysis Reports of Air, Water, Soil & Noise ...........................................................A-26
Annexure V Environment Health and Safety Policy ........................................................................A-76
Annexure VI medical reports of employees ......................................................................................A-77
Annexure VII Adequacy Certficate for EMS ......................................................................................A-81
Annexure VIII CCA and it’s Point wise Compliance Report .............................................................A-102
Annexure IX Show Cause Notice, Directions and it’s Reply ..........................................................A-121
Annexure X Letter from PESO.......................................................................................................A-145
Annexure XI PLI policy...................................................................................................................A-149
Annexure XII Conservation Plan for Schedule-I Species .................................................................A-151
Annexure XIII Analysis report of ETP sludge and bio-compost........................................................A-154
Annexure XIV Material Safety Data Sheet ........................................................................................A-155
en-vιsι n
LIST OF TABLES
Table 1-1: General Siting Criteria .................................................................................................................... 1-3

Table 1-2: Size of Project ................................................................................................................................ 1-4
Table 1-3: Scope of Baseline Study ................................................................................................................. 1-5
Table 2-1: Information about Violation ........................................................................................................... 2-1
Table 2-2: List of Nearby Industries ................................................................................................................ 2-5
Table 2-3: Key Infrastructure Features ............................................................................................................ 2-6
Table 2-4: Area Break-up .............................................................................................................................. 2-10
Table 2-5: Built up Area Break-up ................................................................................................................ 2-10
Table 2-6: Space and availability for Production plant, Utilities, Storage area and common
infrastructure ................................................................................................................................ 2-12
Table 2-7: Details of Products ....................................................................................................................... 2-14
Table 2-8: Break-up of Capital Project Cost .................................................................................................. 2-16
Table 2-9: Project Implementation Schedule for Modernization Works ....................................................... 2-16
Table 2-10: Material Balance......................................................................................................................... 2-18
Table 2-11: Raw Material Requirement......................................................................................................... 2-20
Table 2-12: Electricity Requirement .............................................................................................................. 2-21
Table 2-13: Utilities and Fuel Requirement ................................................................................................... 2-22
Table 2-14: Water Requirement ..................................................................................................................... 2-25
Table 2-15: Wastewater Generation .............................................................................................................. 2-26
Table 2-16: Details of Effluent Treatment Plant Units .................................................................................. 2-30
Table 2-17: Details of TTP Units................................................................................................................... 2-33
Table 2-18: Stream wise effluent quality ....................................................................................................... 2-34
Table 2-19: Stage wise effluent characteristics in ETP ................................................................................. 2-34
Table 2-20: Proposed Pollution Control Schemes ......................................................................................... 2-35
Table 2-21: Details of Flue Gas Stacks .......................................................................................................... 2-36
Table 2-22: Details of Hazardous waste Management .................................................................................. 2-38
Table 2-23: Details of Rain Water Harvesting............................................................................................... 2-38
Table 2-24: Activities conducted under CSR in last three years ................................................................... 2-39
Table 2-25: Details of Existing Plant Species in Greenbelt ........................................................................... 2-42
Table 2-26: Greenbelt Development Plan ...................................................................................................... 2-44
Table 3-1: Summary of Site Specific Meteorological Data ............................................................................. 3-5
Table 3-2: Air – Parameters analyzed and sampling duration ......................................................................... 3-9
Table 3-3: Ambient Air Quality - Methodology .............................................................................................. 3-9
Table 3-4: Ambient Air Monitoring Locations .............................................................................................. 3-10
Table 3-5: Ambient Air Quality Status .......................................................................................................... 3-13
Table 3-6: Sample Collection and Analysis of Water Sample ....................................................................... 3-15
Table 3-7: Sampling Locations for Ground Water and Surface Water .......................................................... 3-16
Table 3-8: Water Quality – Physico-chemical Analysis of Ground Water .................................................... 3-19
Table 3-9: Water Quality – Physico-chemical Analysis of Surface Water .................................................... 3-23
en-vιsι n
Table 3-10: Noise Monitoring Methodology ................................................................................................. 3-28
Table 3-11: Ambient Noise Quality Standards for Different Areas/Zones .................................................... 3-29
Table 3-12: Noise Monitoring Locations ....................................................................................................... 3-30
Table 3-13: Noise Levels ............................................................................................................................... 3-32
Table 3-14: Noise Level due to Transportation ............................................................................................. 3-32
Table 3-15: Traffic Counts on Sayan-Kim road ............................................................................................ 3-34
Table 3-16: Existing Traffic Scenario and Level of Services ........................................................................ 3-34
Table 3-17: Level of Service .......................................................................................................................... 3-34
Table 3-18: Methodology of Testing of Soil Samples ................................................................................... 3-35
Table 3-19: Soil Sampling Location .............................................................................................................. 3-36
Table 3-20: Physicochemical Parameters of the Soil ..................................................................................... 3-38
Table 3-21: Land Use / Land Cover Statistics of the Study Area (10 km Radius) ........................................ 3-42
Table 3-22: Geological Succession ................................................................................................................ 3-46
Table 3-23: location detail of the well inventoried ........................................................................................ 3-50
Table 3-24: Water category based on range of Total Hardness value as per IS 10500:2012 ........................ 3-53
Table 3-25: Trees in the Study area ............................................................................................................... 3-63
Table 3-26: List of the Shrubs in the Study Area .......................................................................................... 3-64
Table 3-27: List of Herbaceous Species Observed in the Study Area ........................................................... 3-65
Table 3-28: List of Climbers observed in the Study Area ............................................................................. 3-65
Table 3-29: Birds of the Study Area .............................................................................................................. 3-66
Table 3-30: Butterflies in the Study Area ...................................................................................................... 3-69
Table 3-31: Reptiles observed in the study area ............................................................................................ 3-69
Table 3-32: Mammals in the Study Area ....................................................................................................... 3-70
Table 3-33: Species provided Protection as per Wild Life Protection Act, 1972 .......................................... 3-70
Table 3-34: List of Villages Where Socio-Economic Study Conducted ....................................................... 3-72
Table 3-35: List of Villages in PIA (Census 2011)........................................................................................ 3-74
Table 4-1: Environmental Impacts ................................................................................................................... 4-3
Table 4-2: Overall Impact Scoring System due to the Proposed Expansion ................................................... 4-4
Table 4-3: Impact scoring for Ecology and Biodiversity ................................................................................. 4-4
Table 4-4: Occurrence Frequency Assessment- Ecological............................................................................. 4-5
Table 4-5: Occurrence Frequency Assessment-Others .................................................................................... 4-5
Table 4-6: Environmental Impact Significance Criteria .................................................................................. 4-6
Table 4-7: Environmental Risk Categorization ............................................................................................... 4-6
Table 4-8: Ecological Risk Categorization ...................................................................................................... 4-6
Table 4-9: Assessment of Proposed Traffic Load .......................................................................................... 4-14
Table 4-10: Details of Stacks ......................................................................................................................... 4-24
Table 4-11: Maximum Ground Level Concentration (Average 24 hourly) ................................................... 4-25
Table 4-12: 24 hourly Short Term Incremental Concentrations from Source ............................................... 4-30
Table 6-1: Budget for Implementation of Environmental Monitoring Plan .................................................... 6-2
Table 7-1: Details of Storage Tank .................................................................................................................. 7-2
Table 7-2: Details of Other Chemicals ............................................................................................................ 7-3
Table 7-3: Hazardous Characteristics of of major chemicals .......................................................................... 7-4
en-vιsι n
Table 7-4: Threshold Storage Quantity as per MSIHC Rules.......................................................................... 7-5
Table 7-5: Risk Matrix ..................................................................................................................................... 7-6
Table 7-6: Risk Acceptability Criteria ............................................................................................................. 7-6
Table 7-7: HIRA Worksheet ............................................................................................................................ 7-7
Table 7-8: Damages to Human Life Due to Heat Radiation .......................................................................... 7-14
Table 7-9: Effects Due to Incident Radiation Intensity ................................................................................. 7-14
Table 7-10: Damage Due to Peak over Pressure............................................................................................ 7-14
Table 7-11: Possible Accident Scenario ........................................................................................................ 7-15
Table 7-12: Summary of Consequence Analysis - Fire end points ................................................................ 7-17
Table 7-13: List of Fire Hydrant points ......................................................................................................... 7-21
Table 7-14: List of Fire Extinguishers ........................................................................................................... 7-21
Table 7-15: Details of Water Storage for Fire Fighting System .................................................................... 7-21
Table 7-16: Details of Fire Water Pump Capacity ......................................................................................... 7-21
Table 7-17: List of Personal Protective Equipments...................................................................................... 7-25
Table 7-18: List of Antidotes ......................................................................................................................... 7-26
Table 7-19: Occupational Health Monitoring ................................................................................................ 7-27
Table 7-20: Types of Overall Emergencies ................................................................................................... 7-28
Table 7-21: Offsite Action Plan ..................................................................................................................... 7-45
Table 7-22: Frequency of monitoring of leaks ............................................................................................... 7-49
Table 8-1: Chronology for Project ................................................................................................................... 8-2
Table 8-2: Assessment of Environmental damage assessment & Remediation Plan and EMP
suggested ....................................................................................................................................... 8-4
Table 8-3: Environment Benefits Earned in Violation Period ......................................................................... 8-8
Table 8-4: Budgetary Allocation for Remediation plan and Natural Resource & Community
Augmentation Plan ...................................................................................................................... 8-10
Table 9-1: Corporate Environment Responsibility (CER) Plan for Five Years in Community Area .............. 9-2
Table 11-1: Roles and Responsibility of in Environmental Management Cell (EMC) ............................... 11-16
Table 11-2: Record Keeping Requirement .................................................................................................. 11-18
Table 11-3: Break-up of Capital and Recurring cost for Environment Protection Measures for
Proposed project ........................................................................................................................ 11-18
en-vιsι n
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 1-1: Location of the Project Site ........................................................................................................... 1-3

Figure 2-1: Index Map ..................................................................................................................................... 2-3
Figure 2-2: Google Image showing 10 km Radius Study area of Project Site................................................. 2-4
Figure 2-3: Topography Map Showing Location of study area ....................................................................... 2-5
Figure 2-4: Google Image Showing Nearby Industries ................................................................................... 2-6
Figure 2-5: Google Image Showing Locations of key Infrastructure Facilities in 10 km Radius Study
Area ............................................................................................................................................... 2-7
Figure 2-6: Google Image Showing Location of Surat Airport from Project Site ........................................... 2-8
Figure 2-7: Plant Layout ................................................................................................................................ 2-11
Figure 2-8: Energy Balance ........................................................................................................................... 2-21
Figure 2-9: Usage of steam from old mill ...................................................................................................... 2-23
Figure 2-10: Usage of steam from new mill .................................................................................................. 2-24
Figure 2-11: Water Balance Diagram-Existing ............................................................................................. 2-27
Figure 2-12: Water Balance Diagram-Total after Modernization.................................................................. 2-28
Figure 2-13: Schematic Diagram of Effluent Treatment Plant ...................................................................... 2-32
Figure 2-14: Schematic Diagram of TTP....................................................................................................... 2-33
Figure 2-15: Greenbelt Developed within Plant Premises ............................................................................. 2-41
Figure 3-1: Annual Wind Rose of Daily Surface Data recorded at 8:30 a.m. at Surat Station (1971-
2000) .............................................................................................................................................. 3-4
Figure 3-2: Annual Wind Rose of Daily Surface Data recorded at 5:30 p.m. at Surat Station (1971-
2000) .............................................................................................................................................. 3-5
Figure 3-3: Primary Wind rose Diagram A ..................................................................................................... 3-7
Figure 3-4: Primary Wind rose Diagram B ...................................................................................................... 3-8
Figure 3-5: Google Image Showing Ambient Air Quality Locations ............................................................ 3-11
Figure 3-6: Google Image Showing Ground Water Sampling Locations ...................................................... 3-17
Figure 3-7: Google Image Showing Surface Water Sampling Locations ...................................................... 3-17
Figure 3-9: Google Image Showing Noise Monitoring Locations................................................................. 3-30
Figure 3-11: Google Image Showing Location of Traffic Survey ................................................................. 3-33
Figure 3-12: Google Image Showing Soil Sampling Locations .................................................................... 3-37
Figure 3-13: Land use/Land Cover Map of 10 km Radius Study Area ......................................................... 3-43
Figure 3-14: Satellite Imaginary of 10 km Radius Study Area ...................................................................... 3-44
Figure 3-15: Digital Elevation Model of the study area ................................................................................ 3-45
Figure 3-16: Geological Map of study area ................................................................................................... 3-47
Figure 3-17: Soil Map of study area .............................................................................................................. 3-48
Figure 3-18: Soil Texture Triangles for soil sampling sites ........................................................................... 3-49
Figure 3-19: Contour Map showing Reduced Water Level ........................................................................... 3-51
Figure 3-20: Google Earth snapshot of Study area within 2 km radius ......................................................... 3-61
Figure 3-21: Villages in Study Area .............................................................................................................. 3-73
Figure 4-1: Spatial Distribution of 24-Hour Average PM10 Concentration from the Source (μg/m3) ........... 4-27
Figure 4-2: Spatial Distribution of 24-Hour Average SO2 Concentration from the Source (μg/m3) ............. 4-28
en-vιsι n
Figure 4-3: Spatial Distribution of 24-Hour Average NOx Concentration from the Source (μg/m3) ............ 4-29
Figure 7-1: Threat zone of Maximum Credible Accident Scenario for Ethanol – Pool Fire ......................... 7-18
Figure 7-2: Threat zone of Worst Case Scenario for Ethanol – Pool Fire ..................................................... 7-18
Figure 7-3: Threat zone of Maximum Credible Accident Scenario for LDO – Pool Fire ............................. 7-19
Figure 7-4: Threat zone of Worst Case Scenario for LDO – Pool Fire ......................................................... 7-19
Figure 7-5: Organizational Set-up for Onsite Emergency Plan ..................................................................... 7-30
Figure 7-6: Off-Site Emergency Plan ......................................................................................................... 7-43
Figure 11-1: Environment Management Cell .............................................................................................. 11-17
en-vιsι n
LIST OF PHOTOGRAPHS
Photograph 2-1: Project Site ............................................................................................................................ 2-9

Photograph 3-1: Ambient Air Quality Monitoring ........................................................................................ 3-12
Photograph 3-2: Ground water and Surface water Sampling......................................................................... 3-18
Photograph 3-3: Noise Monitoring ................................................................................................................ 3-31
Photograph 3-4: Soil Sampling ...................................................................................................................... 3-37
Photograph 3-5: Within and Immidiate surrounding of project site .............................................................. 3-60
Photograph 3-6: Floral diversity of the study area ......................................................................................... 3-62
en-vιsι n
TOR COMPLIANCE
Compliance statement is prepared for Terms of Reference received wide letter no.:
SEIAA/GUJ/TOR/Violation/5(j)/927/2019 dated 19/06/2019 attached wide Annexure I.
ToR
Condition Terms of Reference Compliance Page No.
No.
1. Actual Period of violation and extent of Actual Period of violation and extent 2-1
violation with all supportive documents of violation with all supportive
including actions taken by GPCB documents including actions taken by A-121
GPCB is given in Table 2-1 and
Annexure IX
2. Ecological damage assessment with respect to Ecological damage assessment is given 8-2
air, water, land and other project & location in section 8.2 and Table 8-2 8-4
specific environment attributes, The collection
and analysis of data shall be done by an
environment laboratory duly notifies under
Environment (Protection) Act, 1986, or an
Environment laboratory duly notifies
environment laboratory accredited by NABL, or
under Environment (Protection) Act,
a laboratory of a council of Scientific and
1986, or an environment laboratory
industrial Research (CSIR) institution working 13-3
accredited by NABL was utilized and
in the field of environment.
detail is given section 13.3
3. The Environment Management plan shall Remediation plan and community & 8-9
comprise of the remediation plan and natural resource augmentation plan is
community & natural resource augmentation given in section 8.3 and Table 8-4 8-10
plan corresponding to the ecological damage
assessed and economic benefits prepared shall
be included as an independent chapter in the
EIA report.
4. The project proponent shall be required to The project peoponent will submit the --
submit a bank guarantee equivalent to the bank guarantee as and when SEAC
amount of remediation plan and nature and and regular authority will finalize the
community resource augmentation plan with the amount for the same.
GPCB prior to the grant of EC. The quantum
shall be recommended by the SEAC and
finalized by the regulatory authority. The bank
guarantee shall be released after successful
implementation of the remediation plan and
nature and community Resources Augmentation
Plan, and after recommendation by regional
office of the Ministry Followed by
recommendation of the SEAC and approval of
the regulatory authority.
5. A tabular chart for the issues raised and This ToR will be complied after --
addressed during public hearing/ consultation public hearing in final EIA report.
and commitment of the project proponent on the
same should be provided. An action plan to
address the issues raised during public hearing
and the necessary allocation of funds for the
same should be provided.
6. The project proponent shall be required to The project peoponent will submit the --
submit a bank guarantee equivalent to the bank guarantee as and when SEAC
amount of remediation plan and nature and and regular authority will finalize the
community resources augmentation plan with amount for the same.
M/S. SHREE SAYAN VIBHAG SAHAKARI KHAND UDHYOG MANDLI LTD., SAYAN, SURAT GUJARAT C-1
en-vιsι n
ToR
No.
the GPCB prior to the grant of EC. The quantum
shall be recommended by the SEAC and
finalized by the regulatory authority. The bank
guarantee shall be released after successful
implementation of the remediation plan and
nature and community Resources Augmentation
Plan, and after recommendation by regional
office of the Ministry Followed by
recommendations of the SEAC and approval of
the regulatory authority.
7. Executive summary of the project-giving a Executive summary of the project is S-1to S-10
prima facie idea of the objectives of the given after ToR compliance.
proposal, use of resources, justification, etc. In
addition, it should provide a compilation of EIA
report, including EMP and the post-project
monitoring plan in brief. Project description
8. Justification for selecting the proposed product Justification for selecting the proposed 2-1
and unit size. product and unit size is given in 2-14
section 2.3 and section 2.5
9. Land requirement for the project including its Land requirement details are given in 2-10
breakup for various purposes, its availability and section 2.4.2 2-10
optimization. Land break up is given in Table 2-4
Plant layout showing land break-up 2-11
under various purposes is given in
Figure 2-7
10. Complete process flow diagram describing each Complete process flow diagram
unit, its processes and operations in production describing each unit, its processes and
of sugar, along with material and energy inputs operations in production of sugar is 2-17
and outputs (material and energy balance). given in section 2.7.1 and 2.7.2.
2-19
Material balance is given in Table

2-18
2-10
2-21
Energy balance is given in Figure 2-8
11. Details on requirement of raw materials, its Details on requirement of raw 2-20
source and storage at the plant. materials, its source is given in
section 2.8.1
Storage details are given in Table 7-2, 7-3,
7-1, Table 7-2 and Table 7-3 7-4
12. Details on requirement of energy and water Requirement of energy with its 2-21
along with its sources and authorization. sources and authorization is given in
section 2.9.1
Requirement of water with its source

is given in section 2.9.3 and its 2-22
authorization is given as Annexure II A-18
13. Details on water balance including quantity of Water balance for modernization 2-25
effluent generated, recycled & reused. Effort to sugar mill is given in section 2.10.1 2-27
minimize effluent discharge and to maintain and water balance diagram is given in 2-28
en-vιsι n
ToR
No.
quality of receiving water body. Figure 2-11 and Figure 2-12
The wastewater from modernization
activities is treated in ETP. Also
sewage will be treated in ETP along
with effluent and then treated water is
used for on land 2-33
irrigation/plantation/gardening. Refer
section 2.10.1.3

Thus, steps are proposed to be taken
to minimize wastewater final disposal
in water body.
14. Details of effluent treatment plant, inlet and Details of effluent treatment plant, 2-29
treated water quality with specific efficiency of with specific efficiency of each
each treatment unit in reduction in respect of all treatment unit is given as in section
concerned /regulated environmental parameters. 2.10.1.1
Inlet and treated water quality in
reduction in respect of all concerned
/regulated environmental parameters
2-34
is given as Table 2-19
15. Number of working days of the sugar Working days of the sugar production 2-20
production unit. unit is given in section 2.8.1
16. Details of the use of steam from the boiler. Usage of steam from the boiler is 2-23
given in Figure 2-9 and Figure 2-10 2-24
17. Information on the following is necessary: - Details of sugarcane sources are 2-20
Sugar cane sourcing, transportation and storage given in section 2.8
(Issues of traffic congestion) – Water sourcing
and use for sugarcane plantation – Land use Transportation details of sugarcane is
given in section 2.8.1 2-20
pattern and cropping, if sugarcane plantation
are owned by the mill –Bagasse quantity Details of water sourcing and use are 2-22
generated, its storage, internal use and external given in section 2.9.3
disposal- Use of Pith- Bagasse drying- Use of
fossil Fuels-Fire hazards.
3-43
Land use pattern and cropping details
are given in Figure 3-11 and Table 3-42
3-21
2-14
Details of Baggasse generation
quantity, external disposal are given
in Table 2-7
2-22
Internal use of baggasse as fossil fuel
is given in Table 2-13 2-12
Details of Baggasse storage is given
in Table 2-6
18. Details of the proposed methods of water Method of water conservation and 2-38
conservation and recharging. recharging is given in section
2.10.5.1
en-vιsι n
ToR
No.
19. Details of proposed Source- specific pollution Details of proposed Source- specific 2-35
control schemes and equipments to meet the pollution control schemes and
national standards. equipments to meet the national 2-35
standards are given in Table 2-20 and
2-36
in section 2.10.2.1 , Table 2-21
20. Management plan for solid/hazardous waste Solid/hazardous waste generation, 2-37
generation, storage, utilization and disposal. storage, utilization and disposal are
given in section 2.10.4
21. Details regarding infrastructure facilities such as Details regarding infrastructure 2-21
sanitation, fuel storage, restroom etc. to the facilities such as sanitation, fuel
worker during construction and operation phase. storage, restroom etc. to the worker
during construction and operation
phase are given in section 2.9.2
22. In case of expansion of existing industries, Remediation plan proposed to reastore

remediation measures adopted to restore the the environmental quality is given in 8-8
environmental quality if the groundwater, soil, section Table 8-3
crop, air, etc are affected and a detailed
compliance to the prior environmental clearance Detailed compliance of CCA is given
/ consent conditions. in Annexure VIII A-102
23. Any litigation pending against the project and No litigation pending against the --
/or any direction/ order passed by any court of project and /or any direction/ order
law related to the environmental pollution and passed by any court of law related to
impacts in the last two years. if so, details the environmental pollution and
thereof. Description of the environment. impacts in the last two years
24. The study area shall be up to a distance 10 km The study area considered for baseline 2-4
from the boundary of the proposed project site. monitoring is 10 km from the
boundary of the project site is given in
Figure 2-2
25. Location of the project site and nearest habitats Location of the project site is given in
with distances from the project site to be Figure 2-1 2-3
demarcated on a toposheet (1: 50000 scale)
Distances of nearest habitats is given
in Table 2-3 2-6
Toposheet of 10 km radius study area
is given in Figure 2-3 2-5
26. Land use based on satellite imagery including Land use map and satellite imagery is 3-43
location specific sensitivities such as national given in Figure 3-11 and Figure 3-12 3-44
parks/ wildlife sanctuary, villages, industries,
etc. for the study area. Land use pattern including sensitivities
such as national parks/ wildlife
sanctuary, villages, industries, etc. for
the study area is given in Table 3-21 3-42
27. Demography details of all the villages falling Demography details of all the villages 3-74
within the study area. falling within the study area is given in
Table 3-35
28. Topography details of the project area. Topography details of the project area 3-45
is given in section 3.8.2
29. The baseline data to be collected from the study The baseline data to be collected from 3-9
en-vιsι n
ToR
No.
areas w.r.t. different components of the study area are given as air in section 3-15
environment viz. air, noise, water, land, and 3.3, water in section 3.4, Noise in 3-28
biology and socio-economic (please refer section 3.5, Land in section 3.7, 3-40
Section 4.4.2 for guidance for assessment of biology in section 3.9, socio-economic
3-57
baseline components and identify attributes of in section 3.10.
concern). Actual monitoring of baseline 3-71
environmental components shall be strictly
according to the parameters prescribed in the
ToR after considering the proposed coverage of
parameters by the proponents in draft ToR and
shall commence after finalization of ToR by the
compete Authority.
30. Geological features and geo-hydrological status Geological features and geo- 2-38
of the study area. hydrological status of the study area
3-46
is given in section 2.10.5, 3.8.4 and
3.8.6.2 3-50
31. Surface water quality of nearby water sources Surface water quality of nearby water
and other surface drains. sources and other surface drains are 3-27
given in section 3.4.4.2
32. Details on ground water quality. Details on ground water quality is
3-27
33. Details on water quality parameters such as
Temperature, Colour, pH, BOD, COD, Total 3-19
Details on water quality parameters
Kjeldhal Nitrogen, Phosphates, Oil & Grease,
are given in Table 3-8 and Table 3-9 3-23
Total Suspended Solids, Total Coliform bacteria
etc.
34. Details on existing ambient air quality and Details of existing ambient air quality
expected, stack and fugitive emissions for is given in section 3.3.3 3-12
PM10, PM 2.5, SO2*, NOx*, etc., and Details of stack and fugitive 2-22
evaluation of the adequacy of the proposed emissions are given in section 2.9.4, 2-35
pollution control devices to meet standards for 2.10.2.1, 2.10.2.3 2-36
point sources and to meet AAQ standards. (* -
As applicable)
Adequacy certificate is given as A-81
Annexure VII
35. The air quality contours may be plotted on a The air quality contours are given in 4-27, 4-28,
location map showing the location of project Figure 4-1, Figure 4-2, Figure 4-3 4-29,
site, habitation nearby, sensitive receptors, if
any and wind roses Wind rose is given in Figure 3-3 3-7
36. Mathematical modeling for calculating the Details of mathematical model for air 4-24
dispersion of air pollutants and ground level pollutants are given in section 4.3.9
concentration along with emissions.
Ground level concentration along with 4-25
emissions are given in section 4.3.9.4
37. Details on noise levels at sensitive/commercial Details of noise levels are given in 3-31
receptors Table 3-13, Table 3-14 and section 3-32
3.5.2 3-32
38. Site-specific micro-meteorological data Site-specific micro-meteorological 3-5
including mixing height data is given in section 3.2.1.2
Details of mixing height is given in 4-25
en-vιsι n
ToR
No.
section 4.3.9.3
39. One season site-specific data excluding Baseline ambient air quality results 3-13
monsoon season. are given in Table 3-5
Ground water and surface water 3-19
quality results are given in Table 3-8 3-23
and Table 3-9 respectively.
Noise levels result is given in Table
3-32
3-13
Soil quality results are given in Table
3-20 3-38
One season site-specific data is given

in Annexure IV A-26
40. Proposed baseline monitoring network for the Details of baseline monitoring
consideration and approval of the Competent network is given in Air monitoring 3-10
Authority. Table 3-4, Ground water and Surface 3-16
water sampling Table 3-7, Noise
3-30
monitoring Table 3-12, Soil sampling
Table 3-19 3-36
41. Ecological status (terrestrial and aquatic) of the Ecological status of the study area is 3-57
study area such as habitat type and quality, given in section 3.9
species, diversity, rarity, fragmentation,
ecological linkage, age, abundance, etc.
42. If any incompatible land use attributes fall No incompatible land use attributes --
within a 5 km radius of the project boundary, fall within a 5 km radius of the project
proponent shall describe the sensitivity boundary.
(distance, area and significance) and propose the
additional points based on significance for
review and acceptance by the EAC/SEAC.
Incompatible land use attributes include: –
Public water supply areas from rivers/surface
water bodies, from groundwater – Scenic
areas/tourism areas/hill resorts – Religious
places, pilgrim centers that attract over 10 lakh
pilgrims a year – Protected tribal settlements
(notified tribal areas where industrial activity is
not permitted); CRZ – Monuments of national
significance, World Heritage Sites – Cyclone,
Tsunami prone areas (based on last 25 years); –
Airport areas – Any other feature as specified by
the State or local government and other features
as locally applicable, including prime
agricultural lands, pastures, migratory corridors,
etc.
43. If ecologically sensitive attributes fall with in a Not applicable as no ecologically --
5 km radius of the project boundary, proponent sensitive attributes fall with in a 5 km
shall describe the sensitivity (distance, area and radius of the project boundary.
significance) and propose the additional points
based on significance for review and acceptance
by the EAC / SEAC. Ecological sensitive
attributes include: – National parks – Wild life
en-vιsι n
ToR
No.
sanctuaries Game reserve – Tiger
reserve/elephant reserve/turtle nesting ground
Mangrove area; Areas with threatened (rare,
vulnerable, endangered) flora/fauna – Wetlands
– Reserved and Protected forests, etc. – Any
other closed/protected area under the Wild Life
(Protection) Act, 1972, any other area locally
applicable
44. If the location falls in a valley, specific issues Location does not falls in a valley, --
connected to the management of natural specific issues connected to the
resources shall be studied and presented. management of natural resources.
Anticipated environmental impacts and
mitigation measures Anticipated environmental impacts
and mitigation measures are given in
4-6
Chapter 1, section 4.3
45. Anticipated generic environmental impacts due Anticipated environmental impacts 4-6
to this project are indicated in Table 4-2, which and mitigation measures are given in
may be evaluated for significance and based on Chapter 4, section 4.3
corresponding likely impacts VECs may be
identified. Baseline studies may be conducted Baseline study for identified Valued
for all the concerned VECs and likely impacts 3-1
Environmental Components is given in
will have to be assessed for their magnitude in subsequent sections of Chapter 3
order to identify mitigation measures (please
refer Chapter 4 of the manual for guidance).
46. Tools as given in Section 4.4.3 may be referred As per tools given in section 4.4.3 of 4-6
for the appropriate assessment of environmental manual identified likely impacts and
impacts and same may be submitted in draft mitigation measures for all activities
ToR for consideration and approval by are given in section 4.3
EAC/SEAC. 5. While identifying the likely
impacts, also include the following for analysis
of significance and required mitigation
measures: – impacts due to transportation of raw
materials and end products on the surrounding
environment – impacts on surface water, soil
and groundwater – impacts due to air pollution –
impacts due to odour pollution – impacts due to
noise – impacts due to fugitive emissions –
impact on health of workers due to proposed
project activities
47. Proposed odour control measures. Odour control measures are given in 2-37
section 2.10.2.4
48. Action plan for the greenbelt development – Action plan for the greenbelt 2-40
species, width of plantations, planning schedule development is given in section
etc. in accordance to CPCB published 2.10.7.1
guidelines.
Plantations, planning schedule etc. are 2-40
49. In case of likely impact from the proposed No reserve forests fall within the --
project on the surrounding reserve forests, Plan study area.
for the conservation of wild fauna in
consultation with the State Forest Department
50. For identifying the mitigation measures, please Anticipated environmental impacts 4-6
refer Chapter III for source control and and mitigatin measures are given in
en-vιsι n
ToR
No.
treatment. Besides typical mitigation measures section 4.3
which may also be considered are discussed in
Table 4-5. Analysis of alternative resources and Analysis of alternative resources and
technologies technologies are given in Chapter 5
5-1
51. Comparison of alternate sites considered and the Detail of alternates site is given in 5-1
reasons for selecting the proposed site. section 5.2
Conformity of the site with the prescribed
guidelines in terms of CRZ, river, highways, Conformity of the site with the
railways etc. prescribed guidelines in terms of
CRZ, rivers, highways, railways etc.
1-3
are given in Table 1-1
52. Details on improved technologies. Details of improved technologies are 5-1
Environmental monitoring program given in section 5.5
Environmental monitoring program is 6-1
given in section 6.2
53. Monitoring programme for pollution control at Monitoring program for pollution 6-1
source. control is given in section 6.2
54. Monitoring pollutants at receiving environment Monitoring pollutants at receiving 6-1
for the appropriate notified parameters – air environment for the appropriate
quality, groundwater, surface water, etc. during notified parameters are given in
operational phase of the project. section 6.2
55. Specific programme to monitor safety and Specific programme to monitor safety 7-26
health protection of workers. mention in section 7.6.16
Specific programme to Health

protection of workers mention in 7-26
section 7.7
56. Appropriate monitoring network has to be Detail of monitoring network is given 6-1
designed and proposed, to assess the possible in section 6.2
residual impacts on VECs.
57. Details of in-house monitoring capabilities and Details of in-house monitoring is 6-4
the recognized agencies if proposed for given in section 6.3
conducting monitoring.
58. Details on risk assessment and damage control Details on risk assessment and 7-5,
during different phases of the project and damage control mention in section 7.5 7-13
proposed safeguard measures. and 7.6
59. Details on socio-economic development For Detail on Socio-economic 3-77
activities such as commercial property values, development activities such as 3-80
generation of jobs, education, social conflicts, commercial property values,
cultural status, accidents, etc. generation of jobs, education, social
conflicts, culture status, accidents etc.
are given in Chapter 1, section 3.11
and 3.12
60. Proposed plan to handle the socio-economic Proposed plan to handle the socio- 9-1
influence on the local community. The plan economic influence on the local 9-2
should include quantitative dimension as far as community is given in section 9.2 and
possible. its quantitative dimension as far as
possible is given in Table 9-1
en-vιsι n
ToR
No.
61. Details on compensation package for the people No additional land is required to --
affected by the project, considering the socio- acquire for the modernization of sugar
economic status of the area, homestead oustees, mill, existing land i.e. 5,95,292.58
land oustees, and landless labourers. sq.mt. is sufficient for the
modernization project.
62. Points identified in the public hearing and This ToR will be complied after --
commitment of the project proponent to the public hearing in final EIA report.
same. Detailed action plan addressing the issues
raised, and the details of necessary allocation of
funds.
63. Detailed compensation package for the people No additional land is required to acquire --
affected by the project shall be prepared,
for the modernization of sugar mill,
considering the socio-economic status of the
area, homestead oustees, land oustees, and existing land i.e. 5,95,292.58 sq.mt. is
landless labourers. sufficient for the modernization project.
9-2
However, CER plan is given in Table
9-1.
64. 54. Administrative and technical organizational Administrative and technical 11-17
structure to ensure proposed post-project organizational structure is given as
monitoring programme for approved mitigation Figure 11-1
measures.
65. EMP devised to mitigate the adverse impacts of Detailed EMP devised to mitigate the 11-18
the project should be provided along with item- adverse impacts with itemwise cost is
wise cost of its implementation (capital and given in section 11.5.
recurring costs).
66. Allocation of resources and responsibilities for Details of resources and 11-16
plan implementation. responsibilities for plan
implementation are given in Table
11-1.
67. Details of the emergency preparedness plan and Details of the emergency 7-27
on-site and off-site disaster management plan. preparedness plan and on-site and off-
site disaster management plan
mention in section 7.8
68. Details with respect to justification for proposed Details of proportionate availability of 2-12
expansion: (1) To address proportionate space for production, storage, utilities
availability of space for production plant. (2) To and commond infrastructure with its
address proportionate availability of storage area impact is given in Table 2-6.
for raw materials finished goods, utilities and
goods carrier movement within premises. (3) To However, detailed Environment
address proportionate captive/common 4-6
impact and its mitigation measures is
infrastructure available to accommodate given in section 4.3.
additional load due to proposed expansion. (4)
Environment impact and its mitigation measures
for common/ captive infrastructure due to
proposed production.
69. A tabular chart for the issues raised and This ToR will be complied after --
addressed during public hearing/consultation public hearing in final EIA report.
and commitment of the project proponent on the
same should be provided. An action plan to
address the issues raised during public hearing
and the necessary allocation of funds for the
en-vιsι n
ToR
No.
same should be provided.
70. PP shall ensure participation of people during This ToR will be complied after --
Public Hearing with equality in gender so as to public hearing in final EIA report.
encourage woman participation in Public
hearing & at the same time their issues shall also
be given weightage.
71. Proposal of online monitoring system with Online monitoring system with 6-4
reference to direction of CPCB. reference to direction of CPCB is
given in section 6.4
72. Adequacy assessment report of ETP to achieve Adequacy assessment report is given A-81
discharge norms with ETP stage wise reduction as Annexure VII
in pollutants.
73. To explore possibility of reuse of industrial Reuse of industrial effluent for 2-33
effluent for industrial purpose within premises. industrial purpose is not feasible for
sugar unit and large quantity of water
consumption required in onland
irrigation. Reuse details of treated
water is given in section 2.10.1.2
74. Adequacy assessment report of APCM to Adequacy assessment report is given A-81
achieve emission norms as Annexure VII
75. Justification of quantity of ETP sludge against Justification of quantity of ETP 2-34
treatment of industrial effluent. sludge against treatment of industrial
effluent is given in section 2.10.1.4
76. Composition of ETP sludge and its feasibility to ETP sludge and its feasibility to use it A-154
use it as manure in gardening/plantation within as manure in gardening/plantation
premises certified by government agriculture within premises certified by
university. government agriculture university is
given as Annexure XIII.
77. To provide APCM with steam boilers as per Detail of APCM with steam boilers as 2-35
prevailing GPCB guidelines. per prevailing GPCB guidelines is
given in Table 2-20
78. Validity of TOR
 The ToRs prescribed for the project will  Noted --
be valid for a period of three years for
submission of EIA & EMP report. ToR
will lapse after three years from the date of
issue.
 The period of validity could be extended
for a maximum period of one year  Noted --
provided an application is made by the
applicant to the Regulatory Authority, at
least three months the expiry of valid
period together with an updated Form-I,
based on proper justification and also
recommendation of the SEAC.
79. Further project proponent may be advised to Noted --
submit final EIA Report with EC application
within 120 days from the date of issuance of this
ToR to expedite processing of Environment
Clearance application.
en-vιsι n
ToR
No.
80. The project proponent shall have to apply for Noted --
Environmental clearance through online portal
http://environmentclearance.nic.in/ along with
final EIA report.
en-vιsι n
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
1 Introduction
M/s. Shree Sayan Vibhag Sahakari Khand Udyog Mandli Ltd. is a Co-operative Mandli and currently
engaged in production of sugar from sugarcane and also having 45 KLPD molasses based distillery unit
located At & Post Sayan, Taluka Olpad, District Surat - 394 130. Unit has obtained CCA to manufacture sugar
from sugarcane and Industrial alcohol/ Rectified spirit, extra neutral alcohol/Absolute alcohol/ Anhydrous
alcohol from molasses.
Existing sugar mill was based on old technology and resulting in higher operation and maintenance cost, so
management had decided and replaced existing sugar mill by installing modernized mill.
Product Detail
Capacity per Month
Sr. No. Name of Products
Existing Proposed Total
1. Crystal white sugar 19,500 MT 5700 MT 25,200 MT
2. Industrial alcohol/ Rectified spirit 1,350 KL -- 1,350 KL
Extra neutral alcohol/Absolute alcohol/
3. 1,200 KL -- 1,200 KL
Anhydrous alcohol
11.5 MW 11.5 MW
4. Bagasse based Captive Power Plant (9 MW + 2.5 -- (9 MW + 2.5
MW Standby) MW Standby)
By – Products
1. Molasses 7,500 MT 2,000 MT 9,500 MT
2. Bagasse 45,000 MT 20,000 MT 65,000 MT
3. Press mud 6,000 MT 3,000 MT 9,000 MT
The sugarcane, Lime, Sulphur, Phosphoric acid are used in sugar manufacturing unit. Whereas, Molasses,
Turkey red oil/Deformer, Rectified spirit, Potassium permanganate and Caustic soda are used in distillery unit.
Total available land area of premises is 5,95,292.58 m2, out of which 2,02,343 m2 (34.0%) area is covered
with greenbelt. Total cost of the mordenized project is Rs. 37 Crore. Total budget allocation towards
Environmental Management Facilities will be Rs. 48 lacs and recurring cost will be 1.21 Crore/annum.
En-vision Enviro Technologies Private Limited (NABET Accreditation No.: NABET/EIA/1821/RA0102)

was appointed by M/s. Shree Sayan Vibhag Sahakari Khand Udyog Mandli Ltd. to carry out the
Environmental Impact Assessment study for the mordenized project.
Unit has submitted an application to EAC at MoEF&CC as category A, 5(j) Sugar Industry project vide
proposal no. IA/GJ/IND2/74463/2018 dated 13/04/2018 with reference to EC Violation, Notification vide
No. S.O. 804 (E) dated: 14th March, 2017.
After presentation in front of EAC Committee at MoEF&CC in 14th meeting of Expert Appraisal
Committee (Violation) held on 23.10.2018, proposal has been transferred to SEAC/SEIAA, Gujarat under
schedule 5(j), Category-B vide new proposal no. SIA/GJ/IND2/31012/2019. TOR meeting was
M/S. SHREE SAYAN VIBHAG SAHAKARI KHAND UDHYOG MANDLI LTD., SAYAN, SURAT GUJARAT S-1
en-vιsι n
scheduled in 495th SEAC meeting held on 11.04.2019 and TOR letter granted vide letter no.
SEIAA/GUJ/TOR/Violation/5(j)/927/2019 on 19.06.2019.
The baseline details collected in 1st March to 31st May, 2019 is utilized for this project.
The environmental parameters (ambient air, water, soil, noise, flora and fauna, socio economy) selected for
study are those, which are likely to be most affected by the project. The study area is defined as an area within
10 km radius from center of the site.
Salient Features within 10 km Radius Surroundings

Sr. No. Feature Description
1. Address At & Post Sayan, Taluka Olpad, District Surat - 394 130.
2. GPS Co-ordinates 21°20'26.17"N
72°53'48.85"E
3. Power station Dakshin Gujarat Vij Company Limited
4. Annual Rainfall 1208 mm
5. Nearest Airport Surat airport 29.60 km in SSW
6. Nearest Road Sayan-Kim Road 0.30 km in WNW
7. Nearest High Way NH-8 6.79 km in E
SH-65 7.68 km in NNE
SH-605 & 168 4.28 km in SE
8. Nearest Railway Station Sayan Railway Station 2.74 km in SSW
9. Nearest City Surat 19.86 km in SSW
10. Seismic Zone Seismic Zone-III
11. National Park and / Sanctuary Sarthana National Park 11.76 km in S
12. Nearest River Tapi River 7.34 km in S
Kim river 8.85 km in NE
2 Probable Pollution Sources, Baseline Environment, Impacts and Mitigation Measures
2.1 Air Environment

During existing mill, main sources of flue gas emission are boiler and D. G. set (Stand-by source of
electricity). The fuel consumed in boiler is Bagasse, methane gas and furnace oil hence, wet scrubber is
installed as an APCM. In D. G. set diesel is used as fuel. Acoustic enclosure is provided with DG set. After
modernization, in addition to wet scrubber, Multicyclone Separator will be provided as proposed APCM with
boilers. There is no process gas emission in existing as well as after modernization project. The fugitive
emissions from the project mainly due to dust emission which suppressed by spraying water.
The base line Ambient Air Quality (AAQ) status within 10 km study area has been assessed by conducting
monitoring at 8 AAQ sampling stations during 1st March to 31st May, 2019. Ambient Air Quality monitoring
locations were decided based on meteorology & available infrastructure facilities. The baseline Ambient Air
Quality of the study area was monitored for Particulate Matter (PM10 & PM2.5), Sulphur Dioxide (SO2),
Nitrogen Dioxide (NO2), Carbon Monoxide (CO) & Hydrocarbon (HC). The result for the same is given as
below:
en-vιsι n
Ambient Air Quality Status
Location Distance & 98% Percentile (µg/m3)

Monitoring Stations
Code Direction PM 10 PM 2.5 SO2 NO2
A1 Sayan Sugar_PS -- 83 44 18 26
A2 Sayan 2.9 km SW 82 41 19 21
A3 Segvasyadla 7.4 km SW 67 28 15 19
A4 Obhla 5.1 km NW 69 29 14 19
A5 Mulad 7.1 km N* 73 33 17 21
A6 Kudsad 4.9 km NNE* 65 27 16 20
A7 Pipodara 7.3 km ENE 68 29 13 15
A8 Shekhpur 1.5 km SE 74 36 17 22
3
Permissible limit (µg/m ) [NAAQS -2009] 100 60 80 80
*: Indicates predominant downwind direction

CO: BDL; HC: BDL
Analysis of ambient air samples revealed that the Air quality is found well within the prescribed limits of
National Ambient Air Quality standards. Based on outcome of Air quality modeling after modernization of
the project, concentrations of PM10, SO2 & NOx are found to be well below the permissible NAAQs norms for
rural/residential zone and Industrial zone. Therefore, the proposed activity will not have any adverse impact
on the air environment.
2.2 Water Environment
Total water requirement for the existing mill is 5026 KLD and after modernization it is reduced to 3120 KLD,
which is sourced from Canal/Bore well.
Water Requirement
Sr. No. Particulars Remarks
(KLD) (KLD) (KLD)
(A) Domestic 160 0 160 --
(B) Industrial
Distillery
(B -I) 200 0 200 --
plant
(B -II) Sugar plant
Two tandem mills are replaced with
modernized closed system of one tandem
650 mill. This prevented losses of water from
(a) Process 1300 -650
(Condensate) mill which increased condensate water
recovery. Due to reuse of condensate water
fresh water requirement is reduced.
New mill required less steam consumption
213
(b) Boiler than old mill, which decreased demand of
(Condensate)
water in boiler.
1606 -756
Due to decrease in steam requirement of
(c) Cooling 637 boilers for new mill, cooling tower inlet
water reduced.
en-vιsι n
(KLD) (KLD) (KLD)
Others It is reduced due to reduction in water
(Humidifica requirement for boiler.
(d) tion + Spray 1260 -200 1060
pond Make
up)
200 (Fresh Dry cleaning system is adopted instead of
13+ wet cleaning system which has drastically
(e) Washing 500 -300
Condensate reduced washing water requirement.
187)
1910 Fresh + 1050 condensate water of
Total (B) 4866 -1906 2960
sugar cane crushed
2070 Fresh water + 1050 condensate water
Total (A + B) 5026 -1906 3120
of sugar cane crushed
Wastewater Generation

Sr. No. Particulars
(KLD) (KLD) (KLD)
(A) Domestic 150 0 150

(B) Industrial
(B -I) Distillery plant 0 0 --
(B -II) Sugar plant
(a) Process 1750 -1070 680
(b) Boiler 80
631 -311
(c) Cooling 240
Others (Humidification + Spray
(d) 180 0 180
pond Make up)
(e) Washing 500 -300 200
Total (B) 2881 -1501 1380

Total (A + B) 3031 -1501 1530
en-vιsι n
Water sampling locations
Ground Water Surface Water
Water Sample
Code Code Water Sample Location
Location
GW1 Sayan SW1 PS_ Reservoir
GW2 Siwan SW2 Canal near project site
GW3 Obhla SW3 Sayan Lake
GW4 Kareli SW4 Canal near project site
GW5 Pipodara SW5 Kareli Lake
GW6 Galundi SW6 Kakrapar Dam canal
GW7 Velanja SW7 Tapi River
GW8 Bharthana SW8 Delad Lake
 40 parameters of ground water and 38 parameters of surface water were observed.
In existing project, entire industrial effluent was treated in Effluent Treatment Plant (ETP) by providing
primary and secondary treatment and domestic sewage was disposed off through septic tank/soak pit system.
After modernization, in addition to existing ETP, Tertiary treatment will be provided as proposed and also
domestic sewage will be treated along with industrial effluent in ETP and subsequently treated water is/will be
reused for on land irrigation/plantation/gardening purpose within the factory premises.
The quality of ground water is good at Sayan, Siwan, Kareli, Galundi & Valenja locations and the quality of
water is poor at Obhla, Pipodara locations. The water can be used for drinking purpose after proper treatment
of hardness, TDS and bacteria removal such as filtration, RO and UV. All location total hardness result found
high compare to desirable limit but it was within the permissible limit. At Bharthana calcium and TDS found
high compare to desirable limit.
The total hardness varied in the range of 200-253 mg/L, except Tapi River at all location Total hardness is
higher than desirable limit but it was within the permissible limit. At Sayan lake and Reservoir magnesium
found higher than the desirable limit but within permissible limit.
2.3 Solid and Hazardous Waste Management

In existing and after modernization scenario of unit, the solid & hazardous waste generation categories such as
fly ash remains same with change in quantity. Discarded bags and containers, used oil, ETP sludge and Fly
ash are generated as solid & hazardous waste. Discarded bags/containers are being sold to GPCB authorized
recycler while used oil is either sold to registered re-refiners or reused within plant premises for preventive
maintenance and ETP sludge is used as manure within factory premises. Fly Ash is mixed with ETP sludge
and used as filter material for bio-composting and/or sold to brick manufacturers.
Sugar mill has provided separate storage area for hazardous wastes having roof, impervious flooring with
leachate collection system to avoid land contamination/soil pollution.
en-vιsι n
2.4 Land Environment
During operation activity the impact of air, water and solid & hazardous waste pollution on soil causes direct/
indirect effects on soil.
Land use status of study area is as under:
 The land use for settlement is mostly confined to the ‘rural and urban settlement’. Agricultural land covers
single and double crop area (major area under single crop) including rice, sorghum (jawar), wheat, cotton,
and sugarcane.
 The alluvial plains towards west merge into a dry barren sandy coastal plain fringed by marshy shore line.
 The Tapi is the major river which passes through the central parts of the district and flows towards the
west. The river is perennial in nature.
As all necessary air pollution control steps are already taken to avoid adverse impact of air pollution on soil.
Green belt development consisting of air pollution tolerant tree species is already done.
To conserve water, modernized sugar mill will start installation of rain water harvesting system. Impervious
flooring is done in effluent generation and ETP area to avoid any type of leakage that can be percolated into
soil. So there is no adverse effect on land / soil due to water.
All necessary control steps are provided for handling, storage and disposal of solid/hazardous waste generated
from the mill. Thus, there will not be any significant impact of solid/hazardous waste on the soil environment.
Proper facilities with liner and bunding is provided to the raw material and product storage area to prevent soil
and ground water contamination. Spill control measures, mechanical handling is adopted to avoid chemical
spillages.
2.5 Noise Environment

During construction phase for modernization mill, installing mill machinery & heavy equipments were used,
this was generating noise. During operation phase, main sources of noise are DG set, pumps, boiler, various
machineries used for manufacturing process and vehicular movement. Noise level was recorded at 6 locations
within the study area to describe the existing situations. Noise levels due to traffic were also measured.
Ambient Noise Status

Day Time Night Time
Sampling
Code Category Recorded level Limits in Recorded level Limits in
Location
dB(A) Leq dB(A) Leq dB(A) Leq dB(A) Leq
N1 Project site Industrial 73.4 75.0 68.1 70.0
Sayan Railway
N2 Commercial 70.2 65.0 59.6 55.0
Station
N3 Siwan Residential 49.7 55.0 40.7 45.0
N4 Bharundi Residential 40.0 55.0 38.3 45.0
N5 Kareli Residential 54.5 55.0 44.2 45.0
N6 Galundi Residential 40.1 55 38.5 45
en-vιsι n
Noise Level due to Transportation
Noise Level in dBA
Sampling Location Time
10 m from Edge of The Road 20 m From Edge of The Road
Day 53.9 50.9
Sayan - Kim Road
Night 48.2 45.2
The noise sources identified in industrial zone are vehicular traffic, industrial and commercial activities,
railway line is also near to the project site; while Project Site, Sayan railway station and Kareli village are
higher in day time and night time. At all other locations recorded Noise levels were found to be within the
standard limits.
Traffic survey was conducted to identify impact of load due to modernized mill. Traffic study reveals the LOS
(Levels of Service) as “C” Good for the Sayan Kim road, that is 2 lane road divider with capacity of >2400
PCUs; and Total PCUs per day even after modernization project is <1743. For management of traffic,
adequate parking space provided at project site. Transportation activity will be carried out during non-peak
hours only and trained driver will be appointed for transportation.
To control noise level in operation phase of modernized mill following precautions are taken:
Low noise equipments, Periodic checking and servicing of all the equipments and vehicles, Timely
lubrication of equipments, Provision of acoustic enclosures as and when required, Installation of anti-
vibration pads Personal protective equipments like ear plug and ear muff was provided to workers,
Maintenance of vehicles was maintained.
2.6 Hydro-Geological Environment

Probable sources of ground water pollution are percolation of effluent, sewage, hazardous waste (from storage
area/generation source), and spillage of chemicals.
Hydro-geological status of study area is as under:
 In and around the study area ground water occurs in aquifers which can broadly be demarcated into two
zones namely newer alluvium and older alluvium. Water levels are in general deeper in newer alluvium.
 The alluvium occurs in the western part of the district and along the streams whereas in eastern parts
weathered and fractured basalt form aquifers.
Source of water is bore well and canal in the modernized sugar mill rain water harvesting system will be
installed and the harvested rain water will be used for various industrial activities. Annual volume of rain
water for harvesting will be about 29% of the annual fresh water requirement, thus it will be reduced in fresh
water demand.
en-vιsι n
2.7 Socio-Economic Environment
Findings of study area based on Census 2011 and field survey:
 Population density: 867 persons per km2
 Total population : 1,94,285
 Males: 1,04,230
 Females: 90,055
 Population density: 619 persons per km2
 Sex ratio : 864
 Average literacy rate : 80.87%
 Main occupation of study area is depending on agriculture activities and animal husbandry. Main crops
were informed and observed as sugar cane, paddy and vegetables.
 Health care amenities like PHC are available at Sayan and Sandhiyar near the project site, for major
illness treatment available at Surat. No major health related problem identified in village. Sayan sugar had
established Jeevan Raksha Hospital with modern technology at Siwan village.
 Study area having ancient temple in Kudsad village of Ranchhod Ray and Galudi village of Shree
Swaminarayan Panchdev temple thousand of devotees are come temple.
 Bore well water is use for drinking purpose and Canal water for agriculture in villages.
 Village having available basic amenities like Anganwadi, School, Electricity connection, Street light,
Bank, post-office, RO water plant, door to door garbage collection, dustbin, drainage etc are available in
study area.
Impact of Project:
 Various project activities will lead to upliftment of surrounding area. The project will create opportunities
for indirect employment for which skilled and unskilled manpower will be needed. Secondary jobs are
day-to-day needs and services to the work force. This will also temporarily increase the demand for
essential daily utilities in the local market. Local people will be given preference wherever found suitable
for all the jobs in the plant. Income of the area will increase in the form of various types of taxes.
CER:
The Industry will undertake CER activities. A total amount of Rs. 37 lacs would be utilized for Corporate
Environment Responsibility (CER) programme as per provision of OM no. 22-65/2017 on 01.05.2018, which
is 1.0% of proposed project cost i.e. Rs. 37 Crore as per CER guidelines. While this project is considered as
violation project of EIA Notification 2006 and its subsequent amendments, so as per guideline issued by
SEAC, Gujarat given in its TOR letter issued dated 19.06.2019 it should be doubled than actual provision. So,
total amount of Rs. 74 lacs would be allotted for CER programme for the period of five years. This
amount is proposed towards Infrastructure development, waste management, water facility, education
promotion, and healthcare activites. Also unit is abide towards spending CSR cost for the upliftment of the
en-vιsι n
community if project attract Companies (CSR Policy) Rules, 2014; thus improving socio-economic status of
study area.
2.8 Ecology & Biodiversity

Pollution from various production activities such as flue gas and fugitive emission (from transportation &
storage of raw material & products); wastewater generation and solid waste management; noise due to
operation of sugar mill machinery & utilities will disturb ecological balance in nearby plant vicinity.
Ecological Status in study area is as under:
Flora:
 The trees, herbs, shrubs and major crops, observed during the biological survey conducted within
study area. During study 36 tree species belong to 17 families, 17 shrubs belong to 12 families, 17
herbaceous species belongs to 13 family, 13 species of climbers/ twiners belongs to 7 families are
enumerated from the study area.
 There is no Rare and Endemic plant was observed in study area during site visit.
Cultivated plants:
 The study area is dominated by the orchards of Mango and Chikko cultivation during the study
period.
 The main crops of the study area are paddy, rice, sugarcane, jawar and wheat.
 And fruit crops are mango, sapota and banana. The vegetables grown in the study area are, Rigan
(Solanum melongena), Val/Val papri (Lablab purpureus), Bhindi (Abelmoschus esculentus) etc. In
addition to this Very limited Bor plantation was also observed as farm land plantation.
 No natural or reserved forest was observed in the study area except few scattered scrub cover in the
barren lands.
Fauna:
 For the documentation of the faunal biodiversity of the study area with respect to birds, reptiles,
amphibians, and butterfly species, a baseline survey had been conducted Faunal species recorded in
the study area includes 5 types of mammals, 7 types of Reptiles, 3 types of butterflies & birds belongs
to 23 families. None of the sighted animal species can be assigned endemic species category of the
study area.
 Among the birds in the study area, Pea fowl (Pavo cristatus) is included in Schedule I of Wild life
protection Act (1972), while many other birds are included in Schedule IV.
 Among the reptiles, Indian Cobra (Naja naja) and Common Rat Snake (Ptyas mucosus) were
provided protection as per Schedule-II.
 Total plot area of plant is 5,95,292.73 m2 out of which 2,02,343 m2 is developed as greenbelt,
consisting of air and noise pollution capturing species; which is about 34% of total plot area.
en-vιsι n
2.9 Risk Assessment
Risk analysis and study have been carried out for identification of hazards, selection of maximum credible
scenarios, risk mitigation measures etc. All the hazardous chemicals will be stored and handled as per MSDS
guidelines.
2.10 Occupational Health and Safety

Based on risk assessment preventive measures are identified to ensure good health and safety of workers.
Such measures include:
Provision PPEs like ear plug, ear muff etc. where noise levels in excess of 80 db (A) are regularly generated.
Regular medical checkup of workers. Provision of basic infrastructure i.e. like drinking water, sanitation, first
aid etc. to workers. Use of proper PPE’s during hazardous waste handling, chemical handling etc.
3 Environment Monitoring Program

Environment monitoring program is prepared to check efficiency of mitigation measures and changes in
environment over period of time at various stages of project development.
4 Project Benefits
The required raw materials and skilled and unskilled laborers is utilized maximum from the local area. The
increasing industrial activity will uplift the commercial and economical status of the locality, to some extent.
This considerable employment & trade opportunities will eventually result in appreciable economic benefits to
the local people & businesses/contractors. Modernization in project will increase existing contribution to
revenue to the State exchequer in the form of taxes.
5 Environmental Management Plan

An Environmental Management Plan has been prepared to identify mitigation measures of adverse impacts. It
describes objective, responsibility, resources, monitoring related to mitigations measures for identified impact.
It also includes details of greenbelt development, rain water harvesting, CER activities etc.
6 Conclusion
 Negligible impacts will occur on air quality. However, all the necessary air pollution control measures
will be provided.
 No ecological damage will occur.
 No adverse impacts will occur on water environment.
 Local employment opportunities will increase.
 Various other environment parameters like Forest/ National Park/ Sanctuary and Religious / Historical
Places will not be affected.
en-vιsι n
 Environment Management Plan has been formulated to control all the pollutant parameters and
Environment Management Cell has been set-up to ensure that these parameters do not exceed the norms
set out by the concerned authorities.
 After commissioning of the modernized project the Environmental Management Cell will take care of all
the pollution control measures.
It can be concluded that positive implementation of mitigation measures and environmental management plan
during the operational phase, there will be negligible impact on the environment.
en-vιsι n
CHAPTER 1 CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 PURPOSE OF EIA

The Environmental Impact Assessment study is carried out as a part of the process to obtain Environmental
Clearance for the modernization in sugar mill and subsequently increased production capacity. Unit has
replaced existing plant machineries by installation of advanced technologies based machineries for sugar mill
and hence its increased in existing cane crushed quantity from 5000 TCD to 7000 TCD.
proposal no. IA/GJ/IND2/74463/2018 dated 13/04/2018 with reference to EC Violation, Notification vide
No. S.O. 804 (E) dated: 14th March, 2017.
After presentation in front of EAC Committee at MoEF&CC in 14th meeting of Expert Appraisal
Committee (Violation) held on 23.10.2018, proposal has been transferred to SEAC/SEIAA, Gujarat under
schedule 5(j), Category B vide new proposal no. SIA/GJ/IND2/31012/2019. TOR meeting was
scheduled in 495th SEAC meeting held on 11.04.2019 and TOR letter granted vide letter no.
SEIAA/GUJ/TOR/Violation/5(j)/927/2019 on 19.06.2019.
Production of sugar from sugar cane falls under shedule 5(j), B category as stated in Environment Impact
Assessment Notification published on 14th September 2006 & its amendments and hence the project
proponent has to obtain the Environmental Clearance from SEIAA, Gujarat. Environmental Impact
Assessment (EIA) study was carried out during March to May, 2019 and accordingly EIA report has been
prepared.
The purpose of the EIA study is to identify and assess the adverse impacts of a project in the planning stage
itself, so that necessary mitigation measures to prevent or minimize these adverse impacts can be planned
early and cost-effectively.
This project falls under category B, 5(j), Sugar Industry as per EIA Notification dated 14th March, 2006 and its
subsequent amendments. Due to violation of EIA notification, this case considered wide notification the S.O.
804(E) dated 14th March, 2017.
1.2 IDENTIFICATION OF PROJECT AND PROJECT PROPONENT

M/s. Shree Sayan Vibhag Sahakari Khand Udyog Mandli Ltd has obtained CCA to manufacture sugar
from sugar cane and industrial alcohol/ rectified spirit, extra neutral alcohol/absolute alcohol/ anhydrous
alcohol from molasses. The Company intends to manufacture production of sugar from sugar cane and also
having 45 KLPD molasses based distillery unit. The sugar cane, Lime, Sulphur, Phosphoric acid are used in
sugar manufacturing unit. Whereas, molasses, turkey red oil/deformer, rectified spirit, potassium
permanganate and caustic soda are used in distillery unit.
1.2.1 Promoters and their Background

1. Mr. Rakeshbhai Thakorbhai Patel - President
2. Dr. Devendrabhai Dahyabhai Patel - Vice President
3. Mr. Jamubhai Nathubhai Patel
4. Mr. Rajnikantbhai Thakorbhai Patel
5. Mr. Darshankumar Amrutlal Naik
M/S. SHREE SAYAN VIBHAG SAHAKARI KHAND UDHYOG MANDLI LTD., SAYAN, SURAT GUJARAT 1-1
en-vιsι n
6. Mr. Mukundrai Maganbhai Patel
7. Mr. Pareshkumar Karshanbhai Patel
8. Mr. Pushpendrasingh Ranjitsingh Mahida
9. Mr. Rajendrabhai Ramanbhai Desai
10. Mr. Ashokbhai Dhirajbhai Patel
11. Mr. Dharmeshkumar Ranjitbhai Patel
12. Mr. Nitinbhai Balubhai Patel
13. Mr. Jyantibhai Sitarambhai Patel
14. Mr. Pankajkumar Champabhai Patel
15. Mr. Naginbhai Paragbhai Patel
16. Mr. Pravinbhai Laljibhai Surati
17. Mrs. Narmadaben Narottambhai Patel
18. Mrs. Sejalben Nikunjkumar Patel
19. Mr. Ishwarsingh Thaorbhai Patel - Representative of the Sugar Industry Association
20. The District Registrar (C.S) - Representative of the Director of Sugar mills
21. Mr. Dhansukhbhai Nathubhai patel - Representative of The Surat District Co-Op Bank Ltd
22. Mr. Pravinkumar D. Patel – Managing Director/ Ex. officeer
en-vιsι n
1.3 BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF NATURE, SIZE, LOCATION OF THE PROJECT

M/s. Shree Sayan Vibhag Sahakari Khand Udyog Mandli Ltd has obtained CCA to manufacture sugar
from sugar cane and industrial alcohol/ rectified spirit, extra neutral alcohol/absolute alcohol/ anhydrous
alcohol from molasses in their unit located at & post Sayan, Taluka Olpad, District Surat - 394 130; now,
Sugar mill has modernized its existing sugar crushing plant and machineries by installation of advanced
technologies based machineries and hence it increased in existing cane crushed quantity from 5000 TCD
to 7000 TCD but no change in existing boiling house and molasses based distillery unit.
Identification Latitude & Longitude

21°20'26.17"N
72°53'48.85"E
21°20'17.52"N
1
72°53'35.70"E
21°20'39.56"N
2
72°53'40.58"E
21°20'47.80"N
3
72°54'9.29"E
21°20'14.26"N
4
72°53'54.31"E
Figure 1-1: Location of the Project Site

The modernization of existing mill is located in Sayan and no additional land was required to acquire for the
modernization of sugar mill. Project proponent is very well familiar with the surrounding environment &
production process; therefore, it becomes easy for the unit to mordenize project on the above said location.
The other features are briefly summarized hereunder:
 Availability of all basic infrastructure facilities like communication, transportation, medical facilities,
fuel, water, power, unskilled & skilled manpower, raw materials, road network etc.
 Proximity of market.
 No R & R was required;
 No national park or wildlife Habitats falls within 10 km radial distance from project site.
The siting criteria as per the guidelines are given in the following table;
Table 1-1: General Siting Criteria
Details Requirement Compliance
Forest No forest land shall be converted into The modernize mill is located in Sayan, Surat. Existing
non-forest activity for the sustenance of Sugar mill has installed new modernized mill in the
the industry. same premises hence, no forest land is involved in the
mordenized project.
Agricultural No prime agricultural land shall be The unit is located in Sayan, Surat and sufficient land
land converted into industrial site. was available for the mordenized project.
Layout Enough space should be provided for The mordenize mill has established by doing technical
storage area, plant area, greenbelt area, modification and in available open space within
Utilities, Raw material storage, Fly ash, existing premises. Total plot area of the project is
other storage like solid wastes so that 5,95,292.58 m2 from which 2,02,343 m2 is developed
these could be available for possible as greenbelt, thus 34% of total land area is covered
reuse. with green belt. This can be verified from the lay-out
given in the Figure 2-7.
Major At the time of siting of the industry, if the Nearest major habitation is Sayan (Population = 15324
settlements notified limit of any major settlement is as per Census 2011) which is about 2.65 km far from
en-vιsι n
Details Requirement Compliance
(3,00,000 found to be within 50 km from the project the project site in SSW direction.
population): boundary, the spatial direction of growth Surat City (Population: 45 Lacs as per Census 2011) is
of the settlement for at least a decade 19.86 km in SSW direction.
must be assessed.
Ecologically Preferably 5 km depending on the geo- None within 5 km distance.
and/or climatic conditions the requisite distance Sarthana National Park 11.76 km away in S direction.
otherwise may be decided appropriately by the
Sensitive areas Environmental agency.
Transport/Com Preferably ½ km. away from highway and NH-8 is 6.79 km in E direction.
munication railway line. Sayan Railway station is 2.74 km in SSW direction
system from Project Site.
Coastal areas Preferably ½ km away from high tide line None within 0.5 km radius of project site.
(HTL) Coastal Plain of Dumas, Surat is 33.75 km in W
direction from project site.
Flood plain of Preferably ½ km away from flood plain None within 0.5 km radius of project site.
the river or modified flood plain affected by dam Flood plain of
line system in upstream or flood control system.  Tapi River is 7.34 km in S direction from project
site.
Table 1-2: Size of Project

Sr. Total after
Particular Existing Proposed
No. modernization
1. Plant Capacity
Plant capacity of sugar unit
5000 2000 7000
(TCD)
Plant capacity of Distillery
45 -- 45
2. unit (KLPD)
11.5
Bagasse based Captive Power 11.5
(9 + 2.5 --
Plant (CPP in MW) (9 + 2.5 standby)
standby)
Capital Cost of Project (Rs. In
3. 119.44 37.44 156.88
Crores)
Capital Cost Environment
4. Protection Measures - 0.48 0.48
(Rs. In Crores)
Recurring Cost Environment
5. Protection Measures - 1.21 1.21
(Rs. In Crores per Annum)
1.4 SCOPE OF STUDY

Environment Impact Assessment and Environment Management Plan Report has been prepared in line with
Terms of Reference (ToR) suggested by SEIAA, Gujarat vide letter No.
SEIAA/GUJ/TOR/Violation/5(j)/927/2019 dated 19/06/2019 attached as Annexure I. As per the guidelines,
the generic structure of EIA is given in EIA notification dated 14th September, 2006 is maintained.
The EIA study includes determination of:
 Justification of modernization activities of existing mill.
 Pollution load due to modernization production of existing mill, change in pollution load due to
modernization mill based on material balance.
 Pollution load due to modernization utilities of existing mill and change in pollution load due to
modernization utilities of existing mill.
 After modernization baseline conditions of existing mill.
en-vιsι n
 Baseline details collected during March to May-2019 is utilized during this baseline following steps
were followed:
(i) Field sampling of environmental attributes at various representative locations in the study area to
establish the baseline status.
(ii) Collect & compile secondary data.
 Assessment of after modernization impacts of existing mill on the environment and projection of the same
due to the construction and operation activities of the modernization project.
 Identification, assessment and evaluation of the beneficial and adverse impacts on surrounding
environment due to modernization project activities considering the after modernization baseline
status and secondary data, by using scientifically developed and widely accepted models.
 Identification and assessment of risks associated with the modernization in project and their
appropriate management through proper Risk Assessment (RA) and Disaster Management Plan
(DMP).
 Making recommendations on the preventive measures to minimize the impact to acceptable levels and
preparation of post project monitoring plan.
 Prepare an Environmental Management Plan (EMP) to mitigate the predicted impacts.
 Identify critical environmental attributes required to be monitored during the project execution and to
suggest post project monitoring.
The after modernization baseline details utilized for the modernization mill (based on MoEF&CC / CPCB
guidelines) is tabulated below;
Table 1-3: Scope of Baseline Study
Nos. of
Locations
Environmental
studied during Observations
Attributes
1st March to 31st
May, 2019
Meteorology 1 One season site specific meteorological status of the study was
carried out for prediction of ground level concentration in
downwind direction.
Ambient Air Quality 8 The prevailing ambient air quality status was established
through a network of stations monitored during the period of
1stMarch to 31st May, 2019. The study area was 10 km, hence
locations in 10 km radius study area were selected and
predictions of impacts on air quality due to modernization
operations were carried out through application of air quality
models.
Water 8 Ground Water The water quality data with respect to physico-chemical,
and 8 Surface biological parameters and heavy metals were analyzed to
Water established baseline water quality of study area of 10 km. The
wastewater generation, its characterization and management
were carried out which was used in assessing the impact of the
project on water environment.
Noise 6 and 1 no. of Noise level measurements were carried out around the project
traffic noise site and it was used in assessing the impact of the project on
noise & vibration environment.
Soil 6 Soil samples were collected and have been analyzed to
understand nutrient status as well as assessing the impact of the
project on soil environment.
Ecology -- Flora and fauna species were listed based on the available
secondary information. Study of flora and fauna was carried out
within 10 km radius around the existing and after modernization
project.
Geology & Geo- -- Geological and geo-hydrological investigation work has been
Hydrology carried out in and around the study area to know the status of
the study area.
en-vιsι n
Nos. of
Locations
Environmental
studied during Observations
Attributes
1st March to 31st
May, 2019
Risk and Hazard -- Risk assessment study has been carried out to evaluate risk,
Analysis assess its impact associated to the after modernization project
activity and plan the appropriate action to control risk by the
most economical means.
Socio-economic data -- Modernize baseline status of the socio-economic profile of the
study area with reference to demographic structure, provision of
basic amenities, health status incorporating economic pattern in
the nearby rural areas (10 km radius) were undertaken, it was
used in assessing the impact of the project on socio-economic
environment.
1.5 REGULATORY FRAME WORK
Sr. Legal Instrument (Type, Ref.,

Concern Authority or Bodies Applicability
No. Year)
1. Air (Prevention and Control of CPCB and SPCB/UTPCC Air emission from stack attached to
Pollution) Act, 1981 and its boiler and DG set.
subsequent amendments
2. Water (Prevention and Control of CPCB and SPCB/UTPCC Wastewater generation from
Pollution) Act, 1974 and its industrial and domestic activities.
3. Water (Prevention and Control of CPCB and SPCB/UTPCC Wastewater generation from
Pollution) Rules, 1975 and its industrial and domestic activities.
4. The Environment (Protection) Ministry of Environment and Production of Crystal white sugar,
Act, 1986 and their subsequent Forests, & Climate Change Industrial alcohol/ Rectified spirit,
amendments (MoEF&CC), CPCB and Extra neutral alcohol/Absolute
SPCB/UTPCC. alcohol/ Anhydrous alcohol, Bagasse
based Captive Power Plant
5. Hazardous and Other Wastes MoEF&CC, CPCB, SPCB/UTPCC, Generation of Solid and hazardous
(Management and Transboundary DGFT, Port Authority and Customs waste from industrial activities
Movement) Rules, 2016 Authority
6. Manufacture Storage and Import MoEF&CC, Chief Controller of Storage of hazardous chemicals
of Hazardous Chemicals Rules, Imports and Exports, CPCB, within plant premises.
1989 amended 2000 SPCB/UTPCC, Chief Inspector of
Factories, Chief Inspector of Dock
Safety, Chief Inspector of Mines,
AERB, Chief Controller of
Explosives, District Collector or
District Emergency Authority, CEES
under DRDO
7. Chemical Accidents (Emergency CCG, SCG, DCG, LCG Storage of hazardous chemicals
Planning, Preparedness and within plant premises.
Response) Rules, 1996
8. EIA Notification, 2006 and its MoEF&CC, SPCB/UTPCC Production of Crystal white sugar,
subsequent Industrial alcohol/ Rectified spirit,
amendments Extra neutral alcohol/Absolute
alcohol/ Anhydrous alcohol, Bagasse
based Captive Power Plant.
en-vιsι n
Sr. Legal Instrument (Type, Ref.,
Concern Authority or Bodies Applicability
No. Year)
9. Public Liability Insurance Act, MoEF&CC, District Collector Sugar and Distillary unit
1991 amended 1992 & Public manufacturing sugar and alcohol
Liability Insurance Rules, 1991 products and more than 1000 workers
and its subsequent amendments are employed.
10. The Factories Act, 1948 Ministry of Labour, DGFASLI and Sugar and Distillary unit
Directorate of Industrial Safety and manufacturing sugar and alcohol
Health/Factories Inspectorate products and more than 1000 workers
are employed.
11. Noise Pollution (Regulation and CPCB and SPCB/UTPCC Noise generation due to various
Control) Rules, 2000 and its industrial activities.
amendments
12. The Indian Wildlife (Protection) Ministry of Environment and Not applicable
Act, 1972 and its subsequent Forests, & Climate Change
amendments (MoEF&CC), CPCB and
SPCB/UTPCC.
1.5.1 Legal Compliances of Existing Unit

M/s. Shree Sayan Vibhag Sahakari Khand Udhyog Mandli Ltd was established in November 1972 and it
is a Co-operative Mandli to protect the social & economic interest of small farmers located in the region.
It is currently engaged in production of sugar from sugarcane and also having 45 KLD molasses based
distillery unit with 11.5 MW (9 MW + 2.5 MW Standby) CPP located At & Post Sayan, Taluka Olpad,
District Surat- 394 130. Earlier Consolidated Consent and Authorisation (CCA) was issued to the project
by GPCB vide order no. 9316 dated 20.10.1994.
1.5.1.1 Current CCA & It’s Compliance

Current CCA is obtained vide order no. AWH-94405 or letter No. GPCB/CCA-SRT-56(5)/ID_21280/468953
dated 18th September, 2018 valid up to 30th May, 2023. The copy of CCA and its compliance is given as
Annexure VIII.
1.5.1.2 Show Cause Notice; Direction; Closure Notice Issued

The copies of notice and reply are given as Annexure IX; summary of the same is as under:
 One direction notice was issued by CPCB under section 18 (1) (b). Copy of same is given as
Annexure IX. Brief of notice and action taken is as under:
Notice Details in Brief Reply

Reply submitted on 19/12/2018:
Notice of Direction dated 25/05/2018:
 We are storing Molasses in MS material leak proof
tank with RCC and MS based structure floor. We
 The sugar mill shall ensure that the molasses generated by
have also provided separate designated storage area.
the unit is not leaked/discharge into surface water
We are regularly checking and maintaining the
bodies/ground and shall be stored in proper tank meant for
same to prevent/avoid any leakages. Further, we
the purpose. assure you that, there will be no any
leakages/discharges molasses generated from our
unit into surface water bodies/ground.
 We have provided total 6 nos. of MS material based

tanks and designated storage area as precautionary
en-vιsι n
measure for the storage of excess molasses. Tank’s
details are mentioned as below:
 To ensure proper precautionary measure for the storage of

excess molasses, if stored in kutcha lagoons/ open tank as
per NOC of Excise dept/ Concerned dept.
 Our unit is a seasonal industry. Our sugar industry

is operating only for 4-6 months per year and our
distillery unit is totally depending upon the sugar
unit & it is operating only for 1-1.5 months after
closing of sugar unit. We are utilizing the molasses
generated from the sugar unit for the distillery unit
and partial fraction of molasses is sold outside.
 Our cane crushing season for the year 2017-18 was
operational from 31.10.2017 to 25.03.2018 for the
year 2017-18 and accordingly distillery unit was
 Molasses stored in such temporary storage tank shall be operational from 07.11.2017 to 30/03/2018. We had
properly utilised/consumed before approaching monsoon manufactured total 38300 MT/Season molasses in
season. The sugar mills shall explore the utilization of the year 2017-18. Hence, there will be no any
molasses by other distilleries within the state or in the excess molasses stored in our premises during the
nearby state and legal formalities. If any, for such interest monsoon season.
movement may be facilitated, on the request from the
mills
 There is no any temporary/illegal spill/accidental

discharge of molasses into surface water
bodies/ground.
 Please refer print no. 2 for Storage details.
 There is no any accidental discharge from our unit.
 To perform monitoring of water quality of receiving drain/

river on regular basis to ensure timely corrective action to
avoid any spill / accidental discharge from such
temporary/ illegal storage of molasses.
 An assessment of molasses stored at the sugar mills in

your state shall be prepared including the available storage
facilities and shall be provided to CPCB within 15 days.
en-vιsι n
 Analyse the preparedness of all concerned stake holders in

dealing with such accidental discharge.
 Show Cause Notice; Direction; Closure Notice Issued
Total 1 show-cause notice, 2 closures & 2 direction notices are issued in last 5 years, the copies of notice and
reply are given as Annexure IX summary of the same is as under:
Revocation letter dated 14/05/2019:

Revocation on closure dated 14/05/2019 on 4 condition:
Closure notice dated 10/04/2019: Reply submitted on 13/04/2019:

 Production detail today production is 750 MT and it shows  Unit has replaced existing plant and machineries
that average production is higher than the consent quantity. by installation of advanced technologies based
machineries for sugar mill. Due to this
modernized technology, cane crushing capacity
increased from existing 5000 TCD to 7000 TCD
and accordingly production is increased but no
change in existing boiling house, boiler and
molasses based distillery unit.
 Looking this, we had applied under Category A,
5(j) Sugar Industry for obtaining Environment
clearance (EC) to MoEF&CC, Delhi in violation
window vide proposal no.
IA/GJ/IND2/74463/2018 dated 13.04.2018.
 After that, our proposal has been transferred
from category A to category B on 01.02.2019 at
SEIAA, Gujarat and new proposal no.
SIA/GJ/IND2/31012/2019 is generated.
 Then, SEIAA sought two EDS time to time and
replied the same. Now, we obtained acceptance
letter for TOR application from SEAC.
 We have attained TOR presentation on dated
11/04/2019 as per meeting schedule of 495 th
SEAC meeting held on 11/04/2019.
 Further, we assure you that, once we will obtain
TOR from SEAC, we will immediately submit
the TOR copy to the board and also applied for
CTE/CTO amendment for modernization in
existing cane crushed capacity increased from
5000 TCD to 7000 TCD for necessary approvals
from the board. Moreover, once we will obtain
en-vιsι n
EC, will immediately submit the copy of the
same to the board.
 Over flow of washing water from ETP was going

to natural surface storm water drain. We had
immediately diverted the washing water to ETP
for further treatment and also filled and blocked
 During visit natural surface water drain is observed dry.
storm water drain with soil structure.
 Hence, during visit, Natural surface water drain
is observed dry and which is also verified by
GPCB officials during their inspection on
30.01.2019.
Revocation letter dated 15/02/2019:

Revocation on closure dated 14/05/2019 on 6 condition:
Closure notice dated 10/04/2019: Reply submitted on 13/04/2019:

 During the period of visit, ETP is in operation and sample  As per GPCB analysis report of final ETP outlet,
was collected from final outlet of ETP for the analysis. observed following results: BOD=68 mg/l,
According to analysis report BOD=2172 mg/l, COD=8728 COD=403 mg/l, TDS=3026 mg/l, SS=40 mg/l,
mg/l, TDS=6943 mg/l, SS=653 mg/l, Ammonical Ammonical nitrogen=6.72 mg/l
nitrogen=100.8 mg/l which are exceeding the permissible
 Due to over load and disturbance in operation of
limit.
ETP, some of the parameters exceeded the limit
prescribed by the board. Unit has immediately
taken necessary steps by controlling the flow and
collecting the effluent into collection tank and
made ETP operation into normal level. Now the
system is working properly and efficiently to
meet the GPCB norms prescribed in consent
order.
 During the period of visit, yellow brown colored effluent  As per GPCB analysis report of surface drain
/washing water from spent wash area in surface water drain located behind/adjacent to distillery plant,
located at behind the distillery unit was found as discharged observed following results: BOD=2172 mg/l,
in road side underground drainage system of Sayan village. COD=8728 mg/l, TDS=6943 mg/l, SS=653 mg/l,
Out of which sample was collected for analysis and according Ammonical nitrogen=100.8 mg/l.
to analysis report BOD=68 mg/l, COD=403 mg/l, TDS=3026  Over flow of washing water from ETP was going
mg/l, SS=40 mg/l, Ammonical nitrogen=6.72 mg/l which are to outside underground drainage through surface
exceeding the permissible limit. storm water drain passing from residential
colony of industry. Unit had immediately
diverted the washing water to ETP for further
en-vιsι n
treatment and also filled and blocked storm water
drain with soil structure. Photographs also
submitted.
Notice of direction dated 09/09/2016: Reply submitted on 03/10/2016:

 Ensure strict compliance of revised effluent discharge  We assure you that we will follow Gazette
standards including treated effluent irrigation protocol and notification no. G.S.R 35 (E) dated January
waste conservation/waste water management points as listed 14,2016 on effluent discharge standards as
in Gazette notification no. G.S.R 35 (E) dated January mentioned below:
14,2016 under Schedule I of Environment (Protection) Rules,
1986 by all Sugar Manufacturing units in your state well
before the start of crushing season 2016-17.
 The ‘Consent to Operate’ (CTO) issued/to all the sugar
manufacturing units in the State shall be suitably modified
incorporating the above notified standards and condition. The
validity of the ‘Consent to Operate’ shall be stand  We also abide to the condition of notification on
automatically withdrawn if failed to comply the standards. treated effluent irrigation protocol and waste
Submit the compliance of the same. conservation/waste water management. In future,
we will confirm the effluent discharge norms as
per above mentioned notification before utilizing
the treated water for on land irrigation purpose
within factory premises.
 Ensure installation of online Continuous Effluent Monitoring  Unit has already installed and operated online
System (OCEMS) along with the connectivity to effluent monitoring system at ETP outlet for
CPCB/SPCB server commencement of crushing season measuring effluent parameters like pH, BOD,
2016-17 COD and TSS during cane crushing season and it
has been connected to CPCB/GPCB portal also.
GPCB direction dated 28/04/2015:  Unit has already installed and operated online
effluent monitoring system at ETP outlet for
Regarding online effluent/emission monitoring system
measuring effluent parameters like pH, BOD,
COD and TSS and online emission monitoring
system to boiler stack for measuring parameter
PM during cane crushing season. It has been
connected to GPCB/CPCB portal also.
en-vιsι n
CHAPTER 2 PROJECT DESCIRPTION
2.1 TYPE OF PROJECT

M/s. Shree Sayan Vibhag Sahakari Khand Udhyog Mandli Ltd. is a Co-operative Mandli and currently
engaged in production of sugar from sugarcane and also having 45 KLD molasses based distillery unit
with 11.5 MW (9 MW + 2.5 MW Standby) CPP located At & Post Sayan, Taluka Olpad, District Surat-
394 130.
Sugar unit has modernized its existing sugar crushing plant and machineries by installation of advanced
technologies based machineries for sugar mill and hence it increased in existing cane crushed quantity
from 5000 TCD to 7000 TCD but no change in existing boiling house, boiler and molasses based
distillery unit.
proposal no. IA/GJ/IND2/74463/2018 dated 13/04/2018 with reference to EC Violation, Notification No.
S.O. 804 (E) dated: 14th March, 2017. After presentation in front of EAC Committee at MoEF&CC,
proposal has been transferred to SEAC/SEIAA, Gujarat under schedule 5(j), Category B vide new
proposal no. SIA/GJ/IND2/31012/2019 as per Minutes of 14th meeting of Expert Appraisal Committee
(Violation) held on 23.10.2018.
2.2 INFORMATION ABOUT VIOLATION

Table 2-1: Information about Violation
Activity Timeline
Shree Sayan Vibhag Sahakari Khand Udyog Mandli Ltd. This project is in operative from the 1972.
EC Application for TOR modernization to EAC, MoEF&CC 13.04.2018
Case transfer from MoEF&CC to SEIAA, Gujarat 01.02.2019
Acceptance at SEAC, Gujarat 28.03.2019
TOR meeting at SEAC, Gujarat 11.04.2019
TOR Granted 19.06.2019
Civil work start 20.03.2017
Commencement of Mill Installation Activity Started on 10.05.2017
20.03.2017 to 10.05.2017 (Construction phase-192
days)
Production started in New Mill
Period of Violation
31.10.2017 to 25.04.2018 & (Days: 146)
25.10.2018 to 02.04.2019 (Days: 160)
Total Days: 498 Days
Court Case None
To regularize the activity under EIA notification.
As per S.O. 804(E) dated 14.03.2017, S.O.
Why under Violation?
1030(E) dated 08.03.2018, OM dated 15.03.2018
& 16.03.2018 to the EIA Notification.
 All the supportive documents regarding violation and action taken by GPCB are given as Annexure IX, 2nd and 3rd
2.3 NEED FOR THE PROJECT AND ITS IMPORTANCE TO THE COUNTRY AND/OR
REGION
Sugar mill was established in November 1972 as a Co-operative Mandli to protect the social & economic
interest of small farmers located in the region.
en-vιsι n
Mandli is also trying to get good quality crops on continuous basis in order to obtain good quality sugar
production. Unit has started molasses based distillery with a capacity of 45 KLD rectified sprit from 1994 and
20 KLD absolute alcohol from March 2003.
The sugar economy in India, like many other countries, is highly regulated, starting from sugarcane to the
end‐product sugar. Even the by‐products are subject to government control. The demand for products intended
to be manufactured is increasing in domestic and global market.
M/s. Shree Sayan Vibhag Sahakari Khand Udyog Mandli Limited is able to meet the demand of various
products locally and globally. This is generated direct and indirect employment opportunity for various levels
of people including local area employment.
Existing sugar mill was based on old technology and yield of its products were reducing day by day so
management had decided to replace existing sugar mill by assemble modernized mill.
 Disadvantages of old sugar mill (Old Technology):
 After cane crushed, moisture content in bagasse is found high. Hence, production reduced and
calorific value of bagasse is low. Therefore, bagasse as a fuel and its consumption was increasing.
 Effluent load is found with major quantity
 Juice loss is also found due to spill from vessel.
 Higher space was required for old mill.
 Steam turbine driven.
 Maintainace cost of old mill was higher than New Mill.
 Manpower and power requirenment was high.
 Control system for operation was tedious.
 Higher lubrication consumption.
 Advantages of new sugar mill (New Technology):

 Leakages and loss reduced due to closed system of new mill
 Juice and bagasse increased for new mill
 Electricty driven
 Low energy efficient reduction gear box replaced by high energy efficient compact design planetary
gear box.
 Closed circuit water cooling system for mill bearing reduces cold water consumption and leakages of
water.
 Reduction in no. of unit benefitted in easy in operation, monitoring and preventive maintenance. In
old milling tandem there are 12 Mills, but in new mill 4 mills will be sufficient.
 Fully automatic with VFD drive enhance the consistency, efficiency in operation as well as closed
monitoring of all unit from one place. Hence reduction in break down and increased out put.
 Low Maintainace cost
 Less Lubricants consumption
 Less Manpower and power requirenment
en-vιsι n
2.4 LOCATION
M/s. Shree Sayan Vibhag Sahakari Khand Udhyog Mandli Ltd., is engaged in production of sugar from
sugarcane and also having 45 KLPD molasses based distillery unit with 11.5 MW (9 MW + 2.5 MW
Standby) CPP in their unit located At & Post Sayan, Taluka Olpad, District Surat - 394 130.
Sugar unit has assembled new modernize mill which resulted increased cane crushing capacity without
increasing other auxiliaries of the unit. No additional land was required to acquire for the modernization of
sugar mill. Existing land i.e. 5,95,292.58 sq.mt. was sufficient for the modernization project.
It is situated at 21°20'26.17"N latitude and 72°53'48.85"E longitude. An index map showing project site is
given in Figure 2-1, Google image and topography map showing 10 km Radius study area of project site is
given in Figure 2-2 & Figure 2-3 respectively.
Figure 2-1: Index Map
en-vιsι n
Figure 2-2: Google Image showing 10 km Radius Study area of Project Site
en-vιsι n
Figure 2-3: Topography Map Showing Location of study area
2.4.1 Justification of Site Selection and Key Infrastructure Features and Settlements
The modernization mill of existing unit is located in Sayan and no additional land was required to acquire for
the modernization of sugar mill; Sugar mill has basic infrastructure facilty like communication, transportation,
medical facilities, fuel, water, power, unskilled & skilled manpower, raw materials, road network, etc.
The mill is surrounded by various Pharmaceutical, Textile, Food, Electronics manufacturing units. Major
industries are located within 5-6 km radius only hence these industries are shown in Figure 2-4 and list is
given in Table 2-2.
Table 2-2: List of Nearby Industries
Distance
Tag Name of Industry Nature of Industry From Project Direction
Site (km)
A Shree Hari Industries Textile exporter 1.16 S
B Shree Gopal Ind. Estate Industrial area 1.17 SSW
C Shreeji Silk Industries Clothes and fabric manufacturer 3.95 SW
D Biogen Pharmaceutical Co. Pharmaceutical 3.37 SW
E Surka Industries Clothing manufacturer 3.01 SW
F Bandidhari Industries Elevator manufacturer 4.17 SW
G Shreya Fabrics Textile mill 4.17 SW
H Virani Impex Metal machinery supplier 4.72 SW
I Panchras Masala - Samprag Innovative Food manufacturer 4.8 SW
J Gajanad Enterprise Ice Factory Ice supplier 1.8 SE
en-vιsι n
Distance
Tag Name of Industry Nature of Industry From Project Direction
Site (km)
K Gurudev Textile Cloth manufacturer 5.9 W
L Sunrise Textile Park Textile Park 1.09 N
Figure 2-4: Google Image Showing Nearby Industries
The mordenize sugar mill is established on existing land area so no displacement of population is take place.
There is no protected area notified under the Wild Life (Protection) Act, 1972 & Eco-sensitive area notified
under Section 3 of the Environment (Protection) Act, 1986 exists within 10 km radius areas from the project
site.
Table 2-3: Key Infrastructure Features
Nearest
Distance From
Tag Infrastructure Infrastructure Direction
Project Site (km)
Feature
A Nearest Village Shekhpur 1.44 SE
B Sayan 2.65 SSW
C Siwan 2.70 WSW
D Nearest road Sayan-Kim Road 0.30 WNW
E Nearest Railway station Sayan Railway Station 2.74 SSW
en-vιsι n
Nearest
Distance From
Tag Infrastructure Infrastructure Direction
Project Site (km)
Feature
F Nearest High Way SH-65 7.68 NNE
G SH-605 & 168 4.28 SE
H NH-8 6.79 E
I Nearest well known Shree Ranchhodrai 4.63 NE
Temple Temple, Kudsad
J River Tapi River 7.34 S
K Kim River 8.85 NE
L Domestic Airport Surat 29.60 SSW
M Nearest School Udan International 1.62 SE
School
N Nearest Hospital Jeevan Raksh Hospital 3.39 SW
O Sarthana Zoo Sarthana National Park 11.76 S
Project Site
5 km Radius area of Project Site
10 km Radius area of Project Site
Figure 2-5: Google Image Showing Locations of key Infrastructure Facilities in 10 km Radius Study Area
en-vιsι n
Figure 2-6: Google Image Showing Location of Surat Airport from Project Site
2019.05.31 2019.05.31
Main gate of project site Greenbelt in entrance
en-vιsι n
2019.05.31 2019.05.31
Greenbelt in plant area Greenbelt in Distillery area
2019.05.31 2019.05.31
New Sugar Mill New Sugar Mill
2019.05.31 2019.05.31
Distillery gate Distillery plant
Photograph 2-1: Project Site
en-vιsι n
2.4.2 Project Land and Plant Layout
The moderniation is done in existing sugar mill. The project is located in Sayan, Olpad, Surat. Total plot area
of the project is 5,95,292.73 m2 from which 2,02,343 m2 is developed as greenbelt, thus 34% of total land area
is covered with green belt. The breakup of land area after modernization is given in Table 2-4 and Table 2-5;
while plant layout showing infrastructure of existing faculties and that after modernization in Figure 2-7.
Table 2-4: Area Break-up
Area (m2)
Sr. No. Particular % of Total Area
Existing Proposed Total after modernization
1. Built-up 280862.36 2539.00 283401.36 47.6
2. Gardening 202343.00 - 202343.00 33.9
3. Open 95899.97 -2539.00 93360.97 15.6
4. Paved 16187.40 - 16187.40 2.71
Total 595292.73 0 595292.73 100
Table 2-5: Built up Area Break-up

Sr. Area (m2)
Particular
No. Existing Proposed Total after modernization
1. Sugar production area 16441 2509 18950
2. Distillery Production Area 1160 - 1160

3. Storage area 31785 - 31785
4. ETP area 66705 30 66735
5. Laboratory area 300 - 300
6. Admin office 880 - 880
7. Parking Area 1580 - 1580
8. Security Building 57 - 57
9. Road 20235 - 20235
10. Residential Area 141719.36 - 141719.36
Total 280862.36 2539 283401.36
en-vιsι n
Figure 2-7: Plant Layout
en-vιsι n
Table 2-6: Space and availability for Production plant, Utilities, Storage area and common infrastructure
Sr. No. Particular Existing Proposed Total after modernization
1. Total area (m2) 5,95,292.73 - 5,95,292.73
Cane crushed quantity

2. 5000 2000 7000
(TCD)
Space and Availability for Production plant, Utilities, Storage area and common infrastructure
Sr. No. Particular Storage Space and Availability

1. Molasses
Existing Molasses tank capacity Molasses quantity (by-product) (MT/Month)
 3789 MT x 4 Nos.  Existing: 7500

 Proposed: 2000
 4338 MT x 2 Nos.
 Total after modernization: 9500
 As above mention, total 6 nos. of molasses storage tanks are exist which is more than sufficient to cater additional 2000
MTPM Molasses load.
2. Bagasse
Existing storage area capacity Bagasse quantity (by-product) (MT/Month)
 Total Storage area: 31785 m2

 Existing: 45000
 Bagasse yard storage area: 3500 m2
 Proposed: 20000
Bagasse yard storage area capacity:  Total after modernization: 65000
around 1,05,0000 MTPM
 Existing bagasse yard storage area is sufficient to store 65000 MTPM Bagasse.
3. Crystal white sugar Existing bag storage area capacity Crystal white sugar quantity (product) (MT/Month)

 Existing: 19500
Total Storage area: 31785 m2
 Proposed: 5700
en-vιsι n
 After modernization:  Total after modernization: 25200

 Capacity of storage area: 21488 m2
 1 Bag = 50 kg.
 Total 17,90,000 bags (89,500 tonne)
 Existing storage area is sufficient to store the additional 5700 MTPM white crystal sugar production.
 In a worst case, the storage area is enough to store up to 107 days.
4. Industrial alcohol/ Rectified Existing storage area capacity Industrial alcohol/ Rectified spirit (product) (MT/Month)
spirit
 Existing: 1350
 Tank: 900 KL x 2 Nos.  Proposed: 0
 Total after modernization: 1350
 Industrial alcohol/ Rectified spirit is stored in 2 nos. of existing tanks as there is no growth in the generation of Industrial
alcohol/ Rectified spirit after modernization.
5. Extra neutral alcohol/Absolute Existing storage area capacity Extra neutral alcohol/Absolute alcohol/ Anhydrous alcohol (product)
alcohol/ Anhydrous alcohol (MT/Month)
 Tank: 900 KL x 1 Nos.  Existing: 1200
 Tank: 500 KL x 1 Nos.  Proposed: 0
 Tank: 100 KL x 4 Nos.  Total after modernization: 1200
 Extra neutral alcohol/Absolute alcohol/ Anhydrous alcohol is stored in 6 nos. of existing tanks as there is no change in
generation of Extra neutral alcohol/Absolute alcohol/ Anhydrous alcohol.
7. Effluent Treatment Plant Existing Proposed Total after modernization
(ETP)  Flow: 2881 KLD  -1501 KLD  1380 KLD
 Area: 66735 m2  Area: 66735 m2  Area: 66735 m2
 Existing ETP area is sufficient for the wastewater from modernization mill as the flow of modernized mill is less than that
of the existing mill.
8. Bagasse based captive power Connected Load
plant
 Existing: 11.5 [9 + 2.5(stand by)]
en-vιsι n
 Proposed: 0
 Total after modernization: 11.5 [9 + 2.5(stand by)]
9. Press mud Press mud generation (MT/Month)
 Existing: 6000 Proposed: 3000  Total after modernization: 9000
 Bio compost area is 54,846 m2 which is sufficient for making bio composting from additional press mud generation.
On the basis of above data, common/captive infrastructure is having sufficient capacity to cater and additional load. So, no significant environmental impact is envisaged.
2.5 MAGNITUDE OF OPERATION & PROJECT COST

The existing sugar cane crushed consented capacity is 5000 TCD and after modernization of the mill, cane crushing capacity increased up to 7000 TCD. The existing
project cost is Rs. 119.44 Crore and for the modernization of sugar mill project is around Rs. 37 Crores. Hence, it is categorized as “Large Scale Project”.
2.5.1 List of Products and Production Capacity

Details of the products, its end use and CAS no. are given in following Table 2-7.
Table 2-7: Details of Products
Sr. Capacity (MT/Month)
Product Name CAS No. End Use Physical Form Chemical Name
No. Existing Proposed Total
1. Crystal white sugar 57-50-1 19500 5700 25200 Sale as food product Solid Sucrose
2. Industrial alcohol/ Oil industry, Solvent based
64-17-5 1350 0 1350 Liquid
Rectified spirit industry and Pharmaceutical
3. Extra neutral industry Ethanol
alcohol/Absolute
64-17-5 1200 0 1200 liquid
alcohol/ Anhydrous
alcohol
4. Bagasse based 11.5 MW (9 + 11.5 MW (9 + 2.5 Used within premises as electricity
-- 0 -- --
Captive Power Plant 2.5 standby) standby)
en-vιsι n
Sr. Capacity (MT/Month)
Product Name CAS No. End Use Physical Form Chemical Name
No. Existing Proposed Total
By – Products
* Existing: Used for distillery unit Viscous liquid --
(5340 MT/M) and sold in market
Molasses 68476-78-8 7500* 2000** 9500 (2160 MT/M)
1.
** Proposed: will be Sold in
market (2000 MT/M)
2. Bagasse Used as fuel and sale to particle Solid --
9006-97-7 45000 20000 65000
board units
3. Press mud 6000 3000 9000 Used in own bio-compost yard Semi-solid --
--
en-vιsι n
2.5.2 Project Cost

The total project cost for modernization of sugar mill is Rs. 37 Crores. It includes all the plant machineries
and its installation and Environment Protection Measures Cost. Breakup of the investment is given in Table
2-8.
Table 2-8: Break-up of Capital Project Cost
Sr. Cost (Rs. in Lacs)

Description
No
Existing Proposed Total after Modernization
1. Land 9.00 -- 9.00
2. Civil works 2344.06 498.74 2842.80
3. Plant & Machinery 8573.69 3219.81 11793.50
4. Other (Miscellaneous) 1017.93 25.09 1043.02
Total 11944.68 3743.64 15688.32
2.6 PROJECT IMPLEMENTATION SCHEDULE

The implementation of project within a pre-determined time frame is an important factor for the success of a
project. Timely implementation may save on various costs like interest, administrative overheads and helps to
realize the goals as per pre-determined objectives. Completion of the project will take place after getting the
necessary clearances from concerned authorities. A schedule indicating the commencement, duration and
completion of various activities, is presented in Table 2-9.
Table 2-9: Project Implementation Schedule for Modernization Works
Sr.
Particulars Date of Commencement Date of Completion
No.
1. Land 1972 -
2. Civil Works 20/03/2017 15/10/2017
Plant & Machinery & Other Fixed Assets
3. Placement of orders 24/02/2017 -
4. Equipment Delivery 28/03/2017 15/10/2017
5. Erection & installation 31/03/2017 15/10/2017
Trial Production
6. Steam Trial 10/10/2017 -
Factory Start 31/10/2017 -
7. Start of Commercial Production 31/10/2017
2.6.1 Construction Activities

The Old sugar mill was dismantled as new technology was adopted for the new modernization mill, while
existing shed of old mill kept for utilising godown purpose. Construction activities were done in open land
available within the premises. Construction activities were made of foundation, shed, new road, platform, wall
etc. Erection of various equipments was started simultaneously and it was completed along with the
construction activities. The construction was done by Aarc Construction Co. and Nitin Steel which was
commenced on 20th March, 2017 and ended in 15th October, 2017. Construction materials, like steel, cement,
crushed stones, sand, rubble, etc. were procured from the local market of the region. Photographs of
constructed new sugar mill are given in photograph-2.1.
en-vιsι n
2.7 PROCESS DESCRIPTION
Manufacturing process and material balance for production of Crystal white sugar is given in section 2.7.1
and Table 2-10 respectively.
2.7.1 Manufacturing process of Sugar

Matured cane according to plantation calendar is harvested from the fields, trashes, tops and roots and clean
cane is transported to factory by means of trucks and bullock-carts. The cane is weighed and dumped on
feeder tables by means of sling hoist cane unloader. At mill for maceration hot water of 75 0C is applied to
extract maximum amount of sugar cane juice (sugar) from the cane. The residual obtained after milling
(Bagasse) is fed to boilers to generate the steam for running the different prime movers for milling and
electrical power generation.
The mixed juice obtained from mills is weighed and phosphoric acid is added to it. After addition of
phosphoric acid mixed juice is healed to 75 0C in multipass vertical tubular juice heaters where from it is sent
to juice sulphitor where milk of lime and SO2 gas is mixed in it and final pH is maintained to 7.0 (+ or - 0.2).
Sulphited juice is heated to 102 0C (+ or - 2) and then sent to Dorr clarifier for settling to flock formed. The
overflow of the Dorr Clarifier is clear juice and underflow is mud. The mud is filtered through vacuum filter,
mud is disposed off or used as manure and the filtrate is recycled and mixed with the mixed juice for
reprocessing. The clear juice obtained from Dorr Clarifier is concentrated to 60-650 Bx. In vapour cell and
multiple effect evaporators. The juice so concentrated i.e. Syrup is sent to Syrup Sulphitor where it is
Sulphited with SO2 and its pH is brought down to 5.0 to 5.2. Thus, Sulphited syrup is sent to pan supply tank
for further processing.
A massectuite is boiled with syrup melt and A light, Dry seed footing is taken for A massecuite boiling in
vacuum pans where sugar crystals are developed for bagging. A massecuite of 94 0Bx. And 86-88 purity is
finally dropped in the crystallizers. From crystallizer, this A massecuite is sent to centrifugal machines where
sugar crystals. A heavy molasses and A light molasses are separated, sugar is sent to graded through grass
hoppers where sugar is separated in different grains, sizes S 30 & M 30 are bagged. Bags for domestic market
and 50 Kg for export.
A light & a heavy molasses is sent to pans storage tanks. A light is used in A massecuite and a heavy is used
for boiling B massecuite. 95-96 0Bx. and 71-73 % purity. After purging B massecuite, B heavy molasses and
B sugar is obtained. B sugar is melted and sent to pans and fed to A massecuite pans. B heavy molasses is sent
to pan storage tanks and is used for boiling C massecuite of 100 0Bx. and 55-56 % purity. C massecuite is
purged in C for workers where final molasses solution of 45 0Bx. is used for lubrication, molasses obtained
from C fore centrifugals is final molasses it is weighed and is stored in five steel molasses storage tanks. ‘C’
fore cured sugar is affinated with C light molasses and sent to C after worker centrifugals where hot water is
applied and C after sugar and C light molasses is obtained. C after sugar is melted and sent to pans for A
en-vιsι n
massecuite boiling and C light molasses used for C fore magma and boiling C massecuite.
A. Process Flow Diagram of Sugar Unit
Table 2-10: Material Balance

Input Output
Sr. No.
Name of material Quantity (kg/day) Name of material Quantity (kg/day)
1 Sugar Cane 1000.0 Bagasse 309.4
2 Lime 1.9 Hot water 357.1
3 Sulphur 0.6 Effluent 97.1
4 Phosphoric acid 0.1 Sugar 120.0
Filter cake 42.9
Molasses 45.3
Evaporation loss 30.8
Total 1002.6 Total 1002.6
en-vιsι n
2.7.2 Process description of distillery unit
Ethyl alcohol & denatured spirit is manufactured in distillery unit since 1994. Alcohol is basic raw material
for various chemical industries. Alcohol is manufactured from molasses through process of
(1) Fermentation:
Alcohol is manufactured by fermentation of molasses. Molasses contains about 45% to 50% sugar. Molasses
is diluted with water as per required concentration (above 20%) & filled in a tank known as Fermentor tank.
Then alcohol generating bacteria (yeast) is added in to the Fermentor tank & allowed for fermentation. During
this process sugar in molasses is converted in to alcohol. On completion of the process, it will be a mixture of
alcohol & water, which is known as wash.
C6H12O6 2C2H5OH + 2CO2
(2) Distillation:
Fermented wash contains about 5-7% of alcohol. The process for separation of alcohol from water is known
as distillation. In this process, wash is boiled in specially designed column by way of steam. The boiling
point of alcohol is lower than water. Then separated alcohol vapour is condensed in a tubular condenser &
convened in to liquid form. The liquefied alcohol is cooled in an alcohol cooler & stored in a steel tank. This
alcohol is the final product known as rectified spirit, which contains 95% ethyl alcohol.
Denatured spirit: It is known as industrial alcohol/Rectified spirit also. For the precaution & to avoid the
misuse of alcohol, government has decided to add some chemicals such as benzene, acetone, pyridine,
acetaldehyde etc. in certain proportion before sale of alcohol, but it cannot be separated from alcohol. Thus,
the alcohol is mixed with chemicals is known as denatured spirit or denatured alcohol.
(3) ABSOLUTE/POWER/ANHYDROUS ALCOHOL: (MOLECULAR SIEVE DEHYDRATION

SYSTEM-REDISTILLATION)
The salient features of the process are given herewith:
Dehydration with Molecular Sieve Process

The rectified spirit from the rectifier is superheated with steam in feed super-heater. Super-heated rectified
spirit from feed super-heater is passed through molecular sieve unit. Generally, there are two sieve units. One
is under adsorption while the other is under regeneration. Once the unit is saturated with the water, it is put to
regeneration and second unit is put under adsorption process. The regeneration is also known as desorption
process. Desorption is done by applying vacuum. The cycle time for adsorption and regeneration varies from
10 to 15 minutes. Dehydrated rectified spirit vapours are partly used to sweep away water from the sieve bed
under regeneration. This gives a stream of diluted rectified spirit, which is sent to a recovery
column/vaporizer.
The life of molecular sieve is claimed to be around 10 years. As the cycle period is very short, a fully
automated system should be adopted for changing the configuration from adsorption to regeneration and vice
versa. The valves used are totally leak proof at high temperature and pressure/vacuum conditions.
en-vιsι n
The life of molecular sieve may be around ten years. However, the operating cost is considerably less
than azeotropic distillation.
 EXTRA NETURAL ALCOHOL

95 - 96 % v/v alcohol is fed to DOC column for Re-distillation to remove impurity like Aldehyde Fuel Oil &
Acetic Acid, which is in range of 100 PPM & above. No chemical reaction is involved in the process. Some
chemical like KMnO4 & caustic Soda is added in raw material (Approx 0.1 %) for Neutralize the product.
2.8 RAW MATERIAL REQUIREMENT

Details of raw materials (Existing and total after Modernization) along with CAS no. are given in Table 2-11
below. Major raw material i.e. Sugarcane is being procured from farmers who are members of M/s. Shree
Sayan Vibhag Sahakari Khand Udyog Mandli Ltd., and other raw materials are arranged through local
vendors and/ or imported. Raw material is stored in separate designated storage area. The same practice is
continuing Modernization sugar mill.
2.8.1 Mode of Transportation for Raw Materials

Existing and modernization, sugar mill has total 210 working days. The raw materials are procured from the
local market and transported through trucks, mini truck, bullock cart, etc. to the project site. Approximately
12,500 nos. of trucks, 450 nos. of tracktor and 9200 nos. of bullockcarts are required per month for the
transportation of sugar cane. Around 20 nos. of trucks are required for the other raw materials i.e. lime,
sulphur, phosphoric acid, caustic soda, etc per month. There is an around 200 lit drum for turkey red
oil/deformer and for potassium permanganate that comes into the mill via 2 nos. of three wheeler mini tempo
per month. Unit is having sufficient space to accommodate trucks. Generated molasses from the sugar mill is
used as raw material for manufacturing of distillery products which is pumped out from the molassess tank.
Table 2-11: Raw Material Requirement
Requirement (MT/Month)
Sr. Raw Material Name of the Physical
CAS No. Total after
No. Name Products Existing Proposed Form
Modernization
1. Sugar cane 91722-22-4 1,50,000 60,000 2,10,000 Solid
2. Lime Crystal white 8006-28-8 250 150 400 Solid
3. Sulphur sugar 7704-34-9 70 60 130 Solid
4. Phosphoric acid 7664-38-2 15 0 15 liquid
5. Viscous
Molasses Industrial alcohol/ 68476-78-8 5,340 0 5,340
Rectified spirit liquid
6. Turkey red and liquid
8002-33-3 6 0 6
oil/Deformer Extra neutral
7. Rectified spirit alcohol/Absolute 64-17-5 12,72,000 Lit 0 12,72,000 Lit liquid
8. Potassium alcohol/
Anhydrous 7722-64-7 75 – 100 0 75 – 100 liquid
permanganate
alcohol
9. Caustic soda 1310-73-2 550 – 600 -590 10 liquid
2.9 REQUIREMENT OF RESOURCES

The details of resource required like water, power, fuel, manpower, plant & machineries, utilities etc. for
existing and modernization mill are described in subsequent sections under respective headings.
en-vιsι n
2.9.1 Electricity / Power
Existing power requirement is sufficient for the modernization mill and no additional power is required for the
modernization mill. i.e. 490 kVA sourced from DGVCL, 11.5 MW (9 MW + 2.5 MW Standby) bagasse based
Captive Power Plant. D.G. Set (625 kVA x 2 Nos.) is for emergency purpose only. Energy balance is givn in
Figure 2-8.
Table 2-12: Electricity Requirement
Connected Load
S. No. Source of Electricity
Existing Proposed Total after Modernization
1 Dakshin Gujarat Vij Company (kVA) 490 - 490
11.5 11.5
2 Bagasse based Captive Power Plant (MW) -
[9 + 2.5(stand by)] [9 + 2.5(stand by)]
3 DG Set (Stand-by) (kVA) 625 x 2 No. - 625 x 2 No.
Bagasse based Captive Power Plant

(11.5 MW)
Power Turbine (9 MW) Power Turbine

(2.5 MW –stand by)
Power Generation (8 MW)
Power consumed in Sugar Power consumed in Distillery

Plant (7.4 MW) Plant (0.6 MW)
Figure 2-8: Energy Balance
2.9.2 Manpower
There is no addition in manpower requirement for the modernized mill. Existing 1200 personnel is sufficient
for this modernization mill.
Quarters of Sugar mill was allocated to workers during construction phase as construction activities are done
in off season with all the infrastructure facilities such as sanitation, fuel storage, restroom etc. Sanitation and
rest rooms are available in premises and colonies are allocated during operational phase to the workers with
all the basic facilities. Sufficient area is available for fuel storage in existing and after modernization sugar
mill.
en-vιsι n
2.9.3 Water
Total water requirement for the existing mill is 5026 KLD and after modernization, it is 3120 KLD, no
additional water is required, but demand of water is reduced which is sourced from Canal/Bore well.
(Permission letter of Narmada Water Resources water supply and Kalpsar Department is given as Annexure
II Total 1530 KLD waste water is generated from the operational activities of the modernization mill. Entire
industrial effluent (1380 KLD) is treated in Effluent Treatment Plant (ETP) and also Domestic sewage (150
KLD) will be treated along with industrial effluent in ETP and subsequently treated water will be reused for
on land irrigation/plantation/gardening purpose within the factory premises.
2.9.4 Utilities and Fuel Requirement

Proposed utilities are Boiler, and D. G. Set (Stand-by). Fuel is required for Boiler, D. G. Set (Stand-by).
Bagasse, methane gas and furnace oil will be used in Boiler, while diesel will be utilized for D. G. Set. Diesel
will be purchased from the nearby trader. Details of utilities and fuel requirement are given in Table 2-13
Usage of steam from the boiler is given in Figure 2-9 and Figure 2-10.
Table 2-13: Utilities and Fuel Requirement
Sr. Source of emission Quantity of Fuel
Type of Fuel
no. With Capacity MT/Day
EXISTING SCENARIO
Steam Boiler No.: 1, 2 & 3*
1
(20 TPH each) Bagasse
50 MT/hr (1200 MTD)
Steam Boiler No.: 4
2
(40 TPH)
Bagasse 20 MT/hr (480 MTD)
Steam Boiler No.: 5
3 + +
(40 TPH)
Methane gas 500 m3/hr (12,000 m3/day)
Furnace oil 290 lit/hr
Steam Boiler No.: 6
4 & (6.96 KLD) &
(10 TPH)
D. G. Set- (Stand by) Diesel
5 160 lit/hr (3.84 KLD)
(625 KVA – 02 Nos.
AFTER MODERNIZATION OVERALL SCENARIO
Steam Boiler No.: 1, & 2 Bagasse 20 MT/hr
1
(20 TPH each) (480 MTD)
Steam Boiler No.: 3* Bagasse
2 10 MT/hr (240 MTD)
20 TPH each
Steam Boiler No.: 4 Bagasse 20 MT/hr
3
(40 TPH) (480 MTD)
Bagasse 20 MT/hr (480 MTD)
Steam Boiler No.: 5
4 + +
(40 TPH)
Furnace oil 290 lit/hr
Steam Boiler No.: 6
5 & (6.96 KLD) &
(10 TPH)
D. G. Set-
6 (625 KVA – 02 Nos. Diesel 160 lit/hr (3.84 KLD)
(Stand by)
Note: * After modernization, Steam Boiler No.3 is separated from common stack attached to existing steam
boiler No. 1, 2 & 3 and also provided Multicyclone Separator + wet scrubber as proposed APCM
There is no change in existing Steam Boiler No. 4, 5, 6 and D. G. sets (2 Nos.)
en-vιsι n
Figure 2-9: Usage of steam from old mill
en-vιsι n
Figure 2-10: Usage of steam from new mill
en-vιsι n
2.10 POLLUTION POTENTIAL AND MITIGATION MEASURES

Modernization production activities of existing mill generates pollution in the form of domestic & industrial
wastewater disposal; flue gas emission from utilities, fugitive emission, noise & vibration and hazardous
waste generation & disposal. The said existing probable proposed pollutions are described below under
respective heading with necessary details and mitigation measures.
2.10.1 Water Environment

Water requirement and wastewater generation in existing and modernization activities are given in Table 2-14
& Table 2-15 and detailed water balance is given in Figure 2-11 & Figure 2-12.
Table 2-14: Water Requirement
(KLD) (KLD) (KLD)
(A) Domestic 160 0 160 --
(B) Industrial
Distillery
(B -I) 200 0 200 --
plant
(B -II) Sugar plant
Two tandem mills are replaced with
modernized closed system of one tandem
650 mill. This prevented losses of water from
(a) Process 1300 -650
(Condensate) mill which increased condensate water
recovery. Due to reuse of condensate water
fresh water requirement is reduced.
New mill required less steam consumption
213
(b) Boiler than old mill, which decreased demand of
(Condensate)
water in boiler.
1606 -756
Due to decrease in steam requirement of
(c) Cooling 637 boilers for new mill, cooling tower inlet
water reduced.
Others It is reduced due to reduction in water
(Humidifica requirement for boiler.
(d) tion + Spray 1260 -200 1060
pond Make
up)
200 (Fresh Dry cleaning system is adopted instead of
13+ wet cleaning system which has drastically
(e) Washing 500 -300
Condensate reduced washing water requirement.
187)
1910 Fresh + 1050 condensate water of
Total (B) 4866 -1906 2960
sugar cane crushed
2070 Fresh water + 1050 condensate water
Total (A + B) 5026 -1906 3120
of sugar cane crushed
en-vιsι n
Table 2-15: Wastewater Generation

Sr. No. Particulars
(KLD) (KLD) (KLD)
(A) Domestic 150 0 150

(B) Industrial
(B -I) Distillery plant 0 0 --
(B -II) Sugar plant
(a) Process 1750 -1070 680
(b) Boiler 80
631 -311
(c) Cooling 240
Others (Humidification + Spray
(d) 180 0 180
pond Make up)
(e) Washing 500 -300 200
Total (B) 2881 -1501 1380

Total (A + B) 3031 -1501 1530
en-vιsι n
Figure 2-11: Water Balance Diagram-Existing
en-vιsι n
Total Water Consumption

3120 KLD
(2070 Fresh water + 1050 condensate water
of sugar cane crushed)
Industrial Domestic
2960 KLD 160 KLD
(1910 Fresh water + 1050 condensate
water of sugar cane crushed)
Distillery Sugar
200 KLD 2760 KLD
(1710 Fresh water + 1050 condensate
water of sugar cane crushed)
Process Boiler Cooling + Washing

650 KLD 213 KLD Other 200 KLD
1697 KLD 200 KLD
680 KLD 80 KLD 420 KLD
1380 KLD
ETP 150
1530 KLD KLD
ETP treated water ETP sludge

1500 KLD 4.17 MTD
Reused for on land

irrigation/plantation/gardening
purpose within the factory premises
Figure 2-12: Water Balance Diagram-Total after Modernization
en-vιsι n
2.10.1.1 Wastewater Treatment & Disposal

 Existing ETP Details (Including Primary And Secondary Treatment)
Effluent water from factory emerges out through a common gutter. After proper screening of suspended and
floating matters, it comes in a trap for separating oil and grease. This oil and grease removed manually. Oil
and grease free water comes to in a small tank for mixing milk of lime in the effluent water to maintain the pH
range 7.5-8.5 for preparation of milk of lime there is a tank with stirrer near this mixing tank. The milk of lime
continuously gets mixed with incoming effluent water with the help of stirrer. This effluent then passes to
primary holding tank where the floating aerators are placed. From this tank effluent water is pumped to
primary clarifier. After giving proper retention time, the sludge settled at the bottom of this clarifier and the
supernatant clear waste with much reduced total solids and impurities over flows out of this clarifier and
collected in intermediate holding tank no. 1. The sludge at the bottom of clarifier is pumped to sludge drying
beds where sludge is dried by sun light and filtered through coarse and fine sand beds at the bottom. The
filtered water from each bed is commonly collect in one small tank and pumped to mini holding tank.
The clear supernatant in mini holding tank is pumped to two separate lagoons. To keep up the activity of
microorganism of bio mass, the cattle dung and chemicals like urea and superphosphate in aerated lagoon no 1
is added. The holding capacity of two aerated lagoons is at present 4 days. In lagoon no.1 there are four fixed
type surface aerator. The effluent from mini holding tank comes in lagoon no. 1 where further activity of
micro organism takes place. The BOD of effluent considerably reduced by aeration. The overflow of this
lagoon is taken in to lagoon no.2 where further aerobic activity takes place by using diffuser system. The
COD and BOD value of the outgoing effluent are drastically reduced in the effluent and is pumped to factory
farm.
Process Description of Distillery ETP
The rectified spirit and extra neutral alcohol effluent/spent wash is collected in one day capacity holding tank.
These effluents are discharged at high temperature of 80-90 °C and needs minimum 60% cooling before taken
to the anaerobic reactor. For this purpose, tank is provided with flowing mix and a cooling tower is attached to
the by-pass line of the effluent pumps.
The effluents are acidic in nature and need either continuous or intermediate neutralization as per demand of
the process. Factory supplies necessary quantity of lime slurry from their slurry preparation system as and
when required. In case of nutrients, the same shall be added into this holding tank.
The rectified spirit and extra neutral alcohol effluent mixed together before sludge pits. The ENA process does
not generated any effluent but condensate water used in process immerged out as a washing and get mixed
with the spent wash of about 50 m3/day which has already taken care in the total quantity of effluent coming
out of the rectified spirit and ENA plants. Anaerobic treatment is the primary treatment given to the spent
wash in sayan sugar factory.
For first stage anaerobic treatment spent wash is cooled to 35 °C before feeding into up flow type 3985.16 m3
capacity bio digesters (1992.580 m3 each, 2 numbers) in bio digester plastic media is used for the biomass
attachment. No pre-treatment by way of filtration or sedimentation is required before anaerobic treatment.
Spent wash is neutralized by slurry of lime before feeding in digester.
60% digested spent wash is recycled for low consumption of lime. The hydraulic- retention time about 15
days in first stage bio-methanation. After first stage bio-methanation digested spent wash is feeding into
second stage up flow type four numbers of digester (464.49 m3 capacities each). Before second stage of
biomethanation fresh spent wash is also mixed with digester spent wash in small quantity. After two stage
en-vιsι n
biomethanation treatment digested spent wash used for Bio composting. In this system the complex organics
are broken down and the end product is Methane having high calorific value. This methane gas is used as a
Fuel in Boiler and energy conservation can be achieved. Thus, methane gas is recovered by two stage
anaerobic digestion of the distillery waste. To obtain optimum production of gas, it is necessary to feed the
waste to a digester at a controlled rate, under anaerobic conditions. Mixing, temperature, loading (Hydraulic,
Organic) and pH have great influence on the production of gas. Properly maintained and operated
biomethanation unit is certainly an inexpensive relatively simple way to treat the distillery wastewater. But
only anaerobic mode cannot alone stabilize the waste completely. The treated effluent overflow of the
anaerobic reactor is connected to the intermediate clarifier for the removal of floating/settling sludge. The
clarified effluent is taken to the intermediate holding tank then further used to prepare bio-compost. The
sludge is recycled back in to the system and when in access taken in the drying beds for drying and disposal.
The biogas generated in the system is connected to the gasholder of 500 m3 capacity provided in the sugar
ETP and used for boiler.
Process Description for Bio-Composting of Distillery Effluent:
In bio-composting of distillery effluent, the press mud is formed into windrows, left for few in the yard to
supply oxygen using high technique compost machine as shown specially cultured bacteria are added.
Therefore, the windrows are aerated and effluent is sprayed on them daily. The windrows temperature
increased to around 60-70 °C during the second week of composting.
Because of this high temperature, all disease causing germs are killed and effluent consumption increase. The
end product, compost of humus is removed from the yard and left for curing. Curing is the phase, where the
demand of oxygen is less. Later it is sold to farmers.
Table 2-16: Details of Effluent Treatment Plant Units
Sr. No. Name of Unit Quantity (nos.) Capacity (m3) Retention Time MOC
2.5 to 3 hrs
1. Distillery Sludge Tank 10 39.2768 m3 each RCC
(Each)
2. Distillery Holding Tank 1 609.5418 m3 45 to 50 hrs RCC
Distillery Intermediate 7 to 8 hrs RCC

3. 1 100 m3
Holding Tank 1
Distillery Anaerobic 6 to 7 days RCC
4. 2 1992.5866 m3 each
Digestion Tower
(each)
5. Distillery Clarifier 1 64.0382 m 3 4 to 5 hrs RCC
Distillery Intermediate
6. 1 390.7525 m3 25 to 30 hrs RCC
Holding Tank 2
Distillery Anaerobic 30 to 35 hrs RCC
7. 4 464.49 m3 each
Digestion Tower
(each)
Distillery Intermediate 3 12 to 15 hrs RCC
8. 1 180.9356 m
Holding Tank 3
Distillery Storage
9. 1 7612.5 m3 22 to 25 days RCC
Lagoon No. 1
Methane Gas Holding
10. 1 504.866 m3 -- MS
Tank
11. Gas Compressors 2 400 m3 -- RCC
en-vιsι n
Sr. No. Name of Unit Quantity (nos.) Capacity (m3) Retention Time MOC
12. A. Oil & Grease Tank 1 107.5 m3 -- RCC
13. B. Oil & Grease Tank 1 52.03 m3 -- RCC
Sugar Primary Holding 4 to 5 hours RCC

14. 1 251.3274 m3
Tank
15. Sugar Primary Clarifier 1 350 m3 6 to 7 hours RCC
Old Sludge Drying Beds

16. 12 35.35 m3 each -- RCC
New Sludge Drying Beds

17. 18 35.558 m3 each -- RCC
Sugar Fix Aeration System 3 to 4 days RCC

18. 1 4288 m3
– Lagoon No. 2
Diffuser System for Sugar RCC
19. 1 1850.25 m3 1 to 2 days
(Secondary Treatment)
20. Sugar Secondary Clarifier 1 513.9394 m3 7 to 8 hours RCC
Treated Effluent Disposal RCC

21. 1 48 m3 45 to 60 min
Tank
22. Sugar Storage Area 1 5311.746 m3 -- RCC
23. Distillery Storage Area 1 2338.71 m3 -- RCC
Total Area of Bio RCC

24. 1 11 acres --
Compost Plant
en-vιsι n
Figure 2-13: Schematic Diagram of Effluent Treatment Plant
en-vιsι n
2.10.1.2 Addition of Proposed Tertiary Treatment Plant (TTP)
Process Description
Existing Biological treated effluent shall be collected in Existing Intermediate tank from where it passes
through (By Propose Pumps:- One Working & One Standby) Proposed Pressure Sand Filter and Proposed
Activated Carbon Filter in series for polishing treatment for removing colour, odour, trace organics and
chlorine. Treated effluent will be stores in existing Treated Water Tank. Subsequently treated water is/will be
reused for on land irrigation/plantation/gardening purpose within the factory premises.
Table 2-17: Details of TTP Units
Sr. No. Name of unit Capacity Nos. MOC
1. Pressure Sand Filter 50 m3/hr 1 MSEP
2. Activated Carbon Filter 50 m3/hr 1 MSEP
3. Filter Feed Pump 50 m3/hr 1W+1S CI
Figure 2-14: Schematic Diagram of TTP
2.10.1.3 Economical & Technical Viability of the Effluent Treatment System (ETP)
Main sources of wastewater are manufacturing process, boiler, cooling tower, washing and other activities.
Inside the sugar mill, there is an effluent treatment plant. Entire industrial effluent is being treated in Effluent
Treatment Plant (ETP) and treated water is reused for on land irrigation/plantation/gardening purpose within
the factory premises. Stream wise effluent characteristics for treatment in ETP is given in Table 2-18.
en-vιsι n
2.10.1.3.1 ECONOMICAL VIABILITY OF TREATMENT SCHEME
Total wastewater generation from the project is 1530 KLD, which is subjected for treatment in in-house ETP
having primary and secondary treatment facility, and after treatment it is used for onland irrigation/gardening
purpose. In house treatment cost occurs is Rs. 80,072/- per Day. According to CPCB guideline, project
proponent are using for onland irrigation/gardening purpose after treatment in ETP and this is viable for the
project. After modernization project, effluent quantity is reduced than quantity generated from old mill.
2.10.1.3.2 TECHNICAL VIABILITY OF TREATMENT SCHEME

Effluent generation from modernization project is proposed to be treated in ETP having primary, secondary
and tertiary treatment facility. Stream wise raw effluent quality is given in Table 2-18 & while after treatment
its stage wise quality is given in Table 2-19. According to this treatment scheme, desired quality is being
achieved.
Table 2-18: Stream wise effluent quality
Parameters Process Boiler Cooling Washing

BOD 800-1000 60-70 100-150 2000-3000
COD 2000-2500 100-1200 150-300 4000-5000
TSS -- 800-1500 -- --
TDS -- 1500-3500 -- --
Table 2-19: Stage wise effluent characteristics in ETP
After Primary After Secondary After Tertiary

Parameters ETP Inlet ETP Outlet
Clarifier Clarifier treatment
pH 4-6 6.5-8.5 6.5-8.5 6.5-8.5 6.5-8.5
BOD 800-1200 560-840 <30 <30 <30
COD 3500-4000 2450-2800 <250 <250 <250
TSS 100-800 <100 <100 <100 <100
TDS 500-2100 <2100 <2100 <2100 <2100
2.10.1.4 ETP Sludge Generation

Crushing capacity of sugarcane of modernization sugar mill is 7000 TCD. Due to production, 1530 KLD
wastewater generated and that is treated in ETP having capacity of 3000 KLD. On the basis of total flow of
effluent and characteristic as given above, total sludge generation is less than 1000 MT/Annum. So it is
proposed to 1000 MT/ Annum ETP sludge. It is utilized as as manuare in gardening/ plantation within
premises.
It is assured by the project proponent that ETP sludge quantity will not be increased more than 1000
Mt/Annum.
en-vιsι n
Table 2-20: Proposed Pollution Control Schemes
Sr. No. Pollution Pollution Source Pollution Control Schemes

1. Wastewater Process  Wastewater is sent to ETP with
primary, secondary and tertiary
treatment and also wastewater from
Domestic activities is sent to ETP
along with the industrial effluent.
Then treated water is used for on
land irrigation/ plantation/ gardening
purpose within the factory premises.
 Generated ETP sludge is used as
manure for gardening/plantation
purpose within premises.
 Sugar mill is complying Guideline for ZLD scheme issued by CPCB vide later no. B-400/PCI-III/201-15 dated
19.01.2015 and also complying Gazette notification no. G.S.R 35 (E) dated January 14,2016 on revised effluent
discharge standards including restricting final treated effluent discharge to 100 liters per tonne of cane crushed
and waste water from spray pond overflow or cooling tower blow down to be restricted to 100 liters per tonne
of cane crushed. Only single outlet point from unit is allowed.
2. Air Emission Source of Air Emission Air Pollutants APCM

Multicyclone
Steam Boiler No.: 1, & 2
Separator + Wet
(20 TPH each)
Scrubber
Multicyclone
Steam Boiler No.: 3*
Separator + Wet
20 TPH each
Scrubber
Multicyclone
Steam Boiler No.: 4 SPM Separator + Wet
(40 TPH) SO2 Scrubber
NOX Multicyclone
Steam Boiler No.: 5
Separator + Wet
(40 TPH)
Scrubber
Steam Boiler No.: 6 Adequate Stack
(10 TPH) Height
D. G. Set-
Acoustic
(625 KVA) – 02 Nos.
Enclosure
(Stand by)
 Modernized sugar mill will install Multi Cyclone Separator + Wet Scrubber with all stacks attached to
steam boilers as mentioned above.
 As per GPCB guidelines conversion of boilers/ utilities vide office order No. GPCB/ANK-C992/215695
Dated 7-6-14, ESP + Water Scrubber is required.
2.10.2 Air Environment

In this sugar mill, flue gas emission is the main source of air pollution. There is no process gas emission in
existing as well as after modernization products. Main source of fugitive emission are raw material handling
and transportation and manufacturing activities. Various potential of air pollution are described below under
respective heading:
2.10.2.1 Flue Gas Emission

During modernization of existing mill, main sources of flue gas emission are boiler and D. G. set (Stand-by).
The fuel consumed in boiler is Bagasse, methane gas and furnace oil hence, wet scrubber is installed as an
APCM. After modernization, in addition to wet scrubber, Multicyclone Separator will be provided as
en-vιsι n
proposed APCM. In D. G. set diesel is used as fuel. Acoustic enclosure is provided with DG set. The details of
flue gas stacks are given in table below:
Table 2-21: Details of Flue Gas Stacks
Stack Air Pollution
Sr. Source of emission Type of emissions
Height Control Measures Permissible Limit
No. With Capacity i.e. Air Pollutants
(meter) (APCM)
EXISTING SCENARIO
Steam Boiler No.: 1, 2 & SPM Multicyclone
1 3* 30 SO2 Separator & Wet
(20 TPH each) NOX Scrubber
SPM
Steam Boiler No.: 4
2 40 SO2 Wet Scrubber
(40 TPH)
NOX
SPM SPM ≤150 mg/Nm3
Steam Boiler No.: 5
3 40 SO2 Wet Scrubber SO2 ≤ 100 ppm
(40 TPH)
NOX NOX ≤ 50 ppm
SPM
4 30 SO2
(10 TPH) Height
NOX
D. G. Set- SPM
5 (625 KVA – 02 Nos. 8 SO2 Acoustic Enclosure
(Stand by) NOX
AFTER MODERNIZATION OVERALL SCENARIO
SPM Multicyclone
Steam Boiler No.: 1, & 2
1 30 SO2 Separator + Wet
(20 TPH each)
NOX Scrubber
SPM Multicyclone
Steam Boiler No.: 3*
2 30 SO2 Separator + Wet
20 TPH each
NOX Scrubber*
SPM Multicyclone
Steam Boiler No.: 4 40
3 SO2 Separator + Wet SPM ≤150 mg/Nm3
(40 TPH)
NOX Scrubber*
SO2 ≤ 100 ppm
SPM Multicyclone
4
Steam Boiler No.: 5
40 SO2 Separator + Wet NOX ≤ 50 ppm
(40 TPH)
NOX Scrubber*
SPM
5 30 SO2
(10 TPH) Height
NOX
D. G. Set- SPM
6 (625 KVA – 02 Nos. 8 SO2 Acoustic Enclosure
(Stand by) NOX
 Modernized sugar mill will install Multi Cyclone Separator + Wet Scrubber with all stacks attached to
steam boilers as mentioned above.
 As per GPCB guidelines conversion of boilers/ utilities vide office order No. GPCB/ANK-C992/215695
Dated 7-6-14, ESP + Water Scrubber is required.
Note: * After modernization, Steam Boiler No.3 is separated from common stack attached to existing steam
boiler No. 1, 2 & 3 and also provided Multicyclone Separator + wet scrubber as proposed APCM.
There is no change in existing Steam Boiler No. 4, 5, 6 and D. G. sets (2 Nos.)
2.10.2.2 Process Gas Emission

There is no process gas emission from modernization of existing Sugar mill.
2.10.2.3 Fugitive Emission

The fugitive emissions of organic chemicals and VOCs mainly occur due to tank breathing losses, leaking
pipe fitting and valves, during maintenance operations. Though these are not expected to be significant, the
en-vιsι n
following measures are being followed to ensure compliance and further reductions wherever possible in
Existing and after modernization.
 The fugitive emissions in terms of handling losses are reduced by proper storage and handling.
 Raw materials and hazardous chemicals are stored as per standard criteria.
 Proper ventilation in storage & production area is provided and all materials are being stored in suitable
packing to prevent contamination of air due to particulates & volatile emissions from storage container &
area.
 Enclosed system & efficient procedures for materials charging is provided.
 SOP’s for start-up, shut down, operation & maintenance are established & maintained in all relevant area
of works.
 The coverage of greenbelt around the plant consisting of noise and air pollution capturing species also acts
as natural barrier to stop carrying of dust along with the wind current.
 Good housekeeping is maintained in the mill.
Environmental Monitoring Plan is proposed for periodic monitoring. (Refer Table 6-1).Work zone monitoring
will be carried out as per GFR.
2.10.2.4 Odor Control Action Plan

Causes of odour during handling and storage of various raw materials and products such as Crystal white
sugar, Molasses, Rectified spirit and alcohol. To control odour following precautions are being taken and
same is continuing after modernization:
 Better management to avoid staling.
 Hazardous chemicals are being stored in leak free container.
 PPE’s are mandatory for worker handling these chemicals.
 Avoiding the solid/hazardous waste storage inventory.
 Spraying of chemicals wherever required to avoid odour.
2.10.3 Noise Environment

Main source of noise in modernization mill of existing sugar unit are plant machineries and utilities.
Following precautions are being taken for abatement of noise pollution during modernization:
 Noise generating sources and their platforms are maintained properly to minimize noise vibrations
generated by them. Proper and timely oiling, lubrication and preventive maintenance is carried out for the
machineries and equipments to reduce noise generation. All the vibrating parts are checked periodically
and serviced to reduce the noise generation. The equipment, which generates excessive noise, is provided
with enclosures etc.
 The coverage of greenbelt around the plant consisting of noise and air pollution capturing species also acts
as natural barrier to stop carrying of dust along with the wind current.
 Noise barriers / shields in the form of walls, beams are provided around the units wherever found feasible
 To reduce the noise generation during the transportation activities; the vehicle are kept periodically
serviced and maintain as per the requirement of latest trend in automobile industry. Only those vehicles
with PUC’s are allowed for the transportation.
 Noise monitoring is carried out regularly at prominent places in the plant through NABL approved
laboratory.
 Personnel working near the noisy machines in different plant locations are provided with well designed
ear muffs / plugs (effective noise reduction 10-15 dBA).
2.10.4 Solid/ Hazardous Waste Management

The details of hazardous waste generation and handling / Management are given in Table 2-22. Unit has
provided storage area for hazardous wastes having roof, impervious flooring with leachate collection system.
ETP sludge is used as manuare within premises as analysis of ETP sludge is done from government certified
en-vιsι n
navsari Agriculture University which is given in Annexure XIII and it is within limit of citi compost
parameter from FCO guidelines.
Table 2-22: Details of Hazardous waste Management

Quantity (MT/Annum)
Sr.
Waste Source Category Mode of Disposal
No. E P T
Collection, storage,
From plant &
1 transportation &
Used oil 5.1 0.500 0 0.500
Machinery reuse/disposal by selling to
registered re-refiners.
Collection, storage,
Discarded Raw Material decontamination,
2 Container/ 33.1 0.060 6.94 7 transportation and disposal
storage area
Linears/Drums by selling to GPCB
authorized recyclers.
3 From ETP Collection, storage and use

ETP sludge 35.3 1800 -800* 1000
as manuare within
Collection, storage and
mixed with ETP sludge
From bagasse
4 and used as filter material
Fly Ash -- 0 4000 4000
fired boiler for bio-composting and
selling to brick
manufacturers
Note: E: Existing, P: Proposed, T: Total after modernization
2.10.5 Hydro-Geological Environment

Aquifers can broadly be demarcated into two zones namely newer alluvium and older alluvium. Water levels
are in general deeper in newer alluvium. The maximum number of wells, about 80% is 5 to 20 m deep. Depths
to water levels in the wells range from 0.5 to 15 m bgl about 90% wells shows water levels less than 10m bgl.
Although source of water is Canal/Bore well. (Narmada Water Resources water supply and Kalpsar
Department), industry has installed rain water harvesting system and the harvested rain water is used for
various industrial activities.
2.10.5.1 Rain Water Harvesting

Calculation of rain water to be harvested based on yearly rainfall and runoff is given in Table 2-23.
Table 2-23: Details of Rain Water Harvesting
Particular Details
Annual rainfall (mm) 1208
No. of rainy days per year 46
Catchment area available (sq.mt.)
 Roof top area 283401.36
 Road/ Paved area 16187.4
 Green belt area 202343.0
 Open Land 93360.97
 Total 595292.7
en-vιsι n
Particular Details
Coefficient of runoff
 Roof top area 0.8
 Road/ Paved area 0.5
 Green belt area 0.2
 Open Land 0.2
Rain water can be harvested (Kilo Liter/year) 355098

Total water requirement by unit (KL/year) 1226240
Based on the above table, it can be concluded that annual volume of rain water for harvesting is about 29% of
the annual fresh water requirement.
As the harvested rain water quantity is moderate compare to water required. Total cost for the rain water
harvesting structure will be around Rs. 11 lakhs. It is not included in environmental budgetary.
The project conserves the water by harvests the rain water and recharge the well and treated industrial waste
water is utilised for on land irrigation/ plantation/ gardening purpose within the factory premises.
2.10.6 Socio-Economic Environment

The activities of Corporate Environment Responsibility will be carried out by the project proponent to
mitigate the envisaged social issues that has arise/identified during field survey. The goal of CER is to assess
needs of local community and be accountable to internal and external stakeholders at all levels for smooth
performance, of the organization, transparency and social responsibility. The corporate unit has to comply
with and work towards such goals.
total amount of Rs. 74 lacs would be allotted for CER programme for the period of five years. These
activities may change after periodic discussion with local authority (Gram Sarpanch and/or District Collector).
Also unit is abide towards spending CSR cost for the upliftment of the community if project attract
Companies (CSR Policy) Rules, 2014; thus improving socio-economic status of study area. Last three years
CSR activities done by the proponent is given in below Table 2-24.
Table 2-24: Activities conducted under CSR in last three years
Sr.
Year Activities Cost (Inr) Location
No.
Agricultural, Donation in Mandirs, Jahangirpura, Sayan, Gaypagla,
1 2019-20 66,670
Social ceremonies, Kosamba, Olpad
Donation in Mandirs, Education, Social Bodhan, Sayan, Gaypagla,
fastival, community marriage ceremony, Kosamba, Olpad, Galteshwar,
2 2018-19 28,29,611
awareness, relief fund for Army, Food Sondalakhara, Talad, Surat, Kim,
donation, donation in old age home Variyav, Pulvama- J&K, Gothan,
Social celebration, donation in mandir, Gaypagla, Kosamba, Asnabad,

3 2017-18 education, food donation, donation in 49,025 Surat, Sandhiyar, Sayan, Gothan,
oldage home, donation in Indian Army Kim, Galteshwar, Kathodara
Source: Shree Sayan Vibhag Sahakari Khand Udhyog Mandli Limited
en-vιsι n
2.10.7 Ecology and Biodiversity

There is no tree cutting is envisaged for the development of the project. However around 33% are of total
project will be developed as green belt and will be started along with construction phase as per greenbelt
development plan.
2.10.7.1 Greenbelt Development
Greenbelts are an effective mode of control of air pollution, where green plants form a surface capable of
absorbing air pollutants and forming a sink of pollutants. Leaves with their vast area in a tree crown, sorbs
pollutants on their surface, thus effectively reduce pollutant concentration in the ambient air. Often the
adsorbed pollutants are incorporated in the metabolic pathway and the air is purified. Plants grown to function
as pollution sink are collectively referred as greenbelts.
An important aspect of a greenbelt is that the plants are living organism with their varied tolerance limit
towards the air pollutants. A green belt is effective as a pollutant sink only within the tolerance limit of
constituent plants. Planting few, known pollutant sensitive species along with the tolerant species within a
green belt however, do carry out an important function of indicator species.
Apart from function as pollution sink, greenbelt would provide other benefit like aesthetic improvement of the
area and providing suitable habitats for birds and animals.
2.10.7.2 Details of Existing Greenbelt

Total plot area of plant is 5,95,292.73 m2 out of which 2,02,343 m2 is developed as greenbelt, consisting of air
and noise pollution capturing species; which is about 34% of total plot area. Unit has developed sufficient
greenbelt as per requirement i.e. more than 33% across the periphery and within the plant area. Moreover,
unit is adopting modernization in technology of cane crushing within existing premises.
Unit have developed greenbelt on the periphery of the plant premises and also near hamaal chal, sheds, factory
premises and prem colony. In year 2018-19 unit have planted about 1490 nos. of trees within factory premises
and inside the colony area. In addition to this, further unit have planted 2000 nos. of trees in different areas of
facoty and colony premises.
Although, there will be no additional greenbelt development required within premises; unit have planned to
grow 1600 nos. of trees in current year i.e. 2019-2020. Moreover, more than 500 nos. of shrubs and
ornamental species are planted at various locations / area within and outside of the premises.
Existing greenbelt consists of air and noise pollution capturing species such as Neem (Azadirachta indica);
Kasid (Cassia siamea), yellow-flamboyant tree (Peltophorum pterocarpum), Rain tree (Samanea saman),
Coconut Tree (Cocos nucifera) etc. and other shrubs and ornamental species are grown within existing
premises.
Selection of Plant Species in Designing of Green belt
The main limitation for plants to function as scavenger of pollutants are, plant’s interaction to air pollutants,
sensitivity to pollutants, climatic conditions and soil characteristics. While making choice of plants species for
cultivation in green belts, due consideration has to be given to the natural factor of bio- climate. Xerophytes
plants are not necessarily good for greenbelts; they with their sunken stomata can withstand pollution by
avoidance but are poor absorber of pollutants.
Character of plants mainly considered for affecting absorption of pollutant gases and removal of dust particle
are as follows.
en-vιsι n
For Absorption of Gases:
 Tolerance towards pollutants in question, at concentration, that are not too high to be instantaneously
lethal
 Longer duration of foliage
 Freely exposed foliage
 Adequate height of crown
 Openness of foliage in canopy
 Big leaves (long and broad laminar surface)
 Large number of stomatal apertures
For Removal of Suspended Particulate Matter
 Height and spread of crown.
 Leaves supported on firm petiole
 Abundance of surface on bark and foliage
 Roughness of bark
 Abundance of axillary hairs
 Hairs or scales on laminar surface
 Protected Stomata
2019.05.30 2019.05.30
Coconut Tree (Cocos nucifera) Neem (Azadirachta indica)
2019.05.30
Shrubs within plant premises
Figure 2-15: Greenbelt Developed within Plant Premises
en-vιsι n
 Details of the plant species grown in existing greenbelt are as under:
Table 2-25: Details of Existing Plant Species in Greenbelt
No. as per Common Stomatal Mode of Sensitive/ Ecological Quantity
Latin Name Habit Flowering Season Type
Guideline Name Index Regeneration Tolerant performance
Sensitive to 222
Neem / January-March, SO2Tolerant
A44 Azadirachta indica Tree 29.2 Seeds Evergreen AGE, DC, CN
Limbado August- September to Cement
dust
C11 Cassia siamea Lam. Kasid Tree 21.2 Seeds August - May Tolerant Evergreen AGE 35
Sensitive to 06
C7 Cassia fistula Garmado Tree 20.4 Seeds, Suckers March-May Deciduous QG
cement dust
D3 Delonix regia Gulmohar Tree 14.38 Cutting, seeds April-June Sensitive Deciduous AGE, DC 38
Tolerant to 61
F1 Ficus benghalensis L. Vad Tree 21.72 Cutting, seeds April-June Evergreen AGE, DC
dust
Throughout the 42
C19 Cocos nucifera L. Narial Tree 9.31 Seeds Tolerant Evergreen -
year
Shisham By Seeds, Root 01
D2 Dalbergiasissoo Tree 18.72 March-April-June Tolerant Evergreen DC
Tree and Stem cutting
F7 Ficusreligiosa Pipal Tree Tree 18.70 Cutting, seeds January-May Tolerant Evergreen DC 71
Seeds, 17
transplanting, South India -
Sensitive to
grafting. budding, January - March
M5 Mangifera indica L. Amri/Ambo Tree 30.77 SO2Tolerant Evergreen AGE, DC, CN
air layering, root North India
to dust
cutting and February - April
marcotting
Polyalthia longifolia Sensitive to 38
P9 Asopalav Tree 22.27 Seeds April-June Evergreen AGE, DC
(Sonn.) Th. SO2
Jamrukh/Ja Cutting, seeds, 03
P20 Psidium guajava inn. Tree 28.38 - Tolerant Evergreen AGE, DC
mfal budding, grafting
Terminalia Catappa 27
T8 Badam Tree 20.9 Seeds Oct-Nov Tolerant Deciduous -
Linn
Seeds, Root 02
P16 Prosopis Cineraria Samdi Tree 18.1 Dec-Apr Tolerant Evergreen QG
suckers
-- Syzygium cumini Jamun Tree -- Seeds -- -- Evergreen AGE 30
Round the year 05
in costal
A18 Achros sapota linn Chikoo Tree 25.78 Seeds/Cutting Tolerant Evergreen QG
districts.
Sept. - Dec. tn other
en-vιsι n
No. as per Common Stomatal Mode of Sensitive/ Ecological Quantity
Latin Name Habit Flowering Season Type
Guideline Name Index Regeneration Tolerant performance
areas.
Bangali 33
A2 Acacia auticuliformis Tree 10.9 Seeds June-Jan Tolerant Evergreen QG
Babul
-- Gmelina arborea Sevan Tree -- Seeds/Cutting Feb-Apr -- Deciduous -- 08
Z1 Ziziphus mauritiana Bor Tree 12.4 Seeds April-Oct Tolerant Evergreen QG 01
P7 Pithecellobium dulce Gorasamli Tree 11.87 Seess, cutting Jan-Feb Tolerant Evergreen QG 27
C12 Casuarina equisetifolia Saru Tree -- Seeds Feb-April, Sept-Oct Evergreen QG 20
E5 Eucalyptus obliqua Nilgiri Tree 12.91 Seeds Feb-April, Oct-Dec Tolerant Evergreen QG 60
M12 Moringa oleifera Drumstick Tree 28.2 Seeds, Cutting Jan-Apr Sensitive Deciduous QG 03
Peltophorum Copper pod 564
P1 Tree 16.68 Seeds May-Sept Tolerant Evergreen DC,QG
pterocarpum tree.
M2 Madhuca longifolia Mahudo Tree 22.18 Seeds Feb-Apr Tolerant Deciduous QG 07
S6 Samanea saman Rain Tree Tree 15.64 Seeds Mar-Jun Tolerant Evergreen QG 71
T2 Tamarindus indica Aamli Tree 18.4 Seeds Apr-Oct Tolerant Evergreen QG 11
F4 Ficus racemosa Umardo Tree 19.81 Cutting, Seeds Apr-May Tolerant Evergreen QG 03
Bakam
M7 Melia azadirach Tree 23.53 Seed, stem, root Mar-May Tolernat Evergreen QG 07
Limdo
Other shrubs and ornamental species 49
Total 1462
Ecological performance:
 CN –Control Noise level
 AGE – Absorb Gas Emission
 DC - Dust Controller
en-vιsι n
 Unit will maintain existing greenbelt by
1). Rregular watering, soil enrichment work, applying manure, weeding and provide proper protection.
2). Replacement of sapling (replanting) required whenever mortality occurs in the plantation during the
growth stage.
3). Plantation requires after care for a period of minimum five years till the saplings attain matured tree stage.
4). Any damage to the developed greenbelt due to any natural or cattle activity should be redeveloped and
maintained by the unit.
2.10.7.3 Guidelines for plantation

The plant species identified for greenbelt development can be planted using pitting technique. Width of the
green belt in the available land area may prove difficult for many industries to attain for one or more reasons.
Hence it can be decided to have green belt in places available around the industry (source oriented plantation)
as well as around the nearby habituated area (receptors oriented plantation).
The choice of plants for green belt should include shrubs and trees. The intermixing of trees and shrubs should
be such that the foliage area density in vertical is almost uniform.
The pit size has to be either 45 cm x 45 cm x 45 cm or 60 cm x 60 cm x 60 cm. Bigger pit size will be
considered at marginal and poor quality soil. Soil used for filling the pit should be mixed with well
decomposed farm yard manure or sewage sludge at the rate of 2.5 kg (on dry weight basis) and 3.6 kg (on dry
weight basis) for 45cm x 45 cm x 45 cm and 60 cm x 60 cm x 60 cm size pits respectively. The filling of soil
has to be completed at least 5-10 days before actual plantation. Healthy sapling of identified species should be
planted in each pit with the commencement of monsoon.
It is planned to grow remaining total 1600 trees for completion of 34% of total area as a greenbelt, in year
2019-20. For that; Greenbelt development plan is mentioned in Table 2-26.
Table 2-26: Greenbelt Development Plan
Plantation Period in year 2019-2020 Total
No. of Plants to be Planted 1600 1600
Yearly %age 100 % 100 %
Budget (Rs.)- Capital cost 9,60,000 9,60,000
2.11 REUSE/RECYCLE AND CLEANER PRODUCTION TECHNOLOGIES

Cleaner production is a preventive, company-specific environmental protection initiative. It is intended to
minimize waste and emissions and maximize product output. Unit has adopted following cleaner production
techniques and waste minimization methods wherever possible.
2.11.1 Cleaner Production Technologies

Following steps are being followed to achieve goal of Cleaner production:
 Dedicated Reactors are being utilized for different reactions. This is preventing product contamination
and prevents the usage of water for cleaning the reactors.
 Canned motor pumps (Seal less) are utilized for operations; these pumps do not have leakages so floor
cleaning is avoided.
 Preventive maintenance schedule followed strictly for all rotary & static equipments. This is
preventing occurrence of leakages from the equipments.
en-vιsι n
 Storage of the finished goods and raw materials in a proper way as clearly labeled & in designated
storage areas only.
 Cleanliness of roads is done regularly to prevent accumulation of dust and waste material.
2.11.2 Waste Minimization Methods

 Solar energy is used for street lighting within site.
 High energy efficient equipments are used to save energy.
 Bagasse is used as in-house fuel, generated from the Sugarcane crushing.
 Methane gas extraction by biogas process from waste in unit and utilized as fuel in boiler.
 Treated water from the effluent generated from the manufacturing process is reused.
en-vιsι n
CHAPTER 3 DESCRITPION OF ENVIRONTMENT
3.1 INTRODUCTION
The baseline status of environmental quality in the vicinity of project site serves as the basis for identification,
prediction and evaluation of impacts. The baseline environmental quality is assessed through field studies
within the impact zone for various components. Baseline data generation of the following environmental
attributes is essential in EIA studies.
1. Meteorology
2. Ambient Air Quality
3. Ambient Noise Quality
4. Surface and Ground water Quality
5. Soil Quality & Geological Features
6. Land use pattern
7. Biological Information
8. Socio-economic status survey
3.1.1 Objectives of Baseline Monitoring

The term ‘baseline’ refers to conditions existing before development against which subsequent changes can be
referenced. Baseline monitoring studies are carried out to:
Measure environmental parameters during a pre-project period for the purpose of determining the range of
variation of the system and establishing reference points against which changes can be measured.
 Identify environmental conditions which might influence project design decisions (e.g., site layout,
structural or operational characteristics);
 Identify sensitive issues or areas requiring mitigation or compensation;
 Collect input data for analytical models and predict effects due to proposed project;
 Provide proposed environmental monitoring programs.
At this stage of EIA process, baseline monitoring is primarily discussed in the context of first purpose wherein
feedback from baseline monitoring programs may be used to:
 Determine available assimilative capacity of different environmental components within the designated
impact zone and whether more or less stringent mitigation measures are needed.
 Improve predictive capability of EIAs.
3.1.2 Methodology for Data Collection

The baseline details collected in 1st March to 31st May, 2019 is utilized for this project. The methodology
adopted for collection of baseline data of these was components, primary and secondary data collection. The
study was finalized with the ToRs approved by SEIAA, Gujarat.
The sampling locations were selected as per the ToRs prescribed by the SEIAA in consultation with the
respective functional area experts. Subsequently the field monitoring was undertaken during March-April-
May 2019 by functional areas of respective fields with laboratory staff. Secondary data used to finalize
sampling locations were:
 The land-use & land cover map of the 10 km radius study area from the project site was prepared using
IRS P6 LISS-III satellite image procured from NRSC (National Remote Sensing Centre), Hyderabad
(Figure 3-12)
en-vιsι n
 Survey of India Toposheet (Figure 2-3)
 Secondary macro-metrological data from Indian Meteorological Department (Section- 3.2.1) Primary data
has been collected through field monitoring for meteorological conditions, ambient air qality, water
quality, noise quality, soil quality, etc, which includes major portion of the baseline environmental
studies. In addition to these important studies, further studies like land use, socio-economic studies,
ecological and biodiversity studies, hydrogeology, etc. are covered during the study period. Secondary
information sources and constitutes is used for these studies and remaining parts of the baseline
environmental studies. The collected data were analyzed and interpreted.
3.1.3 Study Area

To carry out Environment Baseline Monitoring and to generate baseline environmental data study area of 10
km radial distance from proposed project site has been selected. Base line data of Ambient air quality, water
quality; land use & land cover, topography, ecology as well as socio economic status was collected for study
area of 10 km.
The details of the study period, frequency of sampling & method of environmental sampling & analysis are
given below in succeeding sections under respective titles.
en-vιsι n
3.2 METEOROLOGICAL ENVIRONMENT

Air borne pollutants is dispersed by atmospheric motion. Knowledge of these motions, which ranges from
turbulent diffusion to long-range transport by weather systems. Dispersion of different air pollutants released
into the atmosphere has significant impacts on the neighborhood air environment of project and forms an
important part of impact assessment studies. Meteorological conditions of the site regulates the transport and
diffusion of air-pollutants released into the atmosphere.
Ambient temperature, wind speed, wind direction and atmospheric stability are called primary or basic
Meteorological Parameters because the dispersion and diffusion of pollutants depend mainly on these
parameters. Humidity, precipitation, pressure and visibility are secondary Meteorological parameters as they
control the dispersion of the pollutants indirectly by affecting primary parameters. This data is useful for
proper interpretation of the baseline information as well as serves as an input, to predictive models for air
quality impacts.
It is imperative that one should work with idealized condition and all analysis pertaining to air turbulence and
ambient air should be done with meteorological conditions, which can be best expected to occur.
3.2.1 Climate of Study Area

The general agro-climatic zone of the study area is Arid to Semi arid. Information presented in subsequent
paragraphs is from the most recently published Long Term Climatologically Tables for the nearest
observatory, Surat by the India Meteorological Department (IMD)1. A copy of the long-term Climatological
data is given as Annexure III.
Mean Daily Temperature (°C) Humidity (%) Rainfall Mean Wind

Month
Max Min Max Min (mm) Speed (km/h)
January 30.8 15.2 68 41 1.5 3.7
February 32.3 16.7 64 34 0.3 3.5
March 35.4 20.7 64 33 0.4 3.6
April 36.7 24 66 42 0.2 4.7
May 35.8 26.8 70 58 3.9 8
June 34 27 78 70 245.2 8.3
July 31.2 25.9 86 80 466.3 8.1
August 30.8 25.5 86 79 283.8 6.6
September 32.3 25.4 83 70 151.8 3.7
October 35.1 23.3 73 52 41.8 2.3
November 34.1 19.6 65 44 7.1 2.7
December 31.9 16.5 67 43 0.6 2.9
Annual
33.4 22.2 73 53 1202.8 4.8
Mean
1 Climatological normals 1981-2010, issued by office of the additional director general of meteorology (Research)
India Meteorological Department, Pune-5
en-vιsι n
3.2.1.1 Predominant Wind Direction
As per India Meteorological Department (IMD), Atlas of wind roses, 1971-2000, the annual variations in
average wind speed recorded at Surat station at 8.30 am and 5.30 pm indicates that the predominant wind
direction in from SW to NE.
Figure 3-1: Annual Wind Rose of Daily Surface Data recorded at 8:30 a.m. at Surat Station (1971-2000)
en-vιsι n
Figure 3-2: Annual Wind Rose of Daily Surface Data recorded at 5:30 p.m. at Surat Station (1971-2000)
3.2.1.2 Site Specific Micro-Meteorology Data

Meteorology of the study zones plays an important role in the study of air pollution. Micrometeorological
conditions with respect to temperature, relative humidity, wind speed and direction that regulate the dispersion
and dilution of air pollutants in the atmosphere are collected at the proposed project site. Predominant
direction determines location of monitoring stations at downwind side from the sources.
To collect site specific meteorological data, automatic weather station was installed at the project site to
record micrometeorological parameters on hourly basis during study period to understand the wind pattern,
temperature variation, relative humidity variation, etc. Site-specific mean meteorological data is given in
Table 3-1 and the wind rose diagram processed by ISC-AERMOD View software from data collected at site is
shown in Figure 3-3.
Table 3-1: Summary of Site Specific Meteorological Data
Period: Month of Year 2019
Meteorological Parameter
March April May
Min. 16 23 27
Temperature (°C)
Max. 38 42 42
Avg. 30.27 30.24 32.50
Relative Humidity (%) Min. 10 13 13
en-vιsι n
Period: Month of Year 2019
Meteorological Parameter
March April May
Max. 89 94 89
Avg. 49.12 52.97 61.48
Min. 1 2 3
Wind Speed (km/h) Max. 32 28 32
Avg. 10.29 12.64 14.14
Wind Direction Blowing from SW to NE
Rain fall Nil
en-vιsι n
Figure 3-3: Primary Wind rose Diagram A
en-vιsι n
Figure 3-4: Primary Wind rose Diagram B
en-vιsι n
3.3 AIR ENVIRONMENT

The purpose of EIA is to determine whether average concentrations are likely to encounter at fixed locations
(known as the receptor), due to the given sources (locations and rates of emission known), under idealized
atmospheric conditions. The ambient air quality status with respect to the study zone of 10 km radial distance
from the plant site will form the base line information over which the predicted impacts due to the proposed
expansion in plant can be super imposed to find out the net (Final) impacts on air environment.
3.3.1 Sampling Methodology and Analysis

Ambient levels of pollutants such as PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOx, CO and HC are selected for the sampling. The
methodology of sampling and analysis in detail is given in Table 3-2 & Table 3-3.
Table 3-2: Air – Parameters analyzed and sampling duration
Frequency of Monitoring during Study
Attribute Parameter
period
PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOx, 24 hr sampling - 2 days per week.
AAQ 2
CO 8 hr sampling – 1 day per month.
HC Twice in a month
Meteorological Wind speed, wind Direction, Temperature, Hourly data collected at site using Automatic
Data RH, precipitation at one center location Weather Station
Table 3-3: Ambient Air Quality - Methodology

Instrument used for
Pollutant Method of analysis Detection Limit
analysis
PM10 Particulate Matter 10 Gravimetric Method Respirable Dust Sampler 10 µg/m3
Respirable Suspended Gravimetric Method Fine Dust Sampler
PM2.5 10 µg/m3
Particulate Matter
Improved West and UV-Spectrophotometer
SO2 Sulfur dioxide 4.0 µg/m3
Geake Method
Jacob & Hochheiser UV-Spectrophotometer
NOx Nitrous dioxide 6.0 µg/m3
Modified (Na- Arsenate)
Gas Chromatography Gas Chromatography
CO Carbon Monoxide 1 mg/m3
method
Digital Handy Gas
HC Hydrocarbon Phocheck Tiger 1 µg/m3
Analyzer
Various statistical parameters like standard deviation, geometric mean, minimum; maximum concentrations
and different percentiles have been computed from the data generated during sampling in all sampling
stations.
3.3.2 Selection of Monitoring Locations

The baseline status of the ambient air quality in the impact zone is assessed thorough scientifically designed
ambient air quality monitoring network. The baseline studies for air environment include identification of
specific air pollutants prior to implementation of the project. The Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA)
study requires monitoring of baseline air quality during one season. The base line Ambient Air Quality (AAQ)
status within 10 km study area has been assessed through a monitoring network of 8 AAQ sampling stations
2Sampling height as per standard method.

en-vιsι n
during 1st March to 31st May, 2019. The design of monitoring network in the air quality surveillance program
was designed based on the following considerations:
 Meteorological conditions on synoptic scale (Climatological normal).
 Topography of the study area.
 Representation of regional background levels.
 Representation of valid cross sectional distribution in the downward direction.
 Influence of the existing sources if any, are to be kept at minimum.
 Inclusion of Densely populated areas within the region.
Minimum one location in within 1-3 km radius of study area was fixed. 8 monitoring locations were identified
and the sites are depicted in the Table 3-4 & Figure 3-5 Recorded AAQ levels are given in Table 3-5Error!
Reference source not found..
Table 3-4: Ambient Air Monitoring Locations
Distance GPS
Code Location Direction Located in Type of Area
(km) Coordinates
Sayan 21°20'26.75"N
A1 - - - Industrial Area
Sugar_PS 72°53'48.30"E
21°19'0.10"N
A2 Sayan 2.9 SW Upwind Residential
72°52'46.66"E
21°17'28.00"N
A3 Segvasyadla 7.4 SW Upwind Residential
72°50'39.00"E
21°22'12.61"N
A4 Obhla 5.1 NW Crosswind Residential
72°51'29.60"E
21°24'10.52"N
A5 Mulad 7.1 N Downwind Residential
72°54'14.86"E
21°22'34.14"N
A6 Kudsad 4.9 NNE Downwind Residential
72°55'17.08"E
21°21'30.00"N
A7 Pipodara 7.3 ENE Crosswind Residential
72°57'44.18"E
Crosswind 21°19'48.66"N
A8 Shekhpur 1.5 SE Residential
72°54'24.60"E
Project Site (A1): Machine was kept on the terrace of admin building of distillary unit. New sugar mill is
besides the dsitillary unit.
Sayan (A2): Machine was kept on the terrace of the house. House is surrounded by residential societies and
agricultutal land.
Segvasyadla (A3): Machine was kept on the terrace of Gram panchayat office. Temple is nearer to office and
Building of Sahkari mandli is besides the office.
Obhla (A4): Machine was kept on the terrace of the house. It is surrounded by agricultural area. Internal
village road is nearer to this location.
Mulad (A5): Machine was kept on the terrace of the temple. It is surrounded by Residentail area and pond.
Kudsad (A6): Machine was kept on the terrace of Gram panchayat office. Kudsad railway station is 0.53 km
in W direction. Building of Sahkari mandli is besides the office.
en-vιsι n
Pipodara (A7): Machine was kept on the terrace of Gram panchayat office. It is nearer to Government
primary school and temple.
Shekhpur (A8): Machine was kept on the terrace of Gram panchayat office. It is surrounded by Residential
area.
Figure 3-5: Google Image Showing Ambient Air Quality Locations
en-vιsι n
2019.03.02 2019.03.04
Sayan_PS Sayan
2019.04.08 2019.04.04
Kudsad Mulad
Photograph 3-1: Ambient Air Quality Monitoring
3.3.3 Results and Discussion

The values for mentioned concentrations of various pollutants at all the monitoring locations were processed
for different statistical parameters like arithmetic mean, minimum & maximum concentration and 98 th
percentile values. Raw data of all AAQ parameters of all stations as per frequency along with–min, max,
average and 98% values are given in Annexure IV. The existing baseline levels of PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOx,
CO & HC are expressed in terms of various statistical parameters as given in Table 3-5.
en-vιsι n
Table 3-5: Ambient Air Quality Status

Parameters
Sampling
S. No. - PM10 PM2.5 SO2 NOx CO HC
Location
(µg/m3) (µg/m3) (µg/m3) (µg/m3) (mg/m3) (µg/m3)
Detection Limit 10 10 4 6 1 1
NAAQ Standards 100 60 80 80 2 -
Min. 74 34 15 18
Sayan Sugar_PS Max. 84 44 18 26

1. BDL BDL
(A1) Ave. 80 40 17 24
98th Per. 83 44 18 26
Min. 70 30 14 16
Max. 82 41 19 23
2. Sayan (A2) BDL BDL
Ave. 77 37 17 18
98th Per. 82 41 19 21
Min. 57 21 11 15
Max. 67 28 15 19
3. Segvasyadla (A3) BDL BDL
Ave. 62 26 13 18
98th Per. 67 28 15 19
Min. 61 22 9 13
Max. 69 29 14 19
4. Obhla (A4) BDL BDL
Ave. 64 26 12 17
98th Per. 69 29 14 19
Min. 67 28 12 16
Max. 73 33 17 21
5. Mulad (A5) BDL BDL
Ave. 70 30 15 18
98th Per. 73 33 17 21
Min. 57 19 12 14
Max. 65 27 16 20
6. Kudsad (A6) BDL BDL
Ave. 62 24 14 17
98th Per. 65 27 16 20
Min. 73 37 15 19
Max. 86 49 19 28
7. Pipodara (A7) BDL BDL
Ave. 79 43 18 24
98th Per. 86 49 19 28
Min. 68 29 13 15
Max. 74 36 17 22
8. Shekhpur (A8) BDL BDL
Ave. 71 33 16 19
98th Per. 74 36 17 22
en-vιsι n
Particulate Matter (PM10): During the monitoring period, it has been observed that the average values of
PM10 for all the monitoring stations ranging from 57-86 µg/m3. The lowest value 57 µg/m3 was observed
Kudasd village and highest value 86 µg/m3 was observed at Pipodara village. All the results were found to be
below the NAAQS limits i.e. 100 µg/m3. PM10 at Pipodara village was 86µg/m3 because it is located near to
NH-48 (NH-8) and Pipodara GIDC.
Particulate Matter (PM2.5): During the monitoring period, it has been observed that the average values of
PM2.5 for all the monitoring stations ranging from 19-49 µg/m3. The lowest and highest values are 19 µg/m3 to
49 µg/m3 were observed at Kudsad village and Pipodara village respectively. All the results were found to be
below the NAAQS limits i.e. 60 µg/m3. PM2.5 at Pipodara village was 49 µg/m3 because it is located near to
NH-48 (NH-8) and Pipodara GIDC.
Sulphur Dioxide (SO2): During the monitoring period, it has been observed that the average values of SO2
for all the monitoring stations ranging from 9-19 µg/m3. The lowest values 9 µg/m3 was observed at Obhla
village and highest values 19 µg/m3 was observed at Pipodara village. All the results were found to be below
the NAAQS limits i.e. 80 µg/m3. SO2 at Pipodara village was 19 µg/m3 due to stack emission & flue gas
emission from the vehicles as GIDC and NH-48 is located nearer to Pipodara village.
Nitrogen Dioxide (NOx): During the monitoring period, it has been observed that the average values of NO2
for all the monitoring stations ranging from 13-28 µg/m3. The lowest and highest values are 13 to 28 µg/m3
were observed at Obhla village and Pipodara village respectively. All the results were found to be below the
NAAQS limits i.e. 80 µg/m3. NO2 at Pipodara village was 28 µg/m3 due to stack emission & flue gas emission
from the vehicles as GIDC and NH-48 is located nearer to Pipodara village.
Carbon Monoxide (CO) & Hydrocarbon (HC): The CO and HC are found below detectable limit (BDL).
From the Above results it concludes that Kudsad village is located nearer to the project site, but being
surrounded by green cover, Agricultural area and sparse residential area, low values of PM 10 & PM2.5 were
observed. Obhla village is approx 5.5-6.0 km away from the project site in NW direction, but it is surrounded
by agricultural area and few residential houses, low values of SO2 & NOx were observed. High levels of all
the parameters like PM10, PM2.5, SO2 and NOx are observed at Pipodara village from the selected villages as
NH-48 (NH-8) and Pipodara GIDC is located around it which has resulted high pollution levels due to stack
emission & flue gas emission from the vehicles.
All locations were observed Below Detectable Limit (BDL) for the parameter of Carbon monoxide (CO) and
Hydrocarbon (HC).
en-vιsι n
3.4 WATER ENVIRONMENT

Water of high quality is essential to human life, and water of acceptable quality is essential for Agricultural,
industrial, domestic and commercial uses; in addition, most recreation is water based. The objective of this
report is to define the present environment in which the proposed action is to occur, to evaluate all possible
eventualities, to ensure that all negative impacts are minimized, and to demonstrate that proposed expansion
project has been appropriately announced to all interested parties so that their concerns can be considered.
Water quality studies have been carried out in the study area to understand the availability of water resources,
possibility of water contamination and existing water quality.

The water resources in the study area may be classified into two major categories like Surface and Ground
water sources.
Water samples were collected at 16 locations within 10 km radius from project site, out of which 8 samples
from surface Sources and 8 samples from ground water sources for physico-chemical and biological
parameters.
Following procedures were used while sampling and & Methodologies adopted in assessing quality of water is
presented in following Table 3-6.
 Washing the bottles/cans with distilled water prior to the sampling
 Before collection of water the bottles/cans are again washed 2-3 times with the same water
 For surface water, Bottles were lowered to a minimum depth of 30 cm below water surface
 At each point, different sets of water samples were collected so as to cover all the parameters
 Meticulous attention is taken in proper numbering at the site
 Sterilized bottles were used for the samples that are to be analyzed for bacteria
 Civil supply water pipeline taps are sterilized before collection for bacteriological analysis
 Parameters like pH, conductivity and temperature were analyzed in the field conditions. There are
specific instruments for measuring EC and pH in the field. These are portable. These instruments will
be calibrated at laboratory before use. The results were reconfirmed after getting to the laboratory. DO
is fixed and titrated in the field itself.
 Appropriate preservatives are added, depending upon the elements to be analyzed and marked
accordingly (APHA / IS: 3025 (part I))
 All the water samples collected in the ice box, were immediately transported to the laboratory and free
zed at <5 oC analysis.
 Field observations were noted in the field notebook
Table 3-6: Sample Collection and Analysis of Water Sample
Sampling Preservation Prescribed
Parameter Frequency Analysis Method
methodology method standard
pH, TDS and Once in a IS: 3025 (part Not applicable Onsite measurement IS: 10500
Temperature baseline I) specifications
Other physico- period IS: 3025 (part ‘Standard Methods for
chemical and I) Examination of Water and
biological parameters Wastewater’ Published by
American Public Health
Association (APHA) / IS
3025
en-vιsι n
3.4.2 Selection of Monitoring Location
To identify Ground Water availability and type of structure used in study area Census-2011 was used.
Surface water locations were identified using topo map (Figure 2-3). It was observed that untreated tap water
is available in whole study area for drinking purpose; ground water is used as secondary source of drinking
water and for irrigation purpose. List of sampling locations are mentioned in Table 3-7 while sampling
locations are shown in Figure 3-6 and Figure 3-7.
Table 3-7: Sampling Locations for Ground Water and Surface Water
Availability of Tap
Water Sample Distance GPS
Code Source Direction water as per Census-
Location (km) Coordinates
2011
21°19'1.00"N Untreated tap water
GW1 Sayan Borewell 2.9 SSW
72°52'45.00"E
GW2 Siwan Borewell 2.6 WSW
72°52'13.00"E
GW3 Obhla Borewell 5.0 NW
72°51'28.06"E
21°21'55.63"N Treated Tap Water
GW4 Kareli Borewell 3.0 N
72°53'39.20"E
GW5 Pipodara Borewell 7.3 ENE
72°57'45.00"E
GW6 Galundi Borewell 3.0 E
72°55'26.00"E
21°18'25.08"N Treated Tap Water
GW7 Velanja Borewell 4.1 SSE
72°54'56.72"E
21°16'5.47"N
GW8 Bharthana Borewell 8.2 SSW -
72°52'11.39"E
21°20'28.58"N
SW1 PS_ Reservoir - 0.4 NE -
72°53'51.89"E
Canal near 21°19'42.66"N

SW2 - 1.38 SW -
project site 72°53'14.00"E
21°20'1.00"N
SW3 Sayan Lake - 0.63 SW -
72°53'31.00"E
Canal near 21°20'52.30"N

SW4 - 1.3 NE -
project site 72°54'12.44"E
21°21'53.65"N
SW5 Kareli Lake - 2.9 N -
72°53'37.45"E
Kakrapar 21°20'7.72"N
SW6 - 3.3 E -
Dam canal 72°55'38.33"E
21°18'53.88"N
SW7 Tapi River - 8.1 ESE -
72°58'10.66"E
21°18'39.75"N
SW8 Delad Lake - 4.0 SW -
72°52'9.51"E
en-vιsι n
Figure 3-6: Google Image Showing Ground Water Sampling Locations
Figure 3-7: Google Image Showing Surface Water Sampling Locations
en-vιsι n
2019.05.22 2019.05.22
Sayan Lake Delad
2019.05.22 2019.05.22
Siwan Bharthana
Photograph 3-2: Ground water and Surface water Sampling
en-vιsι n
3.4.3 Results-Ground Water and Surface Water
Parameters were selected based on Guidelines for Water Quality Monitoring by Central Pollution Control Board, Parivesh Bhawan, East Arjun Nagar, Delhi-32
published in December 2007. Analysis results for Ground and Surface water are given in Table 3-8 & Table 3-9. The results of Ground and Surface water samples
results were compared with The Indian standard specification for drinking water IS: 10500.
Table 3-8: Water Quality – Physico-chemical Analysis of Ground Water
Sample Code & Location Limits as per IS : 10500
Sr. Test
Unit of
No. Parameters Detection
Measurement Sayan Siwan Obhla Kareli Pipodara Galundi Velanja Bharthana Permissible
Limit Desirable
(GW1) (GW2) (GW3) (GW4) (GW5) (GW6) (GW7) (GW8)
1. No
pH - 5 - 12 7.3 7.2 7.8 7.2 7.9 7.1 7.4 7.0 6.5-8.5
Relaxation
2. Ambient to
Temperature °C
50
29 34 33 27 30 31 30 28 -- --
3. Colour Pt-Co. 5 - 500 BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 5 15
Quantitativ
e
4. objecti objecti objecti objectio objectiona objection objection objectionabl
Odor -- (objectiona
onable onable onable nable ble able able e
Agreeable Agreeable
ble/unobje
ctionable)
Agreeable/
5. Agreea Agreea Agreea Agreeab Agreeabl Agreeabl
Taste -- Disagreeab
ble ble ble le
Agreeable
e e
Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable
le
6. Turbidity NTU 0.1-200 1.4 2.1 2.6 2.5 2.7 2 1.9 1.3 1 5
Total
7. Suspended mg/L 4 - 1000 18 22 27 24 28 22 20 19 -- --
Solids (TSS)
8. Total
Dissolved
mg/L 4 - 2500 847 617 402 112 730 116 358 688 500 2000
3-19
.
M/S. SHREE SAYAN VIBHAG SAHAKARI KHAND UDYOG MANDLI LTD , GUJARAT
en-vιsι n
Sr. Test
Unit of
Limit Desirable
Solids
(TDS)
Electrical
9. Conductivity µS/cm 1 - 5000 1186 864 563 157 1022 162 501 963 -- --
(EC)
Dissolved
10. Oxygen mg/L 0.2 - 8 6.0 5.5 4.7 5.1 5.2 5.8 6.4 5.90 -- --
(DO)
Biological
11. Oxygen
Demand
mg/L 1 -500 BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL -- --
(BOD)
Chemical
12. Oxygen
Demand
mg/L 2.0 2.5 3.2 4.5 2.1 4.8 2.3 2.7 2.9 -- --
(COD)
Total
13. Coliform MPN/100 ml ≥1 Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent
(TC)
14. E. Coli MPN/100 ml ≥1 Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent
Total
15. Hardness (as mg/L 2 - 1000 547 318 238 243 376 472 310 435 200 600
CaCO3)
16. Calcium
Hardness
mg/L 1 - 1000 199 115 99 101 168 171 192 211 -- --
17. *Magnesium mg/L -- 348 203 139 142 208 301 118 224 -- --
3-20
.
en-vιsι n
Sr. Test
Unit of
Limit Desirable
Hardness
Total
18. Alkalinity mg/L 4 - 100 88.50 97.60 93.78 83.20 85.78 98.00 80.88 58.70 200 600
(as CaCO3)
19. Carbonate mg/L 4 - 500 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -- --
20. Bi-
Carbonate
mg/L 4 - 500 130 119 102 112 121 132 124 116 -- --
21. Sodium (as

Na)
mg/L 1 - 500 198 175 155 168 212 179 151 163 -- --
22. Potassium
(as K)
mg/L 1 - 500 3.6 4.5 4.9 2.2 1.6 4.2 3.1 3 -- --
23. Magnesium
(as Mg)
mg/L 2 - 500 15 17.5 26 14 12 19 24 13 30 100
24. Calcium (as

Ca)
mg/L 1 - 1000 67 59 53 70 57 69 73 88 75 200
25. Chloride (as

Cl)
mg/L 1 -1000 248.2 145 157 186 242 155 218 247 250 1000
26. Sulphates
(as SO4)
mg/L 1 - 500 115 211 168 188.0 105 221 112 119 200 400
27. Phosphate
(as PO4)
mg/L 0.1 - 50 0.80 0.30 0.60 0.30 0.40 0.10 0.40 0.70 -- --
28. Nitrate (as No

NO3)
mg/L 0.1 - 10 6.00 4.20 1.90 2.70 4.70 1.80 6.50 5.80 45
Relaxation
29. Nitrite (as mg/L 0.1 - 10 0.8 0.3 0.8 0.5 0.7 0.4 0.3 0.3 -- --
3-21
.
en-vιsι n
Sr. Test
Unit of
Limit Desirable
NO2)
30. Fluoride (as

F)
mg/L 0.1 - 5 1.24 0.69 0.14 0.54 0.9 0.33 0.6 1.7 1 1.5
31. *Boron (as

B)
mg/L - N.D. N.D. N.D. N.D. N.D. N.D. N.D. N.D. 0.5 1
32. No
Iron (as Fe) mg/L 0.1 - 10 BDL BDL 0.2 BDL 0.3 BDL BDL BDL 0.3
Relaxation
33. Manganese
(as Mn)
mg/L 0.1 - 10 BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 0.1 0.3
34. No
Lead (as Pb) mg/L 0.01 - 10 BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 0.01
Relaxation
35. Copper (as
Cu)
36. Zinc (as Zn) mg/L 0.05 - 10 BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 5 15
37. Arsenic (as
As)
Total
38. Chromium mg/L 0.05 - 10 BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL -- --
as Cr
39. Phenolic
Compound
mg/L 0.01 - 10 BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL -- --
40. Nickel as Ni mg/L 0.02 - 10 BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL -- --
*Non NABL Parameter
3-22
.
en-vιsι n
Table 3-9: Water Quality – Physico-chemical Analysis of Surface Water

Unit of
Sr. Test Detection
Measur
No. Parameters Limit PS_ Reservoir Sayan Lake Kareli Lake Tapi River Delad Lake
ement Desirable Permissible
(SW1) (SW3) (SW5) (SW7) (SW8)
1. No
pH - 5 - 12 7.5 7.1 7.5 7.9 8.2 6.5-8.5
Relaxation
2. Temperature °C Ambient to 50 37 33 30 34 34 -- --
3. Colour Pt-Co. 5 - 500 5.1 BDL 5.1 BDL 5.6 5 15
Quantitative
4. Odour -- (objectionable/un Agreeable Agreeable Dis Agreeable Agreeable Dis Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable
objectionable)
5. Agreeable/
*Taste --
Disagreeable
Agreeable Agreeable Dis-Agreeable Agreeable Dis-Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable
6. Turbidity NTU 0.1 - 200 1.1 1.5 1.3 1.3 1.1 1 5

Total
7. Suspended mg/L 4 - 1000 25 20 28 18 27 -- --
Solids (TSS)
Total
8. Dissolved mg/L 4 - 2500 344 244 335 302 180 500 2000
Solids (TDS)
Electrical
9. Conductivity µS/cm 1 - 5000 499 354 486 438 261 -- --
(EC)
10. Dissolved mg/L 0.2 - 8 5.9 5.8 4.2 6.1 4.5 -- --

Oxygen
3-23
.
en-vιsι n
Unit of
Sr. Test Detection
Measur
(SW1) (SW3) (SW5) (SW7) (SW8)
(DO)
Biological
11. Oxygen mg/L 1 -500 BDL 1.1 1.7 4.4 1.2 -- --
Demand
(BOD)
Chemical
12. Oxygen mg/L 2 - 1000 2.4 2.2 2.6 20.1 2.8 -- --
Demand
(COD)
Total
13. Coliform MPN/10
0 ml
≥1 32 44 53 35 42 Absent Absent
(TC)
Fecal
14. Coliform MPN/10
0 ml
≥1 21 29 35 23 28 Absent Absent
(FC)
15. E. Coli MPN/10
0 ml
≥1 11 15 18 12 14 Absent Absent
Total
16. Hardness (as mg/L 2 - 1000 234.0 252.0 202.0 200.0 253.0 200 600
CaCO3)
17. Calcium mg/L 1 - 1000 156 170 133 130 180 -- --

Hardness
18. *Magnesium mg/L -- 78 82 69 70 73 -- --

Hardness
3-24
.
en-vιsι n
Unit of
Sr. Test Detection
Measur
(SW1) (SW3) (SW5) (SW7) (SW8)
Total
19. Alkalinity ( mg/L 4 - 100 95.20 97.50 98.20 94.0 96.7 200 600
as CaCO3)
20. Sodium (as

mg/L 1 - 500 41.20 42.50 68.95 62.8 48.5 75 200
Na)
21. Potassium mg/L 1 - 500 4.00 2.00 3.00 2.0 4.7 -- --

(as K)
22. Magnesium mg/L 2 - 500 31.20 32.80 27.60 28.00 28.50 30 100
(as Mg)
23. Calcium (as mg/L 1 - 1000 62.4 68 53.2 52 67 -- --

Ca)
24. Chloride (as mg/L 1 -1000 109 117 112.5 127 105 250 1000
Cl)
25. Sulphates (as mg/L 1 - 500 55.8 61.2 63.40 59.5 67.3 200 400
SO4)
*Total
26. Phosphorous mg/L -- BDL BDL 0.30 BDL 0.4 -- --
(as P)
27. Phosphate mg/L 0.1 - 50 4.50 7.80 5.40 3.30 8.21 -- --

(as PO4)
28. Nitrate (as

mg/L 0.1 - 10 1.9 1.5 2.1 2.0 1.0 45
No
NO3) Relaxation
29. Nitrite (as

mg/L 0.1 - 10 2.8 3.1 4.5 2.0 4.7 -- --
NO2)
3-25
.
en-vιsι n
Unit of
Sr. Test Detection
Measur
(SW1) (SW3) (SW5) (SW7) (SW8)
30. Fluoride (as mg/L 0.1 - 5 0.37 0.20 0.81 0.3 1 1 1.5
F)
31. *Boron (as

mg/L -- N.D. N.D. N.D. N.D. N.D. 0.5 1
B)
32. Iron (as Fe) No

mg/L 0.1-10 BDL BDL 0.12 BDL 0.14 0.3
Relaxation
33. Manganese mg/L 0.1 - 10 BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 0.1 0.3
(as Mn)
34. Lead (as Pb) No

mg/L 0.01 - 10 BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 0.01
Relaxation
35. Copper (as mg/L 0.05 - 10 BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 0.05 1.5
Cu)
36. Zinc (as Zn) mg/L 0.05 - 10 BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 5 15
Total
37. Chromium mg/L 0.05 - 10 BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL -- --
(as Cr)
38. Phenolic mg/L 0.01 - 10 BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL -- --

Compound
Note: As mentioned in Table 3-7, Total eight surface water sampling locations were identified. But out of eight locations; three locations were not available (i.e. SW2
& SW4: Canal near project site and SW6: Kakrapar Dam canal) as Canals were found fully dry.
3-26
.
en-vιsι n
3.4.4 Discussions
3.4.4.1 Ground Water

The pH varied in the range of 7.0-7.9 TSS levels varied in the range of 18-28 mg/L, this is due to clay
dominant alluvium.
Total hardness varied in the range of 238-547 mg/L and TDS varied in the range of 112-847 mg/L at all the
locations both hardness and TDS are higher than desirable limit but within permissible limits; hence hardness
and TDS level reduction to desirable limit is necessary to use water for drinking purpose.
Alkalinity varied in the range of 110-345 mg/L, which is higher than the desirable limit, but it was within the
permissible limit. The conductivity levels varied in the range of 156.8 -1185.8 µS/cm.
Coliform bacteria were measured as Total Coliform and E.coli, these bacteria are absent in all the samples.
Water Quality Index for all the ground water samples was determined as 46.35, 44.77, 54.55, 44.05, 54.06,
41.95 & 46.04 at Sayan, Siwan, Obhla, Kareli, Pipodara, Galundi & Valenja respectively. The quality of water
is good at Sayan, Siwan, Kareli, Galundi & Valenja locations and the quality of water is poor at Obhla,
Pipodara locations. At all the locations total hardness result was found high compare to desirable limit but it
was within the permissible limit. At Bharthana calcium and TDS found high compare to desirable limit.
From above results it can be concluded that as per Drinking water standard of IS: 10500 ground water can be
used for domestic purpose. The water can be used for drinking purpose after proper treatment of hardness,
TDS and bacteria removal such as filtration, RO and UV.
Ground water is suitable for irrigation to semi tolerant crops based on soil type, EC, SAR, RSC, Boron and
Mg/Ca ratio as per guidelines of Department of Agriculture & Cooperation Ministry of Agriculture
Government of India New Delhi.
3.4.4.2 Surface Water

The pH varied is from 7.1 to 8.2, the turbidity varied from 1.1-1.5 NTU, the total dissolved solids varied from
180-344 mg/L, Conductivity varied from 261-499 µS/cm, The total alkalinity varied from 148-215 mg/L,
calcium varied from 52-68 mg/L.
The results indicate that the nutrient values in the form of nitrate varied from 1-2.1. The value for DO varied
from 4.2-6.1 mg/L. The levels of heavy metals viz. Copper, Lead, Iron, Manganese and Zinc were found to be
BDL.
Coliform bacteria were measured as Total Coliform, fecal Coliform and E.coli, these bacteria are present in all
the samples.
The total hardness varied from 200-253 mg/L, except Tapi River at all location Total hardness is higher than
desirable limit but it was within the permissible limit. At Sayan lake and Reservoir magnesium found higher
than the desirable limit but within permissible limit.
Water Quality Index for all the surface water samples was determined as 47.89, 50.25, 63.08, 78.84 & 66.11
at Reservoir, Sayan lake, Kareli lake, Tapi river and Delad lake respectively. As per the index quality of water
of Tapi river is very poor, Kareli Lake and Delad lake is poor, and for rest it is good.
From above results it can be concluded that as per Drinking water standard of IS: 10500 surface water can be
used for domestic purpose. Water of Reservoir and Sayan lake can be used for drinking purpose after proper
treatment.
3-27
.
en-vιsι n
Surface water is suitable for irrigation to Semi tolerant crops based on soil type, EC, SAR, RSC, Boron and
Mg/Ca ratio as per guidelines of Department of Agriculture & Cooperation Ministry of Agriculture
Government of India New Delhi.
3.5 NOISE ENVIRONMENT

Noise is unpleasant, unexpected, or undesired with various frequencies over the audible range due to the
regular activities of the mankind. The source of most outdoor noise worldwide is mainly evolved from
Industries, constructions and transportation systems, including motor vehicle noise, aircraft noise and rail
noise, poor urban planning may give rise to noise pollution.
Industrial noise resulting to noise pollution has many reasons such as industries being close to human habitats
which prevent the noise from decaying before it reaches human ear.
A determination is made of the micro scale impact by predicting anticipated noise levels for each alternative
during both construction and operational phases. Predicted noise levels are compared with applicable
standards or criteria in order to assess the impact.
The physical description of sound concerns its loudness as a function of frequency. Noise in general sound
comprises of many frequency components with different variations in loudness over the audible frequency
range.
The objective of noise pollution survey around the project site was to identify existing noise sources and to
measure background noise levels. The study was carried out in the following steps:
 Reconnaissance
 Identification of noise sources and measurement of noise levels
 Measurement of transportation and community noise levels
Monitoring of noise is done by identifying suitable number of noise quality monitoring locations. Background
noise quality is monitored in dB (A) Leq (d) and dB (A) Leq (n) at the selected locations.
Ambient noise level monitoring was done at same locations where ambient air monitoring was carried out
within a study area. The locations are away from the major roads and major noise sources so as to measure
ambient noise levels. One day monitoring was carried out at all the locations. The frequency of monitoring
was set at an interval of one hour for 24-hours.
Table 3-10: Noise Monitoring Methodology
Sample collection
Environment Sampling
Sampling frequency Methodology Sampling
Component Range Resolution Parameter
equipment
Once during
the study 30
Ambient (Hourly Sound level dB(A) Decibels –
IS: 9989-1991 0.1 dB
Noise reading for 24 meter to 130 dB (A)
hours at each dB(A)
location)
Equivalent Sound Levels or Equivalent Continuous Equal Energy Level (Leq)

There is large number of noise scales and rating methods based on some sort of average of weighted average
quantities derived from the detailed noise characteristics. Equivalent sound levels or Equivalent continuous
equal energy level (Leq) is a statistical value of sound pressure level that can be equated to any fluctuating
3-28
.
en-vιsι n
noise level and forms a useful measure of noise exposure and forms basis of several of the noise indices used
presently.
Leq is defined as the constant noise level, which over a given time, expands the same amount of energy, as is
expanded by the fluctuating level over the same time. This value is expressed by the equation:
i=n
Leq = 10 log  (10)Li/10  ti
i=1
Where,
n = Total number of sound samples,
Li = The noise level of any ith sample
ti = Time duration of ith sample,
Expressed as fraction of total sample time
Leq has gained wide spread acceptance as a scale for the measurement of long term noise exposure. Hourly
equipment noise levels in the identified impact zone are monitored for day and time separately using sound
level meter. All the values are reported in Leq and in case of equipment noise, Sound pressure level are
monitored 1.5 m away from the machine and assessed with respect to standard prescribed in factory Act.
3.5.1 Selection of Monitoring Locations and Results

Ambient noise monitoring was carried out 10 km study area. Sensitive locations (as defined in The Noise
Pollution (Regulation and Control) Rules, 2000 and its subsequent amendments) were identified and ambient
monitoring was done at a distance more than 100 m from the identified location.
Table 3-11: Ambient Noise Quality Standards for Different Areas/Zones
Ambient Air Quality Limits in dB (A) Leq3
Area
Standards Category
Code Day Time4 Night Time5
in Respect of Noise
The Noise Pollution A Industrial 75.0 70.0

(Regulation and Control) B Commercial 65.0 55.0
Rules, 2000 and its C Residential 55.0 45.0
subsequent amendments D Silence 6
50.0 45.0
Keeping in view of various local activities such as residential and Industrial activities 6 noise level
measurement locations were identified and the sites are depicted in the Table 3-12 & Figure 3-8 Recorded
sound levels are given in Table 3-13.
Traffic noise levels were measured in March, 2019. The equivalent noise level Leq (60 min average) measured
at a distance of 10 m and 20 m from the edge of the road are presented in Table 3-14.
3
dB (A) Leq*: denotes the time weighted average of the level of sound in decibels on scale A which is relatable to human hearing. Day Time: 6:00 AM
to 10:00 PM and Night Time: 10:00 PM to 6:00 AM
46:00 a.m. to 10:00 p.m.
510:00 p.m. to 6:00 a.m.
6Area comprising not less than 100 m around Hospitals, educational institutions, courts, religious places or any other area which is
declared as such by the competent authority.

3-29
M/S. SHREE SAYAN VIBHAG SAHAKARI KHAND UDYOG MANDLI LTD , GUJARAT .
en-vιsι n
Figure 3-8: Google Image Showing Noise Monitoring Locations
Table 3-12: Noise Monitoring Locations

Sampling Latitude
Code Category Distance Direction
Location Longitude
Project 21°20'27.85"N
N1 Industrial -- --
site 72°53'44.96"E
Sayan
21°19'4.87"N
N2 Railway Commercial 2.3 SSW
72°53'25.53"E
Station
21°19'54.83"N
N3 Siwan Residential 2.6 WSW
72°52'14.82"E
21°21'27.29"N
N4 Bharundi Residential 3.8 WNW
72°51'49.71"E
21°21'58.31"N
N5 Kareli Residential 4.9 N
72°53'25.25"E
21°20'20.11"N
N6 Galundi Residential 3.0 E
72°55'27.46"E
Sayan 21°19'50.54"N
TN1 Kim Industrial 0.9 SSW
Road 72°53'28.50"E
3-30
.
en-vιsι n
2019.03.04 2019.03.07
Sayan Railway station Galundi
2019.03.03
Siwan
2019.03.06
Kareli
Photograph 3-3: Noise Monitoring
3-31
.
en-vιsι n
Table 3-13: Noise Levels
Day Time Night Time
Sampling Recorded Recorded
Code Date Category Limits in Limits in
Location level dB(A) level dB(A)
dB(A) Leq dB(A) Leq
Leq Leq
1-03-2019 to 2-
N1 Project site Industrial 73.4 75.0 68.1 70.0
03-2019
Sayan Railway 4-03-2019 to 5-
N2 Commercial 70.2 65.0 59.6 55.0
Station 03-2019
2-03-2019 to 3-
N3 Siwan Residential 49.7 55.0 40.7 45.0
03-2019
8-03-2019 to 9-
N4 Bharundi Residential 40.0 55.0 38.3 45.0
03-2019
6-03-2019 to 7-
N5 Kareli Residential 54.5 55.0 44.2 45.0
03-2019
7-03-2019 to 8-
N6 Galundi Residential 40.1 55 38.5 45
03-2019
Table 3-14: Noise Level due to Transportation

Noise Level in dBA
Sampling Location Date Time
10 m from Edge of The Road 20 m From Edge of The Road
9-03-2019 to 10- Day 53.9 50.9
Sayan - Kim Road
03-2019 Night 48.2 45.2
3.5.2 Discussion of Noise Levels

Out of all the 6 locations measured for noise levels, the sound levels recorded at Sayan railway station was
higher in day time and during night time also. At all other locations recorded Noise levels are found to be
within the standard limits.
At project site recorded noise levels are found to be out of the standard limits as the noise sources identified in
industrial zone are vehicular traffic, industrial and commercial activities also railway line is near to Project
Site; at Sayan railway station recorded Noise levels are found to be out of the standard limits due to railway
station. The location of Kareli village is nearer to railway line and it is well connected to internal roads, thus
resulting in high noise levels during day time and night time also.
3.5.3 Traffic Study

To determine current traffic volumes on the road, the traffic studies have been accomplished. This study will
give an idea about expected future traffic volumes as a part of overall impact assessment for the project. The
traffic densities may vary based on working days and time, and also may vary in day and night times. This
survey was conducted during normal working day to get a clear picture of traffic density.
3.5.3.1 Selection of Study Location

NH-48 is 7.0 km in E direction from project site, hence traffic density study was conducted at Sayan- Kim
Road. Location of survey is shown in Figure 3-9.
3-32
.
en-vιsι n
Figure 3-9: Google Image Showing Location of Traffic Survey
3.5.3.2 Methodology
3.5.3.2.1 VEHICULAR COUNT

The vehicles moving in both the directions were counted continuously for 24 hours at one location. The
vehicles were counted every hour and recorded under respective category. The maximum traffic count in an
hour is termed as peak hour traffic.
3.5.3.2.2 CATEGORIZATION OF TRAFFIC

The vehicles were categorized under various heads like heavy motor vehicles such as buses, trucks and
tankers, light motor vehicles (cars, jeeps), three wheelers (auto rickshaws, tempo etc.) two wheelers (scooters,
motor cycles etc.).
3.5.3.3 Results
The summary of daily traffic density in terms of PCU for the locations were monitored during the study
period is summarized below. It was observed that the cars/jeeps and trucks/buses forms the major volume of
the traffic. The overall total traffic PCU of this road is minimal.
The present level of traffic in terms of Passenger Car Units (PCU) at these locations as per the conversion
factors stipulated by Indian Road Congress (IRC) is presented below:
3-33
.
en-vιsι n
Table 3-15: Traffic Counts on Sayan-Kim road
During peak hr (Nos. of Vehicles/hr)
Type of Vehicles Sayan to kim Kim to Sayan
road road
Large Trailer 26 30
Heavy (Bus, Truck, etc) 303 320
Medium (Tractors, light
240 260
commercial vehicles etc)
Light (Car, Jeep, Pickup Van
330 305
etc.)
3 Wheeler (Rickshaw) 52 50
2 Wheeler (Scooter,
110 115
motorcycle, cycle etc)
Total 1061 1080
Table 3-16: Existing Traffic Scenario and Level of Services

Existing Traffic Scenario and Level of
Services
Particular
Sayan to kim Kim to Sayan
road road
2 lane without 2 lane without
Road type
divider divider
Capacity as per IRC (PUC’s
2400 2400
/h)
Existing total volume during
1034 1029
peak hr (Nos.)
Existing volume / capacity
0.43 0.43
ratio
Level of Service “C” (Good) “C” (Good)
Table 3-17: Level of Service

Existing volume /
Sr. No. Level of Service
capacity ratio
8. 0.0 to 0.2 “A” (Excellent)
9. 0.2 to 0.4 “B” (Very good)
10. 0.4 to 0.6 “C” (Good)
11. 0.6 to 0.8 “D” (Fair)
12. 0.8 to 1.0 “E” (Poor)
3.5.3.4 Discussion
The above traffic reveals the LOS (Levels of Service) as “C” Good for the Sayan-Kim road, Which are 2 lane
roads divider with capacity of >2400 PCUs; and Total PCUs per day even after expansion is <1743. For
management of traffic, adequate parking space will be provided at project site. Transportation activity will be
carried out during non-peak hours only and trained driver will be appointed for transportation.
3.6 SOIL ENVIRONMENT

The project area falls under South Gujarat heavy rainfall Agro Climatic Zone (GJ-2) and Agro Ecological Sub
Region Gujarat Plain-5.2, characterized by red Sandy loam deep soil. Mainly comprises of mid plain high
rainfall (165 %), Medium rainfall (139 %), Hilly and highly undulating fine texture (87.0 %) and coastal plain
deep fine texture (42.0 %). The main sources of irrigation are canal (66.07 %), Open well-Bore well-lift
irrigation (33.93 %). The main crops cultivated are rice, sorghum (jawar), wheat, cotton, and sugarcane. And
3-34
.
en-vιsι n
fruit crops are banana, mango, sapota (chiku) and pappya. The plantation crops are ashvagandha, kuvarpathu
and pacholi. The cropping intensity of the area is 122.66 %, as majority of the area is covered by fruit and
plantation crops. (Source: Contingent Planning of Agriculture for Gujarat State, Surat District).
The study area comprises of Olpad Taluka of Surat District; comprises of Black Soils. Crop like cotton, paddy
and mango are grown in black soil.

Disturbed soil samples were collected from the rotary cuttings and bailers and also from split spoon samplers.
Un-disturbed tube samples were collected using thin walled tubes. Soil samples were collected such that
structure and moisture content of the soil do not get altered. In accordance with IS: 2720, split samples were
carefully extracted from the samplers.
Meticulous was paid to collect adequate amount of composite soil samples for analysis. The samples were
packed in dependable, waterproof containers and marking specified accurately and distinctly. All the soil
samples and core boxes were carefully transported to the testing laboratory.
Soil samples were analyzed for physical (Texture, Bulk Density, Porosity and Water Holding Capacity), and
chemical (pH, Electrical Conductivity, Exchangeable Sodium Percentage, Cation Exchange Capacity, Ca, Mg,
Na, K, OC, available N,P and K) properties by using methodologies listed in table below:
Table 3-18: Methodology of Testing of Soil Samples
Sr.
Parameter Test Method
No.
1 Particle size Distribution --
UERL/CHM/LTM/108
2 Texture Issue No. 03
Issue Date: 01/09/2016
3 Bulk Density
UERL/CHM/LTM/105
4 Porosity
UERL/CHM/LTM/84
5 Water Soluble Potassium as K Issue No. 03
6 Calcium as Ca2+ IS 2720 (Part 23): 1976(RA 2015)
UERL/CHM/LTM/84
7 Magnesium as Mg2+ Issue No.: 01
UERL/CHM/LTM/89
8 Water Soluble Sodium as Na Issue No.: 03
UERL/CHM/LTM/79
9 Cation Exchange Capacity Issue No.: 03
UERL/CHM/LTM/104
Exchangeable Sodium
10 Issue No.: 03
Percentage
11 pH IS 2720 (Part-26):1987 (RA 2014)
12 Electrical Conductivity IS 14767:2000 (RA 2016)
UERL/CHM/LMT/80
13 Available Nitrogen Issue No.03
UERL/CHM/LMT/93
14 Available Potassium Issue No.03
15 Available Phosphorus UERL/CHM/LTM/80
3-35
.
en-vιsι n
Sr.
Parameter Test Method
No.
16 Water holding capacity Gravimetric
17 Organic Carbon IS 2720 (P-22):1972 (RA 2015) Amd. 1
3.6.2 Sampling Locations and Results

For soil quality analysis 6 sampling sites were chosen to understand Physic-chemical and biological status of
the soil. Sites are marked in this will establish the baseline characteristics and will facilitate identifying the
contamination if any due to the modernization project. The sampling sites are depicted in the Table 3-19 &
Figure 3-10 analysis results are given in Table 3-20.
Table 3-19: Soil Sampling Location
GPS Distance
Code Location Direction
Coordinates (km)
21°17'54.30"N
S1 Umra 4.5 SSW
72°53'11.04"E
21°17'30.42"N
S2 Syadla segwa 6.8 SW
72°51'9.98"E
21°20'26.11"N
S3 Bharundi 1.7 W
72°52'40.65"E
21°22'22.65"N
S4 Kudsad 4.7 NE
72°55'22.35"E
21°19'42.85"N
S5 Antroli 4.5 ESE
72°56'12.56"E
21°20'38.00"N
S6 Project Site 0.8 NE
72°53'59.59"E
2019.05.22 2019.05.22
Location : Bharundi Village Location : Antroli village
3-36
.
en-vιsι n
2019.05.22
Location : Kudsad Village

Photograph 3-4: Soil Sampling
Figure 3-10: Google Image Showing Soil Sampling Locations
3-37
.
en-vιsι n
Table 3-20: Physicochemical Parameters of the Soil
Results
Sr. Detection
Test Parameters Unit Syadla Bharundi Kudsad Antroli Project
No. Limit Umra (S1)
segwa (S2) (S3) (S4) (S5) Site (S6)
Particle size
13.
Distribution
a Sand 29.1 32.5 30.1 32.6 28.4 32.5

-
b Silt 32.5 30.2 32.5 30.4 32.6 38.9
c Clay 38.4 37.3 37.4 37.0 39.0 28.6
Clay Sandy Clay Sandy

14. Texture Qualitative - Clay Silt Clay
Loam Clay Loam Loam
15. Bulk Density g/cc 1 1.6 1.35 1.48 1.39 1.71 1.8
16. Porosity % - 45.8 33.8 35.9 42.8 39.6 40.5
Water holding 55.9 61.8 60.8 52.7 62.8 59.3

17. % 5
capacity
18. Organic carbon (OC) % 0.5 0.71 0.5 0.56 0.75 0.63 0.69
19. Potassium as K mg/kg 5 125.1 98.6 71.6 105.9 114.8 96.3
20. Calcium as Ca mg/kg 5 315.2 296.8 324.7 285.1 263.4 309.1
21. Magnesium as Mg mg/kg 5 51.7 62.8 71.8 72.5 69.6 55.2
22. Sodium as Na mg/kg 5 512.8 316.9 417.5 251.3 516.2 384.6
Cation Exchange 9.3 12.9 14.7 15.2 16.3 17.1

23. meq/100g 5
Capacity
3-38
.
en-vιsι n
Results
Sr. Detection
Test Parameters Unit Syadla Bharundi Kudsad Antroli Project
No. Limit Umra (S1)
segwa (S2) (S3) (S4) (S5) Site (S6)
Exchangeable 45.2 31.5 32.9 26.9 17.4 19.3
24. % 1
Sodium Percentage
25. pH - 2 7.80 6.80 7.30 7.20 7.90 7.80
Electrical 352 415 289 291 289 312

26. µS/cm 1
Conductivity
27. Available Nitrogen mg/kg 5 72.5 0 61.8 85.6 71.4 96.3
28. Available Potassium mg/kg 5 23.1 81.5 45.7 70.8 56.20 60.1
Available 9.6 12.7 10.9 12.8 10.4 5.6

29. mg/kg 1
Phosphorus
3-39
.
en-vιsι n
3.6.3 Discussion-Soil Environment

Soils in the project areas are having clay to clay loam texture. Although pH at all loacation is moderately
alkaline range. The soils were low to medium in nitrogen status and high in P and K.
Soil class based on pH, ESP & EC is assessed as per Methods Manual Soil Testing in India Department of
Agriculture & Cooperation Ministry of Agriculture Government of India New Delhi January, 2011. The
outcome is as under:
 The pH of the soil samples ranged from 6.8 to 7.9 during the study period, indicating that soils are
normal to slightly alkaline in reaction.
 The EC (0.289 - 0.415dS/m) and ESP (17.4 – 32.9) were well within the safe limits of <0.80 dS/m
and 15.0 to 30.0 %, respectively. They have medium to high water holding capacity (52.7 % to 62.8
%).
 Among water soluble cations predominance of Na (251.3 to 516.2 mg/kg) followed by Ca (263.4 to
324.7 mg/kg), K (71.6 to 114.8 mg/kg) and Mg (55.2 to 72.5 mg/kg). The available phosphorus was
raging from 5.6 kg/ha to 12.8 kg/ha which is low (<28 kg/ha).
Soil salinity class based on electrical conductivity is non-salinein nature (EC>1dS/m)
Interpretation of Soil Data
The analysis of physico-chemical properties of soil samples collected from the project areas indicated that
porosity ranged from 33.8 – 42.8 % and WHC varied from 52.7 – 62.8 %, while bulk density ranged from
1.35 – 1.8 g/cm3. The moderate to high porosity and water holding capacity were on account of clay loam to
clay texture of soils. The pH ranged from 6.8 – 7.9, indicating that soils are normal (pH= 6.5 to 7.80) to
slightly alkaline (pH=7.8 to 8.5). And available phosphorus (5.6 to 12.8 kg P2O5/ha) and available potassium
(45.7 to 81.5 kg K2O/ha) were in the low range.
3.7 LAND ENVIRONMENT

Land Use (LU) refers to man’s activities and various uses, which are carried on land. Land Cover (LC) refers
to natural vegetation, water bodies, rock / soil, artificial cover and others resulting due to land transformation.
Although land use is generally inferred based on the cover, yet both the terms land use and land cover are
closely related and interchangeable.
Information on the rate and kind of change in the use of land resources is essential to the proper planning,
management and regulation of the use of such resources. Knowledge about the existing land use and trends of
change is essential if the nation is to tackle the problems associated with the haphazard and uncontrolled
growth. A systematic framework is needed for updating the land use and land cover maps that will be timely,
relatively inexpensive and appropriate for different needs at both national and state levels. The rapidly
developing technology of remote sensing offers an efficient and timely approach to the mapping and
collection of basic land use and land cover data over large area. The satellite imageries are potentially more
amenable to digital processing because the remote sensor output can be obtained in digital format. Land use
data are needed in the analysis of environmental processes and problems that must be understood if living
conditions and standards are to be improved from or maintained at current levels.
It is required to carry out the land use / land cover study for the project study area (10 km radius) to obtain the
necessary environmental clearances from statutory authorities. The objective of the study is to carryout land
use / land cover study for the proposed project. The LU / LC study is carried out using the Satellite Imageries
en-vιsι n
(IRS RS-2) in addition to Survey of India toposheets. Appropriate guidelines are followed while preparing the
LU / LC map for the project study area.
3.7.1 Methodology of Study
3.7.1.1 Pre-Field Interpretation

 Collection of Survey of India Topographical maps on 1: 50,000 scale from Survey of India (SoI).
 Procurement of Satellite Imagery from National Remote Sensing Centre (NRSC) site Geo Co-ordinates
from site center taken 10 km radius.
 Using ERDAS image processing software processed the raw satellite data.
 Using ARCGIS software converting the all base features from the toposheet, and overlaying the same
features on the satellite imagery.
 Using remote Sensing techniques tone, color, texture and shadow etc. draft land use map is prepared.
 Before site / ground truthing randomly mark field data checked. With which field work will be carried
out.
3.7.1.2 Site / Ground Truthing

 Site visit - capture the Geo-Coordinates of Boundary Pillars and record in field note book.
 Take traverses and observe the land use categories and map it on the field map on draft map with field
photographs.
 Observe the each land use category like single crop/double crop, industrial area, settlements, forest lands,
water bodies, waste lands and etc.
 The buffer zone area will randomly traverse for correlating mapping units.
 Collecting secondary data from agricultural department and local people.
3.7.1.3 Post Field Work

 Using ARCGIS software plotting the data collected during ground truth maps.
 Preparation of maps
 Preparation of report incorporating identification of impacts, quantification of impacts and suggesting
mitigative measures in consultation with other FAEs.
3.7.2 Land Use / Land Cover Map

Land use / land cover map is prepared by visual interpretation of high-resolution satellite data with the help of
Survey of India Topographic maps on 1:50,000 scale. Two seasons’ data (Summer year 2017) is used for the
delineation of different units. The units are confirmed by the ground truth/field visits.
Level-II classification of National (Natural) Resources Information System (NRIS) has been followed for the
delineation of units.
The adjoining area of project site is totally industrial land, constitute the dominant category of land use
covering as much as 17.544 km2 of the total area. The land use for settlement is mostly confined to the ‘rural
and urban settlement’ (built up-rural) 14.792 km2 and land without scrub feature 5.504 km2 of the total area &
as such there is no current fallow land because the satellite used is of March month when most of the crop is
towards senence or maturity. 263.16 km2 of the total area is agricultural land covering single and double crop
area (major area under single crop). The main crops cultivated are rice, sorghum (jawar), wheat, cotton, and
sugarcane. And fruit crops are banana, mango, sapota (chiku) and pappya. The plantation crops are
ashvagandha, kuvarpathu and pacholi.
There is a Tapi River which is active in the study area. Tapi river and other water bodies such as canal, ponds
etc. covers about 30.272 km2 of the total project area.
en-vιsι n
Land use / Land cover map of the study area Figure 3-9 is integrated with village map and analyzed with the
help of GIS to get the village wise findings of the present land use of the study area, which is given
elaborately in the Table 3-21.
Table 3-21: Land Use / Land Cover Statistics of the Study Area (10 km Radius)
Sr. No. Land Use Area (km2) Area (%)
1 Built up
a. Settlement 14.792 4.3
b. Industrial area 17.544 5.1
2 Water bodies
a. Tank/ Canal/ Reservoir etc. 30.272 8.8
3 Crop Land
a. Single crop 189.544 55.1
b. Double Crop 73.616 21.4
4 Wastelands
a. Land with scrub 12.728 3.7
b. Land without scrub 5.504 1.6
Total 344 100
3.7.3 Drainage Pattern of the surrounding Region

The Tapi is the major river which passes through the central parts of the district and flows towards the west.
The river is perennial in nature. It originates in Madhya Pradesh near Betul and has about 62,225 sq. km. of
catchment area. The average width of the river upstream of Kathor Bridge in about 500 m. Downstream of the
bridge the average being about 700m. Pickup weir was constructed on the Tapi River in 1954 at Kakarapar
about 56 km west of Surat. Ukai dam, constructed in 1965, is situated about 25 km upstream of Kakarapar
weir. Other prominent rivers draining the district are Kim.
en-vιsι n
Figure 3-11: Land use/Land Cover Map of 10 km Radius Study Area
en-vιsι n
Figure 3-12: Satellite Imaginary of 10 km Radius Study Area
en-vιsι n
3.8 HYDROLOGY AND GROUNDWATER
3.8.1 Geomorphology
The alluvial plains towards west merge into a dry barren sandy coastal plain fringed by marshy shore line. The
elevation varied between 29 m in Ghaludi and Pipodara to 14 m in Obhla. Figure 3-13 shows the Digital
Elevation Model of the study area.
Figure 3-13: Digital Elevation Model of the study area
3.8.2 Topography
Topography of the region is characterized by agricultural fields mainly sugarcane and eucalyptus fields, open
vegetation, Industrial area, water body, barren land & habitation.
Most of the landscape in the villages is utilized for agriculture.The area is characterized by peneplain
topography with a few mounds and knolls dotting the terrain; mostly formed by trap covered with
soil/alluvium.
Generally, control the drainage of the area and discharge the surface runoff water to Kim River and the Tapi
River, are the major rivers of the area.
3.8.3 Drainage
The Tapi is the major river which passes through the central parts of the district and flows towards the west.
The river is perennial in nature. It originates in Madhya Pradesh near Betul and has about 62,225 sq. km. of
en-vιsι n
catchment area. The average width of the river upstream of Kathor Bridge in about 500m. Downstream of the
bridge the average being about 700m. Pickup weir was constructed on the Tapi River in 1954 at Kakarapar
about 56km west of Surat. Ukai dam, constructed in 1965, is situated about 25km upstream of Kakarapar weir.
Other prominent rivers draining the district are Kim.
3.8.4 Geology & Structure

Major geological formations exposed in the district are Quaternary alluvium, Tertiary limestone and
sandstones and Deccan Trap basalt. Table 3-22 shows the geology of the district and the succession of
geological formations in the district, as given by Geological survey of India in their brochure titled „‟ Know
Your District-Surat‟ is as follows. The geology of the district is depicted in Figure given bellow.
Table 3-22: Geological Succession

Era Period Epoch Series Description
Cenozoic Quaternary Holocene Soil, Younger alluvium Blown and Fluvio-
marine deposits.
Tertiary Pleistocene Older alluvium, conglomerate
Miocene Ferruginous sandstone (Gaj)
Palaeocene Sub-Numulitic limestone, gypseous shale,Supra-
Trappean sediments lateritised and having
bauxite pockets.
Mesozoic Lower Tertiary to Early Eocene To Deccan Trap basalt with dykes
Upper Cretaceous Upper
en-vιsι n
MAP NOT IN SCALE
LITHOLOGY FORMATION
Figure 3-14: Geological Map of study area

(Source: Geological Survey of India)
3.8.5 Seismic Zone

Sismologically, entire Surat district comes under Zone- III, and study area falls under moderate Intensity/
moderate risk zone of seismic zonetion to limit of (ZONE III) seismicity zone (ISI) which represents the
earthquake intensity of order VII, which is moderately earthquake prone.
3.8.6 Soil
The soils found in Surat district are as follows. The basaltic lava flows are covered by black clayey to loamy
soil. It is in general ranges in thickness up to one meter. The colour of the soil turns brown due to high iron
content at places. In the piedmont slope area the soil is shallow to moderately deep, moderate to severely
eroded and non-calcareous in nature. The texture is silt clay loam to clay loams. The clay content varies from
30 to 60%. The water holding capacity of the soil is moderate. In the midland and flood plain areas, the soil is
deep to very deep, light greyish to yellowish brown in colour. The texture is fine clay loam to sandy loam. The
clay content varies from 25 to 60%. In coastal region the soil is deep to very deep dark grey to black colour.
The texture is clay loam to silty loam. The area is affected by tide as well as leaching of salts from up land
forming saline alkali soils. The content of clay in this is high and permeability is low (mud flats).
en-vιsι n
Figure 3-15: Soil Map of study area

(Source: Geological Survey of India)
The static water level is ranging between 6.65 m to 60.98 m from the existing ground Level. The contour map
of reduced water level was prepared.
Soil Sampling Purpose
The soil samples were collected from the study area to determine their physical properties such as grain size
analysis, moisture content, porosity, permeability and soil texture.
Permeability
Permeability is a measure of the ease in which water can flow through a soil volume. It is one of the most
important geotechnical parameters. However, it is probably the most difficult parameter to determine. In large
part, it controls the strength and deformation behavior of soils. It directly affects the following:
1. Quantity of water that will flow toward an excavation
2. Design of cutoffs beneath dams on permeable foundations
3. Design of the clay layer for a landfill liner.
For fine grained soil falling head permeability test is done, whereas constant head permeability test is done for
the coarse grained soil.
en-vιsι n
Figure 3-16: Soil Texture Triangles for soil sampling sites
en-vιsι n
3.8.6.1 Climate & Meteorology
General climate of the district is sub-tropical. The general agro-climatic zone of the study area is Arid to
Semi-Arid. In winter, there is much less rainfall than in summer. The average temperature in is 27.4 °C.
About 1086 mm of precipitation falls annually. The warmest month of the year is May, with an average
temperature of 31.7 °C. In January, the average temperature is 22.2 °C. It is the lowest average temperature of
the whole year. The difference in precipitation between the driest month and the wettest month is 413 mm.
The average temperatures vary during the year by 9.5 °C.
3.8.6.2 Hydrology
The major aquifers in the district are formed by alluvium and Deccan Trap basalt with Tertiary formations
occupying a small patch. The alluvium occurs in the western part of the district and along the streams whereas
in eastern parts weathered and fractured basalt form aquifers. Hydrogeological units:
1. Fissure Formations:
2. Porous Formation
Fissure Formations
Deccan Traps from the aquifers in north-eastern, eastern and south eastern parts of the district comprising
Mangrol, Mandvi, Vyara, Valod Mahuva, Songadh, Uchchhal and Nizar talukas. The ground water occurs in
unconfined to semi-confined conditions.
Alluvium
The western and north western parts of the district comprising Choryasi, Olpad, Kamrej, Palsana and parts of
Bardoli talukas is covered by Alluvium. This aquifer can broadly be demarcated into two zones namely newer
alluvium and older alluvium. The newer alluvium is present along the river courses and comprises fine to
coarse grained sand trap wash with cay intercalations. The sand is unconsolidated but shows some degree of
cohesion at places. Water levels are in general deeper in newer alluvium. Older alluvium is present in inter
river plains and comprises sand, clay, kankar, grave and silt. The ground water occurs mostly under
unconfined conditions but at places semi-confined conditions are also observed, probably due to presence of
clay lenses. The depths of the wells in alluvium generally range from 3.0 to 30.0 m with some of the wells
having bores down to 50 m below bottom of the wells. The maximum number of wells, about 80% is 5 to 20
m deep. Depths to water levels in the wells range from 0.5 to 15m bgl about 90% wells shows water levels
less than 10m bgl.
Water Level
Total 8 wells were inventoried in and around the study area in the month of March 2019. Water level
measurements were taken at 8 locations. The well inventoried was done around the Plant area. The
following table describes the location detail of the well inventoried.
Table 3-23: location detail of the well inventoried
Well SWL
Location Easting Northing Elevation (m) RWL (m)
no. (m)
GW-1 Sayan 72.879167 21.316944 20 22 -2
GW-2 Siwan 72.870278 21.351471 16 60.98 -44.976
GW-3 Obhla 72.857794 21.368917 14 21.22 -7.22
GW-4 Kareli 72.894222 21.365453 19 11.1 7.9
GW-5 Pipodara 72.9625 21.358333 29 16.768 12.2318
GW-6 Ghaludi 72.923889 21.339167 29 6.65 22.35
GW-7 Velenja 72.915756 21.306967 20 23.8 -3.8
en-vιsι n
Obhla
Kareli
21.36
Pipodara
21.35
21.34
Ghaludi
21.33
21.32
Sayan
21.31
Velenja
21.3
21.29
21.28
Bharthana
21.27
72.86 72.87 72.88 72.89 72.9 72.91 72.92 72.93 72.94 72.95 72.96
14 to 16
16 to 17
17 to 20
20 to 29
29 to 29.01
Figure 3-17: Contour Map showing Reduced Water Level
3.8.6.3 Discussions on Ground Water Quality

The groundwater samples were collected and analyzed by the M/s. Shree Sayan Vibhag Sahakari Khand
Udhyog Mandli Limited, Sayan, Surat. The objective of the study depends on the chemical analysis data as it
provides a relevant mode for interpretation of existing subsurface groundwater quality conditions.
pH (Hydrogen Ion Concentration)
pH is a hydrogen ion concentration. Generally, based on the pH value, water can be divided in to three classes,
namely:
1. If pH is less than 7, water is said to be ACIDIC in nature,
2. For FRESH water pH is equal to 7 and
3. If pH is more than 7, water is classified as ALKALINE.
The maximum pH value found 7.9 at pipodara ground water sample while the minimum pH value 7.0
bharthana ground water sample. The pH value found 7.9 at Tapi river water sample, while the pH value 7.5
at project site reservoir water sample. The surface water samples fall in alkaline nature. The maximum pH
value found 8.2 at Delad lake, while the minimum pH value 7.1 at Sayan lake for surface water samples.
Fluoride (F)
en-vιsι n
Flouride having permissible limit are 1-1.5 mg/l as per IS 10500:2012.
The maximum flouride value found 1.7 mg/ltr at Bharthana ground water sample while the minimum flouride
value 0.14 PPM at obhla ground water sample. The maximum flouride value found 1mg/ltr at Delad lake
water sample, while the minimum flouride value 0.2 mg/ltr at Sayan lake water sample.
Bio Chemical Oxygen Demand (BOD)
BOD having permissible limit are ≤ 2 mg/lit as per IS 10500:2012.
The BOD value found at all ground water sample rest are falling under below detection limit. The maximum
BOD value found 4.4 mg/l at tapi river water sample, and the minimum BOD value found 1.1 mg/l at sayan
lake water sample & max value of BOD at kareli lake 1.7 mg/L while project site reservoir water sample
are below detection limit.
The Surface water samples of reservoirs are collected and analyzed for BOD, As per IS 10500:2012.
Total Coliform
Total Coliform having permissible limit are ≤ 500 MPN/100 ml as per IS 2296:1982.
The maximum total coliforms value found 53 MPN/10 ml at Kareli lake water sample, while the minimum
Total coliforms value 32 MPN/10 ml at Ps_Reservoir water sample. The maximum total coliforms value
found 35 MPN/10 ml at Tapi river .The surface water samples of reservoirs are collected and analyzed for
total coliforms, as per IS 10500:2012.
TDS (Total Dissolved Solids)

Permissible limit is 500-2000 specified in IS 10500:2012.
The salt content in the water may be expressed in Total Dissolved Solids (TDS). TDS is the amount of
materials (inorganic salts and small amounts of organic material) dissolved in water and is commonly
expressed in terms of milligrams per liter. If the salt concentration in water increases, it is difficult for plants
to extract the water.
The minimum TDS value found 112 mg/l at Kareli ground water sample water, while maximum value found
847 mg/l at Sayan ground water sample.
The maximum TDS value found 344 mg/l at PS_ Reservoir water, while the minimum TDS value 180 mg/l
at Delad lake water sample. The surface water samples are collected and the surface water samples of
reservoirs are collected and analyzed for TDS, As per IS 10500:2012.
Total Hardness as CaCO3

Hardness of water is due to carbonates, sulphate and chlorides of calcium and magnesium. Permissible limit is
200-600 specified in IS 10500:2012.
en-vιsι n
Table 3-24: Water category based on range of Total Hardness value as per IS 10500:2012
Range of Hardness No. of Location in No. of Locations in Tube
Class
as CaCO3 Pond Sample well Sample
Soft 0 – 55 0 0
Slightly hard 56 – 100 2 0
Moderately 8 4
101 – 200
hard
Hard 201 – 500 2 6
Very Hard >500 0 1
The maximum total hardness value found 547 mg/l at Sayan ground water sample, while minimum value
found 238 mg/l at obhla ground water sample. The maximum total hardness value found 253 mg/l at Delad
lake water sample, while the minimum total hardness value 200 mg/l at tapi river water sample. The total
hardness value found 234 mg/l at PS_ Reservoir water sample.The surface water samples are of both
reservoirs are collected and analyzed for total hardness, as per IS 10500:2012.
Magnesium (Mg)
Permissible limit of Mg is 30-100 mg/l specified in the IS 10500:2012. The effect of having above the
desirable limit is encrustation and adverse effect on domestic use.
The maximum Magnesium (Mg) found 28 mg/l at Daheli ground water sample, while minimum value found
74 mg/l at Ground water sample. All ground water samples are analyzed as per IS 10500:2012 (Class –B
Outdoor bathing).
Chloride (Cl)
Permissible limit of Chloride is 250-1000 mg/l specified in the IS 10500:2012.
The chloride content above the desirable limit can cause the change in taste of water, corrosion and
portability. The Maximum Chloride ion concentration found 248.2 mg/l at Sayan Ground water sample
while minimum concentration found 157 mg/l at Obhla Ground water sample. The maximum Cl value found
127 mg/l at Tapi River water Sample, while the minimum Cl value 105 mg/l at Delad Lake water sample.
The Cl value found 105 mg/l at PS_ Reservoir water Sample. The Surface water samples of reservoirs are
collected and analyzed for Cl, As per IS 10500:2012.
Sulphate (SO4)
Permsible limit of Sulphate is 200-400 mg/l specified in the IS 10500:2012. Above the desirable limit causes
gastro intestinal irritation particularly when magnesium or sodium are present. The sulphate content in
ground water generally occurs as soluble salts of calcium, magnesium and sodium. The Maximum Sulphate
(SO4) value found 221 mg/l at Galudi Ground Water Sample, while minimum concentration of Sulphate
(SO4) found 105 mg/l at Pipodara Ground water sample. The maximum (SO4) value found 67.3 mg/l at
Delad Lake water Sample, while the minimum (SO4) value 55.8 mg/l at PS_ Reservoir water sample.The
Surface water samples of reservoirs are collected and analyzed for (SO4), As per IS 10500:2012
Total Alkalinity
Permissible limit of Total Alkalinity is 200-600 mg/l specified in the IS 10500:2012.
The Maximum Total Alkalinity value found 98 mg/l at Galudi Ground water sample, while minimum Total
Alkalinity found 58.7 mg/l at Bharthana Ground water sample. The maximum Total Alkalinity value found
98.2 mg/l at Kareli Lake water, while the minimum Total Alkalinity value 94 mg/l at Tapi River water
sample. The Total Alkalinity value found 95.2 mg/l at Reservoir Water Sample. The Surface water samples
of reservoirs are collected and analyzed for Total Alkalinity, As per IS 10500:2012.
Electrical Conductivity (EC)
en-vιsι n
Permissible limit of Electrical Conductivity (EC) is not specified in the IS 10500:2012.
Electrical conductivity is useful to determine its usefulness for irrigation water.
The Maximum Electrical Conductivity (EC) value found 1186 µsm/cm at Sayan Ground water sample,
while Minimum Electrical Conductivity (EC) found 116 µsm/cm at Galudi Ground water sample (not used
as drinking water source). The maximum EC value found 499 mg/l at PS_ Reservoir water Sample, while
the minimum EC value 261 mg/l at Delad Lake water sample. The Surface water samples of reservoirs are
collected and analyzed for EC, As per IS 10500:2012.
Total Suspended Solid (TSS)
Permissible limit of TSS is not specified in the IS 10500:2012.
The Maximum TSS value found 28 mg/l at Pipodara Ground water sample, while minimum TSS found 18
mg/l at Sayan Ground water sample. The maximum TSS value found 28 mg/l at Kareli Lake water Sample,
while the minimum TSS value 18 mg/l at Tapi River water sample. The maximum TSS value found 25 mg/l
at PS_ Reservoir water .The Surface water samples of reservoirs are collected and analyzed for TSS, As per
IS 10500:2012.
Nitrates
Permissible limit of Nitrates is 45 mg/l specified in the IS 10500:2012.
The Maximum Nitrates value found 6.5 mg/l at Velenja Ground Water Sample, while minimum Nitrates
found 1.8 mg/l at Galudi Ground water sample. The maximum Nitrates value found to be 2.1 mg/l at Kareli
Lake water sample while The Minimun nitrates values found to be 1 mg/l at Delad Lake. The Surface water
samples of reservoirs (1.9 mg/l) are collected and analyzed for Nitrates, As per IS 10500:2012.
Total Phosphates
Permissible limit of Total Phosphates is not specified in the IS 10500:2012.
The Maximum value 0.8 foundg/l at Sayan while minimum value found 0.1 mg/l at Galudi Gound Water
Sample. The Maximum Total Phosphates value found 0.4 mg/l at Delad Lake Water sample. The Miniimum
Total Phosphates value found 0.3 mg/l at Kareli Lake Water sample and except Rahiyad Pond water sample
rest are falling under below desirable limit.
Calcium Hardness
Permissible limit of Calcium Hardness is 75-200 mg/l specified in the IS 10500:2012.
The Maximum value found 211 mg/l at Barthana Ground water sample, while minimum found 99 mg/l at
Obhla Ground water sample. The Maximum value found 253 mg/l at Delad Lake water sample, while
minimum found 200 mg/l at Tapi River water samples. The value found 234 mg/l at PS_ Reservoir water
Sample.All the Surface water samples of reservoirs are collected and analyzed as per IS 10500:2012.
Carbonates
Permissible limit of Carbonates is not specified in the IS 10500:2012.
The value found 0 mg/l at all Ground water sample.
Bi-carbonates
Permissible limit of Bi-carbonates is not specified in the IS 10500:2012.
The Maximum value found 132 mg/l at galudi Ground water sample, while minimum found 102 mg/l at
Obhla Ground water sample.
en-vιsι n
Sodium
Permissible limit of Sodium is not specified in the IS 10500:2012. The Maximum value found 212 mg/l at
Pipodara Ground water sample, while minimum found 151 mg/l at Velenja Ground water sample. The
maximum Sodium value found 68.95 mg/l at Kareli Lake water Sample, while the minimum Sodium value
41.2 mg/l at PS_ Resrvoir water sample. The Surface water samples of reservoirs are collected and analyzed
for Sodium, As per IS 10500:2012.
Potassium
The Maximum value found 4.9mg/l at Obhla Ground water sample, while minimum found 2.2 mg/l at Kareli
Ground water sample.
The maximum Potassium value found 4.7mg/l at Delad Lake water Sample, while the minimum Potassium
value 2 mg/l at Sayan Lake and Tapi River water sample. The Potassium value found 4 mg/l at PS_ Reservoir
water Sample.The Surface water samples of reservoirs are collected and analyzed for Potassium, As per IS
10500:2012.
Nickel
Permissible limit of Nickel is 0.02 mg/l specified in the IS 10500:2012 All the Ground water samples are
below minimum detection limit Observed.
Arsenic
Permissible limit of Arsenic is 0.01-0.05 mg/l in the IS 10500:2012. All the Ground water samples are
below minimum detection limit. The Arsenic value not found at all the places of Pond water Sample.
Total Chromium
Permissible limit of Hexavalent Chromium is not specified in the IS 10500:2012.All the Ground water
samples are below minimum detection limit of laboratory. The Total Chromium value found to be below
detection Limit at all the places of Lake, River and Reservoir water Sample.
Copper
Permissible limit of Copper is 0.05-1.5 mg/l specified in the IS 10500:2012. All the Ground water samples
are below minimum detection limit. The Copper value found to be below detection Limit at all the places of
Lake, River and Reservoir water Sample. The Surface water samples of reservoirs are collected and
analyzed for Copper, As per IS 10500:2012.
Lead
Permissible limit of Lead is 0.01 mg/l specified in the IS 10500:2012. All the Ground water samples are
below minimum detection limit. The Lead value found to be below detection Limit at all the places of Lake,
River and Reservoir water Sample. The Surface water samples of reservoirs are collected and analyzed for
Lead, As per IS 10500:2012.
Iron
Permissible limit of Iron is 0.3 mg/l specified in the IS 10500:2012. The maximum Value of iron value
found to be 0.3 at Pipodara Ground Water Sample, While Minimum iron Value found to be 0.2 at Obhla
Ground Water Sample Except this value All Ground Water Samples are below minimum detection limit.
The Iron value found to be 0.14 at Delad Lake water sample, 0.12 at Kareli Lake and rest are falling under
below detection Limit. The Surface water samples of reservoirs are collected and analyzed for Iron, As per
IS 10500:2012.
Zinc
en-vιsι n
Permissible limit of Zinc is 5-15 mg/l specified in the IS 10500:2012. All the Ground water samples are
below minimum detection limit. The Zinc value found to be below detection Limit at all the places of Lake,
River and Reservoir water Sample. The Surface water samples of reservoirs are collected and analyzed for
Zinc, As per IS 10500:2012.
Mangenese (Mn)
Permissible limit of Mangenese (Mn) is 0.1-0.3 mg/l specified in the IS 10500:2012. All the Ground water
samples are below minimum detection limit. The Mn value found to be below detection Limit at all the
places of Lake, River and Reservoir water Sample. The Surface water samples of reservoirs are collected
and analyzed for Mn, As per IS 10500:2012.
Phenolic Compoud
Permissible limit of Phenol is 0.005mg/l specified in the IS 10500:2012. All the Ground water Samples are
below minimum detection limit. The Phenol value found to be below detection Limit at all the places of
Lake, River and Reservoir water Sample.
Chemical Oxygen Demand (COD)
COD having permissible limit is not specified in the IS 10500:2012. The Maximum COD value found 6.4
mg/l at Velenja Ground Water sample, while minimum value found 2.1 mg/l at Kareli Ground water
samples. The maximum COD value found 20.1 mg/l at Tapi River water Sample, while the minimum COD
value 2.2 mg/l at Sayan Lake water sample. The maximum COD value found 2.4 mg/l at PS_Reservoir
water Sample. The Surface water samples of reservoirs are collected and analyzed for COD, As per IS
10500:2012.
Dissolved Oxygen
DO having permissible limit is ≥ 5.0 mg/lit As per IS 10500:2012. The Maximum DO value found to be 6.4
at Velenja Ground Water Sample, while Minimum DO Value found to be 4.7 mg/l at Obhla Ground Water
Sample. The Maximum DO value found 6.1 mg/l at Tapi River water surface, while minimum value found
4.2 mg/l at Kareli lake water sample.
Turbidity
Turbidity having permissible limit is 1-5 NTU As per IS 10500:2012. The Maximum turbidity value found
to be 2.7 NTU at Pipodara Ground Water Sample, while Minimum turbidity Value found to be 1.4 NTU at
Bharthana Ground Water Sample. The Maximum turbidity value found 1.5 NTU at Sayan Lake water
surface, while minimum value found 1.1 at Delad lake and PS_Reservoir water sample.
Fecal coliform:
The Maximum turbidity value found 35 MPN/10 at Kareli Lake water surface, while minimum value found
21 MPN/10 at PS_Reservoir water sample.
E- Coil
The Maximum turbidity value found 18 MPN/10 at Kareli Lake water surface, while minimum value found
11 MPN/10 at PS_Reservoir water sample.
en-vιsι n
3.9 ECOLOGY AND BIO-DIVERSITY

Biodiversity is often considered synonymous with species richness of the area. Identifying, measuring, and
monitoring biodiversity is a complex exercise. The Biodiversity assessment generally concern with,
conducting biodiversity inventories; for assessing existing biodiversity. This provides the information on the
biodiversity richness of the area under consideration. The selection of indicators differs for biodiversity
monitoring as per the output required. Various criteria have been developed for selection of indicators, taking
into account biological as well as logistical aspects (Noss, 1990, UNEP, 1992).
A biodiversity baseline study is the work done to collect and interpret information on the biodiversity values
occurring at a site, their current condition, and trends before a project commences. The biodiversity baseline
study plays important roles in supporting the assessment of impacts and risks of a project, applying the
biodiversity mitigation hierarchy, and designing the long-term biodiversity monitoring program (if one is
required). Biodiversity risks, management requirements, and information needs will vary according to the
project, and therefore the biodiversity baseline study should be proportional and specific to the anticipated risk
and significance of impacts from the project (Gullison, et al. 2015). This report is based on information
collected through baseline field-based assessment to describe the biodiversity values present in the baseline
study area of 10 km radius.
3.9.1 Biodiversity of Terrestrial Environment

The Convention on Biological Diversity (CBD), the Ramsar Convention and the Convention on the
Conservation of Migratory Species of Wild Animals (CMS) recognize, impact assessment as an important tool
for helping to ensure that development is planned and implemented with biodiversity in mind. The CBD
requests Parties to apply impact assessment to projects, programmes, plans and policies with a potential
negative impact assessment on biodiversity.
Conference of parties to the Convention on Biological diversity (CBD) held at Curitiba, Brazil on March
20th - 31st, 2006 suggested biodiversity to be considered in impact assessment by providing voluntary
guidelines on biodiversity inclusive Environmental Impact Assessment. CBD provides a strong international
platform for applying impact assessment techniques to biodiversity conservation. It specifically calls for
impact assessment measures to ensure that biodiversity is addressed in projects, plan and policy decision
(Article14). An underlying justification for the application of impact assessment is also given in Article -8
which is for promoting the protection of ecosystems, natural habitats, promoting environmentally sound and
sustainable development in areas next to the protected areas.
3.9.2 Biological Diversity

The variety and variability of organisms and ecosystems is referred to as biological diversity or Bio diversity.
Biodiversity is a term which has gained enormous importance in the past few years. Technically, it is a
contraction of 'biological diversity'. For the purposes of the CBD (Article 2 Use of Terms), 'Biological
Diversity' is "the variability among living organisms from all sources including, inter alia, terrestrial, marine
and other aquatic ecosystems and the ecological complexes of which they are part; this includes diversity
within species, between species and of ecosystems". In practice, 'biodiversity' is most often used as a
collective noun synonymous with nature or 'Life on Earth' (WCMC Biodiversity Series No 5, 1996).
The biodiversity, we see today is the result of billions of years of evolution, shaped by natural processes. The
vast array of interactions among the various components of biodiversity makes the planet habitable for all
species, including humans. There is a growing recognition that, biological diversity is a global asset of
tremendous value to present and future generations. At the same time, the threat to species and ecosystems has
en-vιsι n
never been as great as it is today. Species extinction caused by human activities continues at an alarming rate.
Protecting biodiversity is for our self-interest and also for the future generation.
3.9.3 Ecological Impact Assessment

Ecological impact assessment (EcIA) is used to predict and evaluate the impacts of development activities on
ecosystems and their components, thereby providing the information needed to ensure that ecological issues
are given full and proper consideration in development planning. Environmental impact assessment (EIA) has
emerged as a key to sustainable development by integrating social, economic and environmental issues in
many countries. EcIA has a major part to play as a component of EIA but also has other potential applications
in environmental planning and management. Ecological Impact Assessment provides a comprehensive review
of the EcIA process and summarizes the ecological theories and tools that can be used to understand, explain
and evaluate the ecological consequences of development proposals.
Environmental impact assessments have become an integral part of development projects in India ever since
1994, to formulate policies and guidelines for environmentally sound economic development. Proper
assessment of biological environment and compilation of its taxonomical data is essential for the impact
prediction, yet biodiversity is often inadequately addressed. There is a growing recognition of the need of
biodiversity considerations in environmental impact assessments. Important barriers to the incorporation of
biodiversity in impact assessment include low priority for biodiversity and limitations in one or more of the
following areas: capacity to carry out the assessments; awareness of biodiversity values; adequate data; and
post-project monitoring.
Consistent and regularly updated data on regional and local taxonomy and floristic and faunal diversity of the
areas are almost non-existent in country as diverse as India. Instant information on biodiversity profiles of the
area, where the proposed project is setting up, is an essential part of the baseline studies of EIA. In such a
situation, good primary baseline biodiversity survey is a pre-requisite for the collection of reliable data. The
professional ethic of the Biodiversity practitioners should be their will and skill to conduct scientific field
surveys. These contributions towards biodiversity surveys may sometimes recognized as the actual value
additions in terms of new records or a new data base but are more often recognized in the validation and
updating of the existing information base.
3.9.4 Period of The Study and Study Area

The baseline survey for the evaluation of the floral and faunal biodiversity of the terrestrial environment was
done within 10 km radius of the project of Shree Sayan Vibhag Sahkari Khand Udhyog Mandli Limited
is located in an already developed industrial plot, At & Post: Sayan, Ta: Olpad, Dist:Surat, Gujarat was
conducted during, 30th-31st May, 2019.
3.9.4.1 Methodology
For purpose of Environment Impact assessment (EIA) studies, the term biodiversity survey defines collection
of spatial and or temporal data about spices/ community or a habitat. The information from the survey
provides a snap shot of presence or absence and spatial distribution of important species. In EIA studies the
survey data are used to evaluate the ecological resources on a site and its immediate surroundings, which is
then assessed or evaluated. Impacts are consider in respect to this resources and assessed for significance.
The primary objective of the present survey was to describe the floristic and faunal communities within the
study area. Survey conducted for EIA studies aimed to provide information on the following.
What species and habitat occur in the project site and surroundings?
Whether any threatened flora and fauna occur in the study area? If so, where do they occur?
en-vιsι n
Extrapolation and prediction techniques were used to limit the number of sites to be assessed. The knowledge
of species habitats requirement, soil type, terrain, vegetation etc. were used to predict species occurrence.
This Extrapolation assessment Programme conducts preliminary for the assessment of biological value of
poorly known area. The biological value of an area can be characterized by the species richness, degree of
spices endemism, uniqueness of the ecosystem and magnitude of threats of extinction. This Rapid biodiversity
assessment were undertaken by identifying potentially rich sites from satellite imaginary (Google Earth) and
conducting the field survey in the potential habitats. GPS was utilized for locating field sample plots as well as
gathering positional attributes of sighted flora and faunal species.
For Floral survey, sample plots have been randomly distributed across the suitable stratum within 10 km
radius of project site. Tree species were sampled using 10mx10m or 5mx5m plots depending upon the stratum
variability on the ground and tree species occurrence. For sampling shrub species, two plots of size of 5 meter
x 5 meter at two opposite corner of tree plots or the same 5meter X 5meter plot of tree plots were taken. For
herbaceous plant five plots of 1meter x 1 meter at four corners of tree plots and one at centre
The methodology adopted for faunal survey involve; faunal habitat assessment, random intensive survey,
opportunistic observations, diurnal bird observation, active search for reptiles, active search for scats and foot
prints and review of previous studies. The aim was to set baselines in order to monitor and identify trends
after the commencement of project activity. Emphasis has been placed on presence of rare, endemic,
migratory and threatened species, if any present in the study area. Desktop literature review was conducted to
identify the representative spectrum of threatened species, population and ecological communities as listed by
IUCN, ZSI, BSI and in Indian wild Life Protection act, 1972. The threat status of individual species was
assessed using the revised IUCN category system.
3.9.4.2 Presence –Absence

Monitoring all species was not clearly feasible during a short duration biological baseline survey. Therefore
the most commonly used species based attributes of habitat composition are species presences or absences,
abundance of typical species or vegetation communities, and the distribution (range) of a species/ species.
The simplest target for a species is that its presence at the site or at defined location within the surrounding of
it is maintained. This normally straightforward to monitor, but there are occasions, when difficulties may
arise:, especially when the species that are inconspicuous, difficult to identify or rare, or those that inhabit in
inaccessible areas or species that are migratory not present during the time of survey. The distribution (range)
of a species across a site can be monitored by assessing presence –absence across a number of locations
(grids)
3.9.4.3 DAFOR Scale

The most commonly collected data during biological baseline survey are Nominal and Ordinal. In nominal
survey, each survey location was assigned predefined category, species are recorded as being present or absent
at allocation or a habitat. In ordinal survey, this is an extension of nominal data in which categories are
ordered. Here the abundance of a Flora species at a location (study area) is classified in an ordered scale as per
their occurrence in quadrates studied such as Rare, Occasional, Frequent, Abundant or Dominant – the co-
called DAFOR scale. (David Hill etal., 2005)
While abundance of a fauna species at a location (study area) is classified in an ordered scale as per their
occurrence/ opportunistic sighting during the study period as: VCom: Very common, Com: Common, LCom:
Locally common, UnCom: Un Common and Rar; Rare.
en-vιsι n
3.9.5 Biodiversity of Terrestrial Environment
3.9.5.1 Habitats Description of the Project Site and its Immediate Surroundings
The project of Shree Sayan Vibhag Sahkari Khand Udhyog Mandli Limited is located in an already
developed industrial plot. No rare and endangered flora and fauna observed in the project site or within the
close proximity of the project site. Existing premises is located in Sayan village area and well developed with
Trees, shrubs and vegetation within and outside of the premises.
2019.05.30
2019.05.30
Photograph 3-5: Within and Immidiate surrounding of project site

Habitats Description of the Area (10 Km)
The dominating feature of the study area was Azadirachta indica (Limbado), Delonix regia (Gaulmor) and
Cassia fistula (Garmalo). Major portion of the cultivable land in this area was observed with different crops
during the study period.
Quantity of Lotus (Nelumbo nucifera) was observed in Sayan-sivan Lake at 21°20’14.82” N, 72°52’33.44” E,
but water level was low and started formation of algae blooms. Common Indian species of fish was observed
in Kareli Lake at 21°21’57.93” N, 72°53’38.77” E. Plantation of Sevan (Gmelina arborea) at periphery of the
farming area in various places.
Mostly observed cultivation of SugarCane (Saccharum officinarum), Bhindi (Abelmoschus esculentus), Dudhi
(Lagenaria siceraria), Nilgiri (Eucalyptus obliqua) etc. in the study area. Bhindi farm was observed near
Bharundi village 21°21'14.73"N, 72°52'59.75"E.
en-vιsι n
Figure 3-18: Google Earth snapshot of Study area within 2 km radius
3.9.5.2 Floral Diversity of the Study Area

The objective this floral inventory of the study area is to provide necessary information on floristic structure in
the study area for formulating effective management and conservation measures. The climatic, edaphic and
biotic variations with their complex interrelationship and composition of species, which are adapted to these
variations, have resulted in different vegetation cover, characteristic of each region. The following account of
floral inventory has been, based on the field survey conducted for a short duration in the 30th-31st May, 2019,
is not very comprehensive data and is aimed only to give a general pattern of vegetation of this region during
the study period as a baseline data. Listing of the endangered, threatened and endemic species of flora in a
locality and drawing the attention to the occurrence of such species, would aid in creating awareness amongst
the local people as a whole to protect such species from extinction, and to take necessary measures for their
conservation. These type of floristic study is an inventory for such purpose and hence a necessity.
2019.05.30 2019.05.30
Sugar cane cultivation at various area
en-vιsι n
2019.05.30
Bhindi cultivation Near Bharundi village
2019.05.30
Nilgiri (Eucalyptus obliqua) cultivation z

Photograph 3-6: Floral diversity of the study area
The tree species, herbs, shrubs, climbers and major crops, were documented during this base line study. The
list of floral species documented in the study area is enlisted in Table 3-25.
3.9.5.3 Trees
The dominant trees in the study area were, Mangifera indica (Keri), Azadirachta indica (Limbado),
Tamarindus indicum (Amli), Delonix regia (Gaulmor), Cassia fistula L.(Garmalo), and various Acacia sps.
The list of tree species is enlisted in the Table 3-25. 36 species of trees belong to 17 families were enumerated
from the study area from the sampling plots.
en-vιsι n
Table 3-25: Trees in the Study area
Relative abundance in
No. Family & Scientific name Vernacular name
sampling plots
1. Anacardiaceae
1.1. Mangifera indica L. Ambo D
2. Annonaceae
1.2. Polyalthia longifolia Asopalav O
1.3. Annona squamosa L. Sitaphal O
3. Arecaceae
1.4. Borassus flabellifer L. Tad F
1.5. Cocos nucifera L. Nariel F
4. Caesalpiniaceae
1.6. Delonix regia(Boj) Gulmohar O
1.7. Cassia fistula L. Garmalo R
1.8. Senna siamea Lam. Kasida O
1.9. Tamarindus indica L Amli O
5. Casuarinaceae
1.10. Casuarina equisetifolia L. Sharu F
6. Caricaceae
1.11. Carica papaya L Papaya O
7. Combretaceae
1.12. Terminalia catappa L. Badam O
8. Meliaceae
1.13. Azadirachta indica A.Juss Limbado D
1.14. Melia azedarach Bakan limdo O
9. Mimosaceae
1.15. Acacia auriculiformis L Austrialanbaval D
1.16. Acacia nilotica (L.) Del.subsp.indica (Bth.) Baval A
Brenan
1.17. Acacia leucophloea (Roxb) Hermobhaval A
1.18. Albizia lebbeck L. Siris O
1.19. Leucaena leucocephala (Lam.) De Pardesi Baval O
1.20. Prosopis cineraria (L.) Druce Khyigdo D
1.21. Prosopis juliflora (Sw.) DC Gadobaval F
1.22. Pithecellobium dulce (Roxb.) Bth. Gorasmli O
10. Moraceae
1.23. Ficus bengalensis L Vad O
1.24. Ficus racemosa L. Umaro R
1.25. Artocarpus heterophyllus Lam Fanas R
1.26. Ficus religiosa L Piplo O
11. Moringaceae
1.27. Moringa pterygosperma Gaertn., Fruct Saragvo O
12. Myrtaceae
1.28. Eucalyptus citriodora Hk. Nilgari F
1.29. Syzygium cumini ( L) Jambu O
13. Rhamnaceae
1.30. Zizyphus glabrata Heyne ex Roth Bor A
1.31. Zizyphus mauritiana Lam Bordi O
14. Sapotaceae
1.32. Manilkara zapota L Chikoo O
1.33. Madhuca longifolia (Koenig) Macbr. var. latifolia Mahudo O
15. Simaroubaceae
1.34. Ailanthus excelsa Roxb. Aurdso A
16. Verbenaceae
en-vιsι n
Relative abundance in
No. Family & Scientific name Vernacular name
sampling plots
1.35. Tectona grandis L. Sag F
17. Fabaceae ( Sub family Papiloniodeae)
1.36. Dalbergia latifolia Roxb., Corom Sisam A
Relative abundance in sampling plots DAFOR scale. : Dominant, Abundant, Frequent, Occasional,
Rare,. (David Hill etal., 2005)
3.9.5.4 Shrubs
Shrubs observed during the present survey are given in the Table 3-26 shrub species belong to 13 families
were observed in the sampling plots laid in study area. The dominant shrub community in this area was
represented by Calotropis procera (Akado), Thevetia peruviana (Pilikarean), Lawsonia inermis (Mendhi) etc.
Table 3-26: List of the Shrubs in the Study Area
Sr Vernacular Relative abundance
Family & Scientific name
No. name in sampling plots
1 Apocynaceae
1/1 Thevetia peruviana Merr. Pili karan O
1/2 Nerium indicum Mill Lalkaren O
2 Asclepiadaceae
1/3 Calotropis procera (Ait.) R.Br Akado F
3 Euphorbiaceae
1/4 Euphorbia nerifolia L Thor F
5 Lythraceae
1/5 Lawsonia inermis L Mendhi A
6 Malvaceae
1/6 Abelmoschus manihot L. Medic. Jungli Bindi O
1/7 Abelomoschus esculentus (L.) Bhindi F
1/8 Hibiscus rosa –sinensis Jasund O
1/9 Gossypium hirsutum L. Kapas O
7 Rhamnaceae
1/10 Zizyphus nummularia (Burm.f.) W. &. Chanibor F
1/11 Zizyphus glabrata Heyne ex Ro Bor F
8 Musaceae
1/12 Musa paradisiaca L. Kela O
9 Poaceae
1/13 Saccharum officinarum L. Sherdi Crop
10 Nyctaginaceae
1/14 Bougainvillea spectabilis Willd. Bougainvel O
11 Labiatae
1/15 Ocimum sanctum L. Tulsi F
12 Solanaceae
1/16 Datura metel L Daturo R
1/17 Solanum incanum L Ubhi ringan R
3.9.5.5 Herbs
The herbs observed in the sampling plots, during the survey period have been enlisted in the Table 3-27. 17
species of herbs belongs to13 families were documented from the sampling plots laid in different habitats.
en-vιsι n
Most dominant herbaceous cover in the study area was Hygrophila schulli (Akaro), Xanthium strumarium
(Gokhru) and Ocimum sanctum L. (Tulsi).
Table 3-27: List of Herbaceous Species Observed in the Study Area
Sr Relative abundance in
Family & Scientific name Vernacular name
No. sampling plots
1 Family : Acanthaceae
1/1 Hygrophila schulli (Buch.-Ham.) M. R. Akaro D
2 Family : Amaranthaceae
½ Aerva lanata (L.) Juss. ex Schult., Gorakhganjo A
3 Family : Araceae
1/3 Colocasia esculenta (L.) Schott -- O
1/4 Alocasia macrorrhiza (L.) G -- F
4 Family : Asteraceae
1/5 Tridax procumbens L Pardesi Bhangro A
1/6 Xanthium strumarium L. Gokhru A
5 Family : Boraginaceae
1/7 Trichodesma indicum R. Br. Undha Fuli A
6 Family : Lamiaceae
1/8 Ocimum sanctum L. Tulsi O
1/9 O. canum Sims Ramtulsi O
7 Family : Zygophyllaceae
1/10 Tribulus terrestris L. Mithu Gokhru R
8 Family: Poaceae/geamineae
1/11 Zea mays L., Makkai O
9 Family: Nymphaeaceae
1/12 Nymphaea pubescens Wild Kamal O
10 Family:Nyctaginaceae
1/13 Bougainvillea spectabilis Willd. Bougainvel O
11 Family: Papilionaceae
1/14 Cajanus cajan (L) Tuvar O
1/15 Medicago sativa L Lachko O
12 Family: Liliaceae
1/16 Aloe barbadensis Mill. Kunvarpato O
13 Family: Gentianaceae
1/17 Nymphoides indicum (Roxb.) Kumudini R
Relative abundance in sampling plots DAFOR scale. : Dominant, Abundant, Frequent, Occasional, Rare, (David Hill
etal., 2005)
3.9.5.6 Climbers and Twiners

The major climbers and twiners observed in the study area in the sampling plots are given in the Error!
Reference source not found.. 13 specie of climbers/ twiners belongs to 07 families were recorded from the
samspling plots laid in the study area.
Table 3-28: List of Climbers observed in the Study Area
Relative abundance
Sr No. Family & Scientific name Vernacular name
in sampling plots
1 Family Asclepiadaceae
1/1 Pentatropis spiralis (Forsk.) Decne Shingroti A
2 Family: Caesalpiniaceae
1/4 Caesalpinia crista L. Kachka A
3 Family Convolvulaceae
en-vιsι n
1/5 Ipomea cairica (L.) -- A
1/6 Ipomoea obscura L. Vad Fudardi A
1/7 Ipomoea hederifolia L., -- A
1/8 Ipomea aquatica Forsk. Nadanivel D
1/9 Ipomoea pes-tigrides L Vaghpadini vel A
5 Family Cucurbitaceae O
1/10 Luffa cylindrica (L.) M.J.Roem Galku R
1/11 Lagenaria siceraria Didhi R
6 Family: Cuscutaceae
1/12 Cuscuta reflexa Roxb. Amarvel O
7 Family: Oleaceae
1/13 Jasminum multiflorum (Burm.f.)Andr. Mogro F
3.9.5.7 Cultivated Plants in the Study Area

The study area is dominated by the orchards of Mango and Chikko cultivation during the study period. Tuver
and wheat cultivation also foud in some area. The main crops of the study areaare paddy, rice, sugarcane,
jawar and wheat. And fruit crops are mango, sapota and banana. The vegetables grown in the study area are,
Rigan (Solanum melongena), Val/Val papri (Lablab purpureus), Bhindi (Abelmoschus esculentus) etc. In
addition to this Very limited Bor plantation was also observed as farm land plantation.
3.9.5.8 Rare and Endangered Flora in the Study Area

The IUCN Red List is the world's most comprehensive inventory of the global conservation status of plant and
animal species. It uses a set of criteria to evaluate the extinction risk of thousands of species and subspecies.
These criteria are relevant to all species and all regions of the world. With its strong scientific base, the IUCN
Red List is recognized as the most authoritative guide to the status of biological diversity.
Among the enumerated flora in the study area, none of them were assigned any threat category, by RED data
book of Indian Plants. (Nayar and Sastry, 1990) and Red list of threatened Vascular plants (IUCN, 2010, BSI,
2003).
3.9.5.9 Endemic Plants of the Study Area

De Candolle (1855) first used the concept of “Endemic”, which is defined as an area of a taxonomic unit,
especially a species which has a restricted distribution or habitat, isolated from its surrounding region through
geographical, ecological or temporal barriers. Among recorded plant species, during the survey period, none
can be assigned the status of endemic plant of this region.
There is no Rare and Endemic plant was observed in study area during site visit.
3.9.5.10 Status of Forest and their category in the study area

No natural or reserved forest was observed in the study area except few scattered scrub cover in the barren
lands
3.9.6 Faunal Diversity of Study Area

For the documentation of the faunal biodiversity of the study area with respect to birds, reptiles, amphibians,
and butterfly species, a baseline survey had been conducted in 30th-31st May, 2019
3.9.6.1 Birds of the Study Area

The most commonly spotted bird species of this area were; Cattle Egret, Little Eagret, House Crow etc.
Systematic account of the birds in the study area with the status of occurrence is given in Table 3-29.
Table 3-29: Birds of the Study Area
en-vιsι n
Relative
Old Common New Common Distribution IUCN status
Scientific Name Aabundance
name Name Status Ver3.1
In study area
I ORDER: ANSERIFORMES
Family: Anatidae (Ducks and teals)
Spotbill Spot-billed Duck Anas poecilorhyncha R UC Least Concern
II ORDER: APODIFORMES
Family: Apodidae (swifts)
Common Common
Common Swift Apus apus R VC
Swift Swift
III. ORDER: FALCONIFORMES
Family: Accipitridae (vulture, Sparrow hawk, Eagle, Harrier, Kite and Vulture)
Shikra Shikra Accipiter badius R Uc Least Concern
Black-winged Black-winged
Elanus caeruleus R C Least Concern
Kite Kite
IV. ORDER: : CICONIIFORMES
Family: Ardeidae (heron, Egret, Bittern)
Cattle Egret Cattle Egret Bubulcus ibis R C Least Concern
Little Egret Little Egret Egretta garzetta R C Least Concern
Indian Pond- Least
Pond Heron Ardeola grayii R C
Heron Concern
Median or Intermediate Least
Mesophoyx intermedia R C
Smaller Egret Egret Concern
Family: Charadriidae (Plover, Stilt, Oystercatcher, Lapwing, Avocet )
Black-winged Black-winged
Himantopus himantopus R LC Least Concern
Stilt Stilt
Red-wattled Red-wattled
Vanellus indicus R LC Least Concern
Lapwing Lapwing
Family: Phalacrocoracidae ( Cormorant)
Phalacrocorax
Indian Shag Indian Cormorant R LC Least Concern
fuscicollis
Little
Little Cormorant Phalacrocorax niger R LC Least Concern
Cormorant
Family: Pteroclidae (Sandgrouse)
Indian Chestnut-bellied
Pterocles exustus R UC Least Concern
Sandgrouse sandgrouse
V. ORDER: COLUMBIFORMES
Family: Columbidae (Pigeon, Dove)
Blue Rock
Rock Pigeon Columba livia R C Least Concern
Pigeon
Eurasian
Ring Dove Streptopelia decaocto R C Least Concern
Collared-Dove
VI Order: Coraciiformes
Family: Dacelonidae (King fihers)
White
White-throated
breasted Halcyon smyrnensis R UC Least Concern
Kingfisher
Kingfisher
Family: Meropidae (Bee Eater)
Small Green Little Green Bee-
Merops orientalis R LC Least Concern
bee-eater eater
VII.ORDER: CUCULIFORMES
Family: Centropodidae (Cocucal
Crow-
Pheasant or Greater Coucal Centropus sinensis R UC Least Concern
Coucal
Family: Cuculidae (cuckoo, Koel)
Asian
Koel Koel/Wetsern Eudynamys scolopacea R UC Least Concern
Koel
en-vιsι n
Relative
In study area
Indian
Drongo
Drongo Surniculus lugubris R C Least Concern
Cuckoo
Cuckoo
VIII ORDER: GALLIFORMES
Family: Phasianidae (Peafowl , Patridge)
Common
Indian Peafowl Pavo cristatus R LC Least Concern
Peafowl
Family: Rallidae ( Waterhen, coot, crake water cock, Moorhen, Rail,)
White-
White-breasted
breasted Amaurornis phoenicurus R LC Least Concern
Water hen
Water hen
Coot Common Coot Fulica atra R LC Least Concern
Indian Common
Gallinula chloropus R LC Least Concern
Moorhen Moorhen
Purple
Purple Swamphen Porphyrio porphyrio R LC Least Concern
Moorhen
X. ORDER: PASSERIFORMES
Family: Paridae (Tit )
Grey Tit Great Tit Parus major R LC Least Concern
Family: Corvidae
Large Cuckoo-
Large
shrike/Black Coracina
Cuckoo- R UC Least Concern
faced Cuckoo- novaehollandiae
shrike
shrike
House Crow House Crow Corvus splendens R LC Least Concern
Least Concern
Raven Common Raven Corvus corax R UC
Tree Pie Rufous Treepie Dendrocitta vagabunda R R Least Concern
Family: Laniidae (shrike)

Rufous Long-tailed
Lanius schach R LC Least Concern
backed Shrike Shrike
Grey Shrike Northern Shrike Lanius excubitor R LC Least Concern
Family: Muscicapidae ( Short wing, Chat, Robin, Shama
Indian Robin Indian Robin Saxicoloides fulicata R LC Least Concern
Pied Bushchat Pied Bushchat Saxicola caprata R LC Least Concern
Family: Nectariniidae ( Sun Birds, Flower pecker, Spider hunter
Crimson-backed
Small Sunbird Nectarinia minima R LC Least Concern
Sunbird
Family: Passeridae ( Avadavat,Pipit, Wagtail, Munia, Snowfinch, sparrow,
House
House Sparrow Passer domesticus R LC Least Concern
Sparrow
Family: Sturnidae (Myna, Starling)
Bank Myna Bank Myna Acridotheres ginginianus R LC Least Concern
Indian Myna Common Myna Acridotheres tristis R LC Least Concern
Family: Sylviidae ( Warbler, Browning, Fulvetta ,Babbler, Laughing thrash, Tailor birds,
Common
Common Babbler Turdoides caudatus R LC Least Concern
Babbler
Common
Tailorbird Orthotomus sutorius R LC Least Concern
Tailorbird
XI. ORDER: PSITTACIFORMES
en-vιsι n
Relative
In study area
Family: Psittacidae (Parrot and Parakeet)
Rose-ringed Rose-ringed
Psittacula krameri R LC Least Concern
Parakeet Parakeet
Note: Distribution status: R = Widespread Resident, WM: winter migrant Ref WCMC, Check list of Indian Birds/
IUCN 2018, Bird Life International. 2018, Bird Life International. 2016.
Kumar, A., J.P. Sati and P.C. Tak (2003): Checklist of Indian Water birds. BUCEROS 8 (1): 30 pp
Relative Abundance: VC: Very common, C: Common, LC: Locally common, UC: Un Common and R; Rare.
IUCN Status: ver 3.1 (LC)Least Concern, Near Threatened
3.9.6.2 Butterflies from the study area

Butterflies observed during the present study are documented in the Table 3-30.
Table 3-30: Butterflies in the Study Area

Sr Relative Aabundance
Scientific name & family Common name
No. In study area
1 Family Papilionidae
1/1 Papilio polytes Linnaeus Common Mormon LC
2 Family Pieridae
1/2 Eurema hecabe Linnaeus Common Grass yellow LC
1/3 Catopsilia pomona Fabricius Common Emigrant LC
1/4 Catopsilia pyranthe Linnaeus Mottled Emigrant LC
1/5 Ixias mariane Cramer White orange tip UC
1/6 Ixias pyrene Linnaeus Yellow orange tip UC
3 Family: Nymphalidae
13/3 Danaus genutia Cramer Stripped Tiger LC
14/4 Hypolimanas misippus Danaid egg fly LC
15/5 Mycalesis perseus Common bush brown LC
3.9.6.3 Herpetofauna
No amphibians sighted in the study area during the survey period even though the region is characterized by
many water logged region. Reptiles observed in the study area are given in the Table 3-31.
Table 3-31: Reptiles observed in the study area
Relative
IUCN status
No. Common Name Scientific name Aabundance
Ver3.1
In study area
1 Common garden lizard Calotes versicolor (Daudin) UC Least Concern
2 Common rat snake Ptyas mucosus (Linn.) UC -
3 House Gecko Hemidactylus flaviviridis UC Not evaluated
(Ruppell)
4 Fan-Throated Lizard Sitana ponticeriana ( Cuvier) LC Least Concern
5 Indian Cobra Naja naja ssp. kaouthia (Linn.) Secondary Least Concern
6 Russell’s Viper Daboia russelii (Shaw and Secondary Least Concern
Nodder)
en-vιsι n
Relative
IUCN status
No. Common Name Scientific name Aabundance
Ver3.1
In study area
7 Common Indian Krait  Bungarus caeruleus(Schneider) Secondary -
 = Not sighted but included as per the information provided by villagers ,during the interaction with them with pictorial
presentation.
3.9.6.4 Mammals
The wild mammals observed other than domesticated ones from the study area is documented in the Table
3-32.
Table 3-32: Mammals in the Study Area
Relative
IUCN status
No Common Name Scientific name Aabundance
Ver3.1
In study area
1 Five striped Palm squirrel Funambulus pennantii C Least Concern
(Wroughton)
2 Hare Lepus sp. UC Least Concern
3 Common Mongoose/Indian Herpestes edwardsi (Geoffroy) UC Least Concern
Grey Mongoose
4 Wild Boars  Sus scrofa (Linnaeus) Secondary -
5 Indian field mouse Mus booduga (Gray) UC -
 = Not sighted but included as per the information provided by villagers, during the interaction with them with
pictorial presentation.
3.9.7 Rare and Endangered Fauna of the Study Area

3.9.7.1 As per Indian Wild Life (Protection) Act, 1972
Wild Life (Protection) Act, 1972, as amended on 17th January 2003, is an Act to provide for the protection of
wild animals, birds and plants and for matters connected therewith or ancillary or incidental thereto with a
view to ensuring the ecological and environmental security of the country.
Some of the sighted fauna were given protection by the Indian Wild Life (Protection) Act, 1972 by including
them in different schedules. Among the birds in the study area, Pea fowl (Pavo cristatus) is included in
Schedule-I of Wild life protection Act, 1972, while many other birds are included in Schedule-IV.
Among the reptilesIndian Cobra (Naja Naja) and Common Rat Snake (Ptyas Mucosus) were provided
protection as per Schedule-II.
Among mammals; Common Mongoose (Herpestes edwardsi), is a Schedule-II mammals. Wild Boars (Sus
scrofa (Linnaeus) are provided protection by incorporating them in Schedule-III. Five stripped squirrels are
included in Schedule-IV of Wild Life Protection Act, 1972.
Table 3-33: Species provided Protection as per Wild Life Protection Act, 1972
Schedule
Population
Nearest (Wild Life
Group Species Coordinates at the time of
village Protection
sighting
Act, 1972.)
Pea fowl
Secondary -- -- Schedule-I
(Pavo cristatus),
Birds Various
few other birds -- localities the -- Schedule-V
study area
en-vιsι n
Schedule
Population
Nearest (Wild Life
Group Species Coordinates at the time of
village Protection
sighting
Act, 1972.)
Indian Cobra (Naja
Secondary -- --
naja),
Reptiles Schedule-II
Common rat snake
Secondary -- --
(Ptyas mucosus)
Common Mongoose
Secondary -- -- Schedule-II
(Herpestes edwardsi),
Five striped Palm
Mammals squirrel Many
-- >20 Schedule-IV
(Funambulus pennanii places
( Wroughton))
Wild Boars (Sus
Secondary -- -- Schedule-III
scrofa Linnaeus)
Sources: Wild Life Protection Act 1972 and its amendments
3.10 SOCIO-ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT

The baseline socio - economic data collected for the study region, has been identified for the four major
indicators viz. demography, civic amenities, economy and social culture. Baseline study is done to analyze
intended and unintended social consequences, both positive and negative, of planned interventions i.e.
policies, programs, plans, projects. The baseline status of the above indicators is compiled in forthcoming
sections.
3.10.1 Major Objectives of the Study

 To understand the socio-economic status of the villages
 To study the perceptions of people about the impact of proposed project
 To suggest CER plan for the development of communities
3.10.2 Identification of Stakeholders

Any project usually has some negative impacts on the local population. Displacement and/or
health/socioeconomic hazard are traumatic experience in spite of compensation paid and mitigation measures
adopted. Therefore proper identification of stakeholders and appropriate consultation on the implementation
plan and participation of affected people in decision making are of utmost importance. This helps the
stakeholders in understanding the project objectives and needs; and in communicating their willingness, views
and preferences. Thus it ensures increased participation of people through better acceptance of the project.
Stakeholders' consultation was done during Socio-Economic study at the project locations and nearby area
within 10 km radius area of the proposed project. Planned Corporate Environment Responsibility (CER)
activities are suggested based on findings of this Socio-economic study report.
3.10.3 Methodology
Socio-Economic aspects report was prepared by following methodology given as under:
1. A detailed desk review of the reports and secondary data related to the socio-economic context of the
project.
2. Reviewing census records.
en-vιsι n
3. Reconnaissance visits to the project site were made.
4. Screening of potential social impacts in the project influence area was carried out.
During the reconnaissance visit, Public Consultations, Focused Group Discussion (FGD) and Personal
Interview were conducted to gather feedback from the local people on the proposed development and
perceived socio-economic impacts.
Table 3-34: List of Villages Where Socio-Economic Study Conducted
Sr. From the Project Site
Villages Sub-District District Wind Direction
No. Distance Direction
1 Kareli 2.92 N Crosswind
2 Bharundi 3.92 WNW Crosswind
3 Siwan Olpad 2.73 WSW Upwind
4 Kudsad Surat 4.65 NNE Downwind
5 Sayan (CT) 2.71 SSW Upwind
6 Shekhpur 1.29 SE Crosswind
Kamrej
7 Ghaludi 2.64 E Crosswind
3.10.3.1 Primary Data Collection: Tools and Techniques

The survey team has used the purposive random sampling method at various stages. It was planned to gather
data from various stake holders. For the purpose of this study a structured Interview Schedule related to socio-
demographic variables and interview guide around the theme of perception of setting up the project and their
expectations from the company was prepared. This assessment takes into consideration the beneficial
socioeconomic impact that the production unit may have on the community. It further assesses community's
perception and their awareness regarding polluting components of the environment. Further, it considers the
impact of the proposed project on the socio-economic status of the surrounding area and their perception
regarding this project. The field work for primary data collection was conducted on 31 st May, 2019 during the
study period of March to May 2019 within the study area of 10 km radius from the project site.
en-vιsι n
Figure 3-19: Villages in Study Area
3.10.3.2 Secondary Data Collection

Latest available census records were referred to understand demography related to Infrastructure facilities,
category of population, Economic Status, Health Status, Education Status, and Civic Amenities, etc.
3.10.3.3 Data analysis and Interpretation

Collected data are analyzed through qualitative and quantitative method of analysis for the better
understanding of the project scenario.
3.10.4 Limitations
Study is limited to the 10 km radius with purposive random sampling from the proposed project site.
3.10.5 The Project Influence Area

The Project Influenced Area (PIA) for the concerned industry comprises 58 minor, major villages and urban
area in 10 km radial distance from the proposed project. Demographical details as per census 2011 of the
study area are given in table below:
en-vιsι n
Table 3-35: List of Villages in PIA (Census 2011)
Census Population 2011 Projecte
District
District
Population Literates Total Worker d
Sub
Sr. Total
Village Area Non- Populati
No. HH SC ST
(ha) Total Male Female Male Female Male Female on for
worker
20217
1 Anita 705.81 247 1110 561 549 90 465 399 352 361 199 550 1746
2 Bolav 645.36 267 1223 620 603 2 653 465 420 386 206 631 1923
3 Kimamli 446.36 226 1067 535 532 36 550 344 326 315 173 579 1678
4 Kathodra 349.47 773 3628 1940 1688 243 638 1473 1022 1158 291 2179 5706
5 Simalthu 357.29 166 820 406 414 0 452 244 222 257 132 431 1290
6 Pardi Bhadoly 489.25 172 676 343 333 113 314 246 205 215 136 325 1063
7 Kanbhi 308.92 150 658 320 338 46 371 233 227 224 131 303 1035
8 Erthan 510.46 311 1436 736 700 119 637 538 467 503 240 693 2258
9 Morthan 592.64 206 948 484 464 154 500 313 261 309 237 402 1491
10 Vihara 357.46 221 1023 528 495 75 418 396 326 361 178 484 1609
11 Kachhab 359.48 83 385 197 188 12 253 164 154 123 49 213 605
Olpad
12 Syadla 505.24 326 1415 715 700 26 964 477 352 473 280 662 2225
Surat
13 Mulad 923.62 841 3755 1944 1811 268 1166 1436 1183 1255 565 1935 5905
14 Kudsad 1687.7 2150 9407 5516 3891 173 1299 4127 2291 3640 771 4996 14794
15 Kareli 801.11 250 1152 577 575 108 598 414 361 351 182 619 1812
16 Bharundi 550.41 219 1031 514 517 0 690 288 249 364 241 426 1621
17 Obhla 391.44 84 430 214 216 84 276 133 118 135 78 217 676
18 Kanthraj 261.86 162 681 349 332 33 312 258 229 233 144 304 1071
19 Sithan 313 230 1144 588 556 2 671 385 323 392 212 540 1799
20 Achharan 420.78 231 1025 518 507 74 521 313 251 363 206 456 1612
21 Sandhiyer 1352.09 693 3207 1646 1561 164 1327 1282 1067 1054 301 1852 5043
22 Khalipor 174.77 86 421 223 198 0 158 170 143 135 66 220 662
23 Madhar 296.25 143 607 315 292 95 369 220 176 186 28 393 955
24 Paria 917.22 554 2506 1302 1204 99 890 963 808 843 375 1288 3941
7 Projected population was considered on the basis of growth rate of respective Taluka
en-vιsι n
District
District
Sub
Sr. Total
No. HH SC ST
worker
20217
25 Siwan 562.07 491 2134 1118 1016 86 509 897 698 705 165 1264 3356
26 Kanyasi 424.62 288 1387 710 677 180 559 477 430 489 231 667 2181
27 Umra 423.58 476 2233 1120 1113 104 1319 806 716 701 409 1123 3512
28 Delad 290.19 863 4028 2060 1968 269 1623 1513 1294 1248 396 2384 6335
29 Gothan 635.27 642 3035 1515 1520 156 960 1188 1018 938 419 1678 4773
30 Vaswari 299.55 172 949 494 455 112 465 345 301 292 106 551 1492
31 Segwasyadla 234.4 159 805 407 398 4 472 243 205 263 156 386 1266
32 Kim (CT) 229 4205 18638 9969 8669 1259 1875 8124 6451 5760 1165 11713 29311
33 Sayan (CT) 702 3337 15324 8539 6785 1050 1857 6755 4729 5338 987 8999 24099
Total Olpad (A) 17518.67 19424 88288 47023 41265 5236 24131 35629 27375 29370 9455 49463 138844
34 Siyalaj 677.71 348 1699 893 806 142 389 666 518 551 209 939 4282
35 Mota Borsara 627.44 1397 5680 3933 1747 298 1315 3230 1048 3092 259 2329 14315
36 Kothva 354.96 4476
Mangrol
341 1776 873 903 11 352 604 509 439 35 1302

37 Palod 315.28 1821 7698 4606 3092 190 732 3550 1904 3027 205 4466 19401
38 Bhatkol 159.95 287 1410 728 682 0 339 490 411 422 47 941 3554
39 Pipodara 834.39 1711 7765 4555 3210 297 633 3475 1926 2963 342 4460 19570
40 Lindiad 651.62 181 914 432 482 106 483 306 294 265 83 566 2304
Total Mangrol (B) 3621.35 6086 26942 16020 10922 1044 4243 12321 6610 10759 1180 15003 67902
41 Shekhpur 568.16 304 1432 767 665 32 677 518 399 447 204 781 3069
42 Ghaludi 395.92 179 877 445 432 28 110 370 338 286 115 476 1880
43 Antroli 416.12 238 1068 509 559 54 517 366 324 317 173 578 2289
44 Tharoli 299.79 41 194 100 94 0 55 76 68 45 18 131 416
Kamrej
45 Navi Paradi 815.69 1061 4474 2440 2034 393 1696 1928 1385 1483 566 2425 9589
46 Akhakhol 305.5 128 590 310 280 0 557 161 122 161 24 405 1265
47 Dhoran Paradi 1052.53 431 1939 988 951 9 689 739 614 554 170 1215 4156
48 Velanja 621.6 568 2550 1327 1223 170 975 966 802 822 352 1376 5465
49 Kathor 1107 2848 13783 6986 6797 721 1791 5550 5025 3831 1141 8811 29541
en-vιsι n
District
District
Sub
Sr. Total
No. HH SC ST
worker
20217
50 Choryasi 226 223 1153 619 534 2 198 447 300 345 53 755 2471
51 Bhairav 410.17 203 961 491 470 79 307 373 357 334 133 494 2060
52 Kamrej 1065.91 3269 16078 8327 7751 879 2927 6306 5051 4749 1379 9950 34459
53 Kholvad 763.62 3186 15535 8310 7225 725 2593 6189 4579 4840 842 9853 33296
54 Bhada 458.51 371 1770 889 881 71 764 579 506 557 100 1113 3794
55 Abrama 1032.28 603 2682 1365 1317 124 1356 930 787 850 480 1352 5748
56 Valak 331.39 450 2153 1105 1048 24 392 780 690 651 139 1363 4614
57 Amboli (CT) 375 1317 6137 3274 2863 402 619 2388 1813 1959 423 3755 13153
Total Kamrej (C) 10245.19 15420 73376 38252 35124 3713 16223 28666 23160 22231 6312 44833 157264
Bharthana
Chorasi
58 431 1169 5679 2935 2744 49 601 1863 1272 1643 435 3601 19367
Kosad (CT)
Total Chorasi (D) 431 1169 5679 2935 2744 49 601 1863 1272 1643 435 3601 19367
TOTAL A+B+C+D 31816.21 42099 194285 104230 90055 10042 45198 78479 58417 64003 17382 112900 383377
Sources: Census 2011, District Surat
3.10.1 Overview of Study Area
Surat city situated on the left bank of river "Tapi" once one of western India's major ports and trading
towns. Surat is second largest city in Gujarat and ninth largest in India. Surat is famous for its textile and
diamond businesses. Three-quarters of the world's diamonds are cut and polished in Surat. Surat has
highest number of flyovers bridges in Gujarat state. Economy of Surat district in Gujarat is concentrated in
the diamond processing, textiles and chemical and petrochemical industries. Surat is also a major
production centre for synthetic textiles in India. Agriculture is the main occupation of the rural folk of the
district and they grow jowar, cotton, rice, groundnut, sugarcane, wheat, fruits and vegetables as the
principal crops. Surat district has 10 talukas like Umarpada, Olpad, Kamrej, Chorasi, Palsana, Bardoli,
Mahuva, Mangrol, Mandvi, Surat City
Sayan is one of the nearest towns of Surat City it is situated at around 13 km radial distance away from
Surat. Sayan is famous for its Sugar Factory. Sayan is having Railway station and bus station. Sayan sugar
is near to National Highway-8 (48). Now Sayan is home for many textile industries nearby Sayan Sugar
industry. Many residential projects come in Sayan.
3.11 FINDINGS OF COMMUNITY CONSULTATIONS

Socio-economic survey was conducted with the help of predesigned tool to measure the socio-economic
status of the people in the study area. On the basis of purposive random sampling, adult males/females
from these villages were selected to collect the information related to socio-economic status. Individual
interviews with the adult male/female, common meetings were conducted in which heads of the villages,
panchayat representatives, and other stakeholders like, school teacher, anganwadi sevika, PHC in charge,
gramsevak etc were present.
The findings of the quick socioeconomic survey and various consultations at community level are
presented below:
3.11.1 Population
Project Influence Area does consist one districts viz. Surat while Olpad, Mangrol, Kamrej, Chorasi
indicated as Sub-district.
In 2011 Census, Surat had population of 60,81,322 from which male and female were 34,02,224 and
26,79,098 respectively. In 2001 census, Surat had a population of 42,75,540 from which males were
23,62,072 and remaining 19,13,468 were females. There was change of 42.24 percent in the population
compared to population as per 2001. In the previous census of India 2001, Surat district recorded increase
of 54.30 percent to its population compared to 1991.
Demographical data of the study area are shown in Table 3-35. Populations in villages of study area
located in Olpad, Mangrol, Kamrej, Chorasi talukas of Surat district were 88,288; 26,942; 73,376 and
5,679 respectively as per census 2011. Total population in the study area was 1,94,285 as per the Census
2011 from which 1,04,230 are males and 90,055 are females. 10,042 Schedule Caste population and
45,198 were Schedule Tribes population in the study area as per census 2011.
3.11.2 Population Density

As per census 2011 India, shows that density of Surat district was 1,337 people per square kilometers. In
2001, Surat district density was at 988 people per sq. km. Surat district administers 4,549 sq. km of areas.
Total population density of study area is 619 persons per sq. km as per census 2011.
3.11.3 Sex Ratio
As per 2011census data of Surat district, sex ratio Surat was stood at 787 per 1000 male in 2011 census
compared to 2001 census figure of 810. Child sex ratio is 835 girls per 1000 boys in 2011 census
compared to figure of 859 girls per 1000 boys of 2001 census data. The average national sex ratio in India
was 940 as per latest reports of Census 2011. Sex ratio of the study area as per census 2011 was 864
female population per 1000 male population.
3.11.4 Literacy Rate

Average literacy rate of Surat in 2011 were 85.53 compared to 77.62 of 2001. If things are looked out at
gender wise, male and female literacy were 89.56 and 80.37 respectively. For 2001 census, the same
figures stood at 83.83 and 69.87 in Surat district. Total literate in Surat district were 45,71,410 of which
male and female were 26,87,468 and 18,83,942 respectively.
As informed by the respondents, literacy level of the study area was comparatively good. Average literacy
rate of the study area was 80.87% as per census 2011. New generation are having more educated than old
generation. Girls and boys education is similar in the study area. Education levels of the students of the
area were observed good. Near Sayan sugar industry provide employment to local people and this
modernization project increase indirect employment for local people. This project gives opportunity to
skilled and unskilled worker.
3.11.5 Economic Profile

It can be concluded that majorly occupations were seen in this region is agricultural activities. Main crops
of the region are paddy, sugar-cane, vegetables, etc and the main markets for these agricultural products
are Surat. Nearby industries give employment to local peoples. Animal husbandry is also the source of
livelihood in study area. Proposed project will increase direct or indirect employment opportunities in the
area. Local area is having high property value from last two decades.
3.11.6 Infrastructure Facilities

It is assessed that in the study area are having available basic infrastructural facilities like, drinking water,
sanitation, drainage, health care centre, dairy centers, anganwadi centre, educational facility, vocational
training centers, electricity, bank, post office, transportation facility, dairy farm, etc. There are transport
facilities like buses, auto-rickshaw and railways. Villages are connected with major highways and
approach roads but some interior parts of village need to be developed. Improvement is required for proper
management of solid waste. Moreover, Sayan village is facing narrow road space near railway station that
is main market, where accidents are reported. To cope up that local authority is trying to develop it.
3.11.7 Educational Facility

All villages are having educational facilities like angawadi and
primary school. Private school also observed in study area.
While villages not having secondary, higher secondary or
Industrial Training Institution (ITI), collages facilities can avail
the facility at Kim, Kamrej, Surat and other nearby areas.
Education levels of the students of the area were observed
good. New generation going for post graduation education in
arts, commerce and science field. 2019.05.31
Primary School
3.11.8 Sanitation
During the assessment, it was observed that in the study area, some
area of villages having proper sanitation facility like door to door
garbage collection, dustbin, drainage, clean and adequate water is
available in study area while tribal area of village having improper
sanitation like open defection (Government scheme Swachchh
Bharat Mission under provide latrines but they are not habituated),
2019.05.31
lack of drainage and the reason for this less education and lower
economic condition. There is need for proper management of solid Dustbin
waste in the villages of the study area.
3.11.9 Water Supply

During the field study, it was observed and informed that individual bore well water uses for drinking
purpose and Ukai canal water use for agriculture activities. Other water sources are Overhead tank and
Hand pump are observed in the study area. Some respondents of the study area have complained that bore
well water is not much good for drinking so they use RO water. There will be no stress on water
availability due to this project because there is no increase of water requirement.
3.11.10 Health Care facility

Health care facility Like PHC is available in Sayan and Sandhiyar. Sayan Sugar trust had constructed
Jeevan Raksha Hospital with 80 beds, and departments like Medical, Surgical, Gynecological, Pediatric,
Orthopedic, Ophthalmologic, Dental, Dermatological and Ayurvedic. It is well equipped by latest
Pathological Analysis Laboratory, X-ray, Sonography, ICU etc. Study area is having accessibility of health
care facilities available.
3.11.11 Culture
Study area having ancient temple in Kudsad village which is approx 250 year old temple of Ranchhod Ray
as informed by the local people. It’s well known as ‘Mini Dakor’. Local people believe that, nobody knows
who and when established this idol at Kudsad temple but said by old people that Vanzara community
(migrating community) brought this idol from Dakor some 400-500 years ago to protect it from attack of
thieves (source: http://kudsadranchhodrai.weebly.com/). Galudi village is also having famous temple and it
is well known as ‘Mini sarangpur’. No significant changes in culture are expected due to this project as
existing sugar unit is running for several years.
3.11.12 Quality of life

The purpose of the Quality of Life Index (QOLI) is to provide a tool for community development which
can be used to monitor key indicators that encompass the social, health, environmental and economic
dimensions of the quality of life in the community. Quality of Life is the product of the interplay among
social, health, economic and environmental conditions which affect human and social development.
(Ontario Social Development Council, 1997)
The village /towns within the 10 km from the project sites shows public amenities related to said
components social, health, economic and environment. Amenities like Anganwadi centres; Self help
group; Telephone/mobile; and power supply are largely witnessed in 100% of the villages. While Public
Private Mode of Transportation (53.45); present in villages. Community centre in (32.76%); Government
Primary School (98.28%); river and canal (86.21%); Black Topped Road (94.83%); Govt. PHC/SC
(29.31%); Commercial bank (15.52%); Agriculture credit society in (10.34%); Total Sanitation Campaign
(0%); Forest Area (3.45%); Permanent Pastures and Other Grazing Land Area (86.21%) and Land under
Miscellaneous Tree Crops etc Area 3.45% of the villages. Thus, total average of amenities cumulatively
social, health, economic and environment components is 54, according to this it can be concluded that
quality of life in the area is moderately good.
3.12 PEOPLE’S PERCEPTION

In the process of Social Assessment study, focus group discussion and personal interviews were scheduled
with local people with an objective of understanding the present as well as subsequent situation faced by
villagers after setting up an industry. It is observed that people perceive this project positively. People have
large expectations of generations of employment from upcoming industries to improve better quality of life
and to reduce unemployment of the area. Further, during assessment, no respondent has complained for the
pollution as the study area is not influenced by industries. People are not against the development only it
should not create pollution. Further, people consider agriculture on industrial job if agricultural water
facility sufficiently provided.
Date: 31/05/2019 Village: Sayan
As per census 2011, total population of Sayan was 15,324 from
8,539 is male and 6,785 is female. According to sarpanch of
village, nowadays village population is approx 45,000 - 50,000.
Day by day town population is increased. Sayan having
infrastructure facility like door to door garbage collection,
drainage, roads, public/city bus service, electricity connection,
street light, general stores, PHC, clinics, hospital, etc are
available in town. Local populations residing in Sayan village
are majorly native Kolis, while there are big numbers of 2019.05.31
migrated population living in the village. Local peoples Panchayat Office
concerned in agriculture activities, private business, industrial
job and animal husbandry. Drainage water is disposed in natural
khadi of the area, according to Sarpanch it should be cleaned
and dipped to cop up for flood situation. Day by day Sayan
population increases so town requires basic amenities like
community hall, veterinary hospital. While during the
discussion with Sarpanch, he expressed that there is urgency of
road widen near Station due to fly over bridge. That will
involve land acquisition as there is liner market system so small 2019.05.31
shops both sides of road are exist. Major portion of road is Consultation with Sarpanch
consumed by flyover bridge alignment so available road
remains too minor.
Date: 31/05/2019 Village: Siwan
2019.05.31
As per census 2011 village population was 2,650. According to Consultation with sarpanch
Sarpanch, presently village population is approx 3,500. Agriculture and animal husbandry is main
occupation of village. Main crops of village are Sugarcane and vegetables. Educational facility available in
village from anganwadi to till 5th standard, while further educational facilities are available at Sayan, Kim
and Surat. New generation are getting graduation and post-graduation degree in various fields. Primary
healthcare Centre (PHC) is available in Sandhiyar and Sayan village. Bore well water is use for drinking
purpose and for agricultural activity purpose water is available from Ukai canal. Drainage facility is
available in village and its water is disposed in near ‘Koyli khadi’.
Date: 31/05/2019 Village: Bharundi
Different caste population lives in the village together like SC, ST,
OBC and other castes population. Agriculture and animal
husbandry are main income sources for villagers. Sugarcane, paddy
and vegetables are main agriculture crops of village. Local people
get education degree in various fields. Anganwadi and primary
school facilities are available in village. Education scenario is good
in study area. New generation are getting higher education and
prefer agriculture activity. Sayan sugar provides employment to 2019.05.31
local people as per their educational qualification. Door to door Group Discussion
garbage collection, dustbin, drainage, road, electricity connection, transportation, community hall, fertilizer
co-operative society, irrigation society, etc are available in the study area. Some of villagers received fund
for construction of house and latrine facility under various government schemes.
Date: 31/05/2019 Village: Kareli
As per census 2011, Kareli population is 1,152. Out of this, 577

are males whereas the females count 575 here. Interaction was
done with anganwadi worker. Where Rice, Sukhdi (Gujarati sweet
making in wheat flour), Green vegetables (two times in a day)
based nutrition food provide in anganwadi centre under Integrated
Child Development Scheme (ICDS) and Sanjivani flavored milk
packet provide under mid day meal scheme. The main objective of 2019.05.31
the ICDS is reduction of prevalence of Mal Nutrition among Primary School Kareli
children and pregnant women. No major health related problem informed in the village. It was informed
that day by day consumption of alcohol in schedule tribe community is increased. Village having available
infrastructure facilities like Anganwadi, 1 to 5th School, roads, electricity connection, street light,
transportation, bus service, etc. are available in village.
Date: 31/05/2019 Village: Kudsad
Main occupation of villagers is agriculture activity. Sugarcane,

Nilgiri, Paddy and Vegetables are main crops of village.
Primary health sub-centre is available in Kudsad village. No
major health related problem identify in village. Drinking water
facilities provide by bore well and for agriculture canal water is
used. Kudsad is known as ‘Mini Dakore’. Generally thousand of
devotees are come temple on full moon day. There are main
2019.05.31
festival celebrate on Janmastami, Ramnavmi and anniversary of Gram Panchayat Kudsad
temple. Transportation, roads, railways, garbage collection,
drainage, post-office, bank, etc are available in village.
Date: 31/05/2019 Village: Shekhpur
As per census 2011 village population is 1,432 and nowadays village

population is around 5,000 as informed during consultation.
Government Primary school up to 5th standard and 1 to 12th
science/commerce private ‘Udan International Academy School’ is
available in Shekhpur. Local people concerned in agriculture activity
and animal husbandry. Sugarcane and vegetable are main crops of the
village. Drinking water facility provides through sump but villagers
2019.05.31
use RO water for drinking purpose while canal water is available for
Consultation with Talati
agriculture purpose. Electricity connection, door to door garbage
collection, Open drainage, Post-office, Transportation is available in village. PHC center is available at
Sandhiyar and for major illness treatment facility is available in various facilities near Surat city.
Date: 31/05/2019 Village: Galundi
Ghaludi is a medium size village located in Kamrej Taluka. Ghaludi

village has population of 877 of which 445 are males while 432 are
females as per Population Census 2011. According to sarpanch, village
having education facility like anganwadi, 1st to 4th standard
government school and till 8 standards ‘Muni International School’
(Private) is also available and for further education various educational
facilities are available at Surat. Infrastructures facilities like bus
2019.05.31
service, drainage, electricity connection, door to door garbage
Gram Panchayat Galudi
collection, street light, roads are available in village but some part of
interior roads need to develop. Village dumping site is available in outside of village. Village having mix
caste population, SC, ST and other castes live together but there is lack of sanitation facility in Schedule
Tribe community. There is Ashapuri temple, Yogeshwar temple and Shree Panch Hanuman Swaminarayan
famous temple and it is well known as ‘Mini sarangpur’. Many people came to pray god.
3.12.1 Conclusions Socio-Economic Survey

All the respondents across all socio-economic groups, age, gender and locations have expressed their views
about the location. According to them, all villages are having basic infrastructural facilities but some
villages need to be improved in some areas like, sanitation, road, water, etc. For sanitation, village
panchayats can use Swachh Bharat Mission scheme. Villagers have positive perception about industry
conditioned only it should not creating pollution. It will improve quality of life by increasing indirect
employment opportunities and also by bringing about a positive change, like; developmental activities,
indirect employment, etc, the respondents have suggested measures which need to be taken up for welfare
of the people. The Company needs to undertake various activities in education, infrastructure development,
and health and environment area as a part of Corporate Environment Responsibility (CER).
CHAPTER 4 ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS AND
MITIGATION MEASURES
4.1 INTRODUCTION
The baseline data are going to be extrapolated to identify the impacts of the proposed modernization
activities on the various aspects of environmental components. Any developmental activity has an impact
on the surrounding environment of its activities, which can be either positive or negative. The negative
impacts are being mitigated with the help of adequate measures so that the environment is not being
damaged and conserved to the maximum extent possible.
4.1.1 Objective
To identify project activities that could beneficially or adversely impact the environment
Predict and assess the environmental impacts of such activities
 Examine each environmental aspect-impact relationship in detail and identify its degree of significance
 Identify possible mitigation measures for these project activities and select the most appropriate
mitigation measure, based on the reduction in significance achieved and practicality in
implementation.
4.1.2 Environmental Aspects

These are elements of an organization’s activities or products or services that can interact with the
environment. Environmental aspects could include activities that occur during normal, abnormal and
emergency operations.
Environmental aspects selected for further study should be large enough for meaningful examination and
small enough to be easily understood.
4.1.3 Environmental Impacts

Environmental impacts are defined as any change to the environment, whether adverse or beneficial,
wholly or partially resulting from an organization’s environmental aspects.
The environmental impacts can be categorized as either Primary or Secondary. Primary impacts are those,
which are linked directly to the project, secondary impacts are those, which are indirectly induced and
typically include the effects on social and economic patterns of the surrounding.
The impacts prepared for the proposed modernization project are based on the assumption that the
pollution continues to remain the same during the operation of the project. The proposed modernization
project would create impact on the environment in two distinct phases.
 Temporary or short term effects caused during construction phase
 Long term effects caused during operational phase
4.1.4 Environmental Indices

The environment includes surroundings in which an organization operates such as air, water, land, natural
resources, flora, fauna, humans and their interrelation.
The environmental indices (or parts of the receiving environment on which impacts are being assessed)
include: Land use/land cover, air quality, noise quality, surface water environment, ground water
environment, soil, ecology and bio diversity, socio economics, occupational health, community health and
safety.
4.1.5 Environmental Impact Assessment Study

After the identification of impacting activities, impacts require to be assessed based on subjective /
objective criteria to assess the impacting activities. This is done in the following steps.
4.1.5.1 Identification of Impacts

This entails employing a simple checklist method requiring:
 Listing of environmental aspects (i.e. activities or parts thereof that can cause environmental impacts)
 Identifying applicable components of the environment on which the environmental aspects can cause
an environmental impact
 Listing the environmental components likely to receive impacts, along with the key impacting
activities on each component.
4.1.5.2 Ecological Impact Assessment Considered the Following Stages

 Identification of the likely zone of influence arising from the whole lifespan of the project;
 Assessment of the ecological impacts of the project and definition of the significance of these
impacts;
 Identification and evaluation of ecological resources and features likely to be affected
 Identification of the biophysical changes likely to affect valued ecological resources and features;
 Assessment of whether these biophysical changes are likely to give rise to a significant ecological
impact, defined as an impact on the integrity of a defined site or ecosystem
 The conservation status of habitats or species within a given geographical area, including
cumulative impacts;
 Refinement of the project to incorporate ecological enhancement measures, mitigation measures to
avoid or reduce negative impacts, and compensation measures for any residual significant negative
impacts;
 Provision for monitoring and following up the implementation and success of mitigation measures
and ecological outcomes, including feedback in relation to predicted outcomes. (Already covered in
Post Project monitoring section)
4.1.5.3 Component Wise Environment Risk Assessment and Mitigation

A component wise approach to environmental risk assessment and mitigation is now applied.
4.2 IMPACT IDENTIFICATION AND ASSESSMENT

Considering that identification of significant environmental impact is essential in the preparation of EIA
report, an attempt has been made here through the use of "Activity Effect" matrix.
4.2.1 Identification Matrix

For simplicity the entire project has been divided into three phases.
 Construction Phase
 Operation Phase
 Decommissioning phase
Impact identification matrix for construction phase, operation phase and decommissioning phase is shown
in the Table 4-1.
Table 4-1: Environmental Impacts
Potential Environmental Impacts on Environment
S.
Project Activity LU/
No. S W NV EB SE RH OH AQ
LC
1 Construction Phase
1.1 Land Acquirement No land acquisition involved, proposed project is within premises.
1.2 Site Clearing ● ● ● o ● ●
1.3 Vehicle movement for
transportation of materials ● ● o● ● ●
and equipment
1.4
Civil Construction ● ● ● ● ● o ● ●
1.5 Heavy fabrication work
including metal cutting ● ● o ● ● ●
(Gas cutting, welding)
1.6 Usage of Water ●
1.7 Usage of fuel, electricity
● ● ●
and resources
1.8 Construction material
● ● ● ● ●
storage and disposal
1.9 Domestic Waste
● ●
generation and disposal
2 Operation Phase
2.1 Storage and Handling of
●
Sugarcane
2.2 Storage and Handling of
bagasse , molasses and raw ● ● ● ● ●
materials
2.3 Transportation of Raw
● o● ●
Materials and Products
2.4 Manufacturing Process ● ● o ● ●
2.5 Usage of water ● ● ●
2.6 Effluent/Sewage
● ● ● ● ● ●
management
2.7 Storage, handling and
disposal of solid/hazardous ● ● ● ● ●
waste
2.8 Usage of Fuel for
Operation of Boiler & DG ● ● o● ● ●o
set and APCM operation
2.9 Landscaping and greenbelt
area development o o o o o o
3 Decommissioning Phase
3.1 Dismantling of structures
of the project components ● ● ● ● ●
●: -ve Imapct; o: +ve Impact

 LU/LC: Landuse/ Landcover;  EB: Ecology & Bio-diversity;
 AQ: Air Quality;  SE: Socio-Economic;
 NV: Noise and Vibration;  RH: Risk & Hazard;
 W: Water;  SHW: Solid &Hazardous waste generation;
 S: Soil;  OH/CH&S: Occupational Health
4.2.2 Impact Assessment and Quantification

This section is devoted to assess the impacts due to the existing and after modernisation in project, which
are the most important components of EIA.
Quantitative assessment with the help of a mathematical model has been done wherever possible. The
mathematical model used for assessment in the present study includes “Atmospheric Dispersion Modeling
System (AERMOD)” dispersion model for air quality. For other cases i.e. Water, Noise, Land / Soil,
Ecology, Socio-economic etc., the available scientific knowledge, consequence analysis and probability of
occurrence is used.
Assessment of environmental impacts involves determination of impacts due to the industrial activities or
the actions involved.
When describing changes/activities and impacts the following parameters are considered:
 Magnitude of Impact- Significance/Severity
 Extent- Permanent/ temporary
 Duration- Long term/ short term
 Reversibility- Reversible/ irreversible; and
 Timing and frequency – Probability of occurrence
4.2.2.1 Scoring the Overall Impact Severity/Consequence

The consequences on various environmental receptors have been ranked into 5 levels ranging from
insignificant to catastrophic consequence and are given in Table 4-2.
Table 4-2: Overall Impact Scoring System due to the Proposed Expansion
Consequence
Magnitude Ranking
Category
The activities and their environmental impacts are judged to be very short term &
Insignificant ±1
reversible change
The activities and their environmental impacts are judged to be short term & reversible
Minor ±2
change
The activities and their environmental impacts are judged to be long term & reversible
Moderate ±3
change
The activities and their environmental impacts are judged to be long term &
Major ±4
irreversible change
The activities and their environmental impacts are judged to be permanent &
Catastrophic ±5
irreversible change
Impact scoring for Ecology and Biodiversity is as given in Table 4-3.

Table 4-3: Impact scoring for Ecology and Biodiversity
Consequence
Magnitude Ranking
Category
 Site specific loss of common floral species (but no tree/trees)
 Removal of vegetation composition which does not form a habitat character for
any species of conservation significance.
 No short term or long term impacts are likely to adversely affect the surrounding
Insignificant ±1
habitat/ecosystem.
 Site specific disturbance to common/generalist faunal species i.e no
movement/displacement of fauna
 No negative impact on surrounding ecosystem functioning or habitat ecology.
 Site specific removal of sapling of trees
 Temporary impact on functioning ecosystem or habitat ecology consisting of
common species.
Minor ±2
 Short /long term impact on adjacent habitats which are resistant to changes but
part of ecosystem.
 Impact on agro-ecosystem even though pollution load is in permissible limit.
Moderate  Site specific loss of common well grown trees. ±3
Consequence
Magnitude Ranking
Category
 Site specific loss of habitats of common species of fauna; but it will not result in
permanent loss of habitat.
 Short /long term impact likely to adversely affect habitat character/ habitat
ecology/ ecosystem function.
 Impact on agro-ecosystem when pollution load increases but can be mitigated.
 Site specific impact on threatened species and impacted species are widely
distributed in study area.
 Short term impacts may lead to loss of large quantity of species or area covered
by species; but it will not lead to loss of local population.
Major ±4
 Short term impacts may lead to loss of local population.
 Site specific loss of fauna listed in IUCN, WCMC, bird life international, or any
other secondary information.
 Impact on habitat/ecosystem of international importance.
 Impact and/or loss of threatened species listed as endemic/ Schedule-I in IWPA-
1972, BSI, red book data, ZSI, or literature published by any State Government
Institute/university/ collage etc.
Catastrophic  Impact on genetic diversity ±5
 Impact on ecosystem i.e. river, forest, wetland etc.
 Impact on WLS / ESZ /NP/ RF
4.2.2.2 Quantifying the Probability of Occurrence of the Impact
After identifying the consequence severity, the probability of occurrence also needs to be estimated to
arrive at a complete picture of environmental impact risk. Table 4-4 &
Table 4-5 provides probability/likelihood ratings on a scale of 1 to 5. These ratings are used for estimating
the likelihood of each occurrence.
Table 4-4: Occurrence Frequency Assessment- Ecological
Category Ranking Occurrence frequency
Regular 5 Continuous occurrence/each day
Frequent 4 Occur several times each year
Periodic 3 Might occur a few time each year
Occasional 2 Might occur few time during project life cycle

Rare 1 One off event during project life cycle
Table 4-5: Occurrence Frequency Assessment-Others

Category Ranking Environment Health and Safety
Frequent 5 Continuous or will happen every time under Has happened more than once per year at the
normal operating condition. location
Often 4 Occur several times under normal operating Has happened at the location
condition.
Likely 3 Might occur at least once Has happened once in organization or more
than one per year in industry
Possible 2 Might occur Heard of in the industry
Rare 1 Very rarely encountered Never heard of in the industry
4.2.2.3 Quantifying Environmental Impact Risk
The level of environmental impact risk is calculated by multiplying the consequence score and the
probability of occurrence together. Thus
Significance of Impact = Consequence Score × Probability of Occurrence
The final score is in relative point score, rather than actual impact. Table 4-6 below as signs significance
criteria, based on the scale of 1-15, used for prioritizing mitigation measures for reducing the
environmental impact risks and thereafter, formulating and implementing. Environmental Management
Plans (EMPs).
To do this, environmental impact risk levels are first scored and identified as mentioned earlier and then
evaluated on the evaluation scale that follows in Table 4-6.
Table 4-6: Environmental Impact Significance Criteria
Consequence (Risk)
Probability
Insignificant (1) Minor (2) Moderate (3) Major (4) Catastrophic (5)
Rare (1) 1 2 3 4 5
Possible (2) 2 4 6 8 10
Likely (3) 3 6 9 12 15
Often (4) 4 8 12 16 20
Certain (5) 5 10 15 20 25
4.2.2.4 Identifying Activities Causing Unacceptable Levels of Environmental Risk

Environmental risks are now clubbed into four levels from extreme to low risk activities. This is
summarized in Table 4-7.
Table 4-7: Environmental Risk Categorization
Score Significance Action Required
15-25 Extreme Activity should not be proceed in current form
Activity should be modified to include remedial planning and actions and be
8-15 High
subject to detailed EHS assessment
4-6 Medium Activity can operate subject to management and / or modification
1-3 Low No action required unless escalation of risk is possible
Ecological risk is categorized in to 3 levels from less, moderate and high ecological risk This is
Table 4-8: Ecological Risk Categorization
Score Significance Action Required
Activity/aspect should be eliminated or activity should be modified to
>20 High
include remedial planning.
11-20 Medium Operation subject to management by operational control
1-10 Low Operation subject to periodic monitoring/surveillance
4.3 SIGNIFICANCE OF IMPACTS & PROPOSED MITIGATION MEASURES

Mitigation measures require being formulated and implemented for all high risk and moderate risk
activities. A programme to implement all mitigation measures is then prepared and presented as an
Environmental Management Program.
For various activities at different stages of industrial setup impacts identified are listed in Table 4-1. While
the nature and extent of impacts is mentioned in Section 4.2.2. The mitigation measures are proposed for
these activities are given in subsequent sections:
en-vιsι n
4.3.1 Land Environment
Impact Scoring
S.
Activity Aspect /Impact Consequence Probability Significance Mitigation Measures Proposed
No. CxP
(C) (P)
Construction Phase
1 Site Clearing and minor Land use change in result of vegetation -4 1 -4 Medium  No trees were cut down during site cleaning activity
excavation removal due to cleaning and excavation and 34% of total premises area was developed as a
of site. It must have increased sun greenbelt.
heating.
2 Civil Construction- Land use of the area was already -4 1 -4 Medium
construction for shed industrial but it was converted from open
to shed.It must have increased sun
heating.
3 Construction material There may have been changes in LU-LC -4 1 -4 Medium  Proper dumping and leveling of construction waste
storage and disposal of land where construction material has shall be ensured.
been disposed.
Operation Phase
1 Usage of water Source of water is bore well and canal -3 5 -15 High  Maximum optimization of water usage is followed by
water. It would have an impact on water utilizing treated water.
body and its competitive users.  Rainwater harvesting system will be installed.
2 Storage, handling and Storage and handling of bagasse changes -3 4 -12 High  The Bagasse is Stored in Bagasse yard within the
disposal of solid/ hazardous land use and land cover of the site. premises and regular care is taken not to spread it.
waste
ETP sludge of this project uses as manure 3 5 15 Positive
in composting that helps in greenery of
land area.
3 Effluent management Effluent generation from the unit and is 3 5 15 Positive  Treatment of effluent will be ensured to achieve
being treated and treated effluent uses for desired quality for on land irrigation.
on land irrigation purpose.
It helps in improving green area of the
land and maintaining water body by
reduction of fresh water requirement.
en-vιsι n
Impact Scoring
S.
Activity Aspect /Impact Consequence Probability Significance Mitigation Measures Proposed
No. CxP
(C) (P)
4 Landscaping and greenbelt Developments of flue gas capturing 3 5 15 Positive  --

area development species are helping to reduce air pollution
within premises.
Decommissioning Phase
1 Dismantling of structures of Change in land use land cover due to -3 1 -3 Low  Proper care will be taken while disposal of
the project components disposal of construction waste of construction material.
dismantled structure.
 Conclusion: the impact scoring results shows that activity comes under Low to High significance however with suggested mitigation measures, impacts can be lowered down. To check the efficiency of
mitigation measures Environment Management Plan is proposed.
en-vιsι n
4.3.2 Soil Environment

Impact Scoring
S.
Activity Aspect/Impact Consequence Probability Significance Mitigation Measures Proposed
No. CxP
(C) (P)
Construction Phase
1 Site clearing and Civil Changes in soil quality of the -2 3 -6 Medium  Construction activity was carried out within premises of
construction activities premises and soil layers may have Sugar mill. So, it did not affect the outside of the premises.
ocuured due to civil construction
activity.
2 Construction material Storage and disposal of -2 1 -2 Low  Construction waste was at none greenery area.
storage and disposal construction material may have  Construction waste was stored and disposed properly.
affected greenery of the land.
Operation Phase
1 Storage and Handling of Possibility of soil contamination if -4 1 -4 Medium  Molasses and Chemicals are stored in designated area with
Bagasse, Molasses and leakage of molasses and chemicals dyke wall and spillage collection system.
Chemicals occurs during storage and handling  The Bagasse is Stored in Bagasse yard within the premises
of raw material and products
2 Effluent/Sewage Possibility of soil contamination if -3 2 -6 Medium  Pucca flooring has been done in ETP area to avoid any type
Management leakage of effluent occurs. of leakage that can be percolated into soil.
3 Storage, handling and Possibility of soil contamination -3 2 -6 Medium  Solid/ hazardous wastes is stored and handled within
disposal of solid/ hazardous due to improper disposal of solid/ designated and on paved area.
waste hazardous waste.  Fly ash is sent to brick manufacturers.
ETP sludge uses as manure for 3 5 15 Positive  ETP sludge is properly utilized as manure for composting
composting improve the soil to develop soil quality of the premises.
quality.
4 Landscaping and greenbelt Greenbelt and landscaping activity 3 5 15 Positive  --
area development improve quality of soil and its
fertility.
 Conclusion: The impact scoring results shows that activity comes under Low to Medium significance however with suggested mitigation measures, impacts can be lowered down. To check the efficiency of
mitigation measures Environment Management Plan is proposed.
en-vιsι n
Impact Scoring
S.
No. CxP
(C) (P)
Construction Phase
1 Civil construction activity Water consumption in construction as -2 4 -8 High  Due care was taken to avoid water wastage.
well as domestic activities would have  Rain water harvesting system will be installed to
been lead to resource depletion. It could recharge the ground water level.
have been affect on competitive users
and their lifestyle.
2 Water usage Water requirement for the construction -2 4 -8 High
activities, it would have been affect on
competitive users and their lifestyle like;
flora, fauna, people, and soil quality of
the area.
Operation Phase
1 Usage of water Water consumption in various activities -3 4 -12 High  Unit will installed rain water harvesting system
such as domestic, production, utilities within premises to collect and reuse rainwater.
may lead to resource depletion and its  Effluent generated from the production is being
impact on other ecosystem. treated in ETP and treated water reuses for on land
irrigation purpose.
Conclusion: the impact scoring results shows that activity comes under High significance however with suggested mitigation measures, impacts can be lowered down. To check the efficiency of mitigation
measures Environment Management Plan is proposed.
en-vιsι n
4.3.4 Noise Environment

Impact Scoring
S. No. Activity Aspect/Impact Consequence Probability Significance Mitigation Measures Proposed
CxP
(C) (P)
Construction Phase
1 Vehicle movement for Workers as well as fauna would -2 3 -6 Medium  Timely lubrication of equipments.
transportation of materials have been dirstubed due to the  Usage of PUCs Certified vehicles and speed limit of
and equipment generation of excessive noise from vehicles
operation of vehicular movement  Work in day time only.
and equipment.  Workers were used PPE’s like ear plug, ear muff etc.
2 Civil Construction activity Noise generation due to operation -2 3 -6 Medium  Noise generating equipments was operated in day
and heavy fabrication work of various equipments during time to reduce its impact.
construction activity, disposal and
storage of construction materials
etc. It would have an impact on
local ecosystem.
3 Usage of fuel, electricity Usage of fuel, electricity and -2 3 -6 Medium  Lubrication was done periodically
and resources resources was generated noise  Generated noise limited to premises and work done
within the premises and that would in day time.
have been an impact on workers
and fauna.
Operation Phase
1 Storage and handling of During storing and handling of -3 4 -12 High  Periodically lubrication to machineries are done and
Sugarcane Sugarcane heavy machinery are this noise is localized to premises only.
utilized and truck movement are
Manufacturing Process there.
Noise is generated due to operation
of machineries, pumps during
production, etc. It.
Its impact on workers and fauna
present at there.
2 Transportation of Raw Increase in noise due to -2 4 -8 High  Transportation activity shall be done by mainted
Materials and Products transportation of raw materials and vehicles.
products, its impact on fauna and  Timely lubrication of vehicles.
human settlement on route.  Speed management within premises to avoid Traffic
generation.
3 Effluent Management Noise and vibration due to -3 5 -15 High  Proper and timely lubrication, oiling and
operation of blowers, pumps, maintenance of all plant and machineries are carried
aerators etc in effluent treatment out.
plant  Adequate noise control measures such as
en-vιsι n
Impact Scoring
S. No. Activity Aspect/Impact Consequence Probability Significance Mitigation Measures Proposed
CxP
(C) (P)
4 Usage of Fuel for operation Noise from operation of boiler, antivibration pad for equipment with high vibration
of boiler & DG set DG set, etc is provided.
 All the vibrating parts are checked periodically and
serviced to reduce the noise generation.
5 Landscaping and greenbelt Reduction in Noise and air 5 3 15 Positive Impact  About 2,02,343 m2 of area has been developed as
area development pollution levels due to development Green belt with noise capturing species.
of noise capturing plants in the
vicinity of the project site
 Decommissioning Phase
1 Dismantling of structures of Noise due to operation of heavy -2 1 -2 Low  Maintenance of vehicles and equipment, restriction
the project components machineries for dismantling of this of dismantling activity only for day time with proper
project. planning will reduce noise levels.
 Conclusion: The impact scoring results shows that activity comes under Low to High significance with one positive activity/impact, however with suggested mitigation measures, impacts can be
lowered down. To check the efficiency of mitigation measures Environment Management Plan is proposed.
4.3.4.1 Projection of Proposed Traffic
Activities:
Vehicular movement for raw material, products, wastes, and fuel transportation
Mitigation:
Traffic survey was conducted at Sayan to Kim road. Based on the traffic survey hourly vehicular traffic has
been calculated. Passenger Car Unit (PCU) has been calculated by applying PCU factor. Increase in load of
trucks due to the movement of raw materials, fuel and products have been calculated. A design capacity of
road has been taken from the Indian Road Code. Assessment of existing and after modernization traffic
load due to the proposed activities is given in Table 4-9.
Table 4-9: Assessment of Proposed Traffic Load
Two Lane without divider (One way)
PCU Factor as
Type of Vehicles Average Vehicles per Indian Road
Equivalent PCU
during Peak Code
per day
hr./day
Large Trailer 26 78 3
Heavy (Bus, Truck, etc) 302 906 3
Medium (Tractors, light
242 242 1
commercial vehicles etc)
Light (Car, Jeep, Pickup
313 313 1
Van etc.)
3 Wheeler (Rickshaw) 47 47 1
2 Wheeler (Scooter,
104 52 0.5
motorcycle, cycle etc)
Total PCU/hr 1638
Width of Road (m) 7.5
Design PCU per hr 2400
Existing PCU per hr 1638
Proposed Load (Trucks/hr) 35
Proposed PCU per hr 105
As a Worst Scenario taken 105

Proposed PCU per hr
Total PCU per day after the 1743
Proposed Project
From the table, it can be concluded that even for considering the worst case; there is minor increase in
vehicular load due to the modernization project. However, the total traffic load due to after modernization
project activity is very low compare to the design capacity of roads. Adequate parking arrangements are
provided within the industrial premises.
As no major increase in traffic due after modernization project, there is less chance in increase in vehicular
pollution. However, unit is taking adequate measures such as transporters is instructed to use only PUC
certified trucks/vehicles and carrying out regular service and maintenance of them.
en-vιsι n
4.3.5 Ecological Environment
Impact Scoring
S.
Activity Aspect Consequence Probability Significance Mitigation Measures Proposed
No. CxP
(C) (P)
Construction Phase
1 Site Clearing Existing vegetation may have been lost and -2 1 -2 Low  Tree cutting activity was not carriedout during site
disturbed the fauna preparation. Total 34 % of greenbelt was developed
within premises.
2 Vehicle movement for Spillage of construction material could have -2 2 -4 Low  Waste materials were stored and disposed properly.
transportation of been disturbed the fauna & the growth of the  Soil characteristics were restored with time hence
materials and equipment flora. this was reversible impact.
3 Transportation and Construction work leads -3 2 -6 Low  Vehicular movement and construction activity was
Civil Construction & to dust emissions which could have been restricted only for daytime.
disposal of construction affect the faunal species of the premises.
material Existing soil characteristic may have been
4 Heavy fabrication work lost and it leads to disturbance to growth of -1 2 -2 Low
including metal cutting flora species.
(Gas cutting, welding) High noise may generate due to operation of
heavy machinery for demolition,
construction and fabrication works which
would have been disturbed the faunal
species of the area.
Operation Phase
1 Storage and Handling of Penetration of leachate & Spillage of waste -4 1 -4 Low  Molasses and Chemicals are stored in designated
Bagasse, molasses and can cause adverse impact on local flora & area with spillage collection system.
haz. waste fauna in nearby vicinity area.  Bagasse is storage in bagasse yards.
 ETP sludge is properly utilized as manure for
composting to develop soil quality of the premises.
2 Effluent/Sewage Due to leakage or spillage of effluent can -1 1 -1 Low  Effluent generated from the production is treated in
management cause site specific short term disturbance of ETP and treated water reuses for on land irrigation
subsoil fauna. purpose.
3 Manufacturing Activity Noise generation due to process activity -1 2 -2 Low  Timly lubrication of machinaries
 PPE’s are provided to worker.
 Heavy noise generating equipmrnts are installed with
acuastic enclousers.
en-vιsι n
Impact Scoring
S.
Activity Aspect Consequence Probability Significance Mitigation Measures Proposed
No. CxP
(C) (P)
3 Usage of Fuel for Emission of fluegas due to operation of -2 5 -10 Low  Proper APCD is provided to Boiler, D. G. Set.
operation of boiler, boiler and D. G.Set.  APCM is required to the bagasse, methane gas and
D.G.set & operation of Furnace oil based boiler. Multicyclone Separator
Air Pollution Control with Wet Scrubber is provided with 4 nos. of
Measures System boilers and adequate stack height is provided with
1 no. of boiler.
 Adequate noise control measures such as
antivibration pad for equipment with high vibration
is provided. The equipment, which generates
excessive noise (e.g. DG set), is provided with
enclosures etc.
6 Landscaping and Development of greenbelt area is lead to 4 4 16 Positive  About 2,02,343 m2 of area has been developed as
greenbelt area restoration of local flora, fauna and affected impact Green belt with noise capturing species.
development habitats
7. Dismantling of structures Noise due to operation of heavy machineries -2 -4 -8 Low  The equipment, which generates excessive noise
of the project for dismantling of project may affect local (e.g. DG set), shall be provided with enclosures.
components flora, fauna and affected habitats.  Dismantling activity will be restricted for only day
time.
en-vιsι n
4.3.6 Socio Economic Environment

Impact Scoring
S.
Activity Aspect/ Impact Consequence Significance Mitigation Measures Proposed
No. Probability (P) CxP
(C)
Construction Phase
1 Site clearing Temporary employment generation 2 4 8 Positive  Workers provided PPEs during the activity.
2 Vehicle movement for Temporary employment generation 2 4 8 Positive  Local should be used for this work
transportation of materials
and equipment Flue gas and dust emission deteriorate the -3 5 -15 High  Vehicles with PUC allowed controlling flue gas
air and that may affect the health of driver emissions.
and local community of the route of
transportation.
3 Civil Construction; Temporary employment generation 2 4 8 Positive  Local people given preference thus improving socio-
Heavy fabrication work economic level of study area.
including metal cutting  Uses of heavy machineries used during day time to
(Gas cutting, welding); mitigate the noise levels and PPEs provided to the
Painting workers.
Operation Phase
1 Transportation of Raw Temporary employment generation & 3 4 12 Positive  --
Materials, Products and income to the state by various taxes.
waste
Flue gas and dust emission deteriorate the -3 4 -12 High  Vehicles with PUC shall be allowed controlling flue
air and that may affect the health of drivers gas emissions.
as well as people living near route of  Health care activities should be organized.
transport.
2 Manufacturing Process; Permanent employment generation due to 3 5 15 Positive  During the operation, preference is being given to local
Usage of water; Usage production activities, majorly indirect people, which will help in improving socio-economic
of Fuel for operation of employment generation. level of engaged people.
boiler & DG set
Pollution load from industry such as -3 -5 -15 High Unit will be adopted some practice to reduce impact
 Usage of water as the source of water on surrounding community. Proposed measures are
is bore well and canal water that will as under:
create scarcity of water.  To reduce fresh water demand, utilization of
 Flue gas emission from boilers & DG treated water and recharging of rainwater.
sets will deteriorate the air of the area.  Wastage of water will be avoided, and proper
 will create negative impact on health treatment of wastewater generated from the
of the community. project.
en-vιsι n
Impact Scoring
S.
Activity Aspect/ Impact Consequence Significance Mitigation Measures Proposed
No. Probability (P) CxP
(C)
3 Operation of Air This will help to reduce flue gas emissions 4 5 20 Positive  To control flue gas and fugitive emission adequate
Pollution Control within premises as well as study area and pollution control measures will be installed &
Measures System thus reducing impacts on various receptors. followed.
 Health care activities should be carried out for
4 Landscaping and Plantation will be carried out in villages 4 4 16 Positive community.
greenbelt area within 10 km radius with major focus in  Healthcare activities for worker due to bagasse.
development core zone under CER/CSR activities.  Village developmental activities shall be done.
Plantation within community area will help to reduce

impact due to air pollution and noise pollution.
1 Dismantling of Temporary employment will be generated 2 1 2 Positive  --
structures of the project due to transportation, requirement of heavy
components machinery, etc for the dismantling of the
project.
 Conclusion: the impact scoring results shows that activity comes under High significance with positive activity/impact, however with suggested mitigation measures, impacts can be lowered down. To check the
efficiency of mitigation measures Environment Management Plan is proposed.
en-vιsι n
4.3.7 Risk & Hazard and Occupational Health & Safety

Impact Scoring
S.
No. CxP
(C) (P)
Construction Phase
1 Vehicle movement for Emission of PM10, HC, NOX & CO. -3 4 -12 High  P.U.C Certified Vehicles
transportation of materials Noise generation  Regular Maintenance of Vehicles
and equipment  Speed control of the vehicles
 Proper Road was provided
2 Site Clearing Dust generation -2 1 -2 Low  Dust mask was provided
 Sprinkling of water over construction
3 Civil Construction Injuries due to Fall at height, Collapse -2 5 -10 High  Barricaded construction area
of scaffold  Safety net was provided
 Proper PPE’s provided to workers
4 Heavy fabrication work Noise/Vibration, -2 5 -10 High  PPE’s provided to Workers for various activities.
including metal cutting Fire due to welding,  DG set were installed for emergency only with
(Gas cutting, welding) proper stack height to have proper dispersion of
Injuries/cutting due to fall from height, pollutants
Struck with objects  Good housekeeping maintained
5 Usage of fuel, electricity Fire due to fuel storage/handling if -2 5 -10 High  Earthing was provided
and resources ignition available  Fire hydrant/Fire extinguishers was available
Electrocution due to Electric shock,  First aid box is available
burns, damaged cable, no earthing
6 Construction material Injuries/cuts due to improper storage, -2 4 -8 High  Avoided manual handling
Handling, storage and excessive weight lifting  Proper stacking or storage of construction material
disposal  Preventive maintenance of crane of lifting machine
Operation Phase
1 Storage and Handling of Injury/cuts due to Fall from height, -3 2 -6 Medium  Using proper PPEs
Bagasse and molasses Accident due to moving part  Closed conveyor belt is provide
Bagassosis due to long term
Bagasse dust exposure  Nip guard/Fixed guard provide
Spillage/leakage from molasses tank  Preventive maintenance
 Pull code switch is provide
 Spillage/leak attend properly
 Regular medical checkup of employees was carried
out. Same practice is continuing.
en-vιsι n
Impact Scoring
S.
No. CxP
(C) (P)
2 Manufacturing Process Mechanical hazards e.g. pressure release, -3 1 -3 Low  Feed quantity controlled either volumetrically or
leaks, equipment or utility failure gravimetrically.
Electrical hazard  Process control devices like sensors, alarms, trips and
Noise/Vibration other control systems
Heat Stress due to improper ventilation
 High Temperature indicator valve and alarm system
 Auto cut off system after reaching of predetermined
maximum safe temperature.
 Pressure gauge and Safety Control valve
 Skilled workers
 Mechanical seal in all pumps and reactors
 Proper Insulation
 Adequate Illumination and Ventilation
3 Effluent Management Injuries/Cutting due to moving -3 2 -6 Medium  Trained and Experience Staff
part/machinery, Fall, Slip, struck with  Good Practices is follow
object
Biological hazard due to direct exposure  Use proper PPEs
with untreated effluent  Proper disposal of ETP sludge
Spillage/leakage of effluent  Provided impervious/pucca flooring near ETP area
4 Storage, handling and Release of toxic vapor due to spillage/ -3 2 -6 Medium  Adequate level of natural or artificial lighting and
disposal of hazardous leakage of drum. Adequate Ventilation
chemical and waste Injuries/Cuts due to collapse of  Proper Raw material stacking.
containers.
Spillage/ leakage of chemicals during  Avoid manual handling.
transportation, loading, unloading,  Provided Fire Extinguishers/fire hydrant
charging.  Operators/Workers are trained for Safe Work
Practices.
 Spillage is cleaned or neutralized with suitable
media.
 Use of Suitable protective clothing, gloves, boots
shall be used
5 Usage of Fuel for Flue gas emission from vehicles, boiler, -3 1 -3 Low  To control process gas, flue gas and fugitive emission
operation of boiler, CPP DG set. adequate pollution control measures are installed.
& DG set Hearing loss due to noise of operation of -3 2 -6 Medium  Use proper PPEs
boiler, CPP & DG set  Preventive -maintenance and lubricating to reduce
noise.
 Plantation
 The details for additional requirements are given in
Table 7-7.
en-vιsι n
Impact Scoring
S.
No. CxP
(C) (P)
Operation of APCM will reduce 2 5 10 Positive  --
emissions.
8 Landscaping and greenbelt The greenbelt consisting of air & noise 2 5 10 Positive  --
area development pollutant tolerant will help to reduce
pollution load and thus improving health
of workers
1 Dismantling of structures Workers will be susceptible fugitive -3 1 -3 Low  Site will be covered properly to reduce effect of
of the project components emission, flue gas emission, excessive fugitive emission from civil and site clearing
noise & occupational injuries etc. during activities on nearby community due to dismantling of
dismantling of structures of the project this project.
components.  Workers were provided with PPE’s.
 Conclusion: the impact scoring results shows that activity comes under Low to High significance with one positive activity/impact, however with suggested mitigation measures, impacts can be lowered
down. To check the efficiency of mitigation measures Environment Management Plan is proposed.
en-vιsι n
Impact Scoring
S.
Activity Aspect Probability Significance Mitigation Measures Proposed
No. Consequence (C) CxP
(P)
Construction Phase
1 Site clearing, Vehicle Fugitive emissions may have occurred -3 4 -12 High  Construction materials were transported in covered
movement for due to construction activities. trucks. Water sprinkling was carried out on site.
transportation of materials Flue gas emissions may have ocuured Minimum stock of materials were maintained and
and equipment due to vehicular movement; DG set covered with sheet.
Civil Construction operation.  Proper maintenance of transportation of vehicles was
Constuction material VOC during painting could have carried out to reduce flue gas emission.
storage and disposal affected on health of workers.  VOC may affected workers hence PPE’s was
Usage of fuel, electricity mandatory while Painting.
and resouces
Heavy fabrication work

including metal cutting
(Gas cutting, welding)
2 Domestic waste Odour would have been generated -3 1 -3 Low  Domestic waste was disposed regularly.
generation and disposal from domestic waste, if not disposed
properly.
Operation Phase
1 Storage and Handling of Fugitive emission due to storage and -2 2 -4 Medium  To Control fugitive emission, following measures
Bagasse, Molasses and handling of bagasse and molasses. will adopt by unit.
Chemicals  Molasses and Chemicals are stored in designated
2 Effluent mnagement Odour generation from effluent, if it is -3 1 -3 Low area with dyke wall and spillage collection system.
not disposed properly.  The Bagasse is Stored in bagasse yards.
3 Ttransportation of Flue gas emissions may have ocuured -3 4 -12 High  Manufacturing activity is carried out in closed
materials and equipment due to vehicular movement reactors / vessels and regular checking and
4 Manufacturing Process Fugitive emission during -3 5 -15 High maintenance of the same is carried out to avoid any
Manufacturing Process. leakages.
5 Storage, handling and Continues inhalation of particulate -3 1 -3 Low  Regular monitoring should be done
disposal of matters consists of dust, fumes, mist  Precautionary measures are taken while handling
solid/hazardous waste and smoke cause acute health various hazardous chemicals.
problems, lung damage and respiratory  Transporters is instructed to cover the trucks by
problems to the surroundings tarpaulin sheets.
habitants.  The tanks/ drums containing acids are stored in
6 Usage of Fuel for Flue gas emission due to operation of -3 5 -15 High separate storage area. Manual handling is avoided
operation of boiler, DG DG and Boiler as far as possible.
set and APCM operation  Proper ventilation is provided for dispersion of
7 Operation of Air Pollution Reduction in pollution load. 3 5 15 Positive acid fumes
Control Measures System impact  Proper disposal is carried out for solid/hazardous
en-vιsι n
Impact Scoring
S.
Activity Aspect Probability Significance Mitigation Measures Proposed
No. Consequence (C) CxP
(P)
waste.
Following measures are proposed to control
fugitive emissions during existing and after
modernization activities:
 Good housekeeping is maintained in the plant.
 The open area is covered with either greenbelt of
paved surface to avoid dust during transportation
within plant.
 Wetting of roadways to reduce traffic dust and re-
entrained particles
 Fly ash is mixed with ETP sludge and used in
factory farm or sell to brick manufacturer
 Flue Gas emission and APCM
 APCM is required to the bagasse, methane gas and
Furnace oil based boiler. Multicyclone Separator
with Wet Scrubber is provided with 4 nos. of
boilers and adequate stack height is provided with
1nos. of boiler.
 APCM is required to DG set; Acoustic Enclosure is
provided.
 There is no process gas emission from existing and
after modernization project.
8 Landscaping and The greenbelt area consists of air 3 4 12 Positive --
greenbelt area pollutant tolerant species which helps impact
development to reduce pollution load.
1 Dismantling of structures Fugitive emission due to dismantling -2 1 -2 Low  Site will be covered to avoid fugitive emission.
of the project components of project structures.  Dismantled construction waste will be transported in
covered trucks.
en-vιsι n
4.3.9 Air Quality Modeling
During operation phase the emission of flue gas is take place. Although required APCM will be provided,
based on modeling required modification will be suggested after impact quantification. The details of flue gas
stack considered for study and input data for model area given in Table 4-10. Primary meteorological data
(refer Table 3-1) have been used for AERMOD.
Table 4-10: Details of Stacks
Exit Stack
Stack Stack Exit Gas Emission
Stack Gas Expected
Stack Attached to Diameter Height Temperature Rate
No. Velocity Pollutant
(m) (m) (K) (g/s)
(m/s)
Steam Boiler No.: 1, PM 2.265
1 2 & 3* 3.2 30 2.8 438 SO2 0.036
(20 TPH each) NOx 0.059
PM 1.464
Steam Boiler No.: 4
2 2.85 40 3 433 SO2 0.034
(40 TPH)
NOx 0.046
PM 1.464
Steam Boiler No.: 5
3 2.85 40 3 433 SO2 0.034
(40 TPH)
NOx 0.046
PM 0.222
Steam Boiler No.: 6
4 2 30 0.75 433 SO2 0.003
(10 TPH)
NOx 0.005
After Modernization (After seperation of Boiler No. 3 from common stack No. 1)
PM 11.716
Steam Boiler No.:
1 3.2 30 14 438 SO2 20.446
1, 2 (20 TPH each)
NOx 7.348
Steam Boiler No.: PM 4.902
2 3 2.06 30 14 433 SO2 8.554
(20 TPH) NOx 3.074
PM 8.184
Steam Boiler No.:
3 3 40 11 433 SO2 14.282
4 (40 TPH)
NOx 5.133
PM 8.184
Steam Boiler No.:
4 3 40 11 433 SO2 14.282
5 (40 TPH)
NOx 5.133
PM 2.976
Steam Boiler No.:
5 2 30 9 433 SO2 5.193
6 (10 TPH)
NOx 1.866
4.3.9.1 AERMOD
The dispersion of pollutants in the atmosphere is a function of several meteorological parameters viz.
temperature, wind speed and direction, mixing depths, inversion level, etc. A number of models have been
developed for the prediction of pollutant concentration at any point from an emitting source.
Atmospheric Dispersion Modeling System (AERMOD) is a steady-state plume model that incorporates air
dispersion based on planetary boundary layer turbulence structure and scaling concepts, including treatment of
both surface and elevated sources, and both simple and complex terrain.
In the stable boundary layer (SBL), it assumes the concentration distribution to be Gaussian in both the
vertical and horizontal. In the convective boundary layer (CBL), the horizontal distribution is also assumed to
be Gaussian, but the vertical distribution is described with a bi-Gaussian probability density function (pdf).
This behavior of the concentration distributions in the CBL was demonstrated by Willis and Deardorff (1981)
and Briggs (1993).
en-vιsι n
Additionally, in the CBL, AERMOD treats “plume lofting,” whereby a portion of plume mass, released from
a buoyant source, rises to and remains near the top of the boundary layer before becoming mixed into the
CBL. AERMOD also tracks any plume mass that penetrates into the elevated stable layer, and then allows it
to re-enter the boundary layer when and if appropriate. For sources in both the CBL and the SBL AERMOD
treats the enhancement of lateral dispersion resulting from plume meander.
There are two input data processors that are regulatory components of the AERMOD modeling
system: AERMET, a meteorological data preprocessor that incorporates air dispersion based on planetary
boundary layer turbulence structure and scaling concepts, and RAMMET, a powerful meteorological pre-
processor which allows you to convert raw meteorological data to the format required by the U.S. EPA
AERMOD model.
4.3.9.2 Methodology
Meteorology is the fluid mechanics applied to the atmosphere. Meteorological conditions play an important
role in determining proposed air quality and environmental conditions. The essential relationship between
meteorology and atmospheric dispersion involves the wind in the broadest sense of the term. Wind
fluctuations over a very wide range of time and space scales accomplish dispersion and strongly influence
other processes associated with them. The characterization of the proposed meteorological conditions near a
source of pollutants is, therefore, a critical aspect for assessing air quality in the ambient environment. For the
rapid air quality impact assessment meteorological data for the desired season/period over the project region
are used for air quality modeling. The following subsections describe the prime meteorological parameters
during the observation period which govern the dispersion of pollutants.
4.3.9.3 Mixing Height

Mixing Height (MH) is the vertical extent through which the contaminant plume can be mixed. Forecasting of
mixing height is done with the aid of the vertical temperature profile. The MH is a function of stability. In
unstable air the MH is higher and in stable air the MH is lower. With a lower MH, there is a smaller volume of
air in which the pollutant can be dispersed, resulting in higher concentrations in the ambient environment.
There is a seasonal variation of MH. During summer daylight hours, MH can be few thousand feet whereas
for winter it can be a few hundred feet. It varies also in the course of a day. It is lowest at night and increases
during the day.
4.3.9.4 Maximum Ground Level Concentration

Modernize mill is located in Sayan, Surat. Hence, baseline concentration will give cumulative pollution load
from various industrial set up as well as vehicular & other pollution; hence it was necessary to assess
contribution of modernization sugar mill. Model was run for proposed modernized pollution source (i.e.
Boiler of 20 TPH x 3, 40 TPH x 2 and 10 TPH x 1) under observed meteorological condition and as per model
24 hours average maximum GLC of PM10, SO2 and NOx is located at 1.74 km in NE direction.
Table 4-11: Maximum Ground Level Concentration (Average 24 hourly)
Co-ordinates Average 24 hourly
Pollutant Maximum Ground Level Distance (km) Direction
X Y Concentration (g/m3)
PM10 3.33
SO2 1010.10 1010.10 0.07 1.74 NE
NOX 0.001
en-vιsι n
While the predicted 24 hourly short term incremental Concentrations from at the monitoring locations are
given in Table 4-12.
The spatial distribution of ground level incremental concentrations of PM10, SO2 and NOx, due to modernized
plant operation on the study area of 10 km around the site is shown in Figure 4-1, Figure 4-2 and Figure 4-3.
en-vιsι n
Figure 4-1: Spatial Distribution of 24-Hour Average PM10 Concentration from the Source (μg/m3)
en-vιsι n
Figure 4-2: Spatial Distribution of 24-Hour Average SO2 Concentration from the Source (μg/m3)
en-vιsι n
Figure 4-3: Spatial Distribution of 24-Hour Average NOx Concentration from the Source (μg/m3)
en-vιsι n
Table 4-12: 24 hourly Short Term Incremental Concentrations from Source
Co-ordinates Existing
monitored 24 Hourly
Monitoring Resultant
Pollutant maximum Incremental
Stations X Y (µg/m3)
concentration (µg/m3)
(µg/m3)
Project PM10 83.7 0.00 83.7
Site_Sayan 0 0 SO2 18.2 0.00 18.2
Sugar (A1) NOx 26.30 0.00 26.3
PM10 82.11 0.28 82.39
Sayan (A2) -1812.05 -2641.67 SO2 18.71 0.00 18.71
NOx 22.73 0.00 22.73
PM10 67.11 0.25 67.36
Segvasyadla
-5530.40 -5424.55 SO2 14.63 0.00 14.63
(A3)
NOx 19.27 0.00 19.27
PM10 68.91 0.23 69.14
Obhla (A4) -3952.54 3310.07 SO2 14.12 0.00 14.12
NOx 18.87 0.00 18.87
PM10 73.1 0.91 74.01
Mulad (A5) 857.27 6872.50 SO2 16.86 0.01 16.87
NOx 20.53 0.02 20.55
PM10 65.43 0.89 66.32
Kudsad (A6) 6822.52 1855.80 SO2 15.73 0.01 15.74
NOx 19.84 0.02 19.86
PM10 86.24 0.63 86.87
Pipodara (A7) 1030.41 -1185.52 SO2 19.34 0.01 19.35
NOx 28.27 0.01 28.28
PM10 73.64 0.09 73.73
Shekhpur
2610.50 3884.40 SO2 17.14 0.00 17.14
(A8)
NOx 22.18 0.00 22.18
Predication of incremental values of CO and HC are not done as there were not detected in baseline
monitoring.
4.3.9.4.1 CONCLUSION
After establishment of proposed modernized project, these concentrations are found to be well below the
permissible NAAQs norms for rural/residential zone and Industrial zone. Therefore, the proposed
modernization activity will not have any significant adverse impact on the air environment.
en-vιsι n
CHAPTER 5 ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES (TECHNOLOGY AND
SITE)
5.1 PROJECT ALTERNATIVE

M/s. Shree Sayan Vibhag Sahakari Khand Udhyog Mandli Ltd. is a Co-operative Mandli and currently
engaged in production of sugar from sugarcane and sugar unit has modernized its existing sugar crushing
plant and machineries by installation of advanced technologies based machineries for sugar mill. Unit is able
to meet the demand of various products locally and globally. This is generated direct and indirect employment
opportunity for various levels of people including local area employment. The demand for products intended
to be manufactured is increasing in domestic and global market.
5.2 SITE ALTERNATIVE

Modernization sugar mill of existing unit is located in Sayan, Surat; which is well situated with proper
drainage and approach roads and power supply, manpower, transportation, etc. and sufficient land was
available for the establishment of the new modernized mill.
5.3 FUEL ALTERNATIVE

In modernization sugar mill Bagasse, Methane gas & Furnace oil is consumed as fuel in boiler according to
the boiler capacity same as existing mill which is given in Table 2-13; in existing mill diesel was used in DG
set as a fueland same is continuing in modernization mill. Hence, no other fuel alternative is envisaged as
these fuels are easily available.
5.4 WATER SUPPLY ALTERNATIVE

Total water requirement for the existing mill is 5026 KLD and after modernization, it is 3120 KLD, so
reduced around 1906 KLD water due to adoption of new modernization mill. Due to this project, existing load
on sources of water demand is reduced so sources are sufficient to cater the reduced demand of water for the
project. Soruces area Canal/Bore well (Permission letter from of Narmada Water Resources water supply and
Kalpsar Department Annexure II); hence, no other alternative was envisaged.
5.5 BEST AVAILABLE TECHNOLOGY

Existing mill was based on old technology that was steam driven two milling tandem mill and yield of its
products were reducing day by day so management had decided to replace existing sugar mill by installing
modernized mill that is electric driven single tandem mill.
5.6 WASTEWATER TREATMENT AND USE ALTERNATIVE

In existing 3031 KLD and after modernization 1530 KLD waste water is generated from the operational
activities. After modernization, toatal industrial effluent (1380 KLD) is treated in existing Effluent Treatment
Plant (ETP). Domestic sewage (150 KLD) was disposed off through septic tank/soak pit system in existing
mill while in modernization mill; it will be treated along with industrial effluent in ETP. Treated water is
reused for on land irrigation/plantation/gardening purpose within the factory premises same as existing mill
practice.
en-vιsι n
CHAPTER 6 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAM
6.1 INTRODUCTION
Environmental monitoring describes the processes and activities that need to take place to characterise and
monitor the quality of the environment. It checks efficiency of mitigation measures and changes in
environment over period of time.
The objectives of environmental monitoring program are;
 To verify the results of the impact assessment study in particular with regard to new development;
 To follow the trend of parameters which have been identified as critical;
 To check or assess the efficiency of the pollution control measures;
 To ensure that new parameters, other than those identified in the impact assessment study, do not
become critical through the commissioning of new installations;
 To check assumption made with regard to the development and to detect deviations in order to initiate
necessary measures; and
 To establish a database for future Impact Assessment Studies for new projects.
6.2 MONITORING AND REPORTING PROCEDURE

The attributes, which merit regular monitoring, are
1. Air quality both at source and ambient atmosphere,
2. Water and wastewater quality,
3. Noise levels,
4. Ecological preservation,
5. Greenbelt development,
6. Socio-economic aspects, etc.
Regular monitoring of important and crucial environmental parameters is very important to assess the status of
environment during operational phase. With the knowledge of baseline conditions, the monitoring program
can serve as an indicator for any deterioration in environmental conditions due to operational phase and
suitable mitigation steps could be taken in time to safeguard the environment. Monitoring is as important as
that of control of pollution since the efficiency of control measures can only be determined by monitoring.
Proposed environment monitoring plan is given in Table 6-1.
en-vιsι n
Table 6-1: Budget for Implementation of Environmental Monitoring Plan
Work shall be assigned Total
Attribute Aspect Locations Monitoring Frequency Parameters/ Records
to Budget (INR)8
Air Stacks Monitoring All flue gas stacks except DG Twice in a year or as per PM10, SO2, NOx, CO & HC NABL/ MoEF &CC 5000/stack
stack – as DG is for emergency EC and CCA accredited lab
only
Ambient Air Quality Minimum 2 location within the PM2.5,PM10, SO2, NOx NABL/ MoEF &CC 4500/station
Monitoring premises accredited lab
Work area monitoring 3 to 5 Twice in a year or as per As identified by auditor. NABL/ MoEF &CC 5500/location
locations EC and CCA accredited lab
Water Quantity of water & Process, utilities, ETP, Daily to monitor water Records of water EHS department --
wastewater domestic, garden usage & to monitor ETP consumption and
load wastewater generation
Monitoring of wastewater ETP inlet and various treatment Daily to check efficiency pH, COD, NH3-N, TDS, In house laboratory Onsite by Party
stages of treatment system TSS
ETP outlet Monthly or as per EC and Other parameters as pH meter & flow meter is 2500 for 15
CCA mentioned in CCA. installed at ETP outlet. parameters/ sample
Fresh water source Intake water source Twice in a year or as per Parameters specified in IS: Other parameters by 4000 for 25
EC and CCA 10500 NABL/ MoEF &CC parameters / sample
accredited lab
Ground water quality Two piezometer well are Twice in a year or as per 4000 for 25
proposed EC and CCA parameters / sample
Noise Ambient noise monitoring Main gate, Production area, Twice in a year or as per Noise Level for Day & NABL/ MoEF &CC 200/ location
utility, ETP area EC and CCA Night time or specified in accredited lab
CCA/ EC
Soil Soil quality One inside premises and one At least once in a year in General parameters as NABL/ MoEF &CC 5000/ sample
outside premises pre-monsoon or as per considered in baseline (EC, accredited lab
consent of PCB pH, ESP,OC, Available P &
Available K)
Solid & Solid / hazardous waste Process, ETP etc. Twice in a year or as per General parameters as per NABL/ MoEF &CC 2500/ sample
Hazardous quality EC and CCA audit scheme by Honorable accredited lab
Waste high court of Gujarat
Quantity of Solid / As per EC/ CCA Daily Quantity of solid waste EHS department --
Hazardous Wastes generation
8The cost is for parameters mentioned in column 6 of Table.

en-vιsι n
Work shall be assigned Total
Attribute Aspect Locations Monitoring Frequency Parameters/ Records
to Budget (INR)8
Disposal of Solid / As per EC/ CCA Periodic Manifest copies EHS department --
Hazardous Wastes
Occupational Safety Audit. Within unit As per GFR Audit reports Safety auditor 25000/ audit
Health & safety
Occupation health (medical All workers As per GFR Medical reports Medical officer 5000/person
checkups)
Ecology Greenbelt Health of locally available Once in a six months or Health of plant CPCB guideline 4500/ monitoring
biodiversity sensitive plants planted within as per consent of PCB,
area during active and post
closure period
en-vιsι n
6.3 LABORATORY FACILITY

The sugar unit has developed quality control and environement laboratory which is equipped with
sophisticated equipment like pH meter, TDS meter, Oven, COD apparatus, etc. to monitor and analysis of
environment parameters. Sugar unit is doing regular monitoring in in-house laboratory and shall do analysis of
basic parameter of raw effluent as well as effluent quality at various treatment stages. Third party sampling
and analysis is carried out by NABL Accreditation Laboratory as per MoEF / CPCB / GPCB guidelines and
same will be continue.
6.4 CONTINUOUS EMISSION MONITORING SYSTEM (CEMS)

Continuous Emission Monitoring System is not applicable to unit because: CPCB has issued direction to all
SPCB vide letter number B-29016/04/06/PCI-I/5401 dated 5th February 2014; CPCB has provided list of
industries in which Continuous Emission Monitoring System is mandatory along with parameters; the existing
and after modernization products does fall in industries listed.
Unit has provided online effluent monitoring system to ETP outlet complying above direction for measuring
parameters like; pH, COD, BOD and TSS, while online emission monitoring system to boiler stack for
measuring parameter like PM. These systems are connected with server of Gujarat Pollution Control Board
and Central Pollution Control Board.
6.5 WORK ZONE MONITORING FOR HAZARDOUS CHEMICALS

Work zone monitoring for hazardous chemicals will be carried out by accredited safety auditor. Sampling
locations will be identified for the air borne concentration of hazardous chemicals. Monitoring shall be carried
out regularly and records shall be maintained in Form No. 37 as per Rule 12-b of Gujarat Factories Rules
(GFR).
en-vιsι n
CHAPTER 7 ADDITIONAL STUDIES
7.1 PUBLIC CONSULTATION

Public hearing is applicable for the Sugar Industry as per EIA Notification, 14th September, 2006 and its
subsequent amendments. This is draft Environmental Impact Assessment report for submission to Gujarat
Pollution Control Board (GPCB) for conducting Public Hearing and its details will be incorporated in final
EIA report to be submitted for obtaining Environmental Clearance. As per Terms of Reference (ToR) issued
by SEIAA, Gujarat letter No. SEIAA/GUJ/TOR/Violation/5(j)/927/2019 dated 19/06/2019 (given as
Annexure I)
7.2 SOCIAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT AND R & R ACTION PLAN

The socio-economic study of the study area is carried out and details are presented in the section 3.10. This
project is proposed by private ownership and No additional land is required to acquire for the modernization
of sugar mill, existing land i.e. 5,95,292.58 sq.mt. is sufficient for the modernization project. Thus, no
displacement of villagers/people will take place. Therefore, the R&R (Rehabilitation & Resettlement)
policy/plan is not undertaken. However, the direct financial and social benefits with special emphasis on the
benefit to the local people will be preferred and the proposed budgets for Corporate Environment
Responsibility (CER) activities are summarized in section no.9.2.1 of 0.
7.3 RISK ASSESSMENT

M/s. Shree Sayan Vibhag Sahakari Khand Udyog Mandli Ltd. is a Co-operative Mandli and currently
engaged in production of sugar from sugar cane and also having 45 KLPD molasses based distillery unit
with 11.5 MW (9 MW + 2.5 MW Standby) CPP located At & Post Sayan, Taluka Olpad, District Surat -
394130. Sugar unit has modernized in existing plant and machineries by installation of advanced
technologies based machineries for sugar mill and hence its increase in existing cane crushed quantity
from 5000 TCD to 7000 TCD but no change in existing boiling house, boiler and molasses based
distillery unit.
Fire, toxic release or combinations of them are the hazards associated with industrial plants which
handling hazardous chemicals. More comprehensive, systematic and sophisticated methods of Safety
Engineering, such as, Hazard Analysis and Qualitative and Quantitative Risk Assessment have been
developed to improve upon the integrity, reliability and safety of industrial plants, the same has been
discussed in detail under their respective headings.
7.3.1 Objective of Risk Assessment Study

The principle objective of this study is to identify major risks in the manufacturing process and to evaluate
On-site & Off-site consequences of identified hazard scenarios. To give effective mitigation of hazards in
terms of suggestions for effective disaster management, suggesting minimum preventive and protective
measures & change of practices to ensure Occupational Health and Safety.
Scope of Study
A. Hazard Identification
B. Risk Management
C. Disaster management Plan
D. Occupational Health Safety
en-vιsι n
7.3.2 Methodology
The steps involved in risk assessment methodology are as follows:
 Hazard identification by studying the information of plant location, layout of the equipment & process condition;
 Hazard assessment by qualitative risk assessment and quantitative risk assessment.
 Quantification of Hazard involves selection of most credible scenario or worst case scenario;
 Estimate consequences scenarios in the plant such as fire, explosion and toxic effect;
 Estimate frequency of occurrence of any incident is to be found out by reliability analysis;
 Prioritize and Reduce Risk by providing control / mitigation measures;
 Preparing disaster management plan to face any accident and disaster caused by the project operations;
7.4 RISK AND HAZARD STUDY

Identification of causes and types of hazards is the primary task for planning for risk assessment. Hazard can
happen because of the nature of the chemicals handled and also the nature of process involved.
The methods employed for hazard identification in this study are:
 Identification of major hazards based on Manufacture, Storage and Import of Hazardous Chemicals;
 Identification of hazardous units and segments of plants and units based on relative ranking technique
7.4.1 Storage of Chemicals

In existing plant, Rectified Sprit, Absolute Alcohol and Molasses are stored in vertical above ground MS tank
at Normal temperature and pressure at separate storage yard. The unit has modernized in existing plant and
machineries by installation of advanced technologies based machineries for sugar mill. Hence, no
additional tank will be required. Additional storage is requiring for Lime and Sulfur storage and caustic
soda consumption will be reduced. List of major chemicals along with its storage details, its properties are
presented in Table 7-1 to Table 7-3. MSDS of all chemicals are given as Annexure XIV.
Table 7-1: Details of Storage Tank
Capacity of Storage Nos. of Max. Storage
No. Material Name State Tank Dimension
tank in KL or MT Tank (KL or MT)
1. Molasses Tank Semi 3789 MT 4 3500 MT 12 m ⌀ x 30 m
Liquid
4338 MT 2 4000 MT 12.5 m ⌀ x 31 m
2. Industrial alcohol/ Liquid 900 KL 2 850 KL 9 m ⌀ x 14.2 m
Rectified spirit
3. Extra neutral Liquid 900 KL. 1 850 KL 9 m ⌀ x 14.2 m
alcohol/Absolute
alcohol/Anhydrous
500 KL 1 450 KL 7 m ⌀ x 15 m
alcohol 100 KL 4 90 KL 4m⌀ x 8m
4. F.O. Tank Liquid 100 KL 1 90 KL 4m⌀ x 8m
5. Diesel Tank Liquid 1 KL 2 0.8 KL 0.5 m ⌀ x 5 m
0.85 KL 1 0.7 KL 0.4 m ⌀ x 4 m
en-vιsι n
Table 7-2: Details of Other Chemicals
Type of MOC of Storage Nos. of Max. Storage
No. Material Name State
Storage Storage Capacity of unit storage unit (MT or KL)
Existing
1. Lime Solid Bags PP woven 50 Kg 1345 67 MT
2. Sulphur Solid Bags PP woven 20 Kg 942 19 MT
3. Phosphoric Acid Liquid Tank MS 5 KL 3 15 KL
4. Potassium Solid Bags PP woven 5 Kg 81 0.40 MT
Permanganate
5. Caustic soda Solid Bags PP woven 50 Kg 3230 162 MT
After Modernization
1. Lime Solid Bags PP woven 50 Kg 808 40 MT
2. Sulphur Solid Bags PP woven 20 Kg 808 16 MT
3. Caustic soda Solid Bags PP woven 50 Kg 54 3 MT
en-vιsι n
Table 7-3: Hazardous Characteristics of of major chemicals
Vapour Flammability Limit Odour
S. Name of Phase Sp. Gravity Flash Point Boiling Melting TLV (Mg/m³ LD50 LC50, NFPA IDLH
CAS NO Density Threshold
No Chemical (G/L/S) (Water = 1) (°C) Point (oC) Point (oC) LEL% UEL% or ppm) (Mg/kg) (Mg/m3/h) Rating (ppm)
(Air = 1) (ppm)
Phosphoric 1530 1000

1. 7664-38-2 Liquid 1.6 1.7 N.A 21 NA N.A. N.A. 1 mg/m3 NA 3-0-0 NA
acid mg/kg mg/m³
2 mg/m3
10
2. Lime 1310-73-2 Solid 2.13 NA N.A. 1388 323 N.A. N.A. from NA NA 3-0-1 NA
mg/m3
ACGIH
1400
3. Sulphur 7704-34-9 Solid 2.07 NA 207.2 444.6 119 35 g/m3 5 ppm NA NA 2-1-0 NA NA
g/m3
Potassium
Decompos 1090
4. permangan 7722-64-7 Solid 2.7 NA N.A. NA N.A. N.A. 5 ppm NA 1-1-0 NA NA
es mg/kg
ate
2 mg/m3
Caustic 1310-73-2 Solid 2.13 NA N.A. 1388 323 N.A. N.A. from NA NA 3-0-1 NA N.A.
5.
soda
ACGIH
7060 20000 3300
6. Ethanol 64-17-5 Liquid 0.79 1.59 16.6 78 -114 3.3 19 1000 ppm 2-3-0 NA
mg/kg ppm/10H ppm
7500
7. Furnace Oil 68334-30-5 Liquid 0.8-0.88 4.5 > = 40 150 - 371 -39 0.7 6 850 ppm NA 1-2-0 NA NA
mg/kg
5 g/M3/4
8. Diesel 8052-41-6 Liquid 0.81-0.91 3-5 32 215-376 18-46 0.6 6 800 ppm 5 g/kg 1-2-0 NA NA
hr
NA Not available TLV Threshold Limit Value UEL Upper Exposure Limit FP Flash point ACGIH American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists
N.A. Not applicable TWA time-weighted average LEL Lower Exposure Limit CC Close Cup OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration
NG Not Given STEL short-term exposure limits BP Boiling Point OC Open Cup NFPA National Fire Protection Association
ND Not determined
en-vιsι n
7.4.2 Regulatory Permission Required For Storage of Chemicals
7.4.2.1 PESO Permission

In proposed modernization, there is no such chemical will be utilized which attracts PESO. In existing, Fuel
based Absolute Alcohol/Ethanol bulk storage tank attracts PESO for Class A chemical. For that, PESO license
is obtained which is given as Annexure X.
7.4.2.2 Applicability of MSIHC Rules

In existing, Ethanol attracts MSHIC rules.The maximum storage capacity of below chemical is less than their
threshold quantity as specified under Schedule - 3 of Rule 68-J(i)(a) of The Gujarat Factory Rules 2004. Thus,
the Unit is classified as a “Non Major Accident Hazardous Installation” as provided under Rule-2(f) of
C.A.(EPPR) Rules-1996 (2000). The various statutory provisions under Section 41-A to 41-E require the
status of the safety will be periodically examined from an external Agency.
Table 7-4: Threshold Storage Quantity as per MSIHC Rules
Storage Threshold (MT)
Storage Applicability
Sr. Schedule for for Appl. of
Chemical Quantity in Chemical Class for Appl. of of MSIHC
No. Storage Rules 5, 7-9
KL Rules 10-12 rules (Y/N)
Threshold & 13-15
1. Absolute Alcohol/ 1350 Flammable Y (Sch. I 2500 20000 N
Ethanol liquid Part-II)
7.5 QUALITATIVE RISK ASSESSMENT

Many a times Risk involved in various processes / process equipment’s cannot be addressed completely by
Consequence Analysis. As a conservative approach, these risks have been considered separately under this
topic. The approach is to identify hazards associated in operation of equipment as well as in processes,
assessing its impacts, ranking the risk posed by it and finally to propose remedial actions/mitigation measures
such that the risk is minimized to tolerable level.
Qualitative Risk Assessment has been carried out for the following areas:
 Hazard involving during Construction Phase;
 Storage and Handling of Acids;
 Storage and Handling of Flammable Chemicals;
 Storage and Handling of Toxic Chemicals;
 Storage and Handling of other Solid Chemicals;
In Qualitative Risk Assessment, risk has been analyzed using methodology called HIRA-Hazards
Identification & Risk Assessment. In HIRA, major manual activities carried out by plant personnel as well as
contract labors have been considered. The Risk Matrix is presented in Table 7-5, Risk acceptability criteria
given in Table 7-6 and HIRA worksheet presented in Table 7-7.
en-vιsι n
Table 7-5: Risk Matrix
Severity
Minor Moderate
Major Catastrophic
Insignificant (First Aid (Medical
(Hospitable/ (Death/Mass
Likelihood (No injuries/Min. treatment/Med Treatment/
Large Financial ive Financial
financial loss) ium Financial High financial
Loss) Loss)
Loss) loss)
1 2 3 4 5
5 Almost Certain (often
5 10 15 20 25
occurs)
4 Likely (could easily
4 8 12 16 20
happen)
3 Possible (could happen
3 6 9 12 15
or known it to happen)
2 Unlikely (hasn't
2 4 6 8 10
happened yet but could)
1 Impossible (conceivable
but only on extreme 1 2 3 4 5
circumstances)
Reference: Fine Kinney Method
Table 7-6: Risk Acceptability Criteria

Risk Rating Action Require
 Requires urgent action
Catastrophic - Critical  Requires notification of responsible executive
16-25
Risk  Must be tracked Daily
 Requires immediate notification of senior executives including CEO
 Requires notification of a senior manager
High Risk 10-15
 Must be monitored and reviewed on a weekly basis
 Must be monitored on a monthly basis
Moderate Risk 4-9  Must be reviewed at least monthly
 Requires notification of a senior manager
 Little or no impact on any aspect of the project
Low Risk 1-3  Should be reviewed quarterly
 No explicit it action required
en-vιsι n
7.5.1 Hazard Identification and Risk Assessment (HIRA)
Table 7-7: HIRA Worksheet
Sr. Process / Hazards Associated Initial Risk Residual Risk
Effect Control/Mitigation Measures
No. Activity with /Cause Likelihood Severity Risk Likelihood Severity Risk
A. Construction Phase
1. Vehicle  Accident  Injury 3 2 6  Regular Maintenance of Vehicles 2 1 2
movement for  Speed control of the vehicles
transportation  Proper Road provided
of material
2. Site Clearing  Fall from height,  Injuries 2 2 4  Barricaded construction area 1 1 1
and Civil Collapse of scaffold   Safety net provided
Construction   Proper PPE’s provided to
workers
3. Heavy  Fire due to welding  Injury/cuts 3 3 9  Trained person 3 1 3
fabrication  Fall from height  Burns  Good House Keeping
work include  Struck with objects  Proper illumination and Adequate
metal cutting  Noise/Vibration ventilation
(Gas welding)  Use PPE
B. Operation Phase
1. Transportation, Loading-Unloading , Transferring on Conveyor belt
1.1 Unloading of  Fall load from height  Injury/cuts 3 2 6  Inspected & tested lifting tool, 2 1 2
sugar cane on  Over turn of OHT due  Material loss tackle
Conveyor belt to heavy load  Trained person/operator
by OHT lift  Improper maintenance/  Work permit system with lock
operation out/tag out (LOTO)
 Preventive maintenance
1.2 Operation of  Accident due to  Injury/cuts 3 2 6  Trained person & supervision 2 1 2
Conveyor belt moving part/machinery  Nip guard/Fixed guard provide
 Proper signage & labeling
 Pull code switch provided
1.3 Loading of Fall of load from  Bagassosis due to 3 3 9  Use proper PPEs 2 1 2
Bagasse on height long term  Nip guard/Fixed guard provide
Conveyor belt  Bagasse dust exposure exposure of  Proper signage & labeling
to Boiler area  Accident due to Bagasse dust  Preventive maintenance
moving part  Injury/cuts  Pull code switch provide
2. Sugarcane Milling, Sugarcane Juice Clarification, Concentration and Evaporation
en-vιsι n
2.1 Sugar cane  Accident due to  Injury/cuts 3 3 9  Trained person & supervision 3 1 3
milling moving part/machinery  Electrical Burns  Nip guard/Fixed guard provide
 Electrical Shock  Use proper PPEs
 Proper Earthing.
 Adequate Illumination
 Good Housekeeping
2.2 Clarification,  Mechanical hazards  Burns 3 4 12  Feed quantity controlled either 3 1 3
Crystallizer, e.g. pressure release,  Injuries volumetrically or gravimetrically.
Evaporation leaks, noise,  Damage to  Process control devices like
equipment or utility Equipments sensors, alarms, trips and other
failure  Property loss control systems
 Hazards due to failure  Asphyxiation  High Temperature indicator valve
of control and alarm system
 Electrical hazard  Auto cut off system after
 Noise hazard reaching of predetermined
 Heat Stress maximum safe temperature.
 Pressure gauge and Safety
Control valve
 Skilled workers
 Mechanical seal in all pumps and
reactors
 Proper Insulation
 Adequate Illumination and
Ventilation
 Juice heaters with necessary
valves, venting and condensate
extraction device with collection
tanks and safety for steam use.
 Guards on stirrer and gear drives
and centrifugal machines.
2.3 Distillation  Fire Hazard  Burns/Death 3 4 12  Automatic control system 2 1 2
Unit  Mechanical hazard  Loss of material  Fire extinguisher/Fire hydrant
 Damage property system provision
 Earthing bonding for static
charge
en-vιsι n
 Temperature gauge
 Pressure gauge
 Level Indicator
 Personal protective device
 Adequate local exhaust
ventilation
 Good Housekeeping
 Proper lighting and illumination
 Machine Guarding & Fencing
 Trained person & supervision
3. Storage, Handling of Hazardous Chemical/Acid/Alkalis, Molasses, Industrial Alcohol/Rectified Spirit
3.1 Handling of  Fire due to  Injury/cuts 3 3 9  Impervious floor 2 1 2
Hazardous Spillage/Leakage  Burns/Death  Adequate level of natural or
Chemical/Aci  Release of toxic vapor  Asphyxiation artificial lighting
d/Alkalis  Reaction of  Skin irritation  Adequate Ventilation
incompatible chemical  Loss of material/  Proper Raw material stacking.
 Collapse of containers property  Avoid manual handling.
 Provide Fire Extinguishers/fire
fighting system.
 Operators/Workers to be trained
for Safe Work Practices.
 Regular Inspection
 Spillage will be cleaned or
neutralized with suitable media.
 Chemical handling bags to be
labeled properly.
 Use of Suitable protective
clothing, gloves, boots shall be
used
 SOP should be follow for
handling hazardous chemical
3.2 Storage and  Health Hazard  Injury/illness 2 2 4  Proper preventive maintenance 1 1 1
Handling of  Spillage/leakage  Containment loss schedule
Molasses in  Catastrophic failure of  Loss of tank  Operators/Workers to be trained
Tank tank for Safe Work Practices.
 Spillage/leak attended properly
en-vιsι n
 SOP should be follow
3.3 Storage and  Fire due to Glands/seal  Injuries 3 4 12  Fire hydrant system installed. 2 1 2
Handling of leaks in valves, pumps  Burns/Death  Flame proof Electrical fittings
Industrial  Fire during loading  Loss of provided
Alcohol/Rectif and unloading process containment  Proper selection of MOC for
ied Spirit in if nearby ignition  Property damage chemicals storage tank.
Tank sources  Earthing/bonding provided for
 Unloading road tanker static charges.
hose rupture.  Flame arrestor provided on
flammable material storage tank
vent.
 Level gauge and level
measurement instrument
provided on material storage
tank.
 Safety permit system should be
follow
 Fencing, caution note, hazardous
identification board provided
 Authorized person permitted in
storage tank area
 SOP should be follow.
 Dyke wall should be providing.
4. Utility plant
4.1 Operation of  Explosion due to  Hit of Fragments 2 4 8  Water level indicator & controller 2 1 2
Boiler Failure of Controls or of boilers or inter lock
poor Maintenance Building  Air to full ratio control
 Hot water splash  Flame failure control device
 Burns and Injury  Fire Extinguisher/Fire Hydrant
 Loss of provided.
Equipment  Temperature indicator
&controller
 Regular inspection /cleaning
Testing of Boiler
4.2 Diesel  Fire/Explosion  Burns 2 3 6  Good Housekeeping maintained 1 1 1
Generator  Generator  Spillage/leak attended
en-vιsι n
House & LDO damage  Level indicator on LDO tank in
tank  Damage property DG Room
 No smoking in area
4.3 Electricity  Fire due to lose contact  Electric Burns 3 3 9  Regular inspection of electrical 2 1 2
of wires  Damage Property fitting, flame proof fitting
 Weak earthing provided in flammable area,
 Short Circuit proper earthing.
 Improper Insulation  Regular measurement of earth pit
resistance.
4.4 Cooling  Electrical Shock  Burns 2 3 6  Trained Electrician 1 1 1
Tower  Health Hazard due to  Illness  Use proper Personal Protective
Legionella bacteria Equipments
 Good practice
4.5 Pipeline  Fire/Explosion  Burns 2 4 8  Regular inspection of pipelines 2 1 2
Network  Toxic dispersion if  Injuries and tanks. The damaged pipes &
leakage  Damage flanges to be replaced, regular
 Corrosion Equipment painting of pipelines.
 Property loss  Proper preventive maintenance
 Color coding on pipeline
5. Captive Power Plant
5.1 Turbine and  Fire/Explosion  Burns 2 3 6  Regular inspection, maintenance 1 2 2
Generator  Mechanical Hazard  Injuries  Proper storage, isolation from the
 High Noise  Damage ignition sources
 Cooling system failure Equipment  Ear plug, ear muff should
 Short Circuits  Property loss provided.
5.2 Power  Fire/Explosion  Burns 2 3 6  All electrical fittings and cables 1 2 2
Transformer  Transformer oil  Injuries are provided as per the specified
leakage/ Spill Short  Damage standards.
circuit in Transformer Equipment  Ensure that all electrical cabling
 Overheating of  Property loss in the area are properly insulated
Transformer & fire and covered.
 Foam/CO2/dry powder type fire
extinguishers are to be provided.
6. ETP Area
6.1 ETP operation  Moving  Injuries/Cuts 3 3 9  Avoid manual handling 2 1 2
and part/machinery  Asphyxiation  Trained and Experience Staff
en-vιsι n
Maintenance  Fall, Slip, struck with  Illness  Good Practices to be follow
object  Use proper PPEs
 Biological hazard due  Proper disposal of ETP sludge
to direct exposure with  Provide impervious/pucca
untreated effluent flooring near ETP area
7. Electrical-Mechanical Preventive Maintenance Work
7.1 Operation &  Person fall at height  Burns 3 3 9  Use proper PPEs 2 1 2
Maintenance while working at  Injuries  LOTO system should follow
of Electrical height  Asphyxiation  Trained and Experience Staff
Appliances  Exposure of Live  Good Practices to be follow
Wires  Work Permit System should
 Falling of material/ follow
accessories
 Fire in Waste Oil
 Fire due to welding
 Struck with objects
Conclusion
It can be concluded from the above table that, after providing mitigation measure in different Operations/activities, risk probability will change from almost
certain to possible as well as its residual risk will change from medium to low.
en-vιsι n
7.6 QUANTITATIVE RISK ASSESSMENT

Quantitative Risk Assessment (QRA) is a structured approach to identifying and understanding the hazards
and risks associated with Storage and Handling of flammable/ toxic chemicals. The assessment starts by
taking into account an inventory of hazardous chemicals stored, likelihood of leakage/ spillage associated
with it and selecting the worst case scenario for consequence estimation. Finally, suggesting the measures
to minimize or mitigate risks to meet appropriate acceptability criteria. The planning for emergency
evacuation shall be borne in mind whilst interpreting the results.
7.6.1 Consequence analysis

In a plant handling hazardous chemicals, the main hazard arises due to storage and handling of hazardous
chemicals as mentioned above. If these chemicals are released into the atmosphere, it may cause damage
due to resulting fires or vapour clouds. Blast overpressures depend upon the reactivity class of material
between two explosive limits.
The consequences of the release of Hazardous substances by failures or catastrophes and the damage to the
surrounding area can be determined by means of models. Models help to calculate the physical effects
resulting from the release of hazardous substances and to translate the physical effects in terms of injuries
and damage to exposed population and environment. To assess the damage level caused by the various
accidental events, it is essential to firm up the damage criteria with respect to different types of accidents
e.g. thermal radiation, toxicity, explosion overpressure etc.
Consequence analysis involves the application of mathematical, analytical and computer models for
calculation of effects and damages subsequent to a hydrocarbon release accident. Consequence models are
used to predict the physical behaviour of the hazardous incidents. The techniques used to model the
consequences of hydrocarbon and other hazardous material releases cover the following:
 Modelling of discharge rates when holes develop in process equipment/pipe work/pipeline.

 Modelling of the size and shape of flammable and toxic gas clouds from releases in the atmosphere;
 Modelling of the flame and radiation field of the releases that are ignited and burn as jet fire, pool fire, flash fire
and BLEVE/ Fire ball;
 Modelling of the explosion fields of releases, which are ignited away from the point of release
The information normally required for consequence analysis includes meteorological conditions, failure
data of equipment and components, ignition sources, population characteristics within and outside the
plant, acceptable levels of risk etc.
7.6.2 Damage Criteria

In consequence analysis studies, in principal three types of exposure to hazardous effects are distinguished:
1. Heat radiation from jet fire, pool fire, a flash fire or a BLEVE;
2. Explosion;
3. Toxic effects, from toxic materials or toxic combustion products;
A. Heat Radiation
The consequence caused by exposure to heat radiation is a function of:
 The radiation energy onto the human body [kW/m2];
 The exposure duration [sec];
en-vιsι n
 The protection of the skin tissue (clothed or naked body).
 The limits for 1% of the exposed people to be killed due to heat radiation, and for second-degree burns
are given in the table below:
Table 7-8: Damages to Human Life Due to Heat Radiation
Exposure Radiation for 1% Radiation for 2nd degree Radiation for first degree
Duration lethality (kW/m2) burns (kW/m2) burns, (kW/m2)
10 Sec 21.2 16 12.5
30 Sec 9.3 7.0 4.0
Since in practical situations, only the employees will be exposed to heat radiation in case of a fire, it is
reasonable to assume the protection by clothing. It can be assumed that people would be able to find a
cover or a shield against thermal radiation in 10 sec. time. Furthermore, 100% lethality may be assumed
for all people suffering from direct contact with flames, such as the pool fire, a flash fire or a jet flame. The
effects due to relatively lesser incident radiation intensity are given below:
Table 7-9: Effects Due to Incident Radiation Intensity
Incident Radiation in kw/m2 Type of Damage
0.7 Equivalent to Solar Radiation
1.6 No discomfort for long exposure
4.0 Sufficient to cause pain within 20 sec. Blistering of skin (first degree burns are
likely)
9.5 Pain threshold reached after 8 sec. second degree burns after 20 sec.
12.5 Minimum energy required for piloted ignition of wood, melting plastic tubing etc.
B. Damage due to Explosion

Explosion is a sudden and violent release of energy accompanied by the generation of pressure wave and a
loud noise. The rate of energy release is very large and has potential to cause injury to the people, damage
the plant and nearby property etc.
BLEVE – fireball: A Boiling Liquid Expanding Vapor Explosion (BLEVE) occurs when there is a sudden
loss of containment of a pressure vessel containing a superheated liquid or liquefied gas. It is sudden
release of large mass of pressurized superheated liquid to atmosphere. The primary cause may be external
flame impinging on the shell above liquid level weakening the vessel and leading to shell rupture.
Calculations are done for diameter and duration of fire ball and the incident thermal flux.
Pool fires and jet fires are common fire types resulting from fires over pools of liquid or from pressurized
releases or gas and/or liquid. They tend to be localized in effect and are mainly of concern in establishing
potential for domino effects and employee safety. ALOHA Models are used to calculate various
components - burning rate, pool size, and flame height, in jet fire modeling the steps followed for the
thermal effects are calculation of the estimated discharge rate, total heat released, radiant fraction/source
view fraction, transmissivity and thermal flux and thermal effects.
Table 7-10: Damage Due to Peak over Pressure
Human Injury Structural Damage
Peak Over Peak Over
Type of Damage Type of Damage
Pressure (bar) Pressure (bar)
5 -8 100% lethality 0.3 Heavy (90%damage)
3.5 -5 50% lethality 0.1 Repairable (10%damage)
2 -3 Threshold lethality 0.03 Damage of Glass
1.33 - 2 Severe lung damage 0.01 Crack of Windows
en-vιsι n
1/3
1-1 50% Ear drum rupture - -
Source: Marshall, V.C. (1977)' Howlethal are explosives and toxic escapes'.
C. Effect due to toxic gas release

Various approaches are used to determine the consequences of toxic gases:
 IDLH (“Immediate Danger to Life or Health”) is the maximum concentration from which
escape is possible within 30 minutes without any escape-impairing symptoms or irreversible health
effects.
 ERPG (Emergency Response Planning Guidelines) estimate the concentrations at which most
people will begin to experience health effects if they are exposed to a hazardous airborne chemical
for 1 hour. A chemical may have up to three ERPG values, each of which corresponds to a specific
tier of health effects.
7.6.3 Scenarios (Vulnerability Area Identification)

Identification of risks is done qualitatively and quantitatively through the selection of hazardous substances
and by studying the manufacturing process, to arrive at possible failures and their inherent causes.
Probability of risk occurrence is also ascertained in order to determine the MAXIMUM CREDIBLE
ACCIDENT SCENARIO and the WORST CASE SCENARIO.
Hazardous substances have been identified as follows considering the applicable criteria laid down under
the Chemical Accident (Emergency Planning, Preparedness and Response) Rules, 1996, as well as other
relevant guidelines:
The risks are then analyzed quantitatively in terms of probability, and severity. The risks have also been
rated according to the matrix R = Probability x Severity.
Based on generally accepted definitions, the MAXIMUM CREDIBLE ACCIDENT SCENARIO
(MCAS) indicates most likely or possible accident scenario, taking into account the effect of existing
control measures also.
Possible accident scenarios at site are given in following Table 7-11:
Table 7-11: Possible Accident Scenario
S. Risk
Source Scenarios Probability Severity Risk Rating
No. Consequence
Leakage from 1 inch dia. hole of Ethanol storage
1. Fire 2 3 6
tank - 900 M3
Catastrophic failure of Ethanol storage tank - 900
2. Fire 1 4 4
M3
Leakage from 1 inch dia. hole of LDO storage tank
3. Fire 2 2 4
- 100 M3
4. Catastrophic failure of LDO storage tank - 100 M3 Fire 1 3 3
LEGEND
1 2 3
PROBABILITY: SEVERITY: RISK RATING:
1 – HIGHLY UNLIKELY 1 – EXTREMELY MILD PROBABILITY x SEVERITY
2 – UNLIKELY 2 – MILD
3 – SOMEWHAT LIKELY 3 – MODERATE
4 – LIKELY 4 – SEVERE
5 – VERY LIKELY 5 – MOST SEVERE
 There are fire risk scenario, on the operational and storage of chemicals.
 The worst case scenario is also well within the reach of fire protection/mitigation measures, planned
for installation.
en-vιsι n
 Fire protection/control/mitigation measures are incorporated.
Hence, proposed project setup can be categorized as a medium hazard industry who can manage their risks
through invoking on-site emergency plan. The scope for Off-site emergency is visualized as a remote
possibility.
During the navigation of above sequence of activities, it is drawn to the understanding that the storage &
handling are to be closely associated with the Threshold Planned quantities (TPQ) of hazardous
chemicals. This will ensure, the associated preventive / mitigating facilities planned and installed for
managing the projected risk scenarios will be serving the desired objectives.
The in-house regulatory measures for implanting safety shall be appropriate to the risks, and to be handled
by trained persons for the purpose. SOPs are to be documented and identified people are to be trained.
Regular mock drills shall be planned and will be executed, as a preparation/ precaution for dealing with
emergency operations.
7.6.4 Software Used for Calculations

ALOHA (Areal Locations of Hazardous Atmospheres):
Aloha is a computer program designed especially for use by people responding to chemical accidents, as
well as for emergency planning and training. ALOHA can predict the rates at which chemical vapour may
escape into the atmosphere from broken gas pipes, leaking tanks, and evaporating puddles. It can then
predict how a hazardous gas cloud might disperse in the atmosphere after an accidental chemical release.
ALOHA provides output as amount of chemical discharged from the source as well as its concentration in
air it takes in to account different levels of concentrations for a specified chemical.
Vulnerability Analysis
A vulnerability analysis is carried out on the MAXIMUM CREDIBLE ACCIDENT SCENARIO and the
WORST CASE SCENARIO. The analysis is carried out using the help of sophisticated computer software
which provides the zone of influence as well as the geographical risk contours.
The calculations are complex in nature, and various parameters are defined to assist the software in
simulating the risk contours. The parameters include details such as the size of the leakages / holes,
quantity of materials released, duration of the release, weather and geographical conditions.
The simulations are generated under standard operating conditions.
Consequence Analysis
Details of selected Maximum credible accident scenario and result of consequence analysis areas are as
follows:
A. Weather Data
Parameters Condition - A
Wind: 5 meters/second
Direction 225° true at 3 meters
Ground Roughness: Open Country
Cloud Cover: 50%
Air Temperature: 32° C
Stability Class: D
Inversion Height No Inversion Height
Relative Humidity: 50%
en-vιsι n
B. Considerations for Maximum Credible Accident Scenario (MCA)
 Pool Fire due leakage from tank
 Internal Temperature: 32° C
 Circular Opening Diameter: 1inch
 The chemical escaped as a liquid and formed a burning puddle.
C. Chemical Properties
Chemical properties of each hazardous chemical stored within premises are given in Table 7-3.
7.6.5 Scenario of Consequence Analysis

Considering Maximum Credible Accident i.e. leakage of raw material from storage tank and worst case i.e.
failure of raw material storage tank, damage distance has been evaluated from software and detail are
Table 7-12: Summary of Consequence Analysis - Fire end points
Flammable Distance (m)
Maximum Credible Accident Scenario
Chemical Worst Case Scenario (WCS)
(MCA)
Chemical Mass in
Tank Orange Yellow Orange Yellow
Red Zone Red Zone
Zone Zone Zone) Zone
(10 kW/m2 (10 kW/m2)
(5 kW/m2) (2 kW/m2) (5 kW/m2) (2 kW/m2)
Absolute 900 KL 11 13 18 18 22 29
Alcohol/ Flame Length: 6 meter Flame Length: 9 meter
Ethanol Total Amount Burned: 3,876 Kg Total Amount Burned: 12, 086 Kg
Tank Pool fire (Figure 7-1) Pool fire (Figure 7-2)
LDO 100 KL < 10 < 10 11 < 10 12 15
Tank Flame Length: 4 meter Flame Length: 5 meter
Total Amount Burned: 1348 Kg Total Amount Burned: 2996 Kg
Pool fire (Figure 7-3) Pool fire (Figure 7-4)
en-vιsι n
Figure 7-1: Threat zone of Maximum Credible Accident Scenario for Ethanol – Pool Fire
Figure 7-2: Threat zone of Worst Case Scenario for Ethanol – Pool Fire
en-vιsι n
Figure 7-3: Threat zone of Maximum Credible Accident Scenario for LDO – Pool Fire
Figure 7-4: Threat zone of Worst Case Scenario for LDO – Pool Fire
en-vιsι n
7.6.6 Summary
 For purpose of consequence analysis, Distillery unit Maximum Credible Accident Scenario and Worst
Case Scenarios for the Tank storage have been considered.
 The risk assessment study shows that existing setup of the unit has potential for damage to those inside
because of storage and handling of Ethanol.
 As per the Consequence analysis in case of worst case scenario due to catastrophic failure of,
- Ethanol storage tank for pool fire the maximum hazardous distance is observed within 29 meter.
- Hence, it will pose threat to within 29 meter of storage area.
7.6.7 Recommendation against Risk

Based on the risk assessment analysis following precautionary mitigation measures are recommended for the
project.
 The installation of all the equipment is/will be as per guidelines of provision of Gujarat Factories Rule
1963.
 For any case of fire emergency, standard type of Fire fighting equipments i.e. fire hydrant system and fire
extinguisher is/will be provided in the storage area as well as required places in the plant.
 Smoking will be strictly prohibited inside the plant premises.
 Personnel protective equipments is/will be providing to workers.
 First Aid facility and First-aid trained person is/will be available at the time of chemical handling
operation.
 Operation/activities wise mitigation measure mentioned in Table 7-7.
7.6.8 Fire Fighting System

The management is taking into consideration fire prevention measures at the project planning and during plant
commissioning stage to avoid any outbreak of fire. But looking to the hazardous nature of process and the
chemicals that shall be handled and processed, the chances of outbreak of fire cannot be totally ignored.
Hence to tackle such a situation a good well laid fire protection system is provided in the factory. List of
proposed fire fighting equipments are given in Table 7-13.
A full flagged hydrant system (as per Tariff Advisory Committee’s Guideline) is provided with hydrant lines
covering entire factory premises. The hydrant lines shall be provided with hydrant posts covering different
locations. Every plant will be protected by hydrant system and Fix foam protection system for storage tanks.
Hose pipe & nozzles will be provided at Central hose stations and near hydrant points. Water storage reservoir
is provided for hydrant system. Separate high capacity fire pumps are provided to hydrant system.
en-vιsι n
Table 7-13: List of Fire Hydrant points

Sr. No. Location No. of Points
1. Distillery Ground Floor 5
th
2. Distillery 5 Floor 5
3. Sugar Factory side 9
4. Sugar Godown 4
5. Molasses Tank 2
6. ETP Plant 2
7. Diesel Pump Area 2
Total 29
Table 7-14: List of Fire Extinguishers
Sr. No. Type Fire Extinguisher Capacity (Kg or Lit) Quantity
1. Dry Chemical Powder (DCP) 50 Kg 2
2. Dry Chemical Powder (DCP) 10 Kg 25
3. Foam 50 Kg 2
4. Foam 10 Lit 3
Total 32
Table 7-15: Details of Water Storage for Fire Fighting System

Sr. No. Tank reservoir Capacity in M3 Ground/ Underground/ O/H
1. Reservoir I 3100 On Ground
2. Reservoir II 3100 On Ground
3. Tank 98 Under ground
4. Tank 95 Under ground
5. Tank 40 Above ground
6. Tank 40 Above ground
7. Reservoir Distillery 6000 On Ground
Table 7-16: Details of Fire Water Pump Capacity
Sr. No. Type of Pump Capacity
1. Electrical main Pump 3
2 x 90 M per hour 35 meter head
2. Electrical main Pump 1 x 75 M3 per hour 35 meter head
3. Jockey Pump 3 x 75 M3 per hour 35 meter head

7.6.9 Do’s and Don’ts

Suitable notices / boards is displayed at several locations indicating appropriate hazards warning as well as
DOs and DON’T for ensuring operational and personal Safety for information of workers / staff and visitors.
Do’s Don’ts
 Check the available raw material as per the job on  Without checking of raw material don’t use it as
hand required for all stages. per the job on hand required for all stages.
 For good physical condition, check the vessels  Don’t use the vessels expected to be used in the
expected to be used in the process. process without checking.
 Check the availability of utilities required till the  Don’t fail to check the availability of utilities
en-vιsι n
Do’s Don’ts
end of the batch / job. required till the end of the batch / job
 Check for proper manpower available till the entire  Don’t work without enough and proper man
operation in over. power.
 Time schedule should prepare for material flow on  Don’t use the equipments which are not in
basis of the process. operable condition.
 Monitor the temperature and pressure if possible  Don’t use the materials for process without
during the process. verify the test certificates.
 Use pumps for transferring the liquids to the reactor  Don’t use the material without Prepare time
tank. schedule of material flow on basis of the process.
 Familiarize the worker about what is the job on  Don’t perform without Monitoring the
hand. temperature and pressure during process.
 The worker or operator should have sufficient  Don’t handle chemicals with open hands where
knowledge of the materials handling. manual handling is a must.
 Visual instructions should properly display for  Don’t keep the workers under wraps about what
characteristics of the chemicals. is the job on hand.
 Ensure proper training of personnel.  Don’t let the worker / operator do the work
 Ensure sufficient numbers of safety devices are having lack of sufficient knowledge of the
available. materials handled.
 In view of the chemicals handled, whether required  Don’t use the chemical with unknown
or not, please ensure availability of SCBA characteristics or having unreadable label.
apparatus near every use and storage area of  Don’t let the personnel do the work without
chemical. giving proper training.
 Ensure the workers wear proper PPE of adequate  Don’t work without sufficient numbers of safety
grade. devices.
 Demarcation of the chemical storage area for  Don’t let the workers do work without wearing
chemical in test. proper PPE of adequate grade.
 Ensure removal of used containers from  Don’t use material that is under testing for
workspaces. production.
 Prepare and follow the safe work instruction.  Don’t store used containers at workspaces.
 Record every incident that led to an accident  Don’t breach the safe work instruction.
irrespective of the seriousness of the accident and  Don’t try to conceal information regarding
analyze the same to improvise the system missed accidents or small injuries. Remember
continuously. every and any mishap can be fatal if not for
 Always check the fire water tank to be filled up to yourself for others.
the brim to ensure availability of fire water in  After any shutdown never start operation without
sufficient quantity at all times. The design of other having ensured the fire water tank filled up.
water to be used shall be from the overflow of the  Don’t work bare foot or without safety shoes.
fire water tank to ensure this system.  Don’t use mobile phones in work zones.
 Never work bare foot or without safety shoes.  Do not use PPEs which are not relevant to the
 Never use mobile phones in work zones. operational aspect that has been identified.
 Use only proper grade PPEs and use them properly.  Don’t open or use containers on which
 Open or use containers only on written instruction. instruction are not written.
 Verify the label with the instruction before use.  Don’t work without Verifying the label with the
 Participate wholeheartedly in all safety related instruction before use.
exercises an keep yourself updated.  Don’t ever even thinking of evading safety
instructions.
en-vιsι n
7.6.10 Safety Training

SOP for training is prepared which are applicable to all the employee/operational Staff of the company. The
main objective is to identify training need and its evaluation.
Head is for planning and co-ordination all type of Training/Gap Analysis of the Employees in the company
and also to maintaining training records and also to initiate Induction Training for all new employees and is
imparted respective department where employee is going to work. While departmental head ensures that each
employee in his department has been imparted required Training which is relevant to the activities performed
by the employees, as per SOP. They are responsible to send training records to Head.
Training is divided in to two major categories as mentioned below:
 Internal Safety Training
 External Safety Training
Internal Safety Training
Internal Training is the Training which conducted within the organization by in house faculty only. It is
divided in to 3 main categories as mentioned below:
a. Induction Training
b. On the Job Training
c. Refresher Training – Regular Base Training
a. Induction Training
 This training covers the overview of organization, company policies and departments, basic rules and
system called induction Training.
 The induction Training will be imparted to every new employee as well as visitors. It will be extended to
Driver/ Contract employees on later stage.
b. On the Job & Class Room Training
 Class Room training is provided to all employees on various subjects by concerned internal and external
faculty as per the Schedule prepared by HRD.
 On the job Training is imparted to all new joiners by the concerned HOD or his/her designee related to the
area of operation. This Training program includes the Training related to the specific aspects of an
employees’s role including use of equipment, unit operations, and safety norms to be followed.
 If any employee is transferred from one area of operation to other area of operation within the department,
Training on related SOPs is imparted to the employees.
c. Refresher Safety Training
 All employees is undergo refresher Training on the procedures of their respective functions and related or
cross functional department processes, whenever needs identified.
 Refresher Training is carried out as per ongoing calendar, and whenever there is a procedural change or
revision in the SOP.
External Training
 Persons from another sites, locations and persons from outside of organizations will be called to give
training as and when required for specialized subjects.
en-vιsι n
 The external Safety training will be conducted for Mandatory safety training as required under Section
111-A ii of the Factories Act 1948 to all employees and contract employees through DISH Approved
Safety Training Institute.
7.6.11 Safety Audits and Inspections

EHS officer is responsible to conduct safety audit. Two types of safety audit will be conducted:
1 Internal Audit
2 External Audit
Internal Audit
As per GFR 68-J(9)(2)(a), internal audit is conducted once in a year by a team of cross functional team for on-
site operations by EHS officer based on checklist.
External Audit
As per GFR 68-J(9)(2)(b), It is recommended to conduct external audit at least once in a years by a competent
agency accredited by authority. If storage quantity of chemicals is more than the threshold quantity mentioned
in Column 3 of Part 1 of Schedule 3 of Rules 68-J (GFR-1963), then it comes in MAH (Major Accident
Hazards) unit. Therefore, external audit conducted once in a year.
Aspects Considered in Safety Audits
1. Regular safety audit is conducted to ascertain the safety levels followed in the plant and suggestions
for improvement.
2. Special safety audits will be conducted whenever there are process-related equipment / operational
changes made in the plant.
3. Testing and inspection of high pressure equipment with periodical hydro testing and thickness testing
is carried out during maintenance shutdown.
4. Testing of pressure safety valves and setting will be carried out regularly during maintenance
shutdown
5. Calibration of control valves, instruments as and when required, but at least once in a year during
maintenance shutdown.
6. Testing of electrical measurements, such as earthing resistance, will be carried as per requirement.
7. Testing of all fire hydrant installations, fire extinguishers, fire pumps, and fire water level monitors
will be carried regularly.
7.6.12 Standard Operating Procedures

Various SOP’s like for Training, Safety audit, Chemical loading unloading and for Work permit are prepared
and followed for the safe operation of the plant. These SOP’s includes objective, scope responsibility and
procedure steps. Following SOP’s have been prepared in current unit:
 Safety measure during receipt, storage and handling of chemicals
 Safety work permit for hot work
 Safety work permit for confined space entry
 Safety work permit for work at height
 Safety work permit for general work
 Operation of effluent treatment plant
 On Job training
 Operation and handling of fire fighting equipments
en-vιsι n
7.6.13 Minimization of the Manual Handling of Hazardous Substance
Employers and employees should examine their workplaces to detect any unsafe or unhealthful conditions,
practices, or equipment and take corrective action. Minimize lifting of raw materials, heavy loads by using
appropriate platforms, trolleys etc. Manual material handling only the causes of musculo-sketal disorders
(MSD), backache, pain in minor and major joints, fatigue etc. following measure have been taken to avoid
mentioned ill health effect to workers.
 Below 25 Kg weight will be handling by a worker if required to do so.
 Material handling lorry-cart, drum handling trolley, fork lift, stacker, etc. will be used for material handling.
 Training will be carried out for Manual material handling.
 Avoid the moving, manual handling of hazardous material.
7.6.14 Personal Protective Equipment

Personal protective equipments (PPE’s) are/will provided to protect individuals from injury. Several types of
PPE’s are necessary for providing the optimum protection to individuals from the various risks. In addition to
the PPE which will be used for regular plant operation, the following PPE is available in case of emergency:
Table 7-17: List of Personal Protective Equipments
Sr. No. Personal Protective Equipments Quantity
A Respiratory:
1. Self Breathing Apparatus 2
2. Air Line Respirator 2
3. Gas Masks 2
4. Dust mask 110
B Non – respiratory:
1. Hand Gloves 50
2. Rubber Gloves 35
3. Gum Boots 20
4. Helmet 210
5. Ear plug 55
6. Ear muff 20
7. Safety Shoes 800
8. Safety Goggles 120
9. Safety Belt 10
Care of PPE’s
 Visual check for personal protective equipment is carried out by the user for its integrity before its use
and, if any defects are observed, the concerned supervisor is informed promptly and the defects corrected
or PPE replaced.
 Self contained breathing apparatus will be inspected and details of the inspection and maintenance will be
recorded.
 All employees are familiarized themselves with different types of PPEs available in the company.
 When not in use, PPE is carefully stored in a designated place.
 PPE’s is keeping in a safe place well covered, away from sunlight and dust.
en-vιsι n
7.6.15 Medical Facilities
Medical facilities are needed to provide immediate medical attention to people who may be exposed to certain
health risks during an accident. The factory is covered under ESI. All the injured persons will be sent to
nearby Hospital for treatment after giving first aid. A general agreement for immediate treatment is made
between the nearest hospital and the plant.
The First Aid boxes are kept in the Security Office, Production Plant, QC, and Safety Office. The First Aid
Boxes are checked from time to time and the first aid material is replenished immediately.
Industry has appointed a full-time medical officer and also external medical officer. Occupational Health
Centre (OHC) is located at HR Department which contains safety shower, eye wash centre and oxygen-
administering facility, etc. The contact numbers of all nearby hospitals and medical facilities are put up on a
board in the First Aid Centre. An emergency guide is provided to each employee, which gives guidance to
him or her during an emergency.
Antidotes are available in Occupational Health Centre (OHC) as well as in the area where chemical exposure
is likely. The list of antidotes is as under:
Table 7-18: List of Antidotes
No. Name of Chemical Antidote
1. Ethanol 2 gm sodium bi carbonate in 250ml water. Diazepam 10 mg through injection. Injury

in eye or skin washes plenty of water.
2. Acid 4% sodium hydro carbonate
7.6.16 Hazard Identification Studies

For existing unit, third party audit through checklist is being conducted as per IS14489 and frequency of audit
is set at once in a year in consultation with third party. Hazard identification using HAZOP, HAZAN, Fault
tree analysis, Event tree analysis etc. is not required as per the third party report, but proactively to identify
different hazards associated with various processes HIRAC (Hazard Identification Risk Assessment &
Control) is being conducted regularly for existing plant, same practice will continue after modernization. The
outcome of the report is discussed with the auditor to derive necessary precautionary & safety measures and
thereby ensuring the implementations and compliances.
7.7 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH SURVEILLANCE PROGRAM
7.7.1 Health Management within Unit

 Personal Hygiene practices strictly implemented to avoid inhalation, ingestion, Skin contact of
chemicals. Air bubble hoods, canister masks, SCBA sets have to be readily available in the operational
areas. Regular practice for wearing the equipment is given.
 Competency of persons working is fully established. Work related training is imparted periodically.
 Roles and responsibilities is assigned clearly and reviewed periodically.
 PPEs is kept at designated places and indicated on the layout plan.
 Periodic Mock Drills is conducted for emergency escape.
 Firefighting using first aid fire extinguishers and hydrant system is practiced at monthly intervals.
 Periodic health checkup program is organized and records maintained.
en-vιsι n
7.7.2 Occupational Health Monitoring
Occupational health surveillance of the workers (Pre-Employment, Periodic Check up and Post -checkup) is
carried out on a regular basis as per section-41-C of the Factories Act and Rule-68-T of Gujarat Factories
Rules and records are maintained in form 30 & 32. Full time internal medical officer is available at project
site.
In Sugar and distillery industry main Health hazards is;
 Bagassosis due to bagasse dust in Sugar plant
 Noise and Vibration due to heavy machineries
 Working at height, Falling objects, Struck with Objects
 Cutting, Injuries etc.
 Heat Stress
Table 7-19: Occupational Health Monitoring
Sr. Check up
No. Medical Test
Pre employment Periodical Post employment
1. Vision ✔ ✔ ✔
2. Audiometry ✔ ✖ ✔
3. Spirometry ✔ ✔ ✔
4. X-Ray ✔ ✔ ✔
5. Urine ✔ ✔ ✔
6. RBCs ✔ ✔ ✔
7. PFTs ✔ ✖ ✔
All precautions would be taken to avoid foreseeable accident like spillage, fire and explosion hazards and to
minimize the effect of any such accident and to combat the emergency at site level in case of emergency. Risk
control preventive & mitigative measures are discussed in previous section. Medical checkup is conducted
regularly. Medical records of employees are given as Annexure VI.
7.8 DISASTER MANAGEMENT PLAN

Disaster is a catastrophic situation in which the day-to-day patterns of life are, in many instances, suddenly
disrupted and people are plunged into helplessness and suffering and as a result need protection, clothing,
shelter, medical and social care and other, necessities of life.
Advance emergency planning and proper training of every employee in the emergency function is very
essential to make emergency control measures more effective. It is not possible to completely eliminate
emergency situations, but it is definitely possible to control them. An emergency, if uncontrolled may cause a
disaster which in turn may create a catastrophe.
There are two types of emergency control plans
1. On site emergency plan and
2. Off site emergency or disaster plan.
7.8.1 Statutory Provisions

Section 41B(4) of the Factories Act, 1948 requires an onsite emergency plan and detailed disaster control
measures for the safety of the factory workers and the general public living in the vicinity of the factory. The
occupier is required to inform the workers and the public about the safety measures to be taken in the event of
an accident.
en-vιsι n
Rule 13, 14 and Schedule II & 12 of the Manufacture; Storage and Import of Hazardous Chemicals Rules,
1989 and Rule 5,7,9 and 10 of the Chemical ' Accidents (Emergency Planning, Preparedness and Response)
Rules, 1996 also provide for on-site and off-site emergency plans.
7.8.2 Onsite Emergency Plan

Unit has well developed onsite emergency plan. The details of plan are discussed in subsequent sections.
Objectives of the Plan
1. To protect persons and properly of your factory in case of all kinds of accidents, dangerous occurrences
(Rule 103, Gujarat Factories Rules), emergencies and disasters happening in or affecting your plant at any
time.
2. To inform people and surroundings about above happening if it is likely to adversely affect them.
3. To inform authorities including helping agencies (doctors, hospitals, fire, police, transport etc.) in
advance, and also at the lime of actual happening.
4. To identify, assess, foresee and work out various kinds of possible hazards, their places, potential and
damaging capacity and area in case of above happenings. Review, revise, redesign, replace or reconstruct
the process, plant, vessels and control measures if so assessed.
5. To work out a plan with detailed instructions to cope up with above happenings, based on your personnel,
equipment and records. Necessary requirements shall be added if not already available. Levels of
hazardous substances shall be minimised to the extent possible. Establish machinery for rescue and
recuperation operations, total loss control and prevention of harms and recurrence of above happenings.
Ensure that absolute safety and security is achieved within the shortest time.
Types of Overall Emergencies
The risk assessment study has described all type of hazards are listed along with its causes in or near plant.
Fire (small and big), explosion, toxic exposure, strike, storm, flood and other hazardous possible situations are
described with reasons. A source of hazard from outside or neighboring plants, tanks, structure etc. is
mentioned. From the consequence analysis for storage area and drums following emergency situation can be
arise:
Table 7-20: Types of Overall Emergencies
Sr. Type of Emergency
Source Place Affected Persons
No. Including Disaster
1 Fire  Spillage or leakages of flammable Storage area of Plant Operator,
chemical at storage tank raw materials and Labors, workers
 Leakages: Pipeline, pumps and valves tankers carrying Admin staff
carrying flammable chemical chemicals
 Leakages and spillages in drums
storage area for other raw materials
and products
 Fire in road tanker during loading
unloading
2 Explosion Failure of the safety valve/pressure relief Boiler
valve, corrosion of critical parts of the
boiler, or low water level.
4 Spillage of Loading and unloading of Ethanol Tank Farm area,
flammable liquid process area
5 Collapsing of Loading and unloading such as Ethanol Tank Farm area,
structure process area
Overturning of
en-vιsι n
Sr. Type of Emergency
Source Place Affected Persons
No. Including Disaster
tanker containing
flammable / toxic
substances
6 Deliberate Sabotage, - Town/ villages Public living in
Terrorism, Air Raid that area.
etc.
7 Natural Calamities: - -
Lightening, Storm,
Earthquake, Flood
etc.
Emergency Control System

The organizational set-up is necessary for chain of commands during emergency situation which may arise in
the premises. The system is described in following subsections.
en-vιsι n
Figure 7-5: Organizational Set-up for Onsite Emergency Plan
en-vιsι n
Members of above teams will be available during all shifts and holidays. Protective equipment, lifting gears,
fire control points etc.; will be provided in sufficient numbers and their locations will be well informed.
Necessary vehicles will be kept ready to shift persons in case of emergency.
Details of Antidotes, PPE’s, Medical facilities and Fire fighting system are provided. Minimum two persons
qualified as Incident Controller must be present anytime during plant operation. If this condition is not met,
temporary suspension of chemical operations must be initiated.
A. Emergency Control Centre
The Security office near the factory main gate has been earmarked as an emergency Control Centre. All the
operations to handle and control emergency are coordinated from the emergency control centre. The
emergency Control Centre is always in close liaison with HSE, Medical Operation & HR Dept. in-side the
factory. The emergency Control Centre is manned all the time by a security guard. The Security Guards have
been trained on various actions to be taken in case of emergency. They are made aware about the emergency
communication facilities, first aid, basic fire fighting etc. All employees who come for duty and while going
back make necessary record into the Emergency Control Centre. Moreover visitors are also not allowed to
enter inside the factory premises without taking necessary gate pass from the emergency control centre. This
helps to know the exact number of employees and visitors at a time available in the factory / Head Count.
B. Chain of Command during Emergency
1. Incident Controller
A person eligible for Incident Controller status must hold a minimum position of “Shift In-Charge”.
Furthermore, training must be given to the concerned and exams must be passed 6 monthly to retain the status.
At the time of emergency the highest ranking – and qualified – person present in the company will put in
charge of Incident Controller and second highest ranking qualified person is put in charge of Incident Deputy
Controller. Qualified personnel in ranking order are listed. Any higher ranking personnel arrives in the
company premises on emergency call automatically takes over the Incident Controller or Deputy Incident
Controller charge after debriefing.
2. Site Controller
Site Controller and Site Deputy Controller status is held by Chief Executive Officer (CEO) and any deputy
ordered by CEO. If Site (Deputy) Controller is present at company premises, he takes charge of Incident
(Deputy) Controller automatically.
3. In case of Off-Site Emergency
If Off-Site Emergency is declared by Site Controller Government Authorities automatically take charge of
main controller status. All company employees are required to act as per the instructions of District
Emergency Commander.
C. Fire Fighting Team
Any employee of company can become a Fire Fighting Team member on instruction of his superior. Training
must be given to the concerned Fire Fighting Team members play a major role in in-house tackling of fire
incidents. They are required to operate fire fighting equipment in front-line, help other employees into safe
place and take any fire-control measure on order of Incident Controller. It is always ensured that minimum 3
Fire Fighting Team Members are present in the premises. Fire Fighting Team commander is Site Deputy
Controller under normal operation and Incident Controller during emergency.
en-vιsι n
D. First Aider
First aid training time to time provide by approved agency& at lease minimum first aider available in all shift.
E. Assembly Points
Assembly point is the place, where the non-emergency employees are assembled for a head count. Later they
are kept at the same place OR shifted to a safer place on the advice of IC. Two assembly points are provided.
Assembly point will be located inside the site of the plant. Normally assembly points are away from the bulk
storage locations, near to the plant main security gate, and located in upward side of the predominant wind
direction. The wind sock will be installed on the top of the plant building for instantly knowing the current
wind direction and is clearly seen from the assembly points.
7.8.2.1 Communication Facilities

Communication facility plays a very important role in dealing any type of emergency. Looking to the
necessity and importance, following ways of communications are provided for communicating a fire or
explosion or gas leak or a disaster.
 List of important authorities with their role in emergency and telephone numbers is prepared and placed
wherever required.
 List of important addresses in the nearby area such as hospitals, ambulance services, fire fighting services,
Government personnel (District Helpline, District EOC’s Helpline, Commissioner of Rescue & Relief,
district collector, zilla panchayat, police station and emergency control services and their telephone
numbers will be prepared and will be displayed outside emergency control room.
A. Emergency Evacuation Siren
An Electric operated emergency siren and Hand Operated emergency siren will be installed Nr. Main Plant
building. The operating switch of which is located inside the main Security Office. In case of major
emergency if evacuation of plant personnel is required, security personnel on duty can BLOW the emergency
siren only after the instruction of Site Main Controller. The audibility of the siren is such that at all corners of
the plant or factory premises the sound is being heard. The codification of the emergency siren is as below;
accordingly the siren is being operated.
Types of Emergency Siren Codification Duration of Sounding
Fire Off and On 3 times 10 Seconds On &10 Second Off
Emergency is over Continuous for one minute One minute at one time continuous
All employees of the factory should know the above codification, so that he can take appropriate action as
deem fit at the time of emergency.
B. Mobile Phones
To communicate with the concern key persons in emergency, the facility of mobiles has been provided to
concern dept. head / key personnel.
It is strictly prohibited to use mobile phones in and near areas where chemical spillage is happening!
To communicate the verbal or written messages in emergency, a facility for runner is devised; people are also
identified for the same who can go and communicate the required message / information.
C. Evacuation Plan
Graphical evacuation plan is prepared by Maintenance Dept. Display boards marking fire exits and assembly
points are prepared and placed accordingly. Revision is done yearly.
en-vιsι n
7.8.2.2 Sequence of Action in Emergency
A. In case of Fire, Explosion
 Any person noticing fire or explosion should attract attention of nearby persons by shouting Aag…
Help… Aag…….. Help…. Aag.......Help…
 He will try to start combating the fire with available resources.
 Types of extinguishing media to be used:
Class Nature of Material Example Extinguishing media

A Solid combustibles Wood, Paper, Leaves, Water
B Flammable liquids Solvents, Paint Foam, DCP, CO2, ABC
C Flammable gases LPG Gas, H2 GAS ABC, DCP, CO2
D Combustible Metals Mg, Al, Zinc, Na, K Sand
E Electrical Fire Electrical Equipments. CO2, ABC, DCP, halon
Do not use water to extinguish solvent fire! Use water monitor with foam!
Do not use water to extinguish electrical fires!
 He will inform the Incident Controller via Security Office or any other means.
 After receiving information Incident Controller and Incident Deputy Controller immediately take their
charge and start action.
 Incident Controller rushes to the site and stays there until emergency is over; instructs all personnel,
especially Fire Fighting Team members on combating fire and all other actions.
 Incident Controller takes decision on evacuation, orders First Aider to give first aid and instructs Incident
Deputy Controller to call Ambulance if necessary.
 Incident Controller evaluates seriousness of the situation; and if it cannot be handled with own resources
he orders Incident Deputy Controller to contact District Emergency Control Centre (VECC) and Fire
Brigade
 Incident Deputy Controller rushes to Emergency Control Centre, immediately starts informing Key
Personnel
 Brief description of Incident
 Materials concerned
 Status and seriousness of situation
 Whether human life is in danger
 Action taken
 Immediate assistance required
 Incident Deputy Controller immediately contacts District Emergency Control Centre, Fire Brigade and
Ambulance on instruction of Incident Controller.
 Information to be given to emergency services
 Self-identification
 Incident Deputy Controller starts head count as soon as possible to ensure that no employee in need is left
unattended.
 Incident Controller and Incident Deputy Controller are to guide the outside emergency services and
cooperate with them.
en-vιsι n
 Incident Controller and Incident Deputy Controller are responsible of cordoning the site off and to prevent
any unauthorized persons – especially media and news – entering the premises.
 Incident Controller and Incident Deputy Controller are to immediately brief any qualified higher ranking
person – especially the Site (Deputy) Controller – arriving at company premises and hand over the charge.
 Site (Deputy) Controller – after reaching the site – re-evaluates the situation and reviews actions taken / to
be taken.
 If Site (Deputy) Controller feels that the situation is not controlled by available resources within the
factory premises, he will assess the situation and declare the emergency as Off Site Emergency.
 Site (Deputy) Controller will immediately inform to the COLLECTOR, District, Sr. Inspector of Factories
and brief them regarding the incident and ask for additional help if required.
 Site (Deputy) Controller will continue to do his job by using available resources to control and contain the
emergency until the outside authorities and aids reach to the site.
 As soon as District Authorities reaches to the site of incident Site (Deputy) Controller will narrate the
following things.
 Type and Exact location of incident
 Equipments, Chemicals, and people likely involved
 Measures taken to tackle the emergency situation
 Additional aid required to mitigate the emergency situation.
 After arrival of the District Authorities to the site of incident he will give all the necessary help, assistance
and information as and when needed.
 Site (Deputy) Controller is the only authorized person to call off the on-site emergency after evaluation of
the situation.
 Site (Deputy) Controller is the only authorized person to make any statement or give any interview to
media.
B. Guidelines for Fire Fighters
 If a jet of fire is shooting out of any flanges / valves / pipelines / pumps of flammable material i.e.
Leaking liquid is on fire, in such case cut of the supply of liquid / gas to the leaking section or equipment
by closing the appropriate valve in the incoming line.
 Do not attempt to extinguish fire unless flow of material can be stopped.
 Flood the area with fine water spray; do not scatter spilled material with high-pressure water streams.
 Apply water from a protective location or from a safe distance.
 Stay upwind and keep out of low areas so that you will be protected from flame / radiant heat and
inhalation of material or combustion by-product.
 Move containers from fire area, if it can be done without risk.
 Cool Container with water spray until well after the fire is out.
 Stay away from the ends of the tanks as heat will build pressure and rupture closed storage containers.
 Keep unnecessary people away.
 Isolate Hazard area and deny entry.
C. Guidelines for Employees in Case of Fire
 Do not panic. Think before acting.
 Attract attention of nearby persons by shouting.
 Operate the nearest fire alarm point by breaking the glass.
 Inform the Incident Controller via Security Office or any other means.
en-vιsι n
 Action taken
 Try to handle the situation with own resources.
 Start combating the fire.
 Try to save human life in danger.
 Remove flammable materials from incident place.
 Do not take and give away uncontrolled information. Do not spread panic.
 Listen to and follow the instructions of superiors.
 Evacuate the place only via emergency exits if instructed.
 Reach to assembly point if instructed and wait for further instruction.
 Do not enter danger area if instructed not to do so.
 Start emergency shutdown procedure if instructed.
D. In Case of Toxic Spillage / Leakage
 Any person noticing serious leakage of chemical from pipelines, vessel or other equipments should attract
attention of nearby persons by shouting
Help…….Help……Help……
 If the leakage is small and knows to control / contain it, then will start working for containing and
stopping the leakage.
 He will immediately inform to the concerned plant / area in charge
 He will inform the Incident Controller via Security Office or any other means.
 After receiving information Incident Controller and Incident Deputy Controller immediately take their
charge and start action.
 Incident Controller rushes to the site and stays there until emergency is over; instructs all personnel on all
actions including:
 Instruct stopping discharge of effluent through storm / drain.
 Check area clear of people and organize emergency shutdown. Put barricade. Stop all Hot work /
Vessel entry related activity
 Ascertain nature of material and keep MSDS ready
 Follow the standard laid down spill control procedure and emergency shutdown of plant.
 Incident Controller takes decision on evacuation, orders First Aider to give first aid and instructs Incident
Deputy Controller to call Ambulance if necessary.
 Incident Controller evaluates seriousness of the situation; and if it cannot be handled with own resources
he orders Incident Deputy Controller to contact District Emergency Control Centre.
 Incident Deputy Controller rushes to Emergency Control Centre, immediately starts informing Key
Personnel.
 Information to be given to Key Personnel:
 Action taken
 Immediate assistance required
 Incident Deputy Controller immediately contacts District Emergency Control Centre and Ambulance on
instruction of Incident Controller.
 Information to be given to emergency services
en-vιsι n
 Self-identification
 Incident Deputy Controller starts head count as soon as possible to ensure that no employee in need is left
unattended.
 Incident Controller and Incident Deputy Controller are to guide the outside emergency services and
cooperate with them.
 Incident Controller and Incident Deputy Controller are responsible of cordoning the site off and to prevent
any unauthorized persons – especially media and news – entering the premises.
 Incident Controller and Incident Deputy Controller are to immediately brief any qualified higher ranking
person – especially the Site (Deputy) Controller – arriving at company premises and hand over the charge.
 Site (Deputy) Controller – after reaching the site – re-evaluates the situation and reviews actions taken / to
be taken.
 If Site (Deputy) Controller feels that the situation is not controlled by available resources within the
factory premises, he will assess the situation and declare the emergency as Off Site Emergency.
 Site (Deputy) Controller will immediately inform to the COLLECTOR, District, Sr. Inspector of Factories
and brief them regarding the incident and ask for additional help if required.
 Site (Deputy) Controller will continue to do his job by using available resources to control and contain the
emergency until the outside authorities and aids reach to the site.
 As soon as District Authorities reaches to the site of incident Site (Deputy) Controller will narrate the
following things.
 Type and Exact location of incident
 Equipments, Chemicals, and people likely involved
 Measures taken to tackle the emergency situation
 Additional aid required to mitigate the emergency situation.
 After arrival of the District Authorities to the site of incident he will give all the necessary help, assistance
and information as and when needed.
 Site (Deputy) Controller is the only authorized person to call off on-site emergency after evaluation of the
situation.
 Site (Deputy) Controller is the only authorized person to make any statement or give any interview to
media.
E. In Case of Accident / Injury
 If any person is injured or notices that some worker is injured should attract the attention of nearby
persons by shouting Help….Help…Help….
 Other workman at the site will help the injured person to go out of the place i.e. Into open area and
arrange for first aid
 Inform to the shift in-charge / Production Officer / Area in charge to take help of the First Aid team.
 The first Aider and the Shift in charge / Production Officer / Area in charge will immediately rush to the
site of incidence. They will assess the situation and if required they will arrange to call the ambulance or
another vehicle and send the injured person to nearby hospital, after giving necessary first aid.
 He will depute a responsible man to accompany the injured person at hospital / dispensary.
 He will ensure that the injured person reached to the hospital and receives required medical aid.
 EHS Manager takes decision; if the injury is loss time accident / reportable, then he will immediately
inform to Sr. Inspector of Factories, Tapi on telephone or by sending a letter or by any other means
depending on the severity.
 Site Controller – after reaching to the site – depending on severity, will immediately inform to the police /
inspector of factories.
en-vιsι n
F. Evacuation / Emergency Shutdown Procedure

Whenever the concerned Incident Controller declare an emergency and instruct for evacuation of the specified
areas / plants, the concerned employees working in the above specified area will evacuate the plant/ area
following the prescribed procedure as given below:
 Stop addition of reactants and transfers if any.
 Stop Heating
 Stop all other activities in the plant.
 For switching off the Electrical Power totally or start cooling in the reactors follow instruction from
Incident Controller / Shift In charge.
 Evacuate the Plant / Building via the emergency exits only.
 Assemble at the appropriate Assembly Point.
 During the Emergency – as per the instruction of the Incident Controller – only trained fire fighters and
first aiders will enter the building and carry out their duties.
 Report back at the work place, only after all-clear signal is given.
 Restart the operation, only after obtaining clearance from Site Controller.
G. Declaration of Off-Site Emergency
If the site main controller feels that the emergency situation is not controlled by available resources within the
factory premises, he will assess the situation and declare the emergency as Off-Site Emergency. He will
immediately arrange to inform to the following authorities in the below given order and seek required help
from District Emergency Control Centre.
 Local Fire Brigade department
 Police Station
 Medical Officer
 District Collector
 Sr. Inspector of Factories
 Deputy Superintendent of Police
 Gujarat Pollution Control Board
 Voluntary Organizations
After declaration of Off-Site Emergency, the district contingency plan i.e. Off Site Emergency Plan of
relevant District will automatically come in operation. The overall controller of the situation will be District
Collector. The details of sequence of action are given in the district contingency plan. The Site Controller /
Incident Controller will work in close liaison with the District Emergency Commander (Collector) and render
necessary help / assistance required.
Essential Employees and Their Duties
Incident Controller – Responsibilities
 The head of the Plant will be normally the Incident Controller (IC). Ensures the emergency is properly dealt
with, eliminated and normal operating conditions are restored as soon as possible.
 Ensures all the managers and officers of the plant are included as “key emergency personnel.”
 Ensures the On-site Emergency Plan is prepared, and general training is given to all the employees of the plant.
On-site Emergency Plan is submitted to Department of Industrial safety & Health for review.
 Ensures Mock drills (Virtual Emergency) are conducted quarterly in different shifts as per the provisions of On-
Site Emergency plan.
 Ensures one or two District disaster management Authority (DDMA) personnel are invited to participate in the
mock-drills.
en-vιsι n
 Ensures On site Emergency Plan is revised, based on the Mock-drill feed backs, till he is satisfied, that the plan
is acceptable to all key emergency personnel.
 To officiate a person responsible to co-ordinate with District Disaster Management Authorities to prepare OFF-
SITE EMERGENCY PLAN for the plant. The LIASION HEAD may be the appropriate person for the same.
 Ensure the fire fighting system, safety materials required for use during real emergency, and first-aid medical
facilities, are in order by review of documents, inspections and trials.
 Ensures to name the alternate key emergency personnel IC, ASC, LH, EH, RRH in case the emergency is
reported after general shift hours .The key emergency personnel will take positions as soon as possible and
replace the alternate team. (Mock drills conducted in II & III shifts will give necessary guidance to select the
personnel)
On Declaration of Real Emergency
 Soon after hearing the emergency from the Main gate security or SMS –Emergency, INCIDENT
CONTROLLER rushes to ECC.
 He takes control on all operations to deal with the EMERGENCY from ECC.
 He ensures all the team leaders are in their respective positions of operation, soon after ordering to blow the
emergency siren.
 On the advices of ASC, LH, EH, RRH analyzes the actual situation at periodic intervals and declares OFF-SITE
EMERGENCY if required.
 He ensures through Liaison Head, external emergency services are informed and called for help in time.
 Take periodic rounds to provide guidance and help to team leaders for effectively discharging their duties. Notes
down the short comings in the operations.
 Once the Risk is eliminated completely as declared by ACCIDENT SITE CONTROLLER, he orders to blow
“All clear siren”.
 He calls a FEED BACK meeting at ECC. All the key emergency personnel are to attend the meeting and
participate in the deliberations.
 He CO-ORDINARES with department heads to normalize the plant for regular production activities and support
services.
Accident Site Controller - Responsibilities
 Coordinates with ENGG TEAM, FIRE TEAM, RESCUE &RELIEF TEAM to mitigate emergency conditions’
 Ensures to finally eliminate the Emergency condition completely inside the plant.
 Ensures after eliminating emergency the area/s worked, are kept clean for normal operations.
 Ensures the required number of teams and personnel are kept ready for eliminating the emergency.
 Ensures all required materials, equipment and resources are available for eliminating the emergency. Is
requested and brought in time.
 Ensures right information is given to IC at periodic intervals.
 Soon after hearing the emergency siren or SMS Emergency, ACCIDENTSITE CONTROLLER rushes and
takes control of the site inside the plant, which created an emergency situation.
 He assesses the risk, computes the requirements of teams, the requirement of key emergency personnel for each
team, requirement of reserve teams in case the risk spreads, and orders them to take their positions.
 He assesses the complete scenario and decides whether to declare OFF-SITE EMERGENCY and informs to IC
accordingly.
 Ensures all the requirements for fighting the Emergency is available to eliminate the emergency at the shortest
possible time.
 Ensures all requirements of external resources are informed in time to LIAISON TEAM.
 He takes regular rounds and gives necessary guidance and help to teams to deal with emergency.
 He applies strategies and tries all possible permutations & combinations to LIMIT the Emergency as ON-SITE
EMERGENCY.
 Ensures all the key emergency personnel, are operating strictly complying safety parameters.
 Gives constant feedback on the Emergency situation and post his requirements to IC.
 He ensures emergency conditions are completely eliminated, areas are cleared, and informs to IC for blowing all
clear siren.
en-vιsι n
 Notes down the short comings in the operations performed for eliminating the emergency, during his rounds.
Liaison Head - Responsibilities
 Head – HR department is nominated as Liaison Head.
 ENSURES district disaster administration authorities are informed about the declaration of emergency and
constantly keeps in touch with them. Informs the actions initiated by district administration officials to IC.
 Ensures local in habitations are well informed and measures taken for their safety.
 Ensures the external resource help is given in time to ASC.
 Ensures the medical assistance for the injured, in nearby Hospitals, and transport for non-emergency personnel
movement.
 Ensures constant dialogue with nearby industries and arranges all possible help through district administration.
 Ensures proper gate security is maintained for preventing outside persons unauthorized entry inside the industry.
 Soon after hearing the emergency siren or SMS Emergency, Liaison Head rushes to main gate.
 Briefly informs the district administration of the Emergency situation and the help required.
 Informs the Fire Brigade for fire tenders and transport department for buses to evacuate the non emergency
employees.
 Informs the nearby industries about the impact and precautions to be taken by them. On request distribute
chemical masks for the employees inside factory.
 Takes periodic rounds of the affected areas and studies the situation. Notes down the points of concern of the
Engg. Team, Fire mitigation Team, Rescue & Relief teams.
 Asks his spokes person to meet the nearby village head and brief the actions taken for the safety of the people of
that village.
 Keeps the district administration informed about the latest situation and the help required.
Engineering Team- Responsibilities
 Engineering team head is nominated from Maintenance Department.
 Mechanical, Electrical & Instrumentation & Utility Maintenance Head will be the team leaders.
 Ensures the Plant & Machinery inside the plant are protected from damages.
 Isolates EB power and takes essential operations on standby power.
 Ensures the plant with minimum required illumination to carryout emergency operations.
 Ensures the systematic stoppage of plant and machinery to cause minimum LOSS, and pave way for easy restart
conditions.
 Ensures isolation of systems which can otherwise raise the risk level of emergency.
 Ensures the semi-finished products on the process line are protected from unwanted reactions and prevent it
from becoming a waste.
 Ensures all the machines are in shut- off condition.
 Ensures the unaffected storage locations are well protected, using the built in safety protection systems.
 Soon after hearing the emergency siren or SMS - emergency, Engineering Heads rushes and takes control of his
key personnel to deal with the conditions of emergency.
 Associates with the site controller wherever he demands help in controlling the emergency.
 Isolates EB power and takes the unit on standby power.
 Provides minimum illumination required for the control of emergency operations throughout the plant.
 Puts off all running equipment and shuts off the continuous process plant following emergency shut-down
procedures.
 Ensures unwanted chemicals are drained off the reactor vessels, heat exchangers and other systems as the plant
demands.
 Keeps the waste water treatment plant running to clear off the excess load on the system?
 In the Tank storage farms take appropriate actions like – draining the Hazchem in the dyke, transferring from
one vessel to another standby vessel, additional cooling arrangements of the equipment wherever required.
en-vιsι n
Rescue and Relief Team – Responsibilities
 On receiving information from SMS emergency rushes to accident site and coordinates activities with
ASC.
 Group the team members and inform all non-emergency personnel to assemble at assembly points
(Assembly points are located near main security gate).
 Subdivide the group and perform intensive search operation at all location to find out the injured.
 Make arrangements to transport to injure on stretcher to the medical team stationed at medical center.
 Search for the missing person given in the list by LH. Give periodic feedback to ASC.
 Soon after hearing the emergency siren or SMS - emergency, Rescue and Relief Team Head rushes to accident
site.
 Associates with the accident site controller wherever he demands help in controlling the emergency.
 Makes arrangements to search employees, contract persons and visitors missing in the HEAD COUNT.
 Search teams go all around the plant to search for the missing persons in the head count.
Fire Team – Responsibilities
 Fire Team head is nominated from Safety Department.
 Fire Team consists of Key emergency personnel from safety Department, First aid centre, process
department and security departments.
 He ensures all electrical systems are isolated except emergency lighting systems.
 He ensures all the fuel /heating systems are isolated from both the ends of flow.
 He ensures required numbers of fire mitigation equipment are fully operational.
 He ensures all fire fighting persons are performing the operations safe.
 He ensures all external help required is informed to ASC in time.
 He ensures the water resources are fully operational.
 He ensures smooth co-ordination with external Fire Mitigation Agencies.

1. Soon after hearing the emergency siren or SMS Emergency FIRE Team Head rushes to Accident site
and takes Instructions from ASC.
2. He plans with ASC and EH to isolate systems prior to start of fire extinguishing operations.
3. He takes note of wind direction and proper ventilation systems prior to start of fire fighting.
4. He ensures the required number of fire fighting teams is kept for fire fighting and preventing fire
spreading.
5. He ensures appropriate extinguishing systems are optimally used for controlling the situation.
6. He ensures wherever inert gases are used for controlling the fire, safe systems of operations are
adopted.
7. He ensures personal safety is given utmost importance.
8. After ensuring complete extinguishment reports to ASC.
9. He ensures complete clean up operations are performed prior to allowing persons for inspection.
Security Team – Responsibilities
Security Team head is nominated from Security Department.
 Security Team reports to Liaison Head. It is divided into three division
a. Gate security Team
b. Team to associate fire team
c. Team to perform inside factory security and cordoning operations.
 He ensures overall assistance is given to all teams.
He ensures non emergency persons are guided to Assembly points.
 He ensures traffic regulation inside the plant is done to the requirement.
en-vιsι n
 He ensures gate security team protects all inside plant persons. Records the in time of key emergency
personnel.
 Stops all persons/ vehicular movements as soon as Emergency Call is received.
 Allows DDMA vehicles, emergency service vehicles and guides them properly.
 He ensures all instructions given by Liaison Head are strictly followed.
a. Soon after hearing the emergency call OR SMS-emergency, Security Team Head rushes and takes
Instructions from LH.
b. He plans his persons for various operations and assigns a security supervisor for the same.
c. He takes note of wind direction and guides the persons to Assembly point/s.
d. He controls the gate operations and records the movement of vehicles and persons after the
declaration of emergency.
e. He interacts with LH and performs his instructions.
Medical Team – Responsibilities
 Medical Team head is nominated from OHS Department.
 He ensures the ambulance and one male nurse is kept in the accident site.
 Ensures CPR is given to unconscious persons in the accident site.
 Depending on the requirement requests LH for additional ambulance.
 He ensures proper prearrangements are done at nearby hospitals for treatment of injured.
 Keeps records of injured persons and monitor the progress of injured regularly.
a. Soon after hearing the emergency call OR SMS - emergency, Medical Team Head rushes and takes
Instructions from LH.
b. He will be stationed in OHS centre and monitor the medical needs of the injured.
c. He will ensure the required medicine, fire blankets, first aid boxes, and other essentials are kept ready
for the injured persons.
d. One additional ambulance will always be kept at OHC depending on the emergency conditions.
e. He will have constant interactions with LH on the medical treatment to injured persons
7.8.3 Rehearsal and Up-dation of Plan

1 Regular mock drills are organized. Short falls in actions observed during drill is explained to participants
and being corrected accordingly.
2 Any shortcomings regarding On–Site Emergency Plan observed during such drills is corrected and
incorporated in On-Site Emergency Plan and same is communicated to all.
3 The On-Site Emergency Plan is updated after any significant development in factory or change in the law.
7.8.4 Offsite Emergency Preparedness Plan

Offsite emergency plan follows the onsite emergency plan. When the consequences of an emergency situation
go beyond the plant boundaries, it becomes an offsite emergency. As the off-site emergency plan is to be
prepared by the Government, a Central Control Committee or Group is formed under the Chairmanship of the
area head.
However, the plant management provides the public administration with the technical information relating to
the nature, quantum and probable consequences on the neighboring population. The offsite plan in detail is
based on those events, which are most likely to occur, but other less likely events, which have severe
consequence, will also be considered. Incidents which have very severe consequences yet have a small
probability of occurrence would also be considered during the preparation of the plan.
en-vιsι n
The roles of the various parties who is directly involved in the implementation of an offsite plan are described
below. Depending on local arrangements, the responsibility for the offsite plan would either rest with the plant
management or with the local authority.
en-vιsι n
Figure 7-6: Off-Site Emergency Plan
en-vιsι n
Aspects Proposed to be considered in the Offsite Emergency Plan

The main aspects, which should be included in the emergency plan, are:
Organization: Detail of command structure, warning systems, and implementation procedures, emergency
control centres. Names and appointments of incident controller, site main controller, their deputies and other
key personnel.
Communications: Identification of personnel involved, communication centre, call signs, network, list of
telephone numbers.
Specialized Knowledge: Details of specialist bodies, firms and people upon whom it may be necessary to call
e.g. those with specialized fuel knowledge, laboratories.
Voluntary Organizations: Details of organizers, telephone numbers, resources etc.
Chemicals/Fuel Information: Details of the hazardous substances stored and a summary of the risk associated
with them.
Meteorological Information: Arrangements for obtaining details of weather forecasts and weather conditions
prevailing at that time
Humanitarian Arrangements: Transport, evacuation centres, emergency feeding, treatment of injured, first aid,
ambulances and temporary mortuaries.
Public Information: Arrangements for (a) Dealing with the media press office; (b) Informing relatives
Assessment of Emergency Plan
Arrangements for: Collecting information on the causes of the emergency; and Reviewing the efficiency and
effectiveness of all aspects of the emergency plan.
Role of the Emergency Co-ordinating Officer
The various emergency services would be coordinated by an Emergency Coordinating Officer (ECO), who is
designated by the district collector. The ECO would liaison closely with the Factory Manager/Safety officer.
The ECO has been equipped with address and phone numbers of important agencies.
A. Role of the Local Authority
The duty to prepare the offsite plan lies with the local authorities. The emergency planning officer (EPO)
appointed should carry out his duty in preparing for a whole range of different emergencies within local
authority area. This liaison should ensure that plan is continually kept up to date. It is responsibility of the
EPO to ensure that all those organizations which have been involved offsite in handling the emergency knows
of their role and are able to accept it by having for example, sufficient staff and appropriate equipment to
cover their particular responsibilities. Rehearsals for offsite plans should be organized by the EPO.
B. Role of Police
Formal duties of the police during an emergency include protecting life and property and controlling traffic
movements. Their functions should include controlling bystanders, evacuating the public, identifying the dead
and dealing with casualties, and informing relatives of death or injury.
C. Role of Fire Authorities
The control of a fire should be normally the responsibility of the senior fire brigade officer who would take
over the handling of the fire from the site incident controller on arrival at the site. The senior fire brigade
officer should also have a similar responsibility for other events, such as explosions. Fire authorities in the
region should be appraised about the location of all stores of flammable materials, water and foam supply
en-vιsι n
points, and firefighting equipment. They should be involved in onsite emergency rehearsals both as
participants and, on occasion, as observers of exercises involving only site personnel.
D. Role of Health Authorities
Health authorities, including doctors, surgeons, hospitals, ambulances and so on, should have a vital part to
play following a major accident, and they should form an integral part of the emergency plan. For major fires,
injuries should be the result of the effects of thermal radiation to a varying degree, and the knowledge and
experience to handle this in all but extreme cases may be generally available in most hospitals.
Major off site incidents are likely to require medical equipment and facilities additional to those available
locally, and a medical "mutual aid” scheme should exist to enable the Assistance of neighboring authorities to
be obtained in the event of an emergency.
E. Role of Government Safety Authority
This will be the factory inspectorate available in the region. Inspectors are likely to satisfy themselves that the
organization responsible for producing the offsite plan has made adequate arrangements for handling
emergencies of all types including major emergencies. They may wish to see well documented procedures and
evidence of exercise undertaken to test the plan. In the event of an accident, local arrangements regarding the
role of the factory inspector will apply. These may vary from keeping a watch, to a close involvement in
advising on operations.
Table 7-21: Offsite Action Plan
Responsible Action Required to be taken to
Equipment/Material Facilities Required
Agencies for Mitigate Disaster by Aid giving
at Site to Mitigate Emergency
Taking action agency
Police Arrangements for evacuation Rescue of persons from  Self-Breathing apparatus with spare
Department zone of influence to predetermined camps cylinder
Caution to public by announcement  Chemical gas mask with spare canister
Traffic control by cordoning of the area  Vehicle with PA system
Law & order  Transportation for evacuation of
people
Request to railway authority for keeping the nearest
railway gate open & to stop the trains at the nearest
railway station
District Fire Scrubbing of the flashed off gas Cloud with water  Self-breathing apparatus with spare
Brigade curtain cylinders
To rescue trapped persons  Foam /water fire tenders
If fire is big, keep surrounding Area cool by spraying  Gas mask with spare canisters
water Limewater
Communication to State Electricity Board to continue  Neck to toe complete
or cut off electric supply  asbestos suit, PVC hand gloves, gum
boots, safety goggles
Communication to water supply department for
supplying water  Mobile scrubbing system
 Along with suction arrangement.
Hospital and Medical facilities for affected persons(first aid and  Ambulance with onboard resuscitation
Public health treatment) unit, first aid, stretchers
Pollution Identification of concentration of gas in zone of  Gas detector
Control Board influence
Municipal Removal of debris and damaged structures  Provide bulldozers & cranes
corporation
Transport Monitor the incoming and outgoing transports  Provide traffic police & emergency
en-vιsι n
Responsible Action Required to be taken to
Equipment/Material Facilities Required
Agencies for Mitigate Disaster by Aid giving
at Site to Mitigate Emergency
Taking action agency
department Arrange emergency shifting of affected persons and shifting vehicles at site and stock of
non Affected person to specified area fuel for vehicles.
Arrange diesel/ petrol for needed vehicles
Meteorological Give all information related to meteorological aspects  Provide wind direction and velocity
Department for safe handling of affected area for living beings instruments with temperature
measurements
Forecast important weather changes, if any  Mobile van for meteorological
parameter measurements
Local Crises Representatives of all departments are in the local crisis  Must have all resources at hand,
Group group; therefore they are expected to render services especially disaster management plan
available with them. Since it is a group of experts with and its implementation method.
authority, the mitigating measures can be implemented  All relevant information related to
speedily. The representatives’ from locals are also there hazardous industry shall available with
so that communication with local people is easy and crisis group News paper editor shall be
quick. a part of the group so that right and
The district emergency or timely media release can be done.
Disaster control officer/collector shall be the president
and he shall do mock drill etc. so that action can be
taken in right direction in time
District Crisis Collector shall be the president of District Crisis Group  All necessary facilities
Group therefore all district infrastructure facilities are  available at district can be made
diverted to affected zone available at affected zone
All other functions as mentioned For local crisis group  Control of law and order situation
7.9 LEAK DETECTION AND REPAIR (LDAR) PROGRAM

 Written LDAR program or SOPs will be prepared for effective implementation and provision of leak detection
& repair program. Planned preventive maintenance schedule (PPM) will be prepared for the equipment used for
handling VOC generated chemicals.
 Training will be provided to the persons involved in preparation of LDAR program. Internal as well as external
audits will be carried out for effective implementation of LDAR program.
 Parameter will be set for repair and monitor the leaks; the said parameters will be more stringent than regulatory
values. The detected leaks will be repaired within time bound. Frequency for monitoring leaks will be quarterly
or monthly basis.
 To repair leaking component unit will schedule the first attempt of leak program.
 Record of calibration as well as maintenance activity will be maintained.
Methodology to be adopted During LDAR Study:

 Identify the volatile organic chemical streams that must be monitored.
 Types of components (pumps, valves, connectors, etc.) to be monitored
 Frequency of monitoring.
 Actions to be taken if a leak is detected.
 Length of time in which an attempt to repair the leak must be performed.
 Actions that must be taken if a leak cannot be repaired within guidelines.
 Record-keeping and reporting requirements.
en-vιsι n
Elements of an LDAR Program:
 Identifying Components
 Leak Definition
 Monitoring Components
 Repairing Components
 Recordkeeping
Sources of Leakages & VOC Generation:
 Connectors are components such as flanges and fittings used to join piping and process equipment
together. Gaskets and blinds are usually installed between flanges.
 Sampling connections are utilized to obtain samples from within a process.
 Compressors are designed to increase the pressure of a fluid and provide motive force. They can
have rotary or reciprocating designs.
 Pressure relief devices are safety devices designed to protect equipment from exceeding the
maximum allowable working pressure. Pressure relief valves and rupture disks are examples of
pressure relief devices.
 Leaks from pumps typically occur at the seal.
 Leaks from valves usually occur at the stem or gland area of the valve body and are commonly
caused by a failure of the valve packing or O-ring.
 Leaks from connectors are commonly caused from gasket failure and improper bolts on flanges.
 Leaks from sampling connections usually occur at the outlet of the sampling valve when the
sampling line is purged to obtain the sample.
 Leaks from compressors most often occur from the seals.
 Leaks from pressure relief valves can occur if the valve is not seated properly, operating too close to
the set point, or if the seal is worn or damaged. Leaks from rupture disks can occur around the disk
gasket if not properly installed.
 Leaks from open-ended lines occur at the point of the line open to the atmosphere and are usually
controlled by using caps, plugs, and flanges. Leaks can also be caused by the in correct
implementation of the block and bleed procedure.
To Prevent Losses in Atmosphere
 Leak Free Pumps for transfer like Magnetic coupled pumps
 MSW (Metal Slice Wreath) Gaskets in pipelines to prevent leakage from flanges.
 Condenser and Reactor with cooling arrangement.
Diagram of Tanker Loading/Unloading
en-vιsι n
en-vιsι n
LDAR Activities
1. Monitoring of Losses
 Workplace VOC monitoring through VOC meter - photo ionization detection (PID) sensor
technology) or flame ionization detector (FID)
 Periodic Leakage Audit at Plant
2. Preventive Maintenance to prevent Leakages
In order to prevent leakage from Pump, Seals, Valves etc preventive maintenance is carried out
periodically as per plan. In case of any recurring problem, action plan shall be prepared or frequency shall
be revised.
Table 7-22: Frequency of monitoring of leaks
S. No. Component Frequency of Monitoring Repair Schedule
1. Valves/ Flanges Quarterly (semi-annual after two Repair will be started

consecutive periods with < 2% leaks Within 5 working days and
and annual after 5 periods with < 2% shall be completed within 15
leaks) working days after detection
2. Pump seals Quarterly of leak for general
hydrocarbons.
3. Compressor seals Quarterly
4. Pressure relief devices Quarterly
5. Pressure relief devices (after Within 24 hours
venting)
6. Process drains Annually
7. Components that are difficult to Annually
monitor
8. Pump seals with visible liquid Weekly Immediately
dripping
9. Any component with visible Weekly Immediately
leaks
10. Any component after repair/ Within a week --
replacement
3. Immediate Repair of devices in case of Leakages

 Plant has an internal competent team of Technicians and Engineers to handle different types of
leakages round the clock.
 Plant has also maintained adequate number of spares and consumables required to repair the leaking
device.
 Plant also has competent contractor team to handle Leakages and can repair the same immediately.
 Standby equipments like Pumps, valves etc shall be kept basis the criticality and usage.
 Plant also has access equipments like Boom lift to handle leakages at height immediately.
en-vιsι n
LDAR for Specific Volatile Organic Chemical

Name Mode of Sources of Mitigation Mitigation Measure Action taken for
Type of Transfer Leakages Measure For (If leakages will be prevention of leakages
Storage find out occur)
leakages
Ethanol By Pump  Leak from Valve For using Gas  If valve will be  Check Thickness of
tank & Fix (failure of the Detector by leak stop tank
Pipe line valve packing & PID Sensor pumping system  Using fix pipeline for
O-ring) technology and replace with solvent transfer
 Leak from pump new valve.  Minimum use of
(Occur at seal)  When pump seal Connectors & Joins
 Leak from tank will be leak  Provided sufficient
 Leak from immediately stop Space (Solvent
Connectors solvent transfer Unloading area) for
 Leak from open and immediately Solvent Tanker
ended lines repair or replace  Conduct LDAR
with new seal. Program
7.10 SPECIFIC SAFETY MEASURES TO BE TAKEN FOR GENERAL PUBLIC LIVING IN THE
VICINITY
Safety Policy as per Rule 12-C and Rule 68-P of Gujarat Factories Rule 1963 is prepared & displayed / given
to all interested parties. Safety Manual is prepared in line with requirement of the Rule 68-P & 68-J of Gujarat
Factories Rule 1963consisting of list of Hazardous Chemicals, its hazards and precautions taken and in case of
Emergency situation what actions to be taken by General Public is be prepared in Local language and given to
all Stake holders.
Detailed On-Site Emergency Plan is prepared and further it will be modified as per Schedule 8-A of Sub rule
68-J-(12) (1) of Gujarat Factories Rule – 1963. The plan will rehearsed on regular basis at stipulated
frequency. Unit has taken PLI policy as per applicability. PLI policy is given as Annexure XIV
en-vιsι n
CHAPTER 8 ENVIRONMENTAL DAMAGE ASSESSMENT,
REMEDIATION PLAN AND NATURAL & COMMUNITY
RESOURCE AUGMENTATION PLAN
8.1 JUSTIFICATION FOR VIOLATION

Sugar unit was established in November 1972 as a Co-operative Mandli to protect the social & economic
interest of small farmers located in the region. Existing sugar mill was based on old technology and yield
of its products were reducing day by day so management had decided to replace existing sugar mill by
installing modernized mill.
Sugar unit has modernized its existing sugar crushing plant and machineries by installation of advanced
technologies based machineries for sugar mill and hence it increased in existing cane crushed quantity
from 5000 TCD to 7000 TCD but there is no change in existing boiling house and molasses based
distillery unit.
Unit has submitted an application to EAC at MoEF&CC as Category-A, 5(j) Sugar Industry project vide
proposal no. IA/GJ/IND2/74463/2018 dated 13/04/2018 with reference to Violation, Notification No. S.O.
804 (E) dated: 14th March, 2017. After presentation in front of EAC Committee at MoEF&CC in 14th
meeting of Expert Appraisal Committee (Violation) held on 23.10.2018, proposal has been transferred to
SEAC/SEIAA, Gujarat under schedule 5(j), Category B vide new proposal no.
SIA/GJ/IND2/31012/2019. TOR meeting was scheduled in 495th SEAC meeting held on 11.04.2019 and
TOR letter granted vide letter no. SEIAA/GUJ/TOR/Violation/5(j)/927/2019 on 19.06.2019.
Due to modernized mill it resulted in increased cane crushing capacity without increasing other
auxiliaries/utilities of the unit. No additional land is required to acquire for the modernization of sugar mill.
Existing land i.e. 5,95,292.58 sq.mt. is sufficient for the modernization project due to increase in cane crushed
quantity and installation of advanced technology based machinery for sugar unit.
 Disadvantages of old sugar mill (Old Technology):
 After cane crushed, moisture content in bagasse is found high hence, production reduced and calorific
value of bagasse is low. Therefore, bagasse as a fuel and its consumption was increasing.
 Effluent load is found with major quantity
 Juice loss is also found due to spill from vessel.
 Higher space was required for old mill.
 Steam turbine driven
 Maintenance cost of old mill was higher than New Mill.
 Manpower and power requirement was high
 Control system for operation was tedious
 Higher lubrication consumption
 Advantages of new sugar mill (New Technology):
 Leakages and loss reduced due to closed system of new mill
 Juice and bagasse increased for new mill
 Electricity driven
 Low energy efficient reduction gear box replaced by high energy efficient compact design planetary
gear box.
 Closed circuit water cooling system for mill bearing reduces cold water consumption and leakages of
water.
en-vιsι n
 Reduction in no. of unit benefitted in easy in operation, monitoring and preventive maintenance. In
old milling tandem there are 12 Mills, but in new mill 4 mills will be sufficient.
 Fully automatic with VFD drive enhance the consistency, efficiency in operation as well as closed
monitoring of all unit from one place. Hence reduction in break down and increased out put.
 Low Maintenance cost
 Less Lubricants consumption
 Less Manpower and power requirement
8.2 ENVIRONMENTAL DAMAGE ASSESSMENT AND REMEDIATION PLAN
8.2.1 Salient Features Of The Project

 Type of the project: Modernization of Sugar Industry of Shree Sayan Vibhag Sahakari Khand
Udhyog Mandli
 Location: At & Post Sayan, Taluka Oplad, District Surat, Gujarat
 Category of the project as per EIA Notification 2006: 5(j)
 Plot Area: 5,95,292.58 m2
 Project Cost: 37 (Rs. In Crores)
Table 8-1: Chronology for Project
Activity Timeline
Shree Sayan Vibhag Sahakari Khand Udyog Mandli Ltd. This project is in operative from 1972.
Application for TOR modernization to EAC, MoEF&CC 13.04.2018
Case transfer from MoEF&CC to SEIAA, Gujarat 01.02.2019
Acceptance at SEAC, Gujarat 28.03.2019
TOR meeting at SEAC, Gujarat 11.04.2019
TOR Granted 19.06.2019
Civil work start 20.03.2017
Commencement of Mill Installation Activity Started on 10.05.2017
20.03.2017 to 10.05.2017 (Construction phase-
192 days)
Production started in New Mill
Period of Violation
31.10.2017 to 25.04.2018 & (Days: 146)
25.10.2018 to 02.04.2019 (Days: 160)
Total Days: 498 Days
Court Case None
To regularize the activity under EIA
notification.
As per S.O. 804(E) dated 14.03.2017, S.O.
Why under Violation?
1030(E) dated 08.03.2018, OM dated
15.03.2018 & 16.03.2018 to the EIA
Notification.
 All the supportive documents regarding violation and action taken by GPCB are given as Annexure IX
en-vιsι n
8.2.2 Identification Of Damage

Construction of shed for modernization mill of sugar unit within the project site led to pollution in the
environment. Mainly dust and fugitive emissions, exhaust of construction equipment & machineries and
transportation for construction purposes. It has also increased pollutants due to exhaust from vehicles on the
road. The impacts are prevented or reduced by managing proper control measures. While during operation
phase of the project, dust generation, fugitive emission and flue gas emission were the major pollutants due to
bagasse of handling and utilization as a fuel and transportation of sugarcane and products.
Water demand for the construction work was fulfilled from existing water supply sources i.e. canal water and
ground water. The area is considered safe in terms of availability of water. It is sufficient to cater the demand
of all users in the project region. During the construction phase, majorly wastewater generation was domestic
sewage which was disposed off in existing soak pit/ septic tank.
While in operation phase, water requirement and waste water generation from the modernized mill was
reduced from consented quantity. Water requirement were met from existing source of water, i.e. canal water
and ground water. Waste water generation was treated in existing ETP and reused as on-land irrigation/
plantation/ gardening.
Construction of modernization project carried out on vacant land within the premises so there was no
demolition work involved. Due to that construction, wastes were generated that was disposed off as per
existing practice. While construction debris was utilized as filling material up to plinth level and other
materials were sold as scrap to the dealers. During operation of the project, waste generated was disposed off
as per existing consent by GPCB.
Noise generation expected due to construction work but those construction activities were carried out during
the day time and thick greenbelt within the site so its impact was reduced to the environment. As construction
activity was carried out within existing premises so noise might limited to within project site. During the
operation, comparing to old unit this new unit has reduced noise generation due to single and enclosed tandem
system.
Thick greenbelt to the site is already developed, 34% of project site area is developed as a greenbelt further,
and no tree was cut during the construction of the project. Hence, no additional greenbelt is proposed and
positive impact has been considered for this ecological damage assessment.
During the construction and operation phase, required water was met from surface water through canal and
ground water through borewell during interval of 15 days as canal water is sufficiently available for 15 days.
Around 1500 KL water was tapped for construction activities. That has impacted on competitive users so it
needs to be recharged in ground water through rain water harvesting.
en-vιsι n
The collection and analysis of data with respect to air, water, land, noise and other environment attributes was carried out by NABL accredited laboratory and details
are presented in Chapter 3 of this EIA report. Assessment of environmental damage assessment with respect to air, water, noise, soil/land, flora & fauna and other
environmental attributes are presented in Error! Not a valid bookmark self-reference.:
Table 8-2: Assessment of Environmental damage assessment & Remediation Plan and EMP suggested
Environmental
Sr. Estimated Cost of Damage/
Parameter/ Activities Damage Remediation /EMP
No. Remediation
Attribute
1 Water Surface and ground water Fresh water quantity As the area falls under safe category so
Consumption consumed is around 10.8 KLD reduction for recharging of rainwater is not the best
for domestic purpose and 7 competent users. solution. So it is decided to contribute in
KLD construction purpose development of sewerage network of the
during construction phase and area that will prevent percolation of waste
Total cost of Rs. 7 Lacs considered
max 651 KLD during operation water.
under remediation plan for
phase.
During operation phase, water consumption development of sewerage network
is reduced from its permitted quantity that is and treatment in local community.
positive impact.
In addition to this, allocation of Rs.
2 Waste Water Domestic waste water generated Disposal of domestic During construction phase, generated 7.5 lacs towards 5 nos. of safe
Generation is 8.64 KLD during construction waste water through domestic waste water was disposed off drinking water facility like RO/UV in
period. While during operation septic tank, increase through septic tank as per existing practice. nearby villages.
phase maximum 627 KLD disposal quantity in

While during operation phase, effluent
waste water generated. ground water due to
generation quantity reduced due to
additional load of
modernization project with respect to
disposal.
existing permitted quantity.
en-vιsι n
Environmental
No. Remediation
Attribute
3 Air Pollution Construction of shed for mill, Dust generation and During construction phase, water sprinkling To overcome air pollution in the
transportation of materials for pollution increase due was done to suppress dust emission. While community, plantation and
construction purpose. to exhaust from in operation phase of modernization project, Healthcare activities are proposed in
vehicles. Resulting multi cyclone with wet scrubber are remediation plan for the same Rs. 2
increase the level of proposed to control air emission. Moreover, lacs and Rs. 3.75 lacs are allocated
PM, SO, NOx and CO. Plantation in nearby villages and payment of respectively.
hospital bills and development of facilities in
Jeevan Raksha Hospital.
4 Solid Hazardous Waste generation due to Illegal dumping of Construction work was carried out on vacant Cleaning of road side plastic waste in
Waste construction and operation wastes may lead to land within the premises so no demolition the area as per CPCB guidelines 2017
activities pollution in land use, work was carried out. No demolition waste & utilization in road construction and
surface water bodies, generated. Construction debris was utilized in cement industry. Rs. 10 lacs are
air, etc. in levelling. allotted towards this activity, as per
guideline these wastes should be
During operation phase, wastes were
collected and shredded and sent to
generated and those managed as per existing
prescribed users (in road making or
practise as per regulations. These have not
cement industry, etc).
created significant impact.
5 Noise & vibration Use of heavy machineries for Noise generation in Construction activities were done during day To remediate this impact plantation
construction activities, noise location which affect time and it was within the existing premises. to be in nearby villages for this Rs. 2
generation in operation phase. on ecology and human Project is having thick greenbelt which lacs allotted.
beings. control noise to travel outside of premises. It
en-vιsι n
Environmental
No. Remediation
Attribute
was ensured from contractors to use PUC
certified vehicles for transportation of
materials. During operation phase, noise
generation was low comparing to old mill.
6 Greenbelt Tree cut for construction Imbalance in ecological This construction activity done on open land To remediate this impact plantation
activities. system of the location. within the premises and no tree was cut. to be in nearby villages for this Rs. 2
Moreover, unit is having 34% of greenbelt lacs allotted and Healthcare activities
area. are proposed in remediation plan for
the same Rs. 3.75 lacs are allocated.
7 Hydro-Geology Ground water utilization for Ground water utilized for construction and Total cost of Rs. 7 Lacs considered
construction and operation operational activities with interval of 15 under remediation plan for
Reduction in ground
phase. days as a secondary source when surface development of sewerage network
water table that can be
water not available. To optimise this, rain and treatment in local community.
impacted on competent
water harvesting cannot be best option due
users.
to safe category and maximum area
available for percolation. So sewerage
network and treatment is planned for
domestic wastewater in the area.
8 Risk Hazards/ Various construction activities Impact on health of All required safety measures were taken Rs. 4 lacs are allotted towards
Occupational and operation activities workers during construction phase and operation financial aid in educational support to
Health & Safety phase. Though to overcome this impact, youth of the local area and Rs. 3.75
en-vιsι n
Environmental
No. Remediation
Attribute
provisions are made in remediation plan for lacs are allotted towards healthcare
financial aid in education and healthcare activities.
activities.
9 Soil Conservation Excavation during construction Loss of top soil To optimise this impact, plantation in local For plantation activities in local area
activities. area and contribution towards development Rs. 2 lacs area allotted and Rs. 2.75
in Sayan village gas connection lacs allotted for contribution towards
establishment are considered in remediation gas connection establishment in
plan. Sayan villages. This is for approx 68
houses and that can be distributed
amount all remaining houses.
en-vιsι n
8.2.3 Environment Benefits Earned And Cost Of Remediation Plan And Natural & Community
Resource Augmentation Plan
Ecological damage and remediation plan estimated/ calculated as per the guideline given in TOR letter is as
under:
Table 8-3: Environment Benefits Earned in Violation Period

EMP cost
Attributes Scope of environmental benefits earned Recurring cost (Rs.)
Capital Cost (Rs.)
per day
AP Cost of barricading considered for air 50,700 --
pollution to control fugitive dust
Periphery of 260 m x 3 m barricading height x All the precautionary measures are taken during
cost of barricading sheet Rs. 65. operation phase.
WP Water consumption during construction
phase:
Cost of water requirement for construction
worker during the construction phase.
Nos. of workers x 150 ltr per capita water -- 313
requirement x rate of water Rs. 29 per KL/
1000
Water requirement for construction activities 7 -- 203
KL per day x rate of water
Water consumption and effluent treatment

cost during operation phase: -- --
Water consumption was under their existing
consented quantity, so it was not required to
calculate in damage assessment. Due to
modern technology water consumption -- --
reduced from 5026 to 3120KLD. So saved up
to 1906 KLD.
Total waste water generation due to modern
technology reduced near about 50% consented
quantity. So it is considered as a positive
impact.
SHW (a) Construction Phase: No demolition was carried out, but removal of
for In case of demolition has carried out, the machineries of old mill was done while shed is kept
cost of demolition waste management plan for godown purpose.
needs to be discussed and finalized as non-
recurring cost
(b) Operation Phase:
for Source, generation and management of All Solid and Hazardous waste generated were
Hazardous & Solid waste as per the managed as per Rules. Even wastes reduced
Hazardous and Other Wastes (Management compared to old mill.
and Transboundary Movement) Rules 2016.
NV Cost of barricades around the project site is 50,700 --
considered.
260m total perimeter (91m length and 33m
width) x 3m height x Rs. 65 per sheet.
During operation phase all required
precautions were taken like acoustic
enclosures, vibration pad, and greenbelt
en-vιsι n
already developed 34% of the premises, etc.
GB Not applicable as No tree was cut for this

project and more than 33% of area is
developed as greenbelt.
HG Cost of construction & maintenance of 5,00,000 --
recharge well:
1523 KL water tapped for construction so
recharging to be done within project site or out
side project side. Considering 270 KL per
annum rainwater harvesting, about 27 nos. of
RWH structures.
RH/OHS (a) Construction phase & Not Applicable- All provision were made during
(b) Operation phase construction period & it was made by constructors
A. Cost of health check-up of workers:
Not Applicable- During operation phase health check
B. Cost of safety measures including PPEs:
up and all PPEs being provide to all workers
SC Cost of preservation of top soil & excavated 50,400 --
earth to be considered.
[2333m2 area x 0.15 m depth x 1.8 Specific
Gravity x 80 Rs./ton]
TOTAL 6,51,800 516
Cost of remediation plan and natural & community resource augmentation plan:
 Total of recurring cost = Rs 516 per day x Number of days violation (192 days of construction out of
total 498 days of violation) = Rs. 99,072/-
 Total EMP cost = Annual Recurring + Non recurring cost = Rs. 7,50,872/-..........(I)
 Profit earned due to the activity = 10 % of profit earned due to the activity = Rs. 50,616/-..........(II)
 Cost of remediation plan and natural & community resource augmentation plan = Total EMP cost (I)
+ 10 % of Profit earned (II) = Total Rs. (III) Rs. 8,01,488/-..........(III).
Cost of remediation plan and natural & community resource Rs. 8,01,488/-
augmentation plan as per indicative guideline
CER amount as per OM no. 22-65/2017 on 01.05.2018 Rs. 37,00,000/-
8.3 REMEDIATION PLAN

To compensate loss of natural resources due to benefits derived on the loss of environmental components, it is
proposed to carry out developmental activities within local community under Remediation Plan and Natural
and Community Augmentation Plan.
Ecological damage assessed and economic benefits derived due to violation, total amount of Rs. 8,01,488/- is
assessed. But as per guideline given in TOR letter, amount to be considered as calculated as per damage
assessment or equivalent to the CER amount as per OM dated 01/05/2018, whichever is higher. So
en-vιsι n
Remediation Plan and Natural & Community Augmentation Plan to be prepared for Rs. 37,00,000/- for 5
years.
Hence, project proponent assures to submit bank guarantee of Rs. 37 lacs for the cost towards Remediation
Plan and Natural and Community Augmentation Plan. The detail of activities to be carried out and break-up of
the budget allotted is as under:
Table 8-4: Budgetary Allocation for Remediation plan and Natural Resource & Community Augmentation Plan
Cost (Rs. In Lacs) Total
No. Remediation Plan (Rs. In
1st Year 2nd Year 3rd Year 4th Year 5th Year Lacs)
1 Donation in sewerage network and - 3 1.5 1 7

1.5
treatment
Cleaning of road side plastic waste in the

2 area as per CPCB guidelines 2017 & 2 2 2 2 10
2
utilization in Road construction and in
cement industry.
Providing around 5 nos. of safe drinking

3 water facility like RO/ UV in nearby 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 7.5
villages
Plantation to be done in nearby villages

4 with its guard within all villages of study 1 1 2
area (58 villages)
Financial aid for economically backward

students from nearby community in
5 Sayan ITI (Fitter, Electrician, Wireman, - 1 1 1 1 4
nearly total 40 students) and
improvement of its infrastructures
Make payment of hospital bills for

6 nearby villagers within the study area as - 0.75 0.75 1.5 3.75
0.75
actual &/or development of facility in
Jeevan Raksha Hospital
Contribution towards amount to be paid

7 by the community in Sayan Village for - - - - 2.75
2.75
gas connection establishment (for approx
68 houses or remaining)
TOTAL (INR) 9.5 4.5 9.25 6.75 7 37
en-vιsι n
CHAPTER 9 PROJECT BENEFITS
The modernization project will have benefits in the form of infrastructural development, socio-economic
development, indirect employment generation, etc due to this project of as described below under respective
points.
9.1 PHYSICAL INFRASTRUCTURE

The beneficial impact due to modernization of sugar mill on the civic amenities will be substantial after the
commencement of project activities. Opportunities for the fulfillment of the community’s requirements will be
strengthened by extending healthcare facilities, existing road facilities, etc, which will help in uplifting the
living standards of local communities.
9.2 SOCIAL INFRASTRUCTURE
9.2.1 Corporate Environment Responsibility

total amount of Rs. 74 lacs would be allotted for CER programme for the period of five years is given in
Table 9-1, these activities may change by proponent after periodic discussion with local authority (Gram
Sarpanch and/or District Collector). Also unit is abide towards spending CSR cost for the upliftment of the
community if project attract Companies (CSR Policy) Rules, 2014; thus improving socio-economic status of
study area.
An initial assessment of current status of all programmes, both for the Company as well as for the
Government schemes in the area, it will also collect employees’ background and interest, funding possibilities,
information regarding local Community Based Organizations (CBOs), None Governmental Organizations
(NGOs), local clubs and other partners etc, CER activities will be planned with local governing bodies (Gram
Panchayats), NGOs and stake holders.
An annual plan or calendar will be prepared on the basis of initial assessment. The Company shall submit a
report of its activities on completion of each quarter in a year. A strategic review should follow in order to
streamline the CER programs. Budget for each activity should be outlined in the annual calendar/plan. The
CER plan should be implemented in coordination with district collection office. Year wise CER
activities/implementation plan as per the requirement of the area are as follows:
en-vιsι n
Table 9-1: Corporate Environment Responsibility (CER) Plan for Five Years in Community Area
Year wise budget (INR in Lakhs) for CER Activities
Sr.
Area CER –Proposed Planned Activities Village
No. Grand
1st Years 2nd Years 3rd Years 4th Year 5th Year
Total
Sayan, Siwan, Kudsad,
Provide school kit like bag, books, sports Bharundi, Kareli, Shekhpur,
1 Education 1 1 1 1 0.6 4.6
equipment etc to students. Galundi and other nearest
villages
Contribution in constructing of four tract
road and divider, From Delad to Sayan Sayan 4.8 4.5 4.5 0 0 13.8
and east bridge to Jhatkadevi temple.
Sayan, Siwan, Kudsad,
Bharundi, Kareli, Shekhpur,
Clean and repair to drainage creek/canal. 2.2 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 10.6
Galundi and other nearest
villages
2 Infrastructure
Contribution to Construct community hall. Sayan - - 2.6 2.6 2.8 8
Contribution to construct Veterinary
Sayan - 6.0 6.0 - - 12
Hospital.
Contribution with government scheme and
Siwan, Bharundi, Kareli,
construct sanitation and houses for tribal 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2 10.4
Shekhpur, Galundi
community.
Contribution to repair water tank. Sayan - 1.2 1.2 - 1.2 3.6
Contribution in developing Jeevan Raksha
Hospital and organization of awareness Sayan, Kudsad, Siwan,
3 Health camp regarding social evils alcohol, etc. Bharundi, Kareli, Shekhpur, 1 1 1 1 1 5
organize free medical checkup camp Galundi, Kudsad
especially in tribal area of village.
Contribution in agriculture development
Sayan, Siwan, Bharundi,
for new technology or providing
4 Agriculture Kareli, Shekhpur, Galundi, 2 1 1 1 1 6
equipments and/or seeds and fertilizer in
Kudsad
community area.
Year wise Total (INR in Lakhs) 13.1 18.9 21.5 9.8 10.7 74
en-vιsι n
9.3 EMPLOYMENT POTENTIAL

The project will create opportunities for indirect employment for which skilled and unskilled manpower will
be needed. Secondary jobs are day-to-day needs and services to the work force. This will also temporarily
increase the demand for essential daily utilities in the local market.
Indirect Employment: Due to the proposed modernization of sugar mill, indirect employments will be
generated. Indirect employments like; Primary requirements, Grocery shops, Residential requirements,
Garments requirements, Transportation facilities, Health care facilities, etc. During operation of the project,
many locals will get employment in the form of various type contracts.
9.4 BENEFITS OF INDUSTRY

The required raw materials and skilled and unskilled laborers will be utilized maximum from the local area
during construction phase of the project. Considering this scenario, income of the area will increase in the
form of various types of taxes. This project will carry out development of sanitation & road, etc facilities,
communication and community health under its CER activities. Further, industry shall adopt all environmental
precausenary measures under the Environmental Management Plan.
Due to the modernization project, employment and other infrastructural facilities will boost up income of
surrounding people and improve quality of life. This will indirectly boost up the civilization of the
surrounding people.
9.5 OTHER TANGIBLE BENEFITS

Employment & trade opportunities will be generated due to construction activities also. Thus, these
considerable employment & trade opportunities will eventually result in appreciable economic benefits to the
local people & businesses/contractors. Proposed project will increase existing contribution to revenue to the
State exchequer in the form of taxes. Indirect contribution to the State exchequer will be there due to income
by way of registration of trucks, payment of road tax, income tax from individual as well as taxes from
associated units. Thus, the proposed project will help the Government by paying different taxes from time to
time, which is a part of revenue and thus, will help in developing the area. The country shall also benefit from
increase in Goods and Services Tax (GST) revenues. The CER and/or CSR activities by the company can be
considerably beneficial for the health, education, upliftment of poor people, welfare of women & labors,
assistance to the disabled people etc. These all together with the economic benefits of the proposed project
will result in further benefits in terms of the literacy level, primary and middle level education and on health
facilities.
en-vιsι n
CHAPTER 10 ENVITONMENTAL COST BENEFIT ANALYSIS
As per EIA notification, 2006, Environmental cost benefit analysis is applicable only when recommended at
the scoping stage. However as per the ToR points issued by SEIAA, Gandhinagar, Gujarat vide letter No.
SEIAA/GUJ/TOR/Violation/5(j)/927/2019 dated, 19th June, 2019 (given as Annexure I) Environmental cost
benefit analysis is not recommended at the scoping stage, and has therefore not been carried out.
en-vιsι n
CHAPTER 11 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN (EMP)
11.1 INTRODUCTION
To formulate and monitor Environmental Protection measures during and after commissioning of project,
preparation of Environmental Management Plan (EMP) is required.
11.1.1 Objectives of EMP

 To limit/reduce the degree, extent, magnitude or duration of adverse impacts.
 To treat all the pollutants i.e. liquid effluent, air emissions and hazardous waste with adoption of
adequate and efficient technology.
 To comply with all the norms and standards stipulated by Gujarat Pollution Control Board/Central
Pollution Control Board.
 To create good working conditions.
 To reduce any risk hazards and design the disaster management plan.
 Continuous development and search for innovative technologies for a cleaner and better environment.
11.1.2 Components of EMP

 Conceptualization: Preliminary Environmental Assessment
 Planning: Detailed studies of environmental Impacts and design of safe guards
 Execution: Implementation of Environmental safety measures
 Operation: Monitoring of effectiveness of built in safe guards
en-vιsι n
11.2 ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT PLAN

The EMP for the modernization of existing unit has been prepared for the various environmental attributes like Air, Water, Land, Soil, Noise, ecology, socio-economic
etc. and the same is given in subsequent sections.
11.2.1 Land Environment
Objective To avoid changes in LU LC of site and impacts on sensitive receptors
Concern Change in land use pattern and effect of pollution on sensitive receptor of study area
Benefits of EMP Minimum changes on LU LC of site and no impact on sensitive receptors
Impacting Implementation and Management

Mitigation Measures and Rationale Remarks
Activities Location Timing Responsibility Monitoring Records
Construction Phase
Site clearing and No trees were cuted during site cleaning At the site During Contractor Checks by Record of -
minor excavation activity and 34% of total premises area Construction security staff at construction
developed as a greenbelt. activity and entry gate activities were
Excavation maintained
Civil Construction Within premises Once Contractor Regular Record of -
monitoring construction
within material
project site received was
maintained
Construction material Proper dumping and leveling of At the site Once Contractor - Record of -
storage and disposal construction waste shall be ensured. construction
material
received and
construction
waste disposal
was maintained.
Operation Phase
Usage of water Maximum optimization of water usage is Within premises At all time EHS Reuse water Records of flow -
en-vιsι n
Impacting Implementation and Management
Mitigation Measures and Rationale Remarks
Activities Location Timing Responsibility Monitoring Records
followed by utilizing treated water. quality for meter on reuse
Rainwater harvesting is done. general line and analysis
parameters are reports of same.
as per
requirement
Storage, handling and Bagasse is storage on open land area of the Within premises Minimum EHS Analysis of Analysis reports -
disposal of premises and regular care is taken not to once in a waste received
solid/hazardous spread it. month
waste. Checks by
security staff at -
entry gate
(industry as well
as TSDF site)
Effluents/Sewage Treatment of effluent will be ensured to Within premises Minimum ETP Operator Checks by ETP Maintaining -
management achieve desired quality for on land once in a Supervisor record of
irrigation. month effluent quality
Landscaping and Developments of flue gas capturing species Within premises Once in a EHS and Regular Plant species -
greenbelt area will help to reduce air pollution within year maintenance monitoring register
development premises. department within
project site
en-vιsι n
11.2.2 Soil Environment
Implementation and Management

Impacting Activities Mitigation Measures and Rationale Remarks
Location Timing Responsibility Monitoring Records
Construction Phase
Storage and disposal of Construction waste was disposed At the site During Contractor -- Records of --
construction material properly. Construction trucks
activity and transporting soil/
Excavation waste was
maintained
Civil construction activity Construction activity was carried out At the site During Contractor -- -- --
soil quality of the premises within premises for Sugar mill so it Construction
would not affect outside of the activity
premises.
Operation Phase
Storage and Handling of Molasses and Chemicals are stored in At the site All the time EHS and Periodic Recording of any Using of
Bagasse, Molasses, designated area with spillage maintenance checking of spillage occurs & proper PPE
Chemicals and Hazardous collection system. department tank, spillage Housekeeping. by workers.
Waste Bagasse is storage in bagasse yard. check in
Fly ash is sent to brick manufacturers. various areas Hazardous waste
of plant. generation and
disposal quantity
records.
Manifest of
disposal.
Wastewater generation, Pucca flooring is done in ETP area to At and near the All times EHS and Monitoring of Records of flow Using of
treatment and disposal avoid any type of leakage that can be ETP area maintenance waste water meters. proper PPE
percolated into soil. department quality. Analysis results by workers
Wastewater of waste water.
regeneration
records.
en-vιsι n

Total water requirement for the existing project is 5026 KLD and after modernization in sugar mill, it is up to 3120 KLD, no additional water is required, but demand of
water is reduced which is sourced from Canal/Bore well. Total 1530 KLD waste water is generated from the operational activities due to adoption of modernization
mill. Entire industrial effluent (1380 KLD) is treated in Effluent Treatment Plant (ETP) and also Domestic sewage (150 KLD) will be treated along with industrial
effluent in ETP and subsequently treated water is/will be reused for on land irrigation/plantation/gardening purpose within the factory premises.
Objective To reduce water consumption and wastewater generation
Concern Treatment and disposal of wastewater
Benefits of EMP Control on water consumption and wastewater generation.

Construction Phase
Civil construction Due care taken to avoid water At the site During Contractor Checks by Water -
wastage. Construction EHS and consumption and
Rain water harvesting activity was activity security staff at wastewater
design to recharge the ground water entry gate generation
level. records
Usage of water At the site During Contractor Checks by Water -
Construction EHS and consumption
activity security staff at records
entry gate
Operation Phase
Usage of water Unit will install rain water harvesting At the site All times EHS and Monitoring of Records of flow -
system within premises to collect and maintenance water meters
recharge the rainwater. department consumption
Effluent generated from the
production is treated in ETP and
treated water reuses for on land
irrigation /gardening purpose.
en-vιsι n
11.2.4 Noise Level Monitoring & Traffic Management
Probable noise sources are boilers and D.G set. DG set will be standby source of electricity hence noise will be minimal.
Objective To reduce noise due to after modernization unit. To ensure smooth traffic within & outside industry.
Concern Increase in Noise level due to existing and after modernization unit. Traffic movement outside and within site.
Benefits of EMP Control over increase in noise in surrounding area. Smooth and congestion free operation.

Construction Phase
Vehicle movement, Civil  Timely lubrication of equipments. Within and As required Security & stores Regular noise Noise levels Use of PUCs
Construction activity,  Usage of PUCs Certified vehicles immediately At during department, level were recorded, certified
Usage of fuel and speed limit of vehicles the site and construction Contractor and monitoring. Recorded vehicle vehicles only
 Work in day time only. outside the site period at various EHS department Random no. and type, and proper
 Workers were used PPE’s like ear At the site activity stage. checks by site Equipment PPE by
plug, ear muff etc. engineer. records were workers
 Noise generating equipments maintained
operation done in day time to
reduce its impact.
 Periodically lubrication
 Generated noise limited to
premises and work done in day
time.
Operation Phase
Storage and handling of  Periodically lubrication to At the site At all time EHS and Periodic Records of noise Using proper
Sugarcane machineries and this noise is maintenance monitoring of levels. PPE by
localized to premises only. department noise levels Equipment workers at
Manufacturing Process service records. areas
generating
noise.
Transportation of Raw  Transportation activity shall be Within and At all time Security & stores At all time Records of Using of
Materials and Products restricted only for day time. immediately department vehicle no. and PUCs
 Timely lubrication of vehicles. outside the site type certified
 Speed management within vehicles only
premises to avoid Traffic
generation.
en-vιsι n
Effluent Management and  Proper and timely lubrication, At and near the At all time ETP operator/ Periodic Records of noise Use of proper
Usage of Fuel for operation oiling and maintenance of all ETP area and EHS and monitoring of levels. PPE by
plant and machineries. within site maintenance noise levels Equipment workers at
 Adequate noise control measures department service records. areas
such as antivibration pad for generating
equipment with high vibration. noise.
 Check all the vibrating parts
periodically and service to reduce
the noise generation.
Landscaping and greenbelt  About 2, 02,343 m2 of area has Within Once in a year EHS and Regular Regular -
area development been developed as Green belt premises maintenance monitoring monitoring
with noise capturing species. department within within
project site project site
en-vιsι n
11.2.5 Ecological Environment
Greenbelt developed within premises will help in restoration of fauna as well as increase aesthetic view of surrounding area.
Objective To ensure reduction in air pollution, noise pollution, restoration of flora and fauna disturbed due to project activity.
Concern Reduction in disturbance to flora and fauna
Benefits of EMP Restoration of flora and fauna
Mitigation Measures and Implementation and Management

Impacting Activities Remarks
Rationale Location Timing Responsibility Monitoring Records
Construction Phase
Transportation & Construction work  Properly storage and At the site As required Contractor & Only PUC PUC Certificate. -
leads to dust emissions which can disposal of waste materials. during Security holding Ambient air quality
affect faunal species of the  Soil characteristics will be construction vehicles monitoring records.
premises. restored with time hence period at shall be
this is reversible impact. various allowed
 Vehicular movement and activity stage.
Generation of high noise due to construction activity shall At the site All the time Contractor & Periodic Ambient air & noise --
operation of heavy machinery be restricted only for EHS quality monitoring
construction works can disturb the daytime. department records.
faunal species of the area.
Operation Phase
Spillage of waste can cause adverse  Molasses and Chemicals Within At all the time EHS Visual Waste inventory -
impact on local flora & fauna in will be stored in designated Site and department check
nearby vicinity area. area with spillage Nearby
collection system. Main
 Bagasse storage in Gate
designated area.
Emission of various pollutants and  Proper APCD will be Within At all the time EHS As per EC Stack /ambient noise -
generation of high noise due process provided to Boiler and D. Site department or CC&A Monitoring Reports
activity. G. Set.
 Adequate noise control
measures such as
antivibration pad for
equipment with high
en-vιsι n
Mitigation Measures and Implementation and Management
Impacting Activities Remarks
Rationale Location Timing Responsibility Monitoring Records
vibration. The equipment,
which generates excessive
noise (e.g. DG set), is
provided with enclosures
etc
Leakage or spillage of effluent can  Effluent generated from the Within At all the time EHS Daily and Flow Meter; analysis --
cause site specific short term production will be treated Site, Department as per EC reports of Inlet and
disturbance of subsoil fauna. in ETP and treated water around or CC&A outlet of ETP
reuses for on land irrigation ETP area
purpose.
Penetration of leachate during  ETP sludge will be Within At all the time EHS Regular Waste inventory -
storage, handling and disposal of properly utilized as manure Site department
solid/hazardous waste can cause site for composting to develop
specific short term disturbance of soil quality of the premises.
subsoil fauna.
en-vιsι n
11.2.6 Socio Economic Environment

Apart from generation of indirect employment, CER will be carried out in the study area.
Objective To ensure proper implementation of mitigation measures suggested. Improving socio-economic level of study area.
Concern Health & Safety of community and workers; socio-economic status of study area
Benefits of EMP Minimize the impact of the project on health of community & workers and on environment

Construction Phase
Site Cleaning  Workers should be provided PPEs Within At all time Contractor Periodic - -
during the activity.
 Local should be used for this work
Labour register
Vehicle movement for Vehicles with PUC shall be allowed to Within & outside At all time Contractor/ Daily - Security
transportation of control flue gas emissions. premises. Recruiting officer check on gate
construction materials and as per requirement Employment
equipment Local people will be first preference for raised by different register &
employment. divisions Labour register
Civil Construction & Local used for this work. Within At all time Contractor/ Daily - -
Heavy fabrication work Uses of heavy machineries used Recruiting officer
including metal cutting during day time to mitigate the noise as per requirement
(Gas cutting, welding); levels and PPEs provided to the raised by different
Painting workers. divisions
Operation Phase
Vehicles with PUC shall be allowed Within At all time Security Daily - -
Transportation of Raw to control flue gas emissions.
Material, Products and
Waste Health care activities should be - CER/CSR team -
organized
During the operation, preference is Within & outside At all time Contractor/ Daily Employment -
Manufacturing Process, being given to local people, which premises Recruiting officer register &
Usage of water; Usage of will help in improving socio- as per requirement Labour register
en-vιsι n
Fuel for operation of boiler economic level of engaged people. raised by different
& DG sets divisions
Operation of APCM, Utilization of treated water and Within & outside At all time EHS/ Security Daily - -
Landscaping and greenbelt recharging of rainwater. premises
development Adequate pollution control measures
will be installed and followed.
Healthcare activities should be carried - CER/CSR team
out for community and worker.
Social developmental activities
should be done.
Plantation within community area will
reduce air and noise pollution.
en-vιsι n
11.2.7 Risk & Hazard and Occupational Health & Safety
Objective To ensure health & Safety of workers against air pollution, noise pollution, solid and hazardous waste handling, handling of solvents.
Concern Health & Safety of workers
Benefits of EMP Protection of health of workers

Construction Phase
Construction workers are susceptible to  P.U.C Certified Vehicles Within At all EHS & Periodic Records of Being
 Accidental injuries  Regular Maintenance of time Contractor injuries. modernization
 Occupational injuries during fall Vehicles Records of industry noise &
from height, collapse of scaffold  Speed control of the vehicles ambient air ambient air
 Fugitive emission from construction  Proper Road provided quality quality
material handling and storage  PPEs provision monitoring. monitoring shall
 Flue gas emission from vehicles,  DG set provide for emergency be in construction
DG.  Sprinkling of water area also.
 Temporary or permanent hearing  Earthing provision
loss due to operation of heavy  First aid box available
machinery.  Proper stacking or storage of
 Electrocution due to Electric shock, construction material
burns, damaged cable  Preventive maintenance of crane
of lifting machine
 Good housekeeping maintained
Operation Phase
Manufacturing activities, operation of All workmen will be provided with Within At all EHS Periodic Records of -
utilities, solid and hazardous waste required set of PPEs like ear plug, ear time Noise
management, effluent management may muff etc. where noise levels in excess monitoring
lead to injuries; flue gas emissions; of 80 db (A) will be regularly
fugitive emissions; hearing loss etc. generated.
The possibility of suspended particles Within At all EHS Periodic Results of work Use of proper
going into the body of the workmen, time zone monitoring PPE
either in the form of inhalation, and ambient air
ingestion or through skin absorption quality
en-vιsι n
will be least and negligible as because monitoring.
the entire operation at the plant will be
performed under closed loop
condition, right from charging till
discharging, hence it’s a rare
possibility that the workmen will come
in direct contact with raw material or
final goods.
Regular & proper operation of APCM Within At all EHS Regular Records of stack -
will lead to flue gas emission under time monitoring.
norms.
Development of greenbelt consisting Within At all EHS Regular - -
of air & noise pollutant tolerant will time
help to reduce pollution load and thus
improving health of workers.
Regular medical examination of all - At all EHS Periodic Medical reports -
workers will be carried out, and if time of workers.
required further actions will be taken.
Safety Audit Within At all EHS & Safty Yearly Safety Audit Recommandation
time Auditor report to be follow
en-vιsι n
In the modernization project, main source of air pollution is flue gas emission. Main sources of flue gas emission are bagasse, methane gas and Furnace oil based boiler.
Multicyclone Separator with wet scrubber will be provided with 4 nos. of boilers as an APCM and adequate stack height is provided with 1 no. of boiler.
Objective To ensure that air emissions due to the construction activities and operation phase will be minimum
Concern Construction of building, installation of new plant and machinery and operation phase can deteriorate air quality
Benefits of EMP Reduced air pollution and protection of health of workers and local community

Construction Phase
Fugitive emissions may  Construction materials were At the site Once in a day Contractor Random Water consumption --
have occurred due to transported in covered trucks. during checks by site was recorded.
construction activities.  Proper maintenance of construction engineer Reports of ambient
Flue gas emission, transportation of vehicles was period air quality
vehicular movement; DG carried out to reduce flue gas
set operation. emission.
VOC during painting could VOC was affected workers hence
have affected on health of PPE’s was mandatory while Painting.
workers.
Operation Phase
 Ensuring that vehicles have a Along the At all time Safety Checks by PUC certificate -
Vehicle movement for
Pollution Under Control (PUC) vehicle department of security staff
transportation of materials certificate movement track industry at entry gate
and equipment  Materials are transported in At site During EHS department Periodic Type of chemicals, Proper PPE to
covered trucks. transportation operating be worn by
conditions of workers at all
chemicals times
transported
Odour generation from  Properly management and At site At all time, EHS department Periodic Logbook of ETP is --
effluent, if it is not treatment in ETP during maintained.
disposed properly. operation
en-vιsι n
Fugitive emission due to  Good housekeeping is At site At all time, EHS and Periodic Stack monitoring Using proper
operation of DG and Boiler maintained in the plant. during maintenance records and Results PPE
 Proper water sprinkling should operation department of work zone
be done for dust suppression. monitoring and
ambient air quality
monitoring.
en-vιsι n
11.3 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT CELL (EMC)

In addition to preparing an EMP, it is also necessary to have a permanent organizational set up to ensure its
effective implementation. Unit has set up Environment Management Cell to assure regular monitoring of
environmental parameters, and to find out any deterioration in environmental quality. Necessary corrective
steps are taken based on observations made during monitoring. The major duties and responsibilities of
Environmental Management Cell are as follows:
 To ensure regular operation and maintenance of all pollution control devices
 To assure regulatory compliance with all relevant rules, regulations and emission levels
 To minimize environmental impacts of operations by strict adherence to the EMP
 To initiate environmental monitoring as per approved schedule
 Review and interpretation of monitored results and corrective measures in case monitored results are
above the specified limit
 Maintain documentation of good environmental practices and applicable environmental laws as ready
reference
 Coordination with regulatory agencies, external consultants and monitoring laboratories
 Maintaining log of public complaints and the action taken
Table 11-1: Roles and Responsibility of in Environmental Management Cell (EMC)
Designation Responsibility
Managing Director  To look after the matter and approve the required modifications/ replacements/ repairs in
EMP measures.
 Secondary responsibility for environmental management and decision making for all
environmental issues
 Coordination with regulatory agencies, external consultants and monitoring laboratories
Department Head  To co-ordinate with utility in charge and EHS head for working of EMP’s.
 Ensure environmental monitoring as per appropriate procedures
Environmental  To ensure regular operation and maintenance of all pollution control devices
Engineer  To initiate environmental monitoring as per approved schedule
Environmental  Ensuring legal compliance - regulatory compliance with all relevant rules, regulations and
Chemist emission levels by properly undertaking activities
 Ensure correct records of generation, handling, storage, transportation and disposal of solid
hazardous wastes.
 Maintain documentation of good environmental practices and applicable environmental laws
as ready reference
 Maintaining record of complaints and the action taken for it.
 Review and interpretation of monitored results and corrective measures in case monitored
results are above the specified limit
ETP Supervisor  Overall in-charge of operation and maintenance of effluent treatment plant.
Trained Fire  Develop and implement protocols for dealing with fire hazards
fighter/First aiders  Manage and provide Training as required for security guards and induct other employees on
fire safety and security norms.
 Look out for and control the occurrence of fire accidents.
Additionally the Environmental Management Cell collects data about health of workers, green belt
development, etc. Organogram of the Environmental Management Cell is presented in the following Figure
11-1.
en-vιsι n
Figure 11-1: Environment Management Cell
11.3.1 Environment Policy and its Standard Operating Procedure

The sugar unit has an environment policy approved by the Director which is given as Annexure V; EMC
assures implementation of same in the unit.
11.3.2 Reporting System to the Directors

The manual as well as online monitoring of emissions and discharges are carried out as per the schedule
drawn up every month. Emissions are tracked through online monitors. Sugar unit has established their own
internal norms which more stringent than Gujarat Pollution Control Board (GPCB) norms to achieve
environmental performance of international standards, beyond compliance. Any deviations with respect to
internal norms are addressed to all HODs in regular meeting chaired by plant CEO and explanation / root
cause is identified & addressed immediately. The monitoring results are plotted periodically by the
Environment Management Department. The analyses of these trends are used to draw up action plans for
improvement in the environmental performance of various units.
11.4 RECORD KEEPING AND REPORTING

Record keeping and reporting of performance is an important management tool for ensuring sustainable
operation of the unit. Records are maintained for regulatory, monitoring and operational issues. Typical record
keeping practice adopted by unit is summarized in Table 11-2.
en-vιsι n
Table 11-2: Record Keeping Requirement

Parameters Particulars
Ambient air quality Maintenance of APCM, results of monitoring
Records of water usage, wastewater generation, results of water and wastewater
Water quality
analysis
Solid Waste Handling and
Daily quantity of waste generated, stored, recycled and disposed
Disposal
Regulatory (Environmental) Environmental Permits / Consents from SPCB/ GIDC permission for fresh water
Licenses supply/ Membership certificates for TSDF.
Monitoring and Survey Records of all monitoring carried out as per the finalized monitoring protocol.
Log book of compliance, Employee’s health and safety records, Equipment
inspection and calibration records, Vehicle maintenance and inspection records,
Others
Maintenance of Corporate Environment Responsibilities towards the society even
after the completion of the project work and during the operation phase
11.5 BUDGET FOR ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION

Adequate budgetary provisions have been made by management of unit for execution of Environmental
Management Plans. The details of capital and recurring budget earmarked for pollution control / monitoring
equipment; operation and maintenance of pollution control facilities and maintenance is given in Table 11-3.
While remediation plan and community & natural resource augmentation plan is given in Table 8-4.
Table 11-3: Break-up of Capital and Recurring cost for Environment Protection Measures for Proposed project
Maintena Total
Capital Cost (Rs. in Lacs) Operating
Sr nce Cost Recurring
Particulars Cost (Lacs/
No (Lacs/ Cost (Lacs/
Cost Bifurcation Annum)
Annum) Annum)
Tertiary Treatment 15 4.95 0.5 5.45
Water Pollution
1 15 Primary & Secondary
Control - 91.15 9.8 100.95
Treatment in ETP
Air Pollution Multicyclone separator &
2 11 11 2.8 1.6 4.4
Control wet scrubber
Noise Pollution Acoustic enclosures 7 - 2.5 2.5
3 10
Control Anti-vibration pads 3 - 2.5 2.5
Solid and
Management of ETP
4 Hazardous Waste - - 2.5 0 2.5
sludge
Management
PPE 7 - 1.5 1.5
Occupational
5 12 Fire fighting equipments 2 - 1 1
Health
First Aid 3 - 0.5 0.5
Total 48 - 101.4 19.9 121.3
en-vιsι n
CHAPTER 12 SUMMARY & CONCLUSION
12.1 JUSTIFICATION FOR IMPLEMENTATION OF THE PROJECT

The existing and modernization project of sugar mill and molasses based distillery unit has marginal adverse
impacts on the local environment. However, with the implementation of the proposed pollution control and
environment management measures, the minor impacts anticipated due to operation of the modernization
sugar mill is mitigated.
The project is providing business opportunities for the local people; they are also benefited in the areas such
as education, health care, infrastructure facilities and women empowerment. The Government of Gujarat is
beneficiary in terms of taxes and duties, the railways, ports and industries authorities, water supplying
agencies etc. are beneficial indirectly.
Thus, this project is lead to overall development of the region in particular and the state in general. Thus, in
view of considerable benefits from the project without any major adverse environmental impact, the
modernization mill is most advantageous to the region.
The summary of anticipated adverse environmental impacts due to the project and mitigation measures is as
under:
Activity and Potential Negative
Attributes Mitigation Measures
Impact
Construction Phase
Land  Construction waste was  The area under construction was covered to avoid
generated during construction penetration of waste construction material. Waste materials
activity, installation of mill were disposed properly.
machinery.
Air  Fugitive emission during  Sprinkling of water which lead to dust suppression.
transportation activities.  Ensured that vehicles had a Pollution Under Control (PUC)
certificate.
Noise  While installing mill  Personal protective equipments like ear plug and ear muff
machinery heavy equipments were provided to workers.
were used this generated  Maintenance of vehicles was maintained.
noise.
Water  During construction activities  Sewage was disposed to septic tank or soak pit.
water will be used, sewage
will be generated.
Soil  Civil Construction and  Construction waste was disposed properly.
storage of construction  Construction activity was carried out within premises for
material. Sugar Mill so it will not affect outside of the premises.
Ecology Disturbance due to  Waste materials were stored and disposed properly.
 Spillage of construction  Vehicular movement and construction activity restricted
material only for day time.
 Noise due to heavy
machinery
 Dust emission due to
construction activity and
transportation.
Occupational  Flue gas emission;  PPE’s were provided to workers during various activities.
Health &  Noise pollution;  Sprinkled of water over construction material to avoid
Safety
 Accidental &, occupational fugitive emissions
Injuries
 Fugitive emissions.
Socio-  Transportation of construction  Vehicles with PUC were allowed to controll flue gas
en-vιsι n
Impact
Economic materials, Operation of emissions.
equipment’s & machineries
Traffic  Movement of vehicles could  This was temporary activity hence; there was no major
have been affect internal impact on traffic load.
roads.  Maintenance of internal road was carried out.
Operation Phase
Land & Water  Storage and handling of  Unit will install rain water harvesting system within
bagasse changes land use and premises to collect and reuse rainwater.
land cover of the site.  Effluent generated from the production is being treated in
 Effluent generation from the ETP and treated water reuses for on land irrigation purpose.
unit  The Bagasse is stored in bagasse yards of the premises and
regular care is taken not to spread it.
 Treatment of effluent will be ensured to achieve desired
quality for on land irrigation.
 Sewage was disposed to septic tank or soak pit in existing
mill but after modernization sewage will be sent to ETP
along with the effluent and treated water will be reused.
Air  Fugitive emissions due to  Molasses and Chemicals are stored in designated area with
storage and handling of spillage collection system.
bagasse and molasses.  The Bagasse is stored in bagasse yards of the premises
 Flue gas emissions may have  Manufacturing activity is carried out in closed system and
occurred due to vehicular regular checking and maintenance of the same is carried
movement out to avoid any leakages.
 Flue gas emission due to  Transporation of sugarcane does not generate dust except
operation of DG sets, boiler fluegas of truck.
 Fugitive emission during  APCM is required to the bagasse, methane gas and
manufacturing process. Furnace oil based boiler. Multicyclone Separator with Wet
Scrubber will be provided with 4 nos. of boilers and
adequate stack height is provided with 1no. of boiler.
 APCM is required to DG set; Acoustic Enclosure is
provided.
Noise  Noise from various  Proper and timely lubrication, oiling and maintenance of all
machineries used for plant and machineries are carried out.
manufacturing process; utility  The equipment, which generates high vibration, is
operation; vehicular provided with antivibration pad etc.
movement.  Noise monitoring is carried out regularly at prominent
places in the plant through NABL approved laboratory.
Soil  Storage and Handling of  Molasses and chemicals are stored in designated area with
Bagasse, Molasses and spillage collection system.
Chemicals.  Bagasse is stored in bagasse yards of the premises.
 Effluent/Sewage  Pucca flooring is done in ETP area to avoid any type of
Management leakage that can be percolated into soil
 Storage and handling of solid/ hazardous wastes are done
 Storage, handling and
within designated and on paved area.
disposal of solid/ hazardous
 Fly ash is sent to brick manufacturers.
waste
Ecology Adverse impact on local flora &  Molasses and chemicals are stored in designated area with
fauna due to spillage collection system.
 Spillage and penetration of  Bagasse is stored in bagasse yards of the premises. ETP
waste, baggase and molases sludge is properly utilized as manure for composting to
 Emission of various pollutants develop soil quality of the premises.
and generation of high noise  Timely lubrication of machinaries
due process activity.  PPE’s are provided to worker.
 Leakage or spillage of  Heavy noise generating equipmrnts are installed with
effluent acuastic enclousers.
 Proper APCD is provided to Boiler, D. G. Set.
 About 2,02,343 m2 of area has been developed as Green
belt with noise capturing species.
en-vιsι n
Impact
Traffic  Improper & uncontrolled  Controlled vehicular movement with adequate supervision.
movement of vehicles can  Vehicle entry and exit scheduling so that traffic congestion
result in traffic congestion is not created on nearby public road.
within & immediate outside
the industry.
Socio-  Flue gas and dust emission  Vehicles with PUC shall be allowed to control flue gas
Economic deteriorate and air and that emissions.
may affect the health of driver  Healthcare activities are organized.
and people living near the  Utilization of treated water and rainwater recharging.
route due to transportation of  Adequate pollution control measures installed to control
materials. flue gas and fugitive emission.
 Pollution level of the industry  Plantation activities are carried out.
such as water pollution and air
pollution will create negative
impact on health of
community.
Occupational Various activities affecting health  To control flue gas and fugitive emission adequate pollution
Health and of workers via physical contact; control measures are installed.
Safety inhalation; noise etc. are as under:  Use of proper PPE’s during hazardous waste handling,
 Flue gas emission from chemical handling etc.
various activities such as  Basic infrastructure i.e. facilities like drinking water,
transportation activities, sanitation, first aid etc. are delivered to workers.
operation of boiler, DG sets.  Regular medical check-up of workers.
 Fugitive emission from  Ambient and source noise are regularly monitored within
various activities such as the plant.
loading & unloading of  All workmen are provided with required set of PPE’s like
chemicals. ear plug, ear muff etc. where noise levels in excess of 80 dB
 Handling hazardous waste; (A) are regularly generated.
toxic and flammable
chemicals.
 Operation of utilities &
production activities.
12.2 CONCLUSIONS
The modernized sugar mill has certain level of marginal impacts on the local environment. However,
development of this project has beneficial impact/effects on large scale in terms of providing the vital
products, high conversion rate from raw material to product comparing to old mill, less pollution generation
and the same is creating a positive impact during operational phase of the project.
Thus, it is conclude that with the judicious and proper implementation of the pollution control and mitigation
measures, the modernization project is beneficial to the society and is contributing to the economic
development of the region in particular and country in general.

Shree Sayan Vibhag Sahakari Khand Udhyog Mandli LTD Srt65 Eia1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Shree Sayan Vibhag Sahakari Khand Udhyog Mandli LTD Srt65 Eia1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

S H R E E S AYA N V I B H A G S A H A K A R I K H A N D U D Y O G

DRAFT ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT

Modernization of Sugar Unit (7,000 TCD)

At & Post Sayan, Taluka Olpad, District Surat, Gujarat-394 130.

ENVISION ENVIRO TECHNOLOGIES PVT. LTD.

Phone No.: (0261) 2223003, 2224004

CHAPTER 1 CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................. 1-1

Annexure I Terms of Reference ....................................................................................................... A-5

Table 1-1: General Siting Criteria .................................................................................................................... 1-3

Figure 1-1: Location of the Project Site ........................................................................................................... 1-3

Photograph 2-1: Project Site ............................................................................................................................ 2-9

Material balance is given in Table

Requirement of water with its source

22. In case of expansion of existing industries, Remediation plan proposed to reastore

One season site-specific data is given

Specific programme to Health

En-vision Enviro Technologies Private Limited (NABET Accreditation No.: NABET/EIA/1821/RA0102)

Salient Features within 10 km Radius Surroundings

2 Probable Pollution Sources, Baseline Environment, Impacts and Mitigation Measures

2.1 Air Environment

Location Distance & 98% Percentile (µg/m3)

*: Indicates predominant downwind direction

2.2 Water Environment

Existing Proposed Total

(A) Domestic 150 0 150

(e) Washing 500 -300 200

Total (B) 2881 -1501 1380

 40 parameters of ground water and 38 parameters of surface water were observed.

2.3 Solid and Hazardous Waste Management

Land use status of study area is as under:

2.5 Noise Environment

Ambient Noise Status

2.6 Hydro-Geological Environment

Hydro-geological status of study area is as under:

 Population density: 867 persons per km2

 Total population : 1,94,285

2.8 Ecology & Biodiversity

Ecological Status in study area is as under:

2.10 Occupational Health and Safety

3 Environment Monitoring Program

5 Environmental Management Plan

1.1 PURPOSE OF EIA

1.2 IDENTIFICATION OF PROJECT AND PROJECT PROPONENT

1.2.1 Promoters and their Background

1.3 BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF NATURE, SIZE, LOCATION OF THE PROJECT

Identification Latitude & Longitude

Figure 1-1: Location of the Project Site

Table 1-2: Size of Project

1.4 SCOPE OF STUDY

1.5 REGULATORY FRAME WORK

Sr. Legal Instrument (Type, Ref.,

1.5.1 Legal Compliances of Existing Unit

1.5.1.1 Current CCA & It’s Compliance

1.5.1.2 Show Cause Notice; Direction; Closure Notice Issued

Notice Details in Brief Reply

 We have provided total 6 nos. of MS material based

 To ensure proper precautionary measure for the storage of

 Our unit is a seasonal industry. Our sugar industry

 There is no any temporary/illegal spill/accidental

 Please refer print no. 2 for Storage details.

 There is no any accidental discharge from our unit.

 To perform monitoring of water quality of receiving drain/